Home

EtherNet/IP Units Operation

1. D30000 Local memory t l Unit number 0 100 words 100 words D30098 D30099 D30100 IP Address Display Setting Area l Unit number 1 2 100 words Non volatile memory in the EtherNet IP Unit D30199 Unit settings Settings such as the IP address of the D31500 EtherNet IP Unit and FINS UDP settings 2 Refer to 3 8 TCP IP and Link Settings Unit number 15 2 466 words and 3 10 Other Parameters for details D31599 Device parameter settings tag data link settings Refer to Section 6 Tag Data Links for details Network Configurator 89 CIO Area Allocations Section 4 2 4 2 CIO Area Allocations 4 2 1 Overview of the Allocated CIO Area Words The various kinds of data are stored in the allocated CIO Area words which are identified by the offset from the beginning word n allocated to each Unit There are two patterns for the layout of the allocated ClO Area words the default settings and user settings The layout can be selected in the Status Area settings in the Edit Parameters Dialog Box from the CX Programmer To set a customer areas select User defined for the Layout Type on the Sta tus Area Tab Page The beginning word n is calculated by the following equation Beginning word n CIO 1500 25 x unit number Default Settings Offset Bit 15 8 7 0 Data direction 0 n U
2. Note The 7 segment display alternately displays the error and the node address of the node where the error occurred 205 Message Communications Errors Section 7 6 206 SECTION 8 FINS Communications This section provides information on communicating on EtherNet IP Systems and interconnected networks using FINS commands The information provided in the section deals only with FINS communications in reference to EtherNet IP Units or built in EtherNet IP ports FINS commands issued from a PLC are sent via the SEND 090 RECV 098 and CMND 490 instructions programmed into the user ladder diagram program Although an outline of these instructions is provided in this section refer to the CS CJ series Programmable Controllers Programming Manual W340 for further details on programming these instructions 8 1 Overview of FINS Communications 0 00 00 eee eee eee 208 8 1 1 Communications On an Ethernet Network 208 8 1 2 Using the FINS UDP and FINS TCP Methods 209 8 1 3 FINS Communications Service Specifications 209 8 2 FINS UDP Method taa tetai taa eS a a e eee 210 822 1 OVERVIEW een E ER EEE EE Ra ae Lane bee NE 210 8 3 FINS TCP Method renei n E E E EE ESEO 212 8 3 1 QyervieW erse e ev E a We ee Bd ae ee 212 8 4 Routing Tables scncese nsioa et s e ee a E aa eS a alae 217
3. FINS header FINS data Remote node Internal table gt Sle Sa Application level FINS enbe x M eer to ae bare Transport level UDP gpppoa TCP topper number number Application level FIN S Ppilcatt i x S Node number Internet level IP K S IP address Transport level UDEN UDP pori TCP PL Physical level Ethernet RES number TCP number Internet level IR x a L nternet leve x IP address y The remote node s IP address UDP TCP N 47 method UDP port number and TCP port Physical level Ethernet P number are calculated from the node Ethernet address ot number in the FINS message and an x a Ethernet frame is generated Ethernet V2 FINS header FINS data 5 2 2 Pairing Addresses in Internal Tables FINS UDP Communications Methods Automatic Generation When the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port is turned ON or Dynamic restarted the following values are set for addresses in the internal table e Remote IP address Local IP address network number remote FINS node address e Remote UDP port number UDP port number set for local Unit e Connection method FINS UDP With the dynamic method data in an internal table that has been generated can be dynamically converted according to FINS messages received from remote nodes This is enabled when the remote node is a device such as a personal computer an
4. Hub Hub Connect shield Connector Connector Connector Connector Connector X Do not connect shield GR d EIP Power Unit Supply Unit i i Connector GR J j terminal EIP Power Unit Supply Unit Connector GR terminal Shield 61 Network Installation Section 3 4 e Press the cable connector in firmly until it locks into place at both the switching hub and the EtherNet IP Unit e Do not lay the twisted pair cable together with high voltage lines e Do not lay the twisted pair cable near devices that generate noise e Do not lay the twisted pair cable in locations subject to high temperatures or high humidity e Do not lay the twisted pair cable in locations subject to excessive dirt and dust or to oil mist or other contaminants Switching Hub Installation Environment Precautions e Do not ground the switching hub in the same location as a drive system component such as an inverter e Always use a dedicated power supply for the switching hub s power sup ply Do not use the same power supply used for other equipment such as an I O power supply motor power supply or control power supply e Before installation check the switching hub s environment resistance specifications and use a switching hub appropriate for the ambient condi tions Contact the switching hub manufacturer for details on switching hub s environment resistance specifications Switching H
5. Message Communications Errors Section 7 6 7 6 Message Communications Errors The following table shows the main errors that may occur when messages are sent or received Refer to SECTION 14 Troubleshooting and Error Processing for corrective measures and details on errors that are recorded in error log but not indicated by the LED indicators Indicators Error code NS 7 segment display See note Hex Routing table error Flashing red No change IP address duplication error No change Lit red CPU Unit service monitoring error No change Flashing red Other CPU error Not lit Too many retries cannot send Node address setting error cannot send Remote node not part of network cannot send No Unit with specified unit address cannot send CPU Unit error occurred cannot send Destination address not set in routing tables cannot send Routing tables not registered cannot send Routing tables error occurred cannot send Too many relay connections cannot send Maximum command length exceeded cannot send No change No change No change Header error cannot send Reception buffer full packet discarded Invalid packet discarded Local node busy cannot send Unexpected routing error Service not supported in present mode packet discarded Transmission buffer full packet discarded Maximum frame length exceeded routing impossible Packet discarded due to response time out
6. Bit 15 08 07 S 0 28 10 S 1 00 00 S 2 05 DC S 3 52 02 S 4 20 06 S 5 24 01 S 6 OA oC S 7 06 00 S 8 01 02 S 9 20 01 S 10 24 01 S 11 08 00 S 12 12 oD 13 31 39 S 14 32 2E S 15 31 36 S 16 38 2E S 17 32 35 S 18 30 2E S 19 32 00 254 FINS command code Transport ID Message monitoring time Service code 52 hex Request path size 02 hex 8 bit class ID 20 hex Class ID 06 hex Connection Manager 8 bit instance ID 24 hex request path Instance ID 01 hex Priority Time Tick OA hex Time Out Ticks OC hex Message request size Service code 01 hex Get_Attribute_Single service Request path size 02 hex Link 8 bit class ID 20 hex Class ID 01 hex Identity Object path 8 bit instance ID 24 hex Instance ID 01 hex Route path size 8 words Ethernet port 12 hex Extended Link Address Size 1 hex Ethernet port number 2 hex Route path size 13 bytes 19 2 16 8 Route path IP address 25 192 168 250 2 0 2 The response data is set in the same way starting from the word specified for CMND 490 operand D first response word and continuing with words with higher addresses in I O memory in the response block format Note Request path data or request data that is in word 2 byte or double word 4 byte units such as word data and ERROR CLEAR codes is specified from low to high U bytes in command block for
7. There are eight communications ports so up to eight communications instructions can be executed at a time The number of messages that can be sent or received with a single CPU Bus Unit service though is not more than two each for the CPU Unit to the EtherNet IP Unit and for the EtherNet IP Unit to the CPU Unit 236 Communicating between OMRON PLCs Execution Communications condition Port Enabled Flag Cc 1H 1H HA KEEP 011 A Reset B _ Operand control data created with MOV and XFER Communications instructions Section 8 6 Input A remains ON from start to completion of commu nications instruction Creates operand and control data in a given area Executes communications instructions SEND RECV CMND Communications A Port Enabled Flag DIFU 013 B Creates reset input Turns reset B ON I H after execution of communications in struction A communications ort Error ag Send E Flag displ I 1i O a ey ae 4 Execution Communications Exclusive control so execution is not simultaneous condition Port Enabled Flag A i 1 FH KEEP 011 C fiohe inetructions ete started balore execution of ihe above communications instruction is complete Reset D Ik Continued in same way The execution status of the SEND 090 RECV 098 and CMND 490 instruc tions is always reflected by
8. Relay Error Flag Main response Sub response code Item to check Likely cause Corrective action code Value and Value and meaning meaning Normal completion 359 Troubleshooting with FINS Response Codes Main response code Sub response code Value and meaning Local node error Value and meaning Local node send error Item to check Likely cause Lack of available space in internal buffers Section 14 6 Corrective action The load traffic on the Ether net Unit is too heavy Check your user applications Node address set ting error Local IP address The network cannot be used because the IP address setting is incor rect Correct the local IP address Local node busy send failed System load Lack of available space in internal buffers The load traffic on the Ether net Unit is too heavy Check your user applications Remote node error Remote node not in network IP address table and IP router table IP address of remote node not set correctly Set IP address of remote node into IP address table and if internetwork transmis sion is required into the IP router table No Unit with speci fied unit address Instruction s control data There is no Unit with the specified unit address Check the remote node s unit address Response timeout Transfer condi tions Use FINS status read commands
9. Local FINS node number Automatic generation static setting y Y Remote IP address Local IP address FINS command Ethernet EtherNet IP IP address FINS response IP Address Table Method With this method FINS node addresses are converted to IP addresses based on a preset correspondence table IP address table The IP address table is set on the FINS UDP Tab Page of the Edit Parameters Dialog Box of the CX Programmer Nodes can be registered even if they are in different segments and have different network IDs The internal table will be as follows e FINS Node Address Registered to IP Address Table The following address is registered to the internal table e Remote IP address IP address registered to IP address table e Remote UDP port number UDP port number set for local Unit e Connection method FINS UDP e FINS Node Address Not Registered to IP Address Table The following address is registered to the internal table e Remote IP address 0 0 0 0 e Remote UDP port number UDP port number set for local Unit e Connection method FINS UDP With the IP address table method records of FINS nodes registered to the IP address table are not changed dynamically When the Unit is turned ON or restarted the IP addresses of remote FINS nodes registered with an IP address of 0 0 0 0 can be changed dynamically according to FINS messag
10. CJ1M CPU CJ1G CPU NSJL NSJL H B G5D B M3D Programmable Con trollers Instructions Reference Manual Contents Describes the ladder diagram programming instructions supported by CS series and CJ series PCs Use this manual for CJ2 CPU Units H CS1G H CPU CS1G H CPU V1 Programmable Con trollers Operation Manual Provides an outline of and describes the design installa tion maintenance and other basic operations for the CS series PLCs Information is also included on features system configuration wiring I O memory allocations and troubleshooting Use together with the Programmable Controllers Pro gramming Manual W394 CJ1G H CPU CJ1G CPU Programmable Con trollers Operation Manual Provides an outline of and describes the design installa tion maintenance and other basic operations for the CJ series PLCs Information is also included on features system configuration wiring I O memory allocations and troubleshooting Use together with the Programmable Controllers Pro gramming Manual W394 CS1G H CPU H CS1G H CPU V1 CJ1G H CPU CJ1G CPU NSJL NSJL H B G5D B M3D Programmable Con troll
11. Connection request CS Connection established i FINS node numbers exchanged ES ease ENS ode number Asent Remote node No received Local node No sent Remote node No received EINS node number een Local node No sent FINS frame sent ______ J 42 eee FINS frame sent Leena Full duplex communications gt i i Normal data communications y v After a connection has been established as a FINS TCP server it is termi nated in the following ways e When the connection is closed by the client e When a FINS command to close the connection FINS TCP CONNEC TION REMOTE NODE CHANGE REQUEST is sent by the client e When there is no response from the client when the keep alive function is in effect 214 FINS TCP Method Note Procedure for Using FINS TCP 1 2 3 Note Section 8 3 After a connection has been established as a FINS TCP client it can be termi nated in the following ways e If the connection is closed by the server e If there is no response from the client when the keep alive function is in effect Even if the connection is closed at the FINS TCP client requests continue to be made to the FINS TCP server every few seconds to open a connection After the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port is powered up or restarted the IP address for the connection used as the FINS TCP client is the remote IP address that was set in the FINS TCP Tab Page of the CX Pro
12. 00 Hex CPU Unit 15 10 87 3 o 10 to 1F Hex Unit 0 to 15 C45 T T T E1 Hex Inner Board L 1 L FE Hex Unit connected to network L Response monitor time 0000 Hex 2 s Destination node number N 0001 t EERE Hex 0 1 to 6 553 5 s 00 to FE Hex 0 to 254 in units of 0 1 s The same data can be broadcast to all nodes on the network by setting the destination node number to FF Hex The range of node addresses is different for networks other than Ethernet Note The message services function does not guarantee that a message will reach the destination node A message may be lost during transmission due to fac tors such as noise In order to prevent this from occurring when using mes sage services it is common to set up retry processing at the node from which instructions are issued With the SEND 090 RECV 098 and CMND 490 instructions retry processing is executed automatically by specifying the num ber of retries so specify a number other than 0 234 Communicating between OMRON PLCs Section 8 6 Commands Addressed to CS CJ series CPU Units The following table provides a list of FINS commands that can be processed by a CS CuU series CPU Unit For details refer to the CS CJ series Program mable Controllers Communications Commands Reference Manual W342 For details on FINS commands that can be processed by the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port refer to Appendix E FINS Commands Addr
13. The specifications of Segment Format are different for each Segment Type The following sections describe Port Segment Logical Segment and Data Segment which are needed to use the CIP message communications instructions Port Segment The Port Segment is used to specify the path described above Extended Link Segment Type Address Size Port Identifier 7 6 5 A O C0 Set the ID of the port in Port Identifier The Port Identifier is 4 bits so it can have a value between 0 and 15 A port identifier of 0 is reserved and not available A port identifier of 1 indicates the backplane port A port identifier of 15 has a special meaning which indicates that the size of Port Identifier is larger than 1 byte and the 4 bit port identifier 15 is followed by 2 byte Port Identifier The port identifier does not exceed 1 byte when using the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port so this special case is not explained here Set the Extended Link Address Size to 1 when that port s Link Address is larger than 1 byte The following diagram shows the Port Segment value when the Extended Link Address Size is set to O Extended Link Segment Type Address Size Port Identifier Link Address 7 6 5 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 rf G 372 CIP Message Communications Appendix D Specify the size of Link Address when the Extended Link Address Size is set to 1 The following diagram shows the Port Segment v
14. CJ1H CPU with asynchronous memory access mode CS1G CPU AND CS1H CPU When the CPU Unit operating mode is set to RUN or MONITOR mode 3 The manufacturing date can be determined from the lot number on the side or top corner of the CPU Unit 4 The lot numbers are as follows YYMMDDnnnn in which YY indicates the last two digits of the year MM the month DD the day and nnnn the serial number 318 SECTION 13 Maintenance and Unit Replacement This section describes cleaning inspection and Unit replacement procedures as well as the Simple Backup Function 13 1 Maintenance and Replacement 2 0 0 c eee eee eee eee 320 13 1 1 Cleaning 32 4 chee he Peek Re i eee ee eas 320 132122 Inspections zacwecs ey hp cede Ped aie Pamir ois deuce meee 320 13 1 3 Unit Replacement Procedure 0 00000 320 13 2 Simple Backup Function 0 0 0 0 eee eee eee 321 13 3 Using the Backup Tool 2 0 0 eee eee 324 319 Maintenance and Replacement Section 13 1 13 1 Maintenance and Replacement 13 1 1 Cleaning A Caution 13 1 2 Inspection Inspection Equipment Normally Required Equipment Occasionally Required Equipment Inspection Procedure Environmental This section describes the routine cleaning and inspection recommended as regular maintenance as well as the Unit replacement procedure required if an EtherNet IP Unit needs to be repl
15. EIP Ver 2 0 OMRON Corporation MADE IN JAPAN Indicates that the unit version of the CPU Unit is 1 0 Indicates that the unit version of the built in EtherNet I P port is 2 0 In this manual the version of the EtherNet IP port built into the CJ2H CPU EIP CPU Unit is given as the unit version CX Programmer version 4 0 can be used to confirm the unit version using the Unit Manufacturing Information The unit versions of Pre Ver 1 0 Units cannot be confirmed in Unit Manufac turing Information The following dialog box is displayed PLC 10 Table Invalid Manufacturing data In the O Table Window right click and select Unit Manufacturing informa tion CPU Unit The following Unit Manufacturing information Dialog Box will be displayed xix Unit Manufacturing Information File Help Manufacturing Details Revision PCB Revision Software Revision Lot Number Manufacturing ID Serial Number e Unit version Unit Ver Unit Text CS1H H CPUI63 Program Note The unit version will be displayed in the Unit Manufacturing Information Dialog Box Using Unit Version Label The following unit version label is provided with the EtherNet IP Unit This label can be attached to the front of the EtherNet IP Unit to differentiate between EtherNet IP Units with different unit versions Unit Versions and CX Programmer Versions Use the following versions of the C
16. A link was established nor mally with the switching hub CIO Area Allocations Section 4 2 Unit Status 2 EtherNet IP Unit to CPU Unit n 11 Not used Manipulated by Unit operation Status Area Layout Setting Error Indicates that there was an error in the allocated ClO Area s layout settings When this error occurs the allo cated CIO Area layout is set to the default pattern In the following cases how ever the allocated CIO Area layout is set to the user set pattern In this case the user set area will not be refreshed eA non existent area has been specified There was not an error in the layout settings n 11 Not used User Settings Area Enabled Multiple Switches ON Error Online Error Log Stored Status Manipulated Online Tag Data Link Operating Operating IP Address Change Unit operation Indicates that the Unit is online The EtherNet IP Unit can perform communications processing Indicates that the Unit is not online This bit is turned OFF in the following cases e IP Address Duplication Error e Ethernet Communications Controller Error hardware error BOOTP Server Error 95 CIO Area Allocations 96 Tag Data Link Operating Manipulated Section 4 2 Unit operation Indicates that the tag data link is operating Turned OFF when communications
17. Write data 200 bytes max Note A body format of either 8 bits or 16 bits is possible Response Block 9F Service Code Parameters Service code command response IF Hex is specified for commands For responses the highest bit will turn ON and 9F Hex will be returned Class ID command Always C4 2F The class ID depends on the unit version The class ID is C4 for unit version 2 0 and 2F for unit version 1 0 Instance ID command The memory area to which the data is written is specified as shown in the following table Instance ID Hex CPU Unit memory area Word range for write 0000 to 6143 DM D00000 to D32767 WR W000 to W511 HR H000 to H1535 EM banks 0 to 18 En_00000 to En_32767 n 0 to 18 Address L Address H command The address of the first word to which the data is written is specified in hexadecimal as shown below Address L The lower 2 digits when the first word address is displayed in 4 digit hexadecimal Address H The higher 2 digits when the first word address is displayed in 4 digit hexadecimal Write data response The specified area and write data is returned in order from word L lower byte bits O to 7 to word H higher byte bits 8 to 15 Important Points The actual address L address H and number of write data bytes that can be specified depends on the model of the CPU Unit and the data area being written Do not exceed the boundary of t
18. OFF even if some tag data links are communicating Tag Data Links Operating Indicates that tag data links are communicating in one or more connections as the origi nator Indicates that not even one tag data link is communicating in connections as the origina tor OFF even if the Unit is com municating as a target CIO Area Allocations Section 4 2 Communications Status 2 EtherNet IP Unit to CPU Unit n 13 Communications Status 3 EtherNet IP Unit to CPU Unit n 14 Word n 13 contains status flags related to the Ethernet as shown in the fol lowing diagram 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 ri 6 5 4 3 2 a 0 neg So ECan Link Status FTP Status Unit operation Status Manipulated ON when the FTP server is operating i e when there is an FTP client connection OFF when the FTP is on standby i e waiting for a cli ent connection Not used Link Status ON when a link is established with the switching hub OFF when the link with the switching hub is stopped FTP Status Word n 14 contains status flags related to the Ethernet errors as shown in the following diagram n 14 Basic Ethernet Settings Error IP Address Table Error IP Router Table Error Routing Table Error Ethernet Expansion Settings Error BOOTP Server Error Address Mismatch Non volatile Memory Error Status Man
19. The IP address of the device Comment A description of the device The comment is displayed below the device icon The model number of the device is displayed by default Usage of Capacity The percentage of the allowable communications bandwidth used for tag data links for the device is displayed Bandwidth used Allowable tag data link bandwidth The values outside parentheses are for when multicast filtering is used The values inside parentheses are for when multicast filtering is not used The bandwidth used for communications by the device of the 100 Mbps network bandwidth is shown The values outside parentheses are for when multicast filtering is used The values inside parentheses are for when multicast filtering is not used Usage of IP Multi The number of multicast IP addresses actually used for com cast Addresses munications by the device is shown Total usage of IP The number of multicast IP addresses used in the entire net multicast addresses work is shown This value is used to estimate the number of multicast filters for switching Network Total of The total network bandwidth used for tag data link communica Max Mbit s tions in the entire network is shown Tag data links will not operate normally if 100 Mbps is exceeded for the network bandwidth 39 Checking Bandwidth Usage and Adjusting the RPI Section 2 3 Checking the Usage of Capacity and Network Bandwidth fo
20. Unit settings Built in non volatile memory CS CJ series CPU Unit m Tag Data Link Settings Network Configurator The Network Configurator is used to set the tag data links for the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port Double click the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port in the right pane of the Network Configurator and then set the Connections and Tag Sets Tab Pages in the Edit Device Parameters Dia log Box EtherNet IP Unit ee erNe ni Network Configurator or built in EtherNet IP port 9 j Sa Parameters Tag Data Link Settings Dialog Box Built in non volatile memory y CS CJ series CPU Unit If data links are implemented using only addresses use the EtherNet IP Datalink Tool to set up data link tables The EtherNet IP Datalink Tool can be started by selecting Network EtherNet IP Datalink Tool from the Network Configurator menus OMRON Communications Units use OMRON s original FINS network system Make the settings for the FINS network and the relay path as required in the Routing Table Area allocated to the non volatile memory in the CPU Unit Use CX Integrator to make the settings CX Integrator is software that comes with the CX One and is automatically installed when the CX One is installed Each time the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port is turned ON or restarted it reads and uses th
21. 350 Error code generated in origina tor The connection is being opened opening processing in progress Wait until the opening process ing is completed The meaning of this error code is defined by each vendor so it depends on the tar get s specifications Contact the target device s manufac turer Depends on the orig inator s specifica tions Contact the originator device s manufacturer Connection Status Codes and Error Processing Connection status General Additional Status Status hex hex Unique OMRON Error Source of error Codes Handling Section 14 3 Configuration 1 Configuration 2 Configuration 3 01 0810 Error code returned from target New data could not be obtained from the CPU Unit when open ing connection The Unit will automatically retry and attempt to open the connection again This error may occur if the CPU Unit s cycle time was long when opening the con nection the speci fied EM bank was converted to file memory or some problem in the PLC caused the PLC to stop If the cycle time was too long the problem will be resolved automat ically If the EM bank is set as file memory change the storage loca tion for the tag data If the PLC has stopped identify and cor rect the error If the PLC system is stopped iden tify the cause of the error from the CPU Unit error data The meanin
22. Adjust Time This sets in the CPU Unit s clock data the time differ ence made up from the SNTP server s clock data To use the clock data from the SNTP server just as it is input 0 12 3 Automatic Clock Adjustment Switch The Automatic Clock Adjustment Switch is allocated in the ClO Area as shown below The first word n of the CIO Area is calculated using the following equation n CIO 1500 25 x unit number Automatic Clock The Unit control bit is shown in the following diagram Adjustment Switch Pee SSeS Bee vo Clock Adjustment Switch When the Automatic Clock Adjustment Switch turns from OFF to ON the Eth erNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port obtains the clock data from the SNTP server on the network and applies it to the local CPU Unit After applying the data the switch automatically turns OFF again 12 4 Automatic Clock Adjustment Error Processing 12 4 1 Automatic Clock Adjustment SNTP Errors The following table shows the main causes and remedies for errors that occur in the automatic clock adjustment function SNTP Cause Correction SNTP DNS server address not set Reset each server address IP address or host name SNTP DNS server communications time Inspect the communications path Ether out Net IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port cable connections hub router server and correct the situation that is causing the error CPU Unit internal clock could not be set The
23. CIO Area Allocations 102 FINS TCP Connec tion 15 Manipulated by Section 4 2 Unit operation Turned ON by the Unit when a connection is established Turned OFF by the Unit when the connection is terminated FINS TCP Connec tion 16 Turned ON by the Unit when a connection is established Turned OFF by the Unit when the connection is terminated DM Area Allocations Section 4 3 4 3 DM Area Allocations 4 3 1 Overview of the Allocated DM Area Words The various kinds of data are stored in the offset positions shown in the fol lowing diagram from the beginning word in the area for each Unit The beginning word m is calculated by the following equation Beginning word m D30000 100 x unit number Offset Bit Sk 15 08 07 00 Data direction m Not used m 97 maag Ethernet Unit to CPU Unit ernet Unit to nit or IP Address Display Setting Area CPU Unit to Ethernet Unit m 99 J 4 3 2 Details of the Allocated DM Area Words IP Address Display Setting Area m 98 and m 99 15 14 13 1 5 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Hex IP address 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Hex If the local IP address is set to a value other than 0 0 0 0 in the TCP IP Config uration this area words m 98 and m 99 will act as an IP Address Display Area and the local IP address set in the TCP IP Configuration will be read and stored here when the power is turned ON or the Unit restarted
24. Detail code Saved in First byte Second byte EEPROM Parameter error packet discarded FINS Command Bit 15 OFF Bits 08 to 14 Source network address Bits 00 to 07 Source node address FINS Response Bit 15 ON Bits 08 to 14 Destination network address Bits 00 to 07 Destination node address CIP Frame FFFF I O refreshing error 00 hex 00 hex FINS TCP setting error 01 to 10 hex 01 Automatically allo Connection number cated FINS node address duplication 02 Destination IP address error 03 Destination port num ber error Server settings error 00 hex DNS 01 IP address 03 hex SNTP 02 Host name 04 hex ETP 03 Port number 04 Other parameter 06 hex BOOTP 07 hex SNMP 08 hex SNMP Trap 09 hex FINS UDP OA hex FINS TCP FINS TCP packet discarded 01 to 10 hex 02 hex Reopening Connection number because remote node closed 03 hex Reopening because of reception error 04 hex Reopening because of transmission error 05 hex Reopening because RST received from remote node 06 hex Reopening because of no keep alive response 07 hex Illegal FINS TCP procedure 08 hex Insufficient mem ory during server process ing 09 hex Insufficient mem ory during client process ing 0A hex Insufficient mem ory during node switching FINS UDP packet discarded 01 to FE hex Source node address 354 Error Log Function Section 14 4 Detail code Saved in First byte Second b
25. If the local IP address in the TCP IP Configuration is set to 0 0 0 0 this value is read by the EtherNet IP Unit when the power is turned ON or the Unit restarted and is used as the local IP address If the local IP address in these words and the TCP IP Configuration are both set to 0 0 0 0 the default IP address 192 168 250 Node_address will be used For details on the IP address settings refer to SECTION 5 Determining IP Addresses 12 11 m 98 m 99 amp Remarks e The setting in the allocated DM Area words is enabled only when the IP address is set to 0 0 0 0 in the TCP IP Configuration e lf the IP address is set to a value other than 00 00 00 00 in the TCP IP Con figuration this value is stored in the allocated words in the DM Area Application Simple operation i e The TCP IP Configuration is left at its default settings Only the IP address is set Setting device Programming Con sole CX Program mer can also be used Setting area Allocated words in the DM Area Operation with the desired IP address set in the TCP IP Configu ration Note CX Programmer Unit Setup Setup TCP IP Con figuration Dialog Box The IP address set in the Setup TCP IP Configuration Dialog Box is stored in the allocated DM Area words 1 If an IP address other than 00 00 00 00 is set as the local IP address in the TCP IP Configuration the IP Address Display Setti
26. Starting the Network Configurator Start the Network Configurator Refer to 6 2 1 Starting the Network Configurator Reading the Network Configuration File Read the network configuration file which was saved with the completed design into the Network Configurator Refer to 6 2 14 Reading a Network Configuration File Verifying the IP Addresses Verify that the devices IP addresses in the network configuration file matches the actual devices IP addresses If one of the IP addresses does not match change the IP address so that it matches Refer to 3 8 TCP IP and Link Settings and 6 2 3 Registering Devices Checking Connections Check the consistency of connection parameters for network configuration files that have been read Refer to 6 2 15 Checking Connections Connecting the Network Configurator to the Network Connect the Network Configurator to the CPU Unit through the serial port or Ethernet interface Refer to 6 2 7 Connecting the Network Configurator to the Network Downloading the Device Parameters Download the parameters to all of the devices in the network Refer to 6 2 8 Downloading Tag Data Link Parameters Verifying the Downloaded Device Parameters Compare the parameters in all of the devices in the network to verify that the user set device parameters were properly downloaded and saved in the devices Refer to 6 2 10 Verifying the Tag Data Links Closing the Network Configurator Exit from the
27. This flag is turned ON when any bit in Unit Status 1 is ON Bits 1 to 15 are logi cally ORed Indicates that a Unit error did not occur This flag is turned OFF when the error is cleared Network Error Occurred One or more network related errors occurred The bits in Communica tions Status 1 and 3 are log ically ORed Indicates that a network error did not occur This flag is turned OFF when the error is cleared Not used Unit Memory Error Indicates that an error occurred in accessing the Unit s internal non volatile memory device error Indicates that a non volatile memory error did not occur This flag is not cleared even if it occurs one time Flag remains ON Communications Controller Error Indicates that an error occurred in the communica tions controller Indicates that a communica tions controller error did not occur This flag remains ON until the power supply is turned OFF and ON again IP Address Duplica tion Error An ARP was sent with the specified IP address indi cating that an IP address duplication was detected An address duplication is detected if there is an ARP response This flag remains ON until the power supply is turned OFF and ON again The Ethernet interface will stop There was no ARP response Not used Link OFF Error There was an error estab lishing a link with the switch ing hub
28. 00 00 0000 2 1 1 2 System Configuration 0 0 0 eee 4 1 1 3 Devices Required for Constructing a Network 4 1 1 4 Setup Area and Related Programming Devices 4 1 1 5 Communications Services Overview 0 000 6 1 2 EtherNet IP Unit and Built in EtherNet IP Port Specifications 10 1 2 1 General Specifications 0 0 0 eee eee eee ee 10 1 2 2 Unit Specifications 0 0 eee eee eee 10 1 2 3 Communications Specifications 0 0 0 0 0000 13 1 2 4 Dimensions os hase Se wind ie i es A eS 14 1 2 5 Software Configuration 0 0 0 eee eee eee 16 1 3 Nomenclature and Functions 0 00 0 eee eee 17 1 3 1 Nomenclature and Functions 00 0 0000 17 1 3 2 Switch Sette aeoea aa wt de et Gu ae A Caer 22 1 4 Network Configurator Overview 00 0 cece eee eee 24 Il 4 OVERVIEW 2 bis vie ee ce See ied wd ap e hed tee ee Gene 24 1 4 2 Network Configurator Requirements 04 24 1 4 3 Precautions When Using the Network Configurator 25 Overview of EtherNet IP Unit and Built in EtherNet IP Port Section 1 1 1 1 Overview of EtherNet IP Unit and Built in EtherNet IP Port 1 1 1 EtherNet IP Unit Features Note EtherNet IP is an industrial multi vendor network that uses Ethernet compo nents The EtherNet IP specifications are open standards managed by the ODVA Open
29. 100m 1 CS1W EIP21 EtherNet IP Unit for CS series 1 CJ1W EIP21 EtherNet IP Unit EE CS scrics PLC PLC mi 0 1 1 3 Devices Required for Constructing a Network The basic configuration for an EtherNet IP System consists of one switching hub to which nodes are attached in star configuration using twisted pair cable The devices shown in the following table are required to configure a network with CS1W EIP21 and CJ1W EIP21 EtherNet IP Units or the built in EtherNet IP port in CJ2H CPUOLI EIP CPU Units Network device Contents 1 CS1W EIP21 EtherNet IP_ These are Communications Units or built in ports Units for CS series PLCs that connect a CS series or CU series PLC to an Eth CJ1W EIP21 EtherNet IP_ erNet IP network Units for CJ series PLCs or built in EtherNet IP port in CJ2H CPULILI EIP CPU Units 2 Twisted pair cable The twisted pair cable connects EtherNet IP Units or built in EtherNet IP ports to the switching hub with an RJ45 Modular Connector at each end Use an STP shielded twisted pair cable of category 5 5c or higher 3 Switching Hub This is a relay device that connects multiple nodes in a star shaped LAN Recommended Switching For details on recommended devices for constructing a network refer to 2 2 7 Hubs Recommended Network Devices Note f a repeater hub is used for EtherNet IP tag data links cyclic communica tions the ne
30. 20 At this point a confirmation dialog box will be displayed to check whether the registered tag names will be registered without changes as tag sets Tags are just being added in this case so click the No Button Just the tags will be registered without registering the tags as tag sets Network Configurator 157 Network Configurator Operations Section 6 2 Using Network Symbols 158 Note 21 22 23 24 To register the newly added tags in a tag set either double click the de sired tag set or select the tag set and click the Edit Button Edit Tag Set ee PLC Status Name D00000 Not Include Include Tag List CandidateT ag List Name Over Size D00004 2Byte D00005 2Byte The Tag List on the left side of the dialog box shows the tags that are al ready registered and the Candidate Tag Liston the right side of the dialog box shows the other tags that have not been registered yet Select the tags that you want to add from the Candidate Tag List and click the K Button Edit Tag Set PLC Status Name D00000 Not Include Include Tag List CandidateT ag List Name iF il Name Over Size Bit D00000 D00004 D00005 OK Cancel Up to 8 tags can be registered in a tag set or up to 7 tags can be registered and two byes will be added to the size if the PLC status is included in the tag set To confirm the changes click the OK Button at the bottom of the Edit Tag
31. 65 mm 2 7 mm s ai d 79 8 mm j ba 74 5 mm p 15 EtherNet IP Unit and Built in EtherNet IP Port Specifications Section 1 2 1 2 5 Software Configuration Memory Card Interface with CPU Unit EM file memory FINS FINS i FINS evar Loree i FINS Tag data link function Explicit messaging ETP FINS Service Automatic FINS UDP and FINS TCP CIP clock adjustment Encapsulation J TCP UDP IP CARP ICMP IGMP LAN controller driver LAN controller 16 Nomenclature and Functions Section 1 3 1 3 Nomenclature and Functions 1 3 1 Nomenclature and Functions CS1W EIP21 CJ1W EIP21 SS et Be el lt Q LED Indicators COMM mn Fmt Fes tom tom an mt o Unit number setting switch Node address setting switches EtherNet IP IP ADDRESS x 192 168 250 1 A abelon SUBNET MASK a ress 255 255 255 0 100BASE TX 10BASE T E Ethernet pll y connector meg fet lt 4 LED Indicators lt q Unit number setting switch wl lt q Node address setting switches EtherNet IP IP ADDRESS 255 255 255 0 100BASE TX 10BASE T Label showing IP address Ethernet connector lt q Backplane Connector 17 Nomenclature and Functions Section 1 3 Built i
32. Attribute ID 64 Hex Contents Reads the operating mode of the CPU Unit Attribute ID 65 Hex Reads if there is a fatal or non fatal error in the CPU Unit Attribute ID 66 Hex Reads CPU Unit model Attribute ID 64 Hex Attribute Value Changes the operating mode of the CPU Unit Attribute ID 65 Hex Attribute Value Clears errors None Reads the detailed status of the CPU Unit Operation status Stop run CPU standby Operating modes PROGRAM MON ITOR RUN Fatal error information Error flags including memory errors I O bus errors system errors Messages Message No when MSB instruction executed by CPU Unit Error codes Error code for the most serious errors Error messages Messages stored in CPU Unit when FAL FALS instruction executed 259 Receiving Explicit Messages VO Memory Read Write for CPU Units Service Byte Data Read Service code Word Data Read Byte Data Write Word Data Write 260 1F Hex Class ID C4 Hex 2F Hex See note Instance ID Specifies area 01 Hex to 14 Hex Request service data Address No of read bytes Section 9 2 Contents Reads the specified node data in byte units The word data is read in order from high to low bytes Read data 200 bytes max Address No of read words Reads the specified node data in word units The word data is read in order fro
33. CPU Unit EtherNet IP Unit CS1W EIP21 CJ1W EIP21 Applications Use the simple backup function when creating a backup data file for the entire PLC including the CPU Unit EtherNet IP Units built in EtherNet IP port and Serial Communications Units Boards or when replacing all the Units Backup Sources and The data that was backed up with the simple backup function can be restored Restore Targets to Units or built in ports as shown in the following table Network Configuration designations are given for the model numbers and versions of the backup sources and restore targets The model number must be the same for both the backup source and restore target The CIP revision must be the same or higher Restore target CS1W EIP21 CJ2B EIP21 CJ1W EIP21 CJ1W EIP21 CJ2 Backup source Rev 1 1 Rev 2 1 Rev 2 1 Rev 2 1 CS1W EIP21 CU1W EIP21 Yes Rev 1 1 See note 1 CS1W EIP21 CJ1W EIP21 Yes Rev 2 1 CJ2B EIP21 No Rev 2 1 CJ1W EIP21 CJ2 No Rev 2 1 Note 1 Functions added for revision 2 1 will be set to their default settings The number of settings will be increased so an error will occur in the comparison after data is restored 2 Data backed up for revision 1 1 using a simple backup can be restored to an EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port with revision 2 1 but an error will occur in the comparison When changing the unit version refer to 6 2 16 Changing Dev
34. D02000 C D00000 D01016 382E hex D01017 3235 hex D01018 302E hex D01019 3200 hex D00000 0028 hex D00001 0064 hex D00002 0001 hex D00003 0510 hex D00004 0000 hex D00005 00A0 hex D02000 2801 hex D02001 0000 hex D02002 0000 hex D02003 001D hex D02004 8100 hex D02005 0000 hex D02006 2F00 hex D02007 0C00 hex D02008 0C00 hex D02009 0101 hex D020010 3000 hex D020011 5303 hex D020012 0011 hex D020013 0A43 hex D020014 5331 hex D020015 572D hex D020016 4549 hex D020017 5032 hex D020018 3100 hex Section 9 1 IP address 8 IP address 25 IP address 0 IP address 2 Padding data 00 hex First response word at local node First control word Number of command bytes 40 bytes Number of response bytes 100 bytes Destination network address 1 Destination node address 5 Destination unit address FE hex or 10 hex Response communications port 0 no retries Response monitoring time 16 0 s Command code FINS completion code Transport ID Number of bytes received 29 bytes Service code response 81 hex Reserved 00 hex General status 00 hex Reserved 00 hex Words C 6 to C 18 contain the service response data Sending Explicit Messages Section 9 1 Program Example 000000 000013 000018 000024 A20011 071 First Cycle Flag BSET 0000 D00000 D02999 r 021 MOV 0028 D00000 021 MOV
35. Message packet was cor rupted by transmission error Increase the number of trans mit retry attempts Instruction s control data The response monitoring time is too short Set a longer response moni toring time Read the error log The transmission frame may be corrupted or the internal reception buffer full Read out the error log and correct the system as required Unit error Controller error Communications controller error Affected con trollers ERC indicator Error occurred in the communications control ler Take corrective action refer ring to troubleshooting proce dures in this section PLC error Affected node s LED indicators CPU Unit error occurred in the PLC at the remote node Clear the error in the CPU Unit Refer to the PLC s oper ation manuals Unit number setting error Unit number The unit number setting is incorrect Confirm that the unit number set on the switch is within the specified range and that the same unit number is not used twice in the same network Service not supported Unsupported com mand Command code The specified command code is not supported by the destination Unit Check the command code FINS header frame length A short frame 4 bytes is being used for the FINS header frame The EtherNet IP Unit does not support short headers Routing error 360 Routing table sett
36. Number of Stored Records Response The number of IP router table records stored at the time the command is executed is returned in hexadecimal IP Router table Records Response The number of IP router table records specified in the number of records parameter is returned The total num ber of bytes in the IP router table records is calculated as the number of records x 8 bytes record The configu ration of the 8 bytes of data in each record is shown below 1 8 bytes SESAESSE IP Network address Router IP address Network ID IP Network Address The network ID from the IP address in hexadecimal The network ID part corresponding to the address class determined by the leftmost 3 bits set here is enabled Router IP Address The IP address in hexadecimal of a router connected to a network specified with IP addresses Precautions If the IP router table contains fewer records than the number specified in the number of records parameter all the records contained in the IP router table when the command is executed will be returned and the command execution will end normally Response Codes Normal end Command too large Command too small PROTOCOL STATUS READ Reads the protocol status or the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port Command Block 27 62 Command code Response Block Command Response IP status ICMP status TCP status UDP status code code 395 FINS Commands Addressed to Eth
37. e CJ2 series CPU Unit s serial port USB or RS 232C Ethernet port on EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port e The Network Configurator can be connected directly to the EtherNet IP network from the computer s Ethernet port When connecting directly to the EtherNet IP network an Ethernet port must be set up in the computer in advance In this case the Network Configurator will be connected to the EtherNet IP network as a single node If there isn t an unused node address available the Network Configurator can t be connected directly to the EtherNet IP network 25 Network Configurator Overview Section 1 4 26 SECTION 2 Designing the EtherNet IP System This section describes how to design an EtherNet IP system 2 1 Design Procedures a caci tai bs aeaa Mle EE ar eugued ch viguale Grease 28 2 1 1 Establishing a New EtherNet IP System 28 2 1 2 Modifying an Established EtherNet IP System 31 2 2 Selecting the Network Devices 0 0 00 0c cece eee eee eee 34 2 2 1 Recommended Network Devices 0000005 34 2 2 2 Network Devices Manufactured by OMRON 34 2 2 3 Switching Hub Types 0 0 02 34 2 2 4 Switching Hub Functions 0 0 0 2 ee eee 35 2 2 5 Precautions When Selecting a Switching Hub 35 2 3 Checking Bandwidth Usage and Adjusting the RPI 38 2 3 1 Checking Bandwidth Usag
38. e With FINS UDP all of the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port IP address conversion methods can be used 127 Private and Global Addresses Section 5 3 e With FINS UDP when the IP address private address of a computer serving as a DHCP client is changed the IP address conversion method of the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port will be the automatic generation method dynamic the combined method or the IP address table method When FINS TCP is used IP addresses can be changed automatically m Explicit Message Communications Service e The explicit message communications service can be executed on the intranet between EtherNet IP Units and built in EtherNet IP ports with pri vate addresses only e A device such as a personal computer CIP applications including the Network Configurator cannot connect online and communicate over the Internet with an EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port that has a pri vate address Explicit message communications are also not possible over the Internet between EtherNet IP Units and built in EtherNet IP ports with private addresses Note 1 Tag data links cannot be used through an IP router 2 Network Security and Firewalls Setting up an intranet through a global address involves network security considerations Before doing so be sure to consult with a network spe cialist and consider installing a firewall Once a firewall has been set up by a communications
39. grammer s Edit Parameters Dialog Box To dynamically change the remote IP address i e during CPU Unit operation execute the CMND 490 instruction in the ladder program and send a FINS command FINS TCP CONNECTION REMOTE NODE CHANGE REQUEST command code 27 30 hexadecimal to the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port 1 Make the basic settings Refer to Initial Settings in 3 1 1 Procedures 2 Make the following settings on the FINS TCP Tab Page of the CX Pro grammer s Edit Parameters Dialog Box FINS TCP port default 9600 e Server Client Specifies whether the connection will operate in FINS TCP server mode or client mode e Target IP address for client Specifies the IP address of the target FINS TCP server e Target IP address for server Specifies allowed client IP addresses when protection is enabled e Automatically allocated FINS node address for server Specifies the address to allocate when automatically allocating a FINS node ad dress to the target FINS TCP client e Keep alive Specified whether to use the keep alive function Note Normally this function is used and the option is selected e Enable protect via IP address Note Select this option only when protecting as the server 3 Select Transfer to PLC from the Options Menu and click the Yes Button The setting data will be transferred to the CPU Bus Unit System Setup Area in the CPU Unit 4 Make the routing table settings and transfer t
40. 0064 D00001 r 021 MOV 0001 D00002 021 MOV 0510 D00003 021 MOV 0000 D00004 021 MOV 00A0 D00005 021 MOV 2810 D1000 m 021 MOV 0000 D1001 m 021 MOV 05DC D1002 F 021 MOV 5202 D1003 F 021 MOV 2006 D1004 F 021 MOV 2401 D1005 F 021 MOV 0A0C D1006 F 021 MOV 0600 D1007 r 021 MOV 0102 D1008 r 021 MOV 2001 D1009 r 021 MOV 2401 D1010 r 021 MOV 0800 D1011 r 021 MOV 120D D1012 m 021 MOV 3139 D1013 m 021 MOV 322E D1014 m 021 MOV 3136 D1015 r 021 MOV 382E D1016 r 021 MOV 3235 D1017 r 021 MOV 302E D1018 021 MOV 3200 D1019 Execution Z 021 MOV 0001 0000 condition 000000 A20200 fh 151100 490 000001 IT Communications Enabled Flag A20200 I Online Flag n 11 bit 60 A21900 CMND D01000 D02000 D00000 025 Ti 0000 p 021 Communications Enabled Flag Network Communication Execution Error Flag Mov A203 D00006 026 ASR 0000 r 001 END L Sets 0000 in D00000 to D02999 Sets 0028 in D00000 Number of send data bytes 40 Sets 0064 in D00001 Number of receive data bytes 100 Sets 0001 in D00002
41. 1 5 5 0 2 18 5 ms 283 Message Service Transmission Delay Section 10 3 RECV 098 Instruction Execution of RECV 099 in user program CPU Bus Unit service cycle Local node 1 CPU Bus Unit service cycle Local node 2 j fi i CPU Bus Unit service processing time Local node 1 i Send processing 1 _ CPU Bus Unit service processing time Local node 2 A Transmission delay CPU data set Command Response y processing i Transmission delay A Transmission delay Command i Response i Receive processing i Send processing Y Command i Response att CPU Bus Unit service processing time i Remote node CPU Bus Unit service cycle Remote node CPU Bus Unit Service Cycle Local Node 1 CPU Bus Unit Service Processing Time Local Node 1 284 Maximum transmission delay Maximum transmission delay CPU Bus Unit service cycle Local node 1 CPU Bus Unit service processing time Local node 1 Send processing Command Transmission delay Command Receive processing Command CPU Bus Unit service cycle remote node CPU Bus Unit service processing time remote node Send processing Response Transmission delay Response Receive processing Response CPU Bus Unit service cycle Local node 2 CPU Bus Unit service processing time Local node 2 The following table shows the service cycle which depends on the CPU Unit s CPU proce
42. 120000 A21907 an Continued on next page 240 Section 8 6 When the Communications Port Enabled Flag for port 7 is ON and RECV 098 is not being executed the send execution program will start when execution condition CIO 000000 turns ON Input CIO 120000 remains ON from the start of SEND 090 execution until completion Control Data Creation Word Contents Meaning D0000 00 OA Number of send words 10 D0001 00 02 Destination network number 2 D0002 04 00 Destination node number 4 i Destination unit address 0 D0003 97 05 Response required Communications port No used 7 i Number of retries 5 D0004 00 64 Response monitor time 10 s Send Data Creation Ten words of data from word CIO 0000 is stored from D00010 onwards Ten words of data from D00010 at the local node is sent to D00020 onwards at network number 2 node number 4 unit address 0 the PLC Reset Input Creation Send Error Display Communicating between OMRON PLCs Section 8 6 Continued from previous page Execution condition 420207 000001 See note1 120000 When the Communications Port Enabled Flag for port 7 is ON and SEND 090 is not being executed the trans mission execution program will start when execution condition ClO 000001 turns ON 120003 it Input ClO 120002 remains ON from the start of RECV 098 execution until completion Control
43. 19 multicast communications 134 multicast filter 35 N beginning word of allocated CIO Area 90 network devices required for constructing a network 4 network configuration file reading 189 saving 187 Network Configurator 139 connecting to the network 173 Device Monitor function 328 requirements 24 starting 139 TCP IP settings 76 Network Configurator overview 24 network devices recommended devices 34 network symbol 78 141 158 networks network memory 399 network parameters 363 Node Address Setting Switch 23 node addresses setting 56 57 noise XXiv Contact Output Units 63 reducing 61 nomenclature and functions 17 Normal Target Node Flags 101 106 NS indicator 19 O online editing xxiii Index open command 291 296 operating environment precautions xxiv originator 132 P packet interval RPI adjusting 42 relationship to bandwidth usage 272 setting 272 Password field 294 PCMR 260 instruction 237 physical address 78 135 PING 387 PING command 84 PLC object services 259 Port No field 294 314 315 port numbers UDP port reading from Unit 380 power supply xxiv precautions XXV precautions xxi applications xxiv Contact Output Units 63 general xxii handling 60 installation 61 operating environment xxiv power supply xxv safety xxii wiring 64 preferred DNS server 75 private address 126 Programming Console 66 Prog
44. 192 168 250 4 CS1W EIP21 192 168 250 5 C51 W EIP21 192 168 250 6 CS1W EIP21 192 168 250 7 CS1W EIP21 192 168 250 8 CS1W EIP21 lt 192 168 250 9 CS1W EIP21 192 168 250 110 CS1W EIP21 192 168 250 111 GJ1W EIP21 192 168 250 112 CJ1W EIP21 192 168 250 113 GJ1W EIP21 192 168 250 114 CJ1W EIP21 192 168 250 115 CJ1W EIP21 192 168 250 116 CJT W EIP21 w19 M19 M19 M19 Checking Bandwidth Usage and Adjusting the RPI Section 2 3 The percentage of the allowed tag data link bandwidth being used Usage of Capacity increases to 73 00 and the same RPI is set for all of the connec tions which indicates that 5 0 ms is the fastest setting Usage of Device Bandwidth Comment 192 168 250 1 CS1W EIP21 192 168 250 2 CS1W EIP21 192 168 250 3 CS1W EIP21 192 168 250 4 CS1W EIP21 192 168 250 5 CS1W EIP21 192 168 250 6 CS1W EIP21 P 192 168 250 7 CS1W EIP21 192 168 250 8 CS1W EIP21 192 168 250 9 CS1W EIP21 192 168 250 10 CS1W EIP21 192 168 250 11 CJTW EIP21 192 168 250 12 CJ1W EIP21 192 168 250 13 CJ1TW EIP21 192 168 250 14 CJ1TW EIP21 192 168 250 15 CJ1TW EIP21 192 168 250 16 CJTW EIP21 192 168 250 17 CJ1TW EIP21 192 168 250 18 CJTW EIP21 192 168 250 19 CJ1TW EIP21 192 168 250 20 CJTW EIP21 Usage of Capac 73 00 73 00 73 00 73 00 73 00 73 00 73 00 73 00 73 00 73 00 73 00 73 00 73 00 73 00 73 00 73 00 73 00 73 00 73 00
45. 296 300 Index C cables connections 64 installation 63 precautions 61 cd command 291 296 298 cdup command 291 296 CIDR 3 114 CIO Area allocations 90 CIP 2 369 CIP communications services 6 CIP message communications 369 cleaning 320 close command 291 296 300 CMND 490 instruction 200 230 234 commands FTP commands 296 communications high traffic conditions 242 message communications 197 243 message communications errors 205 communications cables xxv Communications Port Enabled Flags 236 Communications Port Error Flags 236 communications specifications 13 Communications Status 1 Flags 97 Communications Status 2 Flags 99 Communications Status 3 Flags 99 communications test 84 component names 17 connecting to the FTP server 292 connection setting 163 Connections settings Edit All Connections 165 Connections Settings editing individual connections 167 Connections Tab 163 connectors modular plug recommended models 34 Contact Output Units precautions 63 control bits 91 CONTROLLER DATA READ 380 CONTROLLER STATUS READ 382 CPU Bus Units 415 416 precautions xxvi creating a tag set 150 creating tag sets 150 creating tags 151 crimp terminals xxv current consumption CJ series 11 12 CS series 10 CX Integrator 5 66 creating routing tables 218 CX Programmer 8 66 connecting to PLC 221 cyclic communications required se
46. 73 00 73 00 73 00 73 00 73 00 73 00 73 00 73 00 73 00 73 00 73 00 73 00 73 00 73 00 73 00 73 00 73 00 73 00 73 00 73 00 73 00 Mbit s without 9 413 9 413 Mbi 9 413 9 413 Mbi 9 413 9 413 Mbi 9 413 9 413 Mbi 9 413 9 413 Mbi 9 413 9 413 Mbi 9 413 9 413 Mbi 9 413 9 413 Mbi 9 413 9 413 Mbi 9 413 9 413 Mbi 9 413 9 413 Mbi 9 413 9 413 Mbi 9 413 9 413 Mbi 9 413 9 413 Mbi 9 413 9 413 Mbi 9 413 9 413 Mbi 9 413 9 413 Mbi 9 413 9 413 Mbi 9 413 9 413 Mbi 9 413 9 413 Mbi Usage of IP mult Close Total usage of IP multicast addresses 20 Network Total of Max Mbit s 11 766Mbit s Method 2 Changing a Particular Device s RPI Setting In this example we want faster tag data links for devices 192 168 250 1 and 192 168 250 10 only Click the Set Packet Interval RPI Button at the bottom of the Usage of Device Bandwidth Dialog Box to display the Set Packet Inter val RPI Dialog Box In the Target Device Area deselect all devices other than 192 168 250 1 and 192 168 250 10 by removing the corresponding check marks Input 5 0 ms as the new RPI value and click the OK Button Set Packet Interval RPD Packet Interval RPD 5 ms 05 100000 ms Target Device 192 168 250 1 CS1W EIP21 C 192 168 250 2 CS1W EIP21 C 192 168 250 3 CS1W EIP21 C 192 168 250 4 CS1W EIP21 C
47. Are the Units installed securely No looseness Phillips head screwdriver Are the Ethernet cable connectors No looseness Visual fully inserted and locked 13 1 3 Unit Replacement Procedure Precautions 320 Replace a faulty EtherNet IP Unit as soon as possible If the built in EtherNet IP port is faulty replace the CPU Unit as soon as possible We recommend having spare Units available to restore network operation as quickly as possi ble Observe the following precautions when replacing a faulty Unit e After replacement verify that there are no errors with the new Unit e When a Unit is being returned for repair attach a sheet of paper detailing the problem and return the Unit to your OMRON dealer Simple Backup Function Section 13 2 e If there is a faulty contact try wiping the contact with a clean lint free cloth dampened with alcohol Note To prevent electric shock when replacing a Unit always stop communications in the network and turn OFF the power supplies to all of the nodes before removing the faulty Unit Settings Required After a Unit has been replaced verify that the following steps have been made after Unit correctly Replacement e Set the node address and unit number e Connect the Ethernet cable e Set the configuration data parameter settings again and download them 13 2 Simple Backup Function Overview The simple backup function can be used to back up not only all of the da
48. CIO Area DM Area EM Area Holding Area Work Area and network symbols See note 8 Number of tags per connec tion 1 tag set 8 7 tags when the tag set contains the PLC status Maximum link data size per node 184 832 words Maximum data size per con nection 252 words or 722 words See note 2 Note Data synchronicity is maintained within each connection Number of registrable tag sets 256 1 connection 1 tag set Maximum size of 1 tag set 722 words The PLC status uses 1 word when the tag set contains the PLC status Maximum number of tags that can be refreshed per CPU Unit cycle See note 3 Output Transmission CPU gt EtherNet IP 19 Input Reception EtherNet IP CPU 20 See note 4 Output Transmission CPU EtherNet IP 256 Input Reception EtherNet IP CPU 256 Data that can be refreshed per CPU Unit cycle See note 3 Output Transmission CPU EtherNet IP 7 405 words Input Reception EtherNet IP CPU 7 405 words Output Transmission CPU EtherNet IP 6 432 words Input Reception EtherNet IP CPU 6 432 words Changing tag data link parameters during operation Supported See note 5 Multicast packet filter func tion See note 6 Supported Explicit messaging Class 3 connected Number of connections 128 UCMM unconnected Number of clients that can communicate at one ti
49. CLOSING Completed and exchanged FIN Awaiting ACK LAST ACK FIN sent and completed Awaiting ACK FIN WAIT 2 Completed and ACK received Awaiting FIN TIME WAIT After closing pauses twice the maximum segment life 2MSL 367 TCP Status Transitions Appendix C 368 Appendix D CIP Message Communications This appendix describes CIP message communications The basic concepts of CIP message communications are described in this appendix from C P Object on page 369 through Example of CIP Message Creation on page 374 Read these sections to improve your understanding of CIP message communications CIP Object Object Model In the CIP Common Industrial Protocol system each device is modeled as a group of Objects An Object abstractly represents a related group of the device s data values When accessing the device from the outside access an Object An Object represents the abstracted device function processing and the resulting data A request from the outside of Object such as Read Data is called Service Data belonging to the Object is called Attribute The actual entity of Object is called Instance or Object Instance When Object is generalized it is called Class For example Japan is one of Instances Object Instances of Class Nation External request Example Read Write 7 Processing Object Instance 369 CIP Message C
50. Description For details refer to EXPLICIT MESSAGE SEND 28 01 on page 251 in 9 1 1 Sending Explicit Messages Using CMND 490 CIP UCMM MESSAGE SEND Sends a message in the CIP message UCMM format Command Block 2810 hex Command Transport Message monitoring code ID timer 4 502 bytes max gt Ee i a A ys a ee a aap ee Request bus size Request data variable length variable length Request bus size Service code Response Block l I I I 2810 hex 0000 hex Command End Transport Number of code code ID bytes received lt ______ __ 502 bytes max gt o0 00 00 hex hex hex variable length Reserved General status Reserved Service code response Ser response data Response Codes Response code Description Normal end The local node s network has not started up Duplicate address error The remote node s network has not started up Remote node busy cannot send No response returned from remote node Monitoring timer timed out Command length exceeds maximum command length Command length is less than minimum command length Command block format does not match 405 FINS Commands Addressed to EtherNet IP Units or Built in EtherNet IP Ports Appendix E Response code Description Header error Respon
51. Destination network address 01 Sets 0510 in D00003 Destination node address 05 destination unit address 10 Sets 0000 in D00004 Response required port number 0 number of retries 0 Sets 00A0 in D00005 Response monitoring time 16 0 s Command data Set the CIP UCMM MESSAGE SEND command s command data in words D01000 to D01019 in routing data format Moves 0001 into CIO 0000 Sends 8 bytes of command data to destination node address 06 receives 14 bytes of response data and stores it in the local node starting at D02000 D00000 is control data Shifts the contents of CIO 0000 one bit to the left Copies the completion code network communications error response code from A203 to D00006 Shifts the contents of CIO 0000 one bit to the right and retries in the next cycle CIO 000000 ON 257 Receiving Explicit Messages Section 9 2 9 2 Receiving Explicit Messages The CS CuJ series EtherNet IP Units and built in EtherNet IP ports are equipped with a PLC Object that is functionally compatible with CS CJ series DeviceNet Units The Unit will receive messages addressed to the PLC Object process service requests addressed to the CPU Unit and return responses The CS CJ series EtherNet IP Units and built in EtherNet IP ports support CIP unconnected message UCMM communications and CIP con nected Class 3 communications as reception functions The following services are provided by the PLC Object e C
52. EDS File Manapement ses gacge sigs hans A eee ee eed ea hs Wee Sea 407 G EtherNet IP Connections from Windows XP SP2 or Higher or Windows Vista 411 ix TABLE OF CONTENTS About this Manual This manual describes the operation of the CS CJ series EtherNet IP Units and the built in EtherNet IP ports on a CJ2 CPU Unit for constructing applications and includes the sections described below Please read this manual carefully and be sure you understand the information provided before attempting to install or operate the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port Be sure to read the precautions provided in the following section Precautions provides general precautions for using the CS CJ series EtherNet IP Units and built in EtherNet IP ports Section 1 introduces the functions and protocols used in EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port communications services Section 2 describes how to design an EtherNet IP system Section 3 explains how to install and make the initial settings required for operation of the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port Section 4 describes the words allocated in the CIO Area and the DM Area for EtherNet IP Units or built in EtherNet IP ports Section 5 explains how to manage and use IP addresses Section 6 describes tag data link functions and related Network Configurator operations Section 7 describes message communications using FINS messages and explicit messages Secti
53. Error 00 Hex No error 15 1 0 1 Error e CPU Unit Model when Attribute ID 66 Hex The CPU Unit model is returned in ASCII Size 2 bytes Always 1400 Hex Model 20 bytes fixed Unused area is filled with 20 Hex Spaces and returned 20 bytes Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte 14 o0 Unitname 20 20 CPU Unit Write Service Code 10 Hex This PLC Object service writes CPU Unit information including the operating mode and clearing errors Command Block C4 10 D 09 The class ID depends on the unit version Version 2 0 The class ID is C4 i ry Version 1 0 The class ID is 2F Class ID Attribute ID Service Code Attribute Value Instance ID Note A body format of either 8 bits or 16 bits is possible Service Code Response Block Parameters Service code command response 10 Hex is specified for commands For responses the highest bit will turn ON and 90E Hex will be returned Class ID command Always C4 2F The class ID depends on the unit version The class ID is C4 for unit version 2 0 and 2F for unit version 1 0 Instance ID command Always 00 Hex Attribute ID command Information to write is specified by the attribute ID The attribute IDs are listed in the following table Attribute ID Hex Attribute value size CPU Unit operating mode 1 word 2 bytes 65 CPU Unit errors 1 word 2 bytes 262 Receiving Explicit Messages Section
54. Indicator Flashing red NS Not lit 7 segment Communica tions Control ler Error An error occurred in the Communica tions Controller in the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port Unit operation Flag status e The Unit will be offline and unable to communicate Errors will be returned to all communications requests e Data exchanges refreshing will con tinue with the CPU Unit The Unit Error Occurred Flag n 10 bit 00 Network Error Occurred Flag n 10 bit 01 and Commu nications Controller Error Flag n 10 bit 05 will go ON Section 14 3 Countermeasure Replace the Ether Net IP Unit or for the built in Ether Net IP port the CPU Unit if the error recurs when the Unit is restarted Flashing red Errors Related to the Unit Indicator 14 3 Connection Status Codes and Error Processing NS Not lit 7 segment Note Node Address Setting Changed Dur ing Operation The Node Address Setting Switch was changed during operation Operation will con tinue The IP Address Changed During Operation Flag n 11 bit 02 will turn ON Restart the Ether Net IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port after setting the correct node address The 7 segment display alternates between the node address and error code Special Unit Error An error occurred ina Special I O Unit or CPU Bus Unit Unit op
55. Lack of available space in internal buffers The load traffic on the Ether net Unit is too heavy Check your user applications FINS TCP not con nected Unit Setup Not opened due to sys tem settings Not opened due to a change command from the FINS TCP connec tion s remote node Closed by remote node opening again Opening again because of a reception error Opening again because of a send error Opening again because of an RST response in keep alive Opening again because there was no response in keep alive Correctly set the Unit Setup FINS TCP connection num ber remote IP address and remote port number Establishing connec tion Command data A connection is already established with the specified remote node Correct the settings for the FINS TCP connection num ber the remote IP address and the remote port number Cannot change con nection Unit Setup and com mand data The specified connection number is not set as a FINS TCP client in the Unit Setup Correct the settings for the Unit Setup the FINS TCP connection number the remote IP address and the remote port number Cannot execute because service was interrupted Command data While a remote node change was being pro cessed for the specified connection number a request for a change was received and the pro cessing was stopped Correct the set
56. NS 7 segment The same unit number is set on another Unit Not lit Duplicate unit number Flashing red The 7 segment display alternates between the node address and error code Unit operation Flag Countermeasure status Set the unit num bers correctly and restart the Ether Net IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port Operation stops CPU Unit faulty Flashing Not lit red Replace the CPU Unit if the error recurs when the CPU Unit is restarted Operation stops 335 Using the LED Indicators and Display for Troubleshooting Indicator Lit red NS Not lit 7 segment EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port faulty Unit operation Flag status Operation stops Section 14 2 Countermeasure Replace the Ether Net IP Unit or fora built in EtherNet IP port the CPU Unit if the error recurs when the Unit is restarted Flashing red Not lit Node address setting error The node address set on the switches is invalid 00 or FF Operation stops Set the node address correctly and restart the Eth erNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port Flashing red Not lit CPU Unit faulty Records the error in the error log time date all zeroes Operation stops Replace the CPU Unit if the error recurs when the CPU Unit is restarted Flashing red Not lit I O table not registered The CPU
57. New IP Address EA OK Cancel 3 Set the IP address to match the node address IP address actually being used in the device 4 Repeat steps 1 to 3 and register all of the devices participating in the tag data links 142 Network Configurator Operations Section 6 2 CO EtherNet IP_t g Network Configurator EtherNet IP Hardware amp Vendor B Omron Corporation Sia Communications Adapter 192 168 250 1 192 168 250 2 192 168 250 3 S CJTW EIP21 CS1W EIP21 CS1W EIP21 CJ1W EIP21 3 CSTW EIP21 E DeviceType 6 2 4 Setting Tags Using Data Link Tables Tag data links can be set in a data link table as shown below The tag settings tag set settings and connection settings can all be made from the data link table The following restrictions exist e Settings can be made only for tag data links between OMRON EtherNet IP Units and built in EtherNet IP ports Tags must be set using I O memory addresses e A maximum of two tags area 1 and area 2 can be set in one tag set The setting window for the data link table is opened by selecting EtherNet IP Datalink Tool from the Network Menu of the Network Configurator The devices for which the tag data links are being set must be registered in the Network Configurator HB 01e8tecd csy DatalinkTool File Edit Datalink Help eoW 4 amp aeax Kv Nodes Datalink Table data of selected node i Areal Area2 IP
58. ON The SNTP server used to adjust the time is set in the Unit Setup Once the clock time has been adjusted the EtherNet IP Unit automatically turns OFF the Adjust Clock Bit Do not force this bit ON or OFF until it is auto matically turned OFF by the Unit These words show the operating status of the target node PLCs that are con nected with the EtherNet IP Unit as the originator This status information is enabled when the PLC status is included in the communications data in both the originator and target node These words show the status of nodes 0 to 63 only If it is necessary to show the status of nodes higher than node 63 select user settings as the layout pattern For details refer to 4 4 User Settings Area The flags are valid only when the corresponding Normal Target Node Flag is ON If the corresponding Normal Target Node Flag is OFF the Target Node PLC Operating Flag indicates the previous operating status CIO Area Allocations Section 4 2 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 2 1 0 ris w is e npole s 7 ets sle s o ele ls fale ole olslel ele el elel Target Node PLC Operat ON The corresponding PLC ing Flags is operating The pro gram is being executed The PLC is not operating Target Node PLC These words show the error status logical OR of fatal and non fatal errors of Error Information the target node PLCs that are connected with the EtherNet IP Unit as the orig EtherNet IP Unit to inator This s
59. Offline P EM WORD A466 Work EMS Area Parameter ma Symbols P EM WORD A467 Work EM6 Area Parameter E 10 Table and Unit Setup PEM WORD A468 Work EM Area Parameter Settings PEMs Work EM8 Area Parameter Memory Pema Work EM9 Area Parameter TA Programs PEMA Work EMA Area Parameter Sai NewProgrami 00 PEMB Name NOT OutData Work EMB Area Parameter 53 Symbols Sectiont PEMO Data type CHANNEL Work EMC Area Parameter END PEQ Work Equals EQ Flag i Address or value F Function Blocks PER Work Instruction Execution Error P First Cycl Comment Work First Cycle Flag P First Cycl Work First Task Execution Flag PGE Work Greater Than or Equals G PGT I Network Variable Publication Input Output Work Greater Than GT Flag P_HR Work HR Area Parameter PO Verity I Link the definition to the project s OX Server file Work 1 0 Verification Error Flag PLE Advanced Settings oK Cancel Work Less Than or Equals LE P_Low Batte Work Low Battery Flag PLT BOOL OF007 Work Less Than LT Flag P _Max Cycle Time UDINT A262 Work Maximum Cycle Time PN BOOL FOB Work Negative N Flae PNE BOOL cron Work Not Equals NE Flag POF BOOL F009 Work Overflow OF Flae POf BOOL CF14 Work Always OFF Flag POn BOOL OFI13 Work Always ON Flae P_Output_Off Bit BOOL A50015 Work Output OFF Bit P Step BOOL 20012 Work Step Flag PUF BOOL cFoo Work Underflow UF Flag PWR WOR
60. Setting the Route Path Port Number The following description explains the network port which is used to specify the route path In the CJ2 Series the Backplane is also considered part of the network when specifying the Link Address CPU Unit CJ2 Not supported by CS1 CJ1 CPU Units Each CPU Unit has one backplane port By convention the built in port on a CJ2 CPU Unit functions as a CPU Bus Unit Pork Port Number Backplane The Backplane port is the Backplane CPU Unit communications routed through CPU Bus Units always travel through the backplane EtherNet IP Unit or CJ2 Built in EtherNet IP Port The EtherNet IP Unit has two ports A CJ2 CPU Unit also has two built in EtherNet IP ports One is a Back plane port and the other is an Ethernet port The Backplane port is the Backplane Communications routed through the CPU Unit a Special I O Unit or another CPU Bus Unit always travel through the backplane C Pon Ponur Backplane 1 Ethernet 2 Link Address The Link Address is a node address on the network which is used to specify the route path The method to set the Link Address is different for each network In the CS CJ Series the Backplane is also considered part of the network when specifying the Link Address Backplane CPU Bus Unit or Special I O Unit In the CS CJ Series the base unit is recognized as a backplane port CPU Bus Units such as the EtherNet IP Unit are also recognized as nodes on
61. The PLC status flags are enabled when the PLC status is included in the communications data for both the originator and target The data in this table is refreshed when neces sary Normal Target Node Flag Table Layout set to default settings Words n 20 to n 23 Layout set to user settings Words n 16 to n 31 Note Does not correspond to the PLC status Each flag indicates the connection status of the corresponding target node PLC of connections in which the EtherNet IP Unit is the originator The flag corresponding to the target node s tar get ID will be ON when connections are estab lished for all connections with that target node indicate that the PLC is operating Each node address s flag location i e target ID can be changed from the Network Configurator The data in this table is refreshed when neces sary SECTION 7 Message Communications Functions This section describes message communications using FINS messages and explicit messages Ras 2 a4 PP a EE 198 7 2 FINS Message Communications 0 0 00 e eee eee eee 200 7 3 Explicit Message Communications 0 0 00 e eee eee eee 202 7 4 Message Communications Specifications 0 0 20008 203 7 5 Message Communications Error Indications 4 204 7 6 Message Communications Errors 2 00 00 205 197 Overview Section 7 1 7 1 Overview The message communications functions s
62. The class ID is 2F Class ID Address L No of bytes read Service Code Address H Instance ID Note A body format of either 8 bits or 16 bits is possible Response Block 9C Service Code Word data L Word data L Word data H Word data H k A Read data 200 bytes max Parameters Service code command response 1C Hex is specified for commands For responses the highest bit will turn ON and 9C Hex will be returned 266 Receiving Explicit Messages Section 9 2 Important Points Class ID command Always C4 2F The class ID depends on the unit version The class ID is C4 for unit version 2 0 and 2F for unit version 1 0 Instance ID command The memory area that will read the data is specified as shown in the following table Instance ID Hex CPU Unit memory area Word range for read 0000 to 6143 DM D00000 to D32767 WR Woo00 to W511 HR H000 to H1535 EM banks 0 to 18 En_00000 to En_32767 n 0 to 18 Address L Address H command The address of the first word from which to read the data is specified in hexadecimal as shown below Address L The lower 2 digits when the first word address is given in 4 digit hexadecimal Address H The higher 2 digits when the first word address is given in 4 digit hexadecimal No of Read Bytes command The number of bytes of read data is specified in 1 byte 2 digit hexadecimal The range
63. There is no reason to be concerned with these names If the Wizard is not used then names will not be automatically assigned and they must be entered directly into the data link table e Total Size The total number of words in areas 1 and 2 This value is auto matically displayed after the sizes of areas 1 and 2 are entered e Node For an input tag this is the IP address of the node that provides the output For an output tag will be entered automatically e Target Variable The target tag set name For an input tag this is the name of the target set that provides the output For an output tag will be entered automatically e RPI ms The requested packet interval for an input tag For an output tag will be entered automatically The setting procedure is described here along with setting examples m Setting Example A Area 1 memory area Work Area W Area 1 start address 0 Area 1 size 50 words Area 2 memory area DM Area D Area 2 start address 50 Area 2 size 100 words Network Configurator Operations Section 6 2 m Allocations jode Jode jode IP address 192 168 250 1 IP address 192 168 250 2 IP address 192 168 250 3 EtherNet IP Area 1 wo _ wo Wo 50 words 1 j 1 1 wo f 50 words 2 2 2 w100 50 words 3 3 7 3 Area 2 D50 ee eee D50 100 words 1 1 1 D150 f 100 words 2 2 2 D250 f 10
64. all CPU Units will be changed to PROGRAM mode and the parameters will be downloaded Confirm safety for all controlled equipment if the CPU Units are changed to PROGRAM mode The operating mode can be re turned to the previous setting after the parameters have been downloaded The Download with Current mode Button can be clicked to download load the parameters even when one or more CPU Units is in RUN or MON ITOR mode e Display When Even One EtherNet IP Unit Is Revision 1 List of Device that are executing The following devices are not in program mode Product Name Comment pa 1921682501 CJ2B EIP21 amp 1921682502 CJ1W EIP21 Download after changed to Program mode When the Download after changed to Program mode Button is clicked all CPU Units will be changed to PROGRAM mode and the parameters will be downloaded Confirm safety for all controlled equipment if the CPU Units are changed to PROGRAM mode The operating mode can be re turned to the previous setting after the parameters have been downloaded During the download the following progress monitor will be displayed to show the progress of the download Downloading Device Parameter 192 168 250 1 J Downloading Parameter 180 Network Configurator Operations Section 6 2 If the operating mode of one or more CPU Units was changed to download the parameters the CPU Units can be returned to the previous operating mode If the No Button is clicked t
65. ber will be one larger than the control port number 81 Other Parameters Using the Automatic Time Adjustment Tab Page in Edit Parameters Dialog Box Auto Adjust Time Setting Not get the time informa tion from the SNTP server or Get the time information from the SNTP server Section 3 10 Function Specifies whether to set the clock in the CPU Unit to the time on the SNTP server The time can be set only in CPU Units with an EtherNet IP Unit or a built in EtherNet IP port Auto Adjust time Sets the time to access the SNTP server to automatically adjust the CPU Unit clock When the specified time arrives the SNTP server will be accessed and the clock in the CPU Unit will be set to the time on the SNTP server Server Specification Type Specifies whether to use an IP address or a domain name i e host name to specify the SNTP server to use for automatic time adjustment IP Address Sets the IP address of the SNTP server to use for automatic time adjustment This IP address is valid only when the Server Specification Type is set to an IP address Host Name Sets the host name of the SNTP server to use for automatic time adjustment This IP address is valid only when the Server Specification Type is set to a host name Port No Sets the port number to use to connect to the SNTP server for automatic time adjustment It is normally not necessary to change this set
66. command Always C4 2F The class ID depends on the unit version The class ID is C4 for unit version 2 0 and 2F for unit version 1 0 Instance ID command Always 00 Hex Attribute ID Command The read information is specified by the attribute ID The attribute IDs are listed in the following table Attribute ID Hex Contents Attribute value size CPU Unit operating mode 1 word 2 bytes CPU Unit errors 1 word 2 bytes CPU Unit model 22 bytes e CPU Operating Mode when Attribute ID 64 Hex Reads the CPU Unit operating mode e CPU Unit Errors when Attribute ID 65 Hex Reads if there are any fatal or non fatal errors in the CPU Unit e CPU Unit Model when Attribute ID 66 Hex Reads the CPU Unit model Read data response The specified information is returned in order e CPU Unit operating mode attribute ID 64 Hex The CPU Unit operating mode is returned in 1 word 2 byte hexadecimal for mat as follows 0001 Hex PROGRAM mode 0002 Hex MONITOR mode 0004 Hex RUN mode PROGRAM mode MONITOR mode RUN mode 261 Receiving Explicit Messages Section 9 2 Note The codes for the above modes are 1 word 2 byte data and are returned in low byte first For example for PROGRAM mode the code is returned as 01 Hex followed by 00 Hex e CPU Unit Errors when Attribute ID 65 Hex The CPU Unit fatal non fatal error data is returned in 1 word 2 byte hexa decimal format as follows 01 Hex
67. default setting is 4x the packet interval RPI Setting Example Edit All Connections Target Device Connection Name Connection I O Type In Out Target Variable Originator Variable Connection Type RPI Timeout Value A 192 168 250 2 002 default 1 Input Only Tag type h D00002 2Byte D00000 2Byte Multi cast connecti 500 ms RPI x 4 2 When the settings are completed click the OK Button 166 Network Configurator Operations Section 6 2 Connections Settings Editing Individual Connections 1 2 3 The connection settings between the originator and target devices are edited individually Select the Connections Tab and click the New Button The following Edit Connection Dialog Box will be displayed 192 168 250 2 CS1W EIP21 Edit Connection Connection Name Connection 1 0 Type Packet Interval RPI Timeout Value Input from Target Device Consume Variable Produce Variable Connection Type Output to Target Device Produce Variable Consume Variable Connection Type Originator Device Node Address 192 168 250 1 Comment CS1W EIP21 Input Only Tag type 50 0 ims 0 5 1000 0 ms Packet Interval RPI x 4 Multi cast connection Target Device Node Address 192 168 250 2 Comment CS1W EIP21 The following table describes the various settings in the dialog box Setting Function Connection Name Assigns a name to each conne
68. eee eee 84 3 1121 PING Command eiee erea 5 tea eng cee tees da aa ee 84 3 11 2 EtherNet IP Unit or Built in EtherNet IP Port Operation 84 3 11 3 Host Computer Operation 0 00 0 0 e ee eee 84 53 Overview of Initial Setup Procedures Section 3 1 3 1 Overview of Initial Setup Procedures 3 1 1 Procedures Initial Settings 1 2 3 10 Set the unit number and node address with the switches on the front of the EtherNet IP Unit or for the built in EtherNet IP port on the front of the CPU Unit Mount the Unit in the CPU Rack up to 8 Units A maximum of seven EtherNet IP Units can be connected to a CJ2H CPULIL EIP CPU Unit making eight EtherNet IP ports including the built in EtherNet IP port Wire the Ethernet network with twisted pair cable Connect the computer Network Configurator and CX Programmer to the CPU Unit s serial port or the EtherNet IP Unit s Ethernet network Turn ON the PLC s power supply When using a CS1W EIP21 connect the CX Programmer online and cre ate the I O table When using a CJU1W EIP21 create the I O table if nec essary With a CJ2H CPULILI EIP CPU Unit the built in EtherNet IP port is registered in the I O tables by default and cannot be changed Use one of the following methods to set the EtherNet IP Unit s IP address a Using the Unit without setting the IP address e The default IP address is 192 168 250 Node_address b Setting a particular IP addre
69. parameter settings default settings Clear reset the device parameters only after verifying that restarting the Unit will not cause any problems in the sys tem 15 Starting the CX Programmer Start the CX Programmer 16 Reading the Project File Read the project file that was saved with the new settings from the CX Pro grammer 17 Connecting the CX Programmer Online Connect the CX Programmer online to the PLC registered in the project file either via the serial port on the CPU Unit or via an Ethernet interface 18 Downloading the Unit Setup Download the Unit Setup from the CX Programmer to the Unit 29 Design Procedures Downloading Tag Note Data Link Settings 30 Note 19 20 1 Section 2 1 Confirming Unit Setup Use the CX Programmer s verification function to confirm that the settings were downloaded correctly and saved properly in the Unit Closing the CX Programmer Exit the CX Programmer After Unit Setup have been downloaded from the CX Programmer you will be ask if it is ok to restart the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port Restarting is required to enable the new parameters Be sure that it is safe to restart and then restart the Unit or port 2 After downloading and verifying the Unit Setup be sure that the parame 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 1 ters have been correctly saved in the EtherNet IP Unit or built in Ether Net IP port
70. point to point connection in the tag data link s connection settings A multicast connection can send 1 produced tag in 1 packet to multiple con sumers On the other hand a unicast connection sends 1 produced tag indi vidually to each consumer so the number of transmitted packets is the same as the number of consumers Consequently network traffic can be reduced by using multicast connections when sending a single produced tag to multiple consumers When multicast connections are being used use a switching hub equipped with a multicast filter function unless all of the nodes are consumers If a switching hub without a multicast filter function is used the multicast packets will be broadcast to the entire network so unneeded packets will be sent to some consumers and network traffic will increase In order to use multicast connections and send 1 produced tag in 1 packet to multiple consumers the following settings must all be the same the target variable produced tag connection I O type packet interval RPI timeout time and connection type Multicast connection The performance of communications devices is limited to some extent by the limitations of each product s specifications Consequently there are limits to the packet interval RPI settings For details refer to 2 3 Checking Bandwidth Usage and Adjusting the RPI and set an appropriate packet interval RPI Overview of Tag Data Links Section 6 1 Starting and St
71. stopped at the tar get Restart the tag data link com munications with the control bit Configuration 2 Depends on the tar get s specifications Contact the target device s manufac turer Configuration 3 Check whether the tag data link is stopped at the origi nator Restart the tag data link commu nications with the control bit Error code returned from target The RPI was set to a value that exceeds the specifications This error does not occur Check the target s RPI setting specifica tions Set the originators RPI setting to 10 seconds or less Error code generated by origi nator or returned from target Attempted to open more con nections than allowed by the specifications 256 Check the con nection settings number of con nections at the originator and tar get Check the connec tion settings number of connections at the originator and target Check the connec tion specifications for another company s devices Check the connec tion settings number of connections at the originator and target Check the connec tion specifications for another company s devices Error code returned from target The Vendor ID and Product Code did not match when open ing connection This error does not occur Depends on the tar get s specifications Contact the target device s manufac turer Confirm that the tar get device s
72. stops communica tions e lf the Unit is the tar get of the tag data link connection and the PLC status is included in the com munications data the corresponding Target Node PLC Error Flag will be turned ON Replace the CPU Unit Using the LED Indicators and Display for Troubleshooting Errors Related to the CPU Unit Indicator Flashing red 7 segment Section 14 2 The 7 segment display alternates between the node address and error code CPU Unit Fatal Error A fatal error occurred in the CPU Unit Unit operation Flag status e If the Unit is the orig inator of the tag data link connection it stops communica tions e If the Unit is the tar get of the tag data link connection and the PLC status is included in the com munications data the corresponding Target Node PLC Error Flag will be turned ON Countermeasure Eliminate the cause of the error in the CPU Unit The tag data link will restart auto matically when the cause of the error is eliminated Errors Related to the Control Bits Indicator 7 segment Output OFF Error An Output OFF output inhibit condition occurred in the CPU Unit The tag data link s send data will be cleared to 0 in accor dance with the Output OFF settings and data transfer will con tinue with that data Turn OFF the CPU Unit s Output OFF Bit A50015 The tag data lin
73. 0 or retain its previous value With the default setting the output data is cleared to 0 Up to 8 tags can be included in a tag set for each connection In the CJ2B EIP21 built in EtherNet IP port CS1W EIP21 EtherNet IP Unit or CJ1W EIP21 EtherNet IP Unit a total of 256 tag sets can be set as input consume tag sets and output produce tag sets The PLC status can be specified in a tag set to indicate the CPU Unit s operat ing status operating information and error information The connection shows the relationship between the target device s tag set and originator device s tag set In the CJ2B EIP21 built in EtherNet IP port CS1W EIP21 or CJ1W EIP21 EtherNet IP Unit a total of 256 connections can be opened The packet interval is the data I O refresh cycle in the Ethernet circuit when performing tag data links and can be set separately for each connection In the CJ2B EIP21 built in EtherNet IP port CS1W EIP21 or CJ1W EIP21 Eth erNet IP Unit the packet interval ca be set between 0 5 and 10 000 ms in units of 0 5 ms The default setting is 50 ms The maximum number of tag data link connections is 256 connections Unit so set connections within this range Each connection is counted as a single connection whether the connection type is set as a multicast connection or unicast connection point to point connection Each connection s connection type can be set as a multicast connection or unicast connection
74. 00 00 20 e eee eee 313 12 3 Automatic Clock Adjustment Switch 0 0 0 0 eee eee eee ee 316 12 4 Automatic Clock Adjustment Error Processing 0 00 00 c eee eee eee eens 316 SECTION 13 Maintenance and Unit Replacement 319 13 1 Maintenance and Replacement 0 0 eee ences 320 13 2 Simple Backup Function 0 0 c ec eee eens 321 13 3 Using the Backup Tool 230 05 004 he cheek ee ale bee USA ee RG ERA eS alae 324 SECTION 14 Troubleshooting and Error Processing 327 14 1 Checking Status with the Network Configurator 00 00 0000 00 00s 328 14 2 Using the LED Indicators and Display for Troubleshooting 4 335 14 3 Connection Status Codes and Error Processing 0 0 0 e eee eee eee ee 346 14 4 Ector Los PUncton moeg seie 14 88a e VEROT besos bow ee PEA Oe bed oe hese DEGA 352 14 5 Troubleshooting s cy vase SS a Se A ee ee ho eee 356 14 6 Troubleshooting with FINS Response Codes 0 0 0 0 0 cece 359 Appendices A CS CJ series Ethernet Unit Function Comparison 00 0000 c eee eee eee 363 B Ethernet Network Parameters 1 0 2 0 0 eee cee eens 365 C gt PCP Status Transitions sinoi oa feos eee bk Geka O ae pisha ean E Geena ne ea eds am 367 D CIP Message Communications 0 0 0 eee cette eens 369 E FINS Commands Addressed to EtherNet IP Units or Built in EtherNet IP Ports 379 F
75. 1 Node 1 Data Link Normal Operation Flag n 11 bit 01 n 20 bit 01 n 2 bit 01 n 6 bit 01 Normal Target Node PLC Operating PLC Error Flag 2 Flag 2 Flag 2 Node 2 Data Link Normal Operation Flag n 20 bit 02 n 2 bit 02 n 6 bit 02 Programming for Revision 1 and Revision 2 Tag Data Link All Tag Data Links Operating Operating __ Normal Operation Flag n 11 bit 01 n 12 bit 14 PLC Operating PLC Error Flag 1 Flag 1 Node 1 Data Link Normal Operation Flag n 2 bit 01 n 6 bit 01 PLC Operating PLC Error Flag 2 Flag 2 Node 2 Data Link Normal Operation Flag n 2 bit 02 n 6 bit 02 Programming to Detect The following programming can be used to check for errors for each target Errors Example 1 node This programming is used to detect errors only after the data links for all nodes have started normally Programming for Revision 2 or Higher Tag Data Link Normal Target Node Operating Flag 1 Node 1 Error output n 11 bit 01 n 20 bit 01 Normal Target Node Node 1 Flag 1 Error output n 20 bit 01 Normal Target Node Flag 2 C Node 2 Error output n 20 bit 02 Normal Target Node Node 2 Flag 2 Error output n 20 bit 02 Programming to Detect The following programming can be used to detect tag data link errors at the Errors Example 2 local node 194 Ladder Programming with Tag Data Links Section 6 3 Example of Programming to Process Data Programming for Revision 1
76. 1 tag lt 722 words Number of tags per tag set lt 8 The maximum size is 721 words when 7 tags tag set when the tag set includes the tag set includes the PLC status the PLC status Note Input and output variables cannot be combined Number of registrable tags lt 256 Number of registrable tag sets lt 256 Overview of EtherNet IP Unit and Built in EtherNet IP Port Connection information e Target IP address e Target tag set e Originator tag set e Packet interval RPI Tag Set Inputs Tag set name SP1_IN PLC Status Section 1 1 Connection Tag Set Outputs Tag set name SP1_IN PLC Status Tag i Tag ii Data flow Originator device Note Message Communications Unconnected Message Service Target device EtherNet IP In this example a connection is established with the originator s tag list con taining tags a to g inputs which are grouped in a tag set called SP1_IN and the target s tag list containing tags i and ii outputs which are grouped in a tag set called SP1_OUT User specified CIP commands can be sent to devices on the EtherNet IP net work CIP commands such as those for reading and writing data can be sent and their responses received by executing the CMND instruction from the CS CJ series CPU Unit s user program without using a connection EtherNet IP Unit CS CJ series CPU Unit CIP command Ethernet E
77. 100 ms 2 ms and 5 ms Communications System Section 10 1 Node 3 has target connections only with send RPI of 5 ms and 1 ms Node 1 O RPI 1 ms T Node2 lt Nodes O Originator O RP 5ms T T Target Each node s total PPS is calculated as follows e Total PPS of node 1 Unit 1 000 100 ms 1 000 2 ms 1 000 1 ms 10 500 1 000 1 510 pps e Total PPS of node 2 Unit 1 000 100 ms 1 000 2 ms 1 000 5 ms 10 500 200 710 pps 1 000 5 ms 1 000 1 ms 200 1 000 1 200 pps All of the Units are within the allowed Unit bandwidth of 6 000 pps so they can transfer data Total PPS of node 3 Unit 10 1 2 Tag Data Link Delay Time Send Processing Delay In an EtherNet IP network the tag data link packets are sent once each packet interval RPI but several delays occur between the transmission of packets from each node and the arrival of the packets at the destination nodes The following diagram shows the 4 major delay sources Total network delay 1 Send processing delay 2 Cable delays 3 Switching hub delay 4 Receive processing delay Send eal P ran P 4 Receive processing eel nna processing i Data ST Switching hub oO 2 Cable delay 3 Switching hub delay 2 Cable delay The lengths of these delays depend on many factors such as the tag data link connection settings number of connections an
78. 192 168 250 3 RE 192 168 250 20 CS1W EIP21 CS1W EIP21 CS1W EIP21 CJ1W EIP21 ss es 7 E 7 a 100 words Tag data link area with 100 words x 20 Units iii 7 es Checking the Device Bandwidth Usage 10 CS1W EIP21 Units 10 CJ1W EIP21 Units 20 Units total The RPI is 10 ms ethernet default for all connections When the Detail Button is clicked in the Usage of Device Bandwidth Area it is apparent that the percentage of the allowed tag data link bandwidth being used by each device s tag data link Usage of Capacity is 39 67 as shown in the following dialog box 47 Checking Bandwidth Usage and Adjusting the RPI Section 2 3 Changing the Settings 48 Usage of Device Bandwidth Comment Usage of Capac Mbit s without Usage of IP mult P 192 168 250 1 CS1W EIP21 39 67 39 67 4 837 4 837 Mbi 192 168 250 2 CS1W EIP21 39 67 39 67 4 837 4 837 Mbi 192 168 250 3 CS1W EIP21 39 67 39 67 4 837 4 837 Mbi 192 168 250 4 CS1W EIP21 39 67 39 67 4 837 4 837 Mbi 192 168 250 5 CS1W EIP21 39 67 39 67 4 837 4 837 Mbi 192 168 250 6 CS1W EIP21 39 67 39 67 4 837 4 837 Mbi P 192 168 250 7 CS1W EIP21 39 67 39 67 4 837 4 837 Mbi 192 168 250 8 CS1W EIP21 39 67 39 67 4 837 4 837 Mbi 192 168 250 9 CS1W EIP21 39 67 39 67 4 837 4 837 Mbi 192 168 250 10 CS1W EIP21 39 67 39 67 4 837 4 837 Mbi 192 168
79. 3 1 Overview of Initial Setup Procedures 0 00 eee cece eee 54 352 SWIER Setting e ea a cha ee aM ce See Ca a E E Gh EE A ed 56 333 Mounting t0 aPLG 3iced oc eee bud brewers Wiel tae Eee BA SARS RAN cae dede ales 58 3 4 Network Installation y o cer toteen e cece e ene eee 61 3 5 Connecting to the Network 0 0 nea EEA E ER EREE E EERE G 64 3 0 Creating T O Tables criacao a D sce a Ma HE ala he gata ee bos eee ae ok aes A 66 3 7 Setting the Local IP Address 0 0 0 0 cece nee 71 3 8 TCP IP and Link Settings 2 0 ci sain a eee os bea eee ea ees eae a 73 3 9 Tag Data Link Parameters 0 0 cece 78 3 10 Other Parameters csi os to socal Ga pe Reh aa eee ees Sowa kat ee ed aks 80 3 11 Communications Test 0 0 0 detr eo e o e ccc e cnet 84 SECTION 4 Memory Allocations ccc cceccccccecsccceee 87 4 1 Overview of Memory Allocated to the EtherNet IP Unit 0 0 0 88 4 2 CIO Area Allocations meri 82346 poke Shas Se a eee ee ee 90 4 3 DM Area Allocations i a ice penne ab yee Pe A Shee WG Fo WEES Y 103 4 4 UserSettings Area tin g Mov tee av wens Se ee SA a ae eget eee 105 4 5 Auxiliary Area Data ie e cy eTe e Sale es ag Sed Hales belie the de HER dete AS 108 vii viii TABLE OF CONTENTS SECTION 5 Determining IP Addresses ceeceeeeeeeeee II 1 AIP AGIECSSES hints hd ee et tie A Ek PE eh ok PF tect Ait nat TE Din dt Ls oe 112 5 2 IP Ad
80. 4 2 2 Details of the Allocated CIO Area Words User Settings Area Section 4 4 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 32 10 9 7 3 o 33 26_ 25 23 20_ 19 16 35 60 59 58 57 55 54 53 52 51 48 36 u 7 z z s s ez 66 65 6 37 s2 ot 90 ao as a7 se 65 s4 a5 oe 31 80 38 106 105 104 108 100 96 39 ne 115 114 n2 40 138 137 136 135 132 131 130 128 41 154 153 152 151 150 149 148 147 146 144 42 170 169 168 167 164 163 162 160 43 186 185 184 183 182 181 180 179 178 176 44 202 196 192 45 218 212 208 46 224 244 47 248 247 242 241 240 Manipulated Unit operation by Target Node PLC ON The corresponding PLC is oper Operating Flags ating The program is being exe cuted The PLC is not operating Target Node PLC These flags indicate the error status logical OR of fatal and non fatal errors Error Information of the target node PLCs and are valid only when the EtherNet IP Unit is the EtherNet IP Unit to originator The flags are valid only when the corresponding Normal Target CPU Unit Node Flag is ON If the corresponding Normal Target Node Flag is OFF the Target Node PLC Error Flag indicates the previous error status For details on the default settings refer to 4 2 2 Details of the Allocated CIO Area Words 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 F 6 5 4 3 2 1
81. 9 2 e CPU Operating Mode Attribute ID 64 Hex Changes the CPU Unit operating mode The Attribute Values are as follows 0001 Hex PROGRAM mode 0002 Hex MONITOR mode 0004 Hex RUN mode Note The specified code for the above operating modes are 1 word 2 byte data and are specified with the low byte first For example for PRO GRAM mode the code is specified as 01 Hex followed by 00 Hex Ac cordingly the low to high bytes for the above codes are set as high to low bytes in I O memory when setting the codes as data for oper and S of CMND 490 e Clearing CPU Unit Errors when Attribute ID 65 Hex Clears any fatal or non fatal errors in the CPU Unit Sets the error clear code to Attribute Value The error clear codes are listed in the following table Error code Hex FFFE Data cleared Current error clears the highest priority error 4101 to 42FF 0008B Interrupt task error 009A Basic I O error 009B PLC Setup error 02F0 Inner Board non fatal error 0300 to 035F Special I O Unit error OOA0 to 00A1 SYSMAC BUS error 0500 to 055F Special I O Unit settings error 00E7 I O verification error When registered and actual I O tables are different When disconnecting or connecting I O Units 00F7 Battery error 0200 to 020F CS CJ series CPU Bus Unit error last 2 digits are binary code for the Unit No
82. Address Relationship to IP Addresses 56 Note When there are multiple EtherNet IP Units or Ethernet Units connected to the Ethernet network for the FINS communications service the EtherNet IP Units are identified by node addresses Use the node address switches NODE NO to set the node address between 01 and FE hexadecimal 1 to 254 deci mal Do not set a number that has already been set for another node on the same network NODE fam 01 to FE 1 to 254 decimal The left switch sets the sixteens digit most significant digit and the right switch sets the ones digit least significant digit The node address is factory set to 01 Turn OFF the power supply before setting the node address When IP addresses are generated automatically either dynamic or passive the rightmost byte of the host ID of the IP address is set to the same value as the node address Refer to Section 5 Determining IP Addresses If the same node address value cannot be used the IP address table method or the com bined method must be used for address conversion For details refer to SEC TION 5 Determining IP Addresses If the FINS communications service is not being used on the Ethernet net work then it is all right for the same node address to be set on two or more EtherNet IP Units The setting however must be made within a range of 01 to FE If a value outside of this range is set the MS indicator will light red the 7 segment displ
83. Address Device TagSet Total Target RPI IN OUT Link CH Size Link CH Size Name Size Node Variable ms 1921682501 CJ2B EIP21 pur yy w200 100 D00500 200 TagSet31 92 300 s 1921682502 CJi W EIP21 0 wooo 100 D00100 200 TagSeti 192 300 192 168 2501 TagSeti 192 50 0 1921682503 CJi W EIPSt Wo0 100 D00300 200 TasSet2192 300 1921682502 TarSet2192 500 The number of PPS Without a PPSW ith connection Multicast filter Multicast filter IN OUT Output with no overload is marked otal Size If it includes PLC Status data NetworkConfigurator will show the additional 2 bytes as a size 1CH 2bytes FA F2 F3 F4 F5 F F F8 F9 F10 Help Edit Cell Show Prey Show Next hsert Delete Move Down Move Up Datalink Check the Node Node TagSet TagSet TagSet TagSet Wizard table NUM Ready Node List The node for which to edit the data link table is selected from the node list on the left size The following information is displayed e IP Address The IP address of the node e Device The name model number of the device at the node Note The node list will display the node registered in the Network Configurator Nodes cannot be added or deleted from this window 143 Network Configurator Operations Section 6 2 Data Link Table Information Setting Procedure 144 The data link table of the node selected on the left will be displayed on the right Each row specifies word that are allocated for data links for that no
84. Close the Windows Firewall with Advanced Security Dialog Box Name Group 7 When you attempt to connect the CX Programmer or Network Configurator to a PLC on an EtherNet IP net work through an Ethernet port the Windows Security Alert Dialog Box will be displayed 8 Click the Unblock Button 412 EtherNet IP Connections from Windows XP SP2 or Higher or Windows Vista Appendix G An EtherNet IP connection will be accepted from CX Programmer or Network Configurator and EtherNet IP connections will be enabled in the future as well 413 EtherNet IP Connections from Windows XP SP2 or Higher or Windows Vista Appendix G 414 Numerics 7 segment display 20 A Adjust Time field 314 316 alternate DNS server 75 applications precautions xxiv Auto Adjust Time field 314 315 Auto Adjust Time Tab 314 315 automatic clock adjustment Automatic Clock Adjustment Switch 316 errors error codes 316 error log 316 SNTP 316 overview 312 procedure 313 requirements 312 settings 314 specifications 313 Auxiliary Area related data 108 Backup Tool 324 bandwidth usage checking 38 42 relationship to packet interval RPI 272 baud rate 38 76 CJ series 11 12 CS series 10 bits Automatic Clock Adjustment Switch 316 boots recommended models 34 BROADCAST DATA SEND 385 broadcast test command 385 reading results 385 BROADCAST TEST RESULTS READ 385 buffers 365 399 bye command 291
85. Command Specify the IP address table records The number of records specified must be provided The total number of bytes in the IP address table records is calculated as the number of records x 6 bytes record The configuration of the 6 bytes of data in each record is as shown in the following diagram 1 6 bytes FINS node IP address number FINS Node Address Node address for communications via the FINS command hexadecimal IP Address IP address used by TCP IP protocol hexadecimal Precautions e The registered IP address table will not be effective until the PLC or EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port is restarted 391 FINS Commands Addressed to EtherNet IP Units or Built in EtherNet IP Ports Appendix E e An error response will be returned if the IP address conversion method in the system mode settings is set for automatic generation on the FINS UDP Tab Page of the Unit Response Codes Response code Description Normal end echo reply received from the remote node Command too large Command too small The number of records specified does not match the sent data length The number of records is not between 0 and 32 The FINS node address is not between 1 and 126 The IP address is 0 IP address conversion method is set for automatic generation IP ADDRESS WRITE Write the local IP address and the subnet mask in the CPU Bus Unit System Setup Command Block Command IP addr
86. Configurator s Edit Parameters Dialog Box set them individually using these connection num bers 213 FINS TCP Method Section 8 3 FINS TCP Connection Status Word n 24 While a connection with a remote node is established the bit corresponding to the FINS TCP connection status turns ON in the section of the CPU Bus Unit words allocated in the CIO Area The bit turns OFF if the connection is termi nated by a communications error or a FINS command i e FINS TCP CON NECTION REMOTE NODE CHANGE REQUEST 15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00 n 24 Bit 15 corresponds to connection No 16 bit 00 to connection No 1 etc Note The starting word of the FINS TCP Connection Status Area is different in the CS1W ETN21 and CJ1W ETN21 Ethernet Units it is n 23 in the Ethernet Units If a ladder program using FINS TCP communications was created for Ethernet Units and is being reused for EtherNet IP Units and built in Ether Net IP ports change the word starting word address for this area from n 23 to n 24 FINS TCP With FINS TCP FINS node addresses are exchanged immediately after a Communications connection is established This makes it possible to determine the FINS node Procedure addresses to which the 16 connection numbers and to manage them in an internal table Personal computer Ethernet IP Unit Client Server Example Example IP address C IP address S FINS node number A FINS node number B Passive open
87. Connection Type Originator Device Target Device Node Address 192 168 2501 Node Address 192 168 250 2 Comment CS1W EIP21 Comment GJTW EIP21 OK Cancel If the RPI cannot be adjusted to the desired value by the three preceding methods evaluate the network configuration itself and consider taking the following steps e Reduce the number of nodes and number of connections e Split the network Check the bandwidth usage again If the connection settings have been changed click the Detail Button in the Usage of Device Bandwidth Area at the bottom of the Network Configura tion Window and check bandwidth usage according to the instructions in 2 3 4 Checking the Device Bandwidth Usage and Resetting the RPI It is particularly important to check the usage of capacity when an individual connection s RPI setting was changed without using the Set Packet Inter val RPI Button at the bottom of the Usage of Device Bandwidth Dialog Box Run user tests to verify that there are no problems with the new settings 2 3 5 RPI Setting Examples The following examples explain how to calculate the packet intervals RPI in the following network configuration 46 Checking Bandwidth Usage and Adjusting the RPI Example Conditions Section 2 3 Dek Untitled Network Configurator File Edit View Network Device EDS File Tools Option Help Os 2 amp B amp O EtherNet IP 1 E Network Confieurator a a B E
88. DeviceNet Vendor Association just like DeviceNet EtherNet IP is not just a network between controllers it is also used as a field network Since EtherNet IP uses standard Ethernet technology various gen eral purpose Ethernet devices can be used in the network The EtherNet IP Unit and built in EtherNet IP port have the following features The CIP has the following advantages e Destination nodes are specified by a relative path without fixed routing tables e The CIP uses the producer consumer model Nodes in the network are arranged on the same level and it is possible to communicate with required devices whenever it is necessary The consumer node will receive data sent from a producer node when the connection ID in the packet indicates that the node requires the data Since the producer can send the same data with the same characteristics in a multicast either multicast or unicast can be selected the time required for the transfer is fixed and not dependent on the number of con sumer nodes The CIP Common Industrial Protocol is a shared industrial protocol for the OSI application layer The CIP is used in networks such as EtherNet IP Con trolNet and DeviceNet Data can be routed easily between networks that are based on the CIP so a transparent network can be easily configured from the field device level to the host level High speed High capacity Data Exchange through Data Links The EtherNet IP protocol supports
89. Devices 0 eao o ra E a eee ee 191 6 2 17 Displaying Device Status sssuusanunr nurnerr 192 6 3 Ladder Programming with Tag Data Links 00 193 6 3 1 Ladder Programming Related to Tag Data Links 193 6 3 2 Status Flags Related to Tag Data Links 196 131 Overview of Tag Data Links Section 6 1 6 1 Overview of Tag Data Links 6 1 1 Tag Data Links The tag data link function provides cyclic data exchanges in an EtherNet IP network between two PLCs or between a PLC and another device Data is exchanged by specifying mutual tags so the PLC s ladder program is not used for the tag data links Note Standard EtherNet IP implicit communications are used to create the tag data link function in this system Tag Data Link Concepts The tag data link function in an EtherNet IP network can be compared to watching television 1 The remote control originator makes a connection by specifying the de sired television program produced tag to the television target 2 The connected television sends produces the requested television pro gram 3 The consumer receives and views the transmitted program Viewer Television Consumer Remote control Target Originator Pee TV program Producer 56 a Program 1 Produced tag see Program 2 Produced tag Tag Data Link Structure In a tag data link one node opens a communications circuit which is called a co
90. EM File Memory EM 8 9 Download the files Exit the connection The EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port will be restarted when the settings data is transferred to the CPU Bus Unit System Setup Area so that the new settings are read and become effective Verify that it is safe for the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port to restart before transferring the settings data 11 3 2 List of Settings Required for the FTP Server Function Make the following settings for the unit setup when the server function is used CX Programmer Settings Setting conditions tab Login User set when the default CON FIDENTIAL is not used Password User set Port No Rarely required when the default 21 is not used 293 Using the FTP Server Function Section 11 3 11 3 3 FTP Tab The CPU Bus Unit System Setup which is set when using the FTP server function is shown in the CX Programmer s Edit Parameters Dialog Box CJ1W EIP 21 Edit Parameters TCP IP Ethemet FINS UDP FINS TCP FTP Auto Adiust Time Status Area SNMP SNMP Trap C Not Use FTP Use FTP Login Password Port No 0 0 default 21 Set Defaults Cancel m Settings Setting Details Default value Login Set the login name to externally connect to None the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP_ CONFIDENTIAL is port via FTP used Password Set the password to
91. Error Processing Connection status General Additional Status Status hex hex Source of error Error code returned from origi nator Connection could not be estab lished because the buffer was full due to high traffic Handling Section 14 3 Configuration 1 An unexpected network load may have been received Use the Network Configu rator Device Moni tor or the Ethernet Tab Page to check the bandwidth usage and cor rect the load If there are places where broadcast storms occur such as loop con nections in the network connec tion format then correct them Configuration 2 An unexpected net work load may have been received Use the Network Configu rator Device Monitor or the Ethernet Tab Page to check the bandwidth usage and correct the load If there are places where broadcast storms occur such as loop connections in the network con nection format then correct them Configuration 3 Follow the operating specifications for the originator Consult the originator manu facturer Error code returned from target The RPI was set to a value that is below the specifications This error does not occur Depends on the tar get s specifications Contact the target device s manufac turer Set the originators RPI setting to 0 5 ms or greater Error code returned from target The connection timed out Tag data link communications from the
92. FINS TCP method 1 EtherNet IP Unit IP address conversion Automatic generation method dynamic EtherNet IP Unit node number 2 EtherNet IP Unit IP address 192 168 250 2 Target PLC1 Ethernet or EtherNet IP Network number none FINS TCP method CX Programmer s Change PLC Dialog Box Settings for target PLC PLC1 s Change PLC Dialog Box Setting PLC name PLC1 Network classification FinsGateway Network Tab FINS destination Network number 0 Page Node address 2 Frame length 2 000 bytes Response monitor time 2 seconds CX Programmer s FINS TCP Tab Page in Edit Parameters Dialog Box FINS TCP Port Default 9600 IP Router Table None Not set All defaults are used FinsGateway ETN UNIT Setup TCP Nodes Tab Page Ethernet Node Definition Dialog Box Node address 2 IP address 192 168 250 2 Destination port number 9600 Keep alive setting Selected yes 229 Communicating between OMRON PLCs Section 8 6 8 6 Communicating between OMRON PLCs FINS commands can be sent from the CPU Unit of a PLC by using the SEND 090 RECV 098 and CMND 490 instructions SEND 090 Writes I O data from the local node to another node RECV 098 Reads I O data from another node to the local node CMND 490 Issues FINS commands for controlling operations such as send ing and receiving I O memory data to and from other nodes reading informa tion regarding other nodes
93. High Traffic To avoid high traffic from FINS communications the communications load must be kept down to a reasonable level To accomplish this follow the proce dure below 1 Specify the node where FINS frames seem to be concentrated 2 Estimate the total processing time for all of the FINS frames processed at that node For details refer to 10 3 1 Maximum Transmission Delays Ex cluding Delays in the Network 3 Set the timeout value for all of the SEND 090 RECV 098 and CMND 490 FINS commands at all the remote nodes to at least 1 5 times the total processing time for all of the FINS frames 4 As much as possible implement communications traffic testing up to the point of actual system operation If any problem occurs adjust the traffic 5 If acommercially available protocol analyzer can be used then the actual FINS frame processing time i e the time from when a command is re ceived at the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port until a response is sent can be measured under high traffic conditions and the communi cations traffic can be further adjusted as required SECTION 9 Message Communications This section describes message communications using FINS commands sent from the ladder program in the CPU Unit of the PLC 9 1 9 2 Sending Explicit Messages Sending Explicit Messages Using CMND 490 Receiving Explicit Messages 9 1 1 9 2 1 List of PLC Object S
94. I O Tables Section 3 6 iH PLG IO Table NewPLG1 File Edit View Options Help CJ1H CPU65H Inner Board GE 7 0000 Main Rack amp 0000 Rack 01 0000 Rack 02 0000 Rack 03 GJTH GPU65H Offline 2 Right click the PLC slot corresponding to the EtherNet IP Unit and select Add Unit from the menu ih PLG IO Table NewPLG1 File Edit View Options Help 7 CJ1H CPU65H Inner Board E egy 0000 Main Rack P00 0000 Empty Sip 01 0000 Empty SIL assi q 02 0000 Empty SI 7 03 0000 Empty SI 7 04 0000 Empty SI 05 0000 Empty SI SYSMAC BUS Master 7 06 0000 Empty SI 7 07 0000 Empty SI 7 08 0000 Empty SI 7 09 0000 Empty SI tee 0000 Rack 01 Start Special Application ie 0000 Rack 02 0000 Rack 03 CJTH GPU The Select Unit Dialog Box will be displayed 68 Creating I O Tables Section 3 6 Select Unit Unit Basic I O Communications Adapter General Purpose Analog I O Generic Device Motion Controller Position Controller Sensor Temperature Controller FEE A A ee es Cancel 3 Select Communications Adapter EtherNet IP Unit Communications Adapter A GJTW CLK21 Controller Link Unit GJTW CLK21 V1 Controller Link Unit CJIW CLK23 Controller Link Unit GJ1W CORT21 GAN Communication Unit CJIW CRM21 MODE0XCompoNet Master Unit CJIW CRM21 MODE1XCompoNet Master Unit CJIW CRM21 MO
95. I O refresh error The EM Area bank in which the device parameters were set was converted to file memory while the tag data link was operating Tag data is not refreshed if it is assigned to a non existent area Note Recovery is possible for this error Stop using the EM Area bank in which the device parameters were set as file mem ory or correct the device parameters 337 Using the LED Indicators and Display for Troubleshooting Indicator Flashing red 7 segment CPU Unit ser vice monitor ing error Servicing from the CPU Unit was not com pleted within the fixed interval The monitoring time is normally 11s Unit operation Flag status e If the Unit is the orig inator of the tag data link connection it stops communica tions e f the Unit is the tar get of the tag data link connection and the PLC status is included in the com munications data the corresponding Target Node PLC Error Flag will be turned ON Note Recovery is possible for this error When operation is restored tag data link startup processing will be performed and opera tions will return to normal Section 14 2 Countermeasure Check and correct the CPU Unit s operating environ ment Flashing red 338 CPU Unit watchdog timer error An error occurred in the CPU Unit e If the Unit is the orig inator of the tag data link connection it
96. IP the Internet layer and a FINS node address for FINS the application layer are used for the remote device Also 9600 is used as the default setting for the local UDP or TCP port number i e the transport layer for identifying the application layer i e the FINS communications service Another number can be set for the FINS UDP port from the Setup Tab Page in the Unit Setup For details on pairing FINS node addresses with IP addresses and UDP TCP port numbers refer to 5 2 IP Addresses in FINS Communications Node Number TCP TCP Port No Application Layer UDP UDP Port No Transport Layer IP Address Ethernet Address Internet Layer Ethernet Physical Layer The FINS communications service is a communications method based on UDP IP and it is supported by most OMRON Ethernet related products In this manual it is called the FINS UDP method In addition to supporting the FINS UDP method the CJU2H CPULILI EIP CS1W EIP21 and CJ1W EIP21 support FINS communications using TCP IP In this manual this is called the FINS TCP method Overview of FINS Communications Section 8 1 8 1 2 Using the FINS UDP and FINS TCP Methods It is recommended that FINS UDP and FINS TCP be used as follows e When remote devices do not support the FINS TCP method Use the FINS UDP method for FINS communications with those devices e When FINS nodes are connected on the same Et
97. IP Unit or built in Ether Net IP port Case 1 The Unit will continue sending requests to the BOOTP server until there is a response In the meantime the Unit will be offline and unable to communi cate Errors will be returned to all com munications requests Data exchanges refreshing will con tinue with the CPU Unit Case 2 The Unit will operate with the default IP address 192 168 250 node_ address The Unit Error Occurred Flag n 10 bit 00 Network Error Occurred Flag n 10 bit 01 and BOOTP Server Error Flag n 14 bit 10 will go ON Perform one of the following e Correct the BOOTP server settings e Check the com munications path EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port cable connec tions hubs rout ers and servers and correct any problems An error occurred in communica tions with the STNP server The SNTP Server Error Flag n 14 bit 11 will turn ON Perform one of the following e Correct the SNTP server settings e Check the com munications path EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port cable connec tions hubs rout ers and servers and correct any problems Using the LED Indicators and Display for Troubleshooting Indicator 7 segment Unit operation Flag status Section 14 2 Countermeasure E3 Server Con An error 03C4 Perform one of the nection Error occurred in De _
98. Internet The changes to the Windows Firewall settings described in this document enable EtherNet IP connections to be used by the CX Programmer If the same computer is being used on a company net work or other network confirm that the changes will not create security problems before proceeding with the changes The changes described in this document are required only when you connect using Ether Net IP through an Ethernet port No changes are necessary if you are connecting through any other port such as a USB port Changing Windows Firewall Settings Windows XP 1 When you attempt to connect the CX Programmer or Network Configurator to a PLC on an EtherNet IP net work through an Ethernet port the Windows Security Alert Dialog Box will be displayed 2 Click the Unblock Button Do you want to keep blocking this program Name Main executable of CX Programmer lt Publisher OMRON Corporation Keep Blocking f Unblock J AskMeLater An EtherNet IP connection will be accepted from CX Programmer or Network Configurator and EtherNet IP connections will be enabled in the future as well Windows Vista Use the following procedure to change the settings before attempting to connect from the CX Programmer or Network Configurator The User Account Control Dialog Box may be displayed during this procedure If it appears click the Continue Button and continue with the procedure 411 EtherNet IP Connections from Win
99. LE Unit 0 Unit 1 Unit 5 Unit 6 Node 1 Node 2 Node 5 Node 10 PLC 1 Routing Table Local network table Relay network table No Local CPU Bus End Relay Relay network Unit No No network network node 1 010 05 1 020 010 004 2 2 030 010 005 3 3 PLC 2 Routing Table Local network table Relay network table Local CPU Bus End Relay Relay No network Unit No No network network node 1 010 03 1 030 010 005 2 020 02 2 3 3 PLC 3 Routing Table Local network table Relay network table Local CPU Bus End Relay Relay 0 1 network Unit No No network network node 1 010 04 1 020 010 004 2 030 07 2 3 3 PLC 4 Routing Table Local network table Relay network table No Local CPU Bus End Relay Relay network Unit No No network network node 1 020 00 1 010 020 003 2 2 030 020 003 3 3 PLC 5 Routing Table Local network table Relay network table N Local CPU Bus End Relay Relay network Unit No No network network node 1 020 01 1 010 020 003 2 2 030 020 003 3 3 PLC 6 Routing Table Local network table Relay network table N Local CPU Bus End Relay Relay network Unit No No network network node 1 030 05 1 010 030 015 2 2 020 030 015 3 3 PLC 7 Routing Table Loc
100. Mbit s without Mbi Mbi Mbi Mbi Mbi Mbi Mbi Mbi Mbi Mbi Mbi Mbi Mbi Mbi Mbi Mbi Mbi Mbi Mbi Mbi 6 897 7 125 4 837 7 125 4 837 7 125 4 837 7 125 4 837 7 125 4 837 7 125 4 837 7 125 4 837 7 125 4 837 7 125 4 837 7 125 4 837 7 125 4 837 7 125 4 837 7 125 4 837 7 125 4 837 7 125 4 837 7 125 4 837 7 125 4 837 7 125 4 837 7 125 7 125 7 125 Usage of IP mult Orr ee ee E a eg en ee ee ee ere ery Set Packet Interval API Total usage of IP multicast addresses Network Total of Max Mbit s 21 9 478Mbit s In this case the tag data link bandwidth being used by device 192 168 250 20 Usage of Capacity also increases from 39 67 to 56 33 51 Checking Bandwidth Usage and Adjusting the RPI Section 2 3 52 SECTION 3 Installation and Initial Setup This section explains how to install and make the initial settings required for operation of the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port 3 1 Overview of Initial Setup Procedures 0 000 000 00008 54 3 1 1 Procedures i 5 2 sd2 girim soe a la 20 wageadia PE EEA 54 3 2 Switch Settings sci ee ieee ig ea ye ea EG 56 3 2 1 CS series EtherNet IP Units 0 000 000 56 3 2 2 CJ series EtherNet IP Units and CJ2 Built in EtherNet IP Port 57 3 3 Mounting toaPLC 2 ee eee 58 3 3 1 Mounting to a CS series
101. Memory Card or EM File Memory as the remote file name If a local file name is specified the file information is stored in the specified file in the host computer rename CURRENT FILE NAME NEW FILE NAME Changes the specified current file name to the specified new file name rename can be used only to change the file name It cannot be used to move the file to a different directory 297 Using FTP Commands mkdir Format Function rmdir Format Function pwd Format Function cd Format Function cdup Format Function 298 Section 11 5 mkdir DIRECTORY NAME Creates a directory of the specified name at the remote host Memory Card or EM File Memory An error will occur if a file or directory of the same name already exists in the working directory rmdir DIRECTORY NAME Deletes the directory of the specified name from the remote host Memory Card or EM File Memory The directory must be empty to delete it An error will occur if the specified directory does not exist or is empty pwd Displays the remote host s Ethernet Unit current work directory cd directory_name Changes the remote host Ethernet Unit work directory to the specified remote directory The files in the Memory Card are contained in the MEMCARD directory under the root directory The files in EM File Memory are contained in the EM directory under the root directory The root directory is t
102. Network Configurator The EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port will restart automatically when the device parameters are downloaded to the Unit from the Net work Configurator The Unit must restart in order to enable the parameter Design Procedures Section 2 1 settings Download the device parameters only after verifying that restart ing the Unit will not cause any problems in the system 2 After the device parameters have been downloaded compare the param eters and verify that the saved parameters are correct 3 Before operating the actual system always verify that the devices in the network are operating as expected in the system design Actual System 29 Operating the Actual System Operation Start operating the system 2 1 2 Modifying an Established EtherNet IP System This section describes how to change an EtherNet IP system after the system has started operating Uploading and Saving 1 Starting the Network Configurator and Connecting to the Network the System s Network Start the Network Configurator and connect it to the network via the CPU Configuration Unit s serial port or an Ethernet interface Refer to 6 2 1 Starting the Network Configurator and 6 2 7 Connecting the Network Configurator to the Network 2 Uploading the Network Configuration Upload the network information to collect the current network configura tion Refer to 6 2 9 Uploading Tag Data Link Parameters 3 Saving th
103. No battery 1 Battery installed CPU status 0 Normal 1 CPU standby waiting for SYSMAC Bus Remote O or other event e Operating mode Returns the operating mode of the CPU Unit in 1 byte 2 digit hexadecimal 0001 Hex PROGRAM mode 0002 Hex MONITOR mode 0004 Hex RUN mode e Fatal error information Returns the fatal error information for the CPU Unit in 2 bytes low to high 15 14131211109 8 765 43 21 0 1 System error FALS 1 Cycle time over 1 Program error 1 I O setting error 1 No of I O points exceeded 1 Inner Board fatal error 1 Number duplicate use error 1 I O Bus error 1 Memory error e Non fatal error information Returns the non fatal error information for the CPU Unit in 2 bytes low to high 15 14131211109 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 0 1 Special I O Unit error Unspecified reserved for system use 1 CPU Bus settings error 1 Battery error 1 SYSMAC BUS error 1 Special I O Unit 1 CS1 series CPU Bus Unit error 1 Inner Board error 1 I O verification error 1 PLC system error 1 Unspecified reserved for system use 1 Basic I O Unit error 1 Interrupt task error 1 Unspecified reserved for system use 1 System error FAL 265 Receiving Explicit Messages Section 9 2 e Message Exists Does Not Exist When the MSG instruction is executed by the CPU Unit the bit corresponding to the message number will turn ON and be returned in 2 bytes from low to high bytes 15 876
104. PLC 2 0 eee eee 58 3 3 2 Mounting to a CJ series PLC 00 ee eee 58 3 3 3 Mounting 2 c 05 ena be bee ts bee Ee oe eee es 59 3 3 4 Handling Precautions 0 0 0 eee eee eee eee 60 3 4 Network Installation eni i e ee eee 61 3 4 1 Basic Installation Precautions 0000 5 61 3 4 2 Recommended Products 0 00 cece eee eee 61 3 4 3 Precautions 3 23 4 Se ie a tA as Dele eee nee os 61 3 4 4 Using Contact Outputs Common to All Units 63 3 5 Connecting to the Network 2 0 0 eee ee eee 64 3 5 1 Ethernet Connectors 00 0 0 02 ee eee eee 64 3 5 2 Connecting the Cable 0 0 0 0 eee eee eee 64 3 6 Creating VO Tables inis reres wae ch eee ead ie ws 66 3 6 1 I O Table Overview 0 00 eee eee 66 3 6 2 Connecting Programming Devices to the PLC 66 3 6 3 Procedure for Creating I O Tables 66 3 7 Setting the Local IP Address 0 0 ee eee 71 3 8 TCP IP and Link Settings 0 0 0 ee eee 13 3 8 1 Setting Procedure with the CX Programmer 73 3 8 2 Making TCP IP Settings with the Network Configurator 76 3 9 Tag Data Link Parameters 00 0 0 e eee eee eee 78 3 9 1 Network Configurator Setting Procedure 78 3 10 Other Parameters ict cs noirin Bd oe ao wale esas eyes eae eS 80 3 11 Communications Test 0 0 0
105. Section 1 2 EtherNet IP Unit and Built in EtherNet IP Port Specifications CJ2 CPU Built in EtherNet IP Port Item Specifications Model number CJ2H CPULIL EIP Type 100Base TX See note Unit classification CJ2 CPU Unit built in port CJ2 CPU Bus Unit CPU Unit words used Allocated CIO Area words CPU Bus Unit words 25 words Unit one unit number s words These words contain control bits and flags the target node PLC s operating and error information Unit status communications status registered normal target node infor mation and FINS TCP connection status Allocated DM Area words CPU Bus Unit words 100 words Unit one unit number s words These words contain the IP address display setting area User set area Any usable data area words Target node PLC s operating and error information and registered normal target node information CPU Bus Unit Sys tem Setup Not used Non volatile memory for the CJ2 built in EtherNet IP port The following settings are stored in the non volatile memory for the built in EtherNet IP port Note Unlike the regular Ethernet Units the CPU Bus Unit Setup Area in the CPU Unit is not used for these settings 1 Unit Setup communications settings for the built in EtherNet IP port such as the IP address DNS server settings host name baud rate FINS UDP settings and FINS TCP settings 2 Ta
106. Set Dialog Box Click the OK Button at the bottom of the Edit Device Parameters Dialog Box With a CJ2H CPU6LI EIP CPU Unit network symbols can be created on the CX Programmer and then imported into the Network Configurator to select members of the tag sets The procedure up to importing symbols into the Net work Configurator and creating tag sets is shown here When multiple copies of the CX Programmer are running at the same time it is possible to import only from the CX Programmer project that was started Network Configurator Operations Section 6 2 Creating Global Symbols Importing Symbols to the Network Configurator 1 2 3 first If the global symbols that are to be imported are stored in multiple CX Programmer project files the projects must be started one by one to import the symbols Create global symbol with the Global Symbol Editor of the CX Programmer and select Input or Output for the network variable properties Safe the project when you are finished Any global symbols with Input or Output set for the network variable property will be imported when the import procedure is performed from the Edit Device Parameters Dialog Box 2 l e x Deh amp SR MES SM Ae amp W Si E fea Be a DARA g E BB Jx Name Data Type Address Value Net Variable Rack Locati Usage Comment a NewProject PEM WORD A465 Work EM4 Area Parameter f NewPLC1 CJ2H
107. Size error N03 hData Not exist 5 D00000 Ok Update 334 Using the LED Indicators and Display for Troubleshooting Section 14 2 Ethernet Information Tab The Ethernet Information Tab Page Page shows the communications status at the communications driver level The error counter information can be used to confirm whether communications problems have occurred The tag data link information can be used to confirm characteristics such as the bandwidth usage pps Monitor Device Status 1 Status 2 Controller Error History General Error History Ethernet Information Connection Tag Status Speed 100MBps Full Duplex MAG Address Octets Unicast Packets Non Unicast Packets Discards Errors Error Gounter Alignment Errors Excessive Collisions Carrier Sense Errors Frame Too Lone Tag Data Link Bandwidth Average of TxRx Packets Average of Rx Packets Average of Tx Packets Receive Multicast Packets Link OFF Errors Clear Information 00 00 04 38 40 72 96246 534 718 Collection s Start Time Send Octets Unicast Packets Non Unicast Packets 0 Discards 0 Errors FCS Errors Maximum Maximum Maximum 2008 05 23 11 44 16 000 Close 14 2 Using the LED Indicators and Display for Troubleshooting 14 2 1 Errors Occurring at the EtherNet IP Unit or Built in EtherNet IP Port Errors Related to CPU Unit Data Exchange Indicator
108. Tab Page e If the command data is addressed to an Ethernet Unit a FINS response will be sent to the source UDP port number e If the command data is for any other Unit such as the CPU Unit a FINS response will be sent to the UDP port number set as the FINS UDP port number 119 IP Addresses in FINS Communications Section 5 2 CJ1W EIP21 Edit Parameters TCP IP Ethemet FINS UDP FINS TCP FTP AutoAdjust Time Status Area SNMP SNMP Trap FINS UDP Port Default 9600 User defined Conversion IP Address Table Destination Node Destination IP Addres Auto dynamic C Auto Static Combined C IP address table Destination IP add T Destination IP is changed dynamically C Destination IP is Not changed dynamically C ETN11 compatible mode Set Defaults Cancel Note If the ETN11 compatible mode is used the internal table will retain the same content from when it was created after the EtherNet IP Unit was turned ON or restarted This feature provides protection from access via FINS UDP from computers that dynamically change their IP address FINS TCP Communications Method Pairing in the FINS TCP Method Note Internal Processing 1 2 3 120 With the FINS TCP method communications are first established for each connection and then remote FINS node addresses are mutually converted See note After the FINS node address is conv
109. _ server Function Connects the FTP server Normally when the FTP client is booted the FTP server IP address is specified to execute this command automatically 296 Using FTP Commands user Format Function Is Format Function Q Format Function rename Format Function Section 11 5 user user name Specifies the user name Specify the FTP login name set in the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port system setup The default FTP login name is CONFIDENTIAL If a non default login name is used it must be followed by the password In this case enter the FTP password set in the system setup The user name is automatically requested immediately after connection to the FTP server ls 1 REMOTE FILE NAME local_file_name Displays the remote host Memory Card or EM File Memory file names Set the switch I to display not only the file names but the creation date and size as well If the switch is not set only the file names will be displayed You can specify a file name in the Memory Card or EM File Memory if desired If a local file name is specified the file information will be stored in the speci fied file in the host computer dir REMOTE FILE NAME local_file_name Displays the file names date created and size of the files in the remote host Memory Card or EM File Memory It displays the same information as com mand Is I Specify a file name in the
110. a connection gets Originator Opens the connection Target Has the connection opened Packet interval RPI 0 5 to 10 000 ms in 0 5 ms units The packet interval can be set separately for each connection 6 1 3 Overview of Operation Setting and Downloading Tag Data Link Parameters Set the following tag data link parameters in the Network Configurator and download the parameters to all devices in the EtherNet IP network The fol lowing settings must be made in order to use the tag data link functions in CJ2B EIP21 built in EtherNet IP port on CJ2 CPU Unit CS1W EIP21 and CJ1W EIP21 EtherNet IP Units Allocating Tag Sets Allocate input consume tags and output produce tags in the CPU Unit s Setting Tags in the Tag memory as memory areas for the tag data links In the CJU2B EIP21 built in Set EtherNet IP port CS1W EIP21 EtherNet IP Unit or CJ1W EIP21 EtherNet IP Units a total of 256 tag sets can be created 133 Overview of Tag Data Links Setting Tag Sets Setting Connections Setting the Packet Interval RPI Counting the Number of Connections Using Multicast and Unicast Communications Note 134 Section 6 1 With a CJ2H CPU6L EIP CPU Unit a symbol table can be created with the CX Programmer and then imported into the Network Configurator to allocate tags When outputs are inhibited shut off in the CPU Unit the output data of out put produce tags can be either cleared to
111. all devices to set the parameter e OK e Downloading Individually to Particular Devices Select the icon of the EtherNet IP Unit to which you want to download To select multiple nodes press and hold the Shift Key while selecting addi tional icons In the following example 2 nodes are selected 192 168 250 1 and 192 168 250 2 After selecting the icons click the right mouse button over the icon to dis play the pop up menu and select Parameter Download EtherNet 1P_1 Edit 68 250 4 Z Monitor 5E W EIP21 tal Open Uo Reset A tal Save as Upload Register to other Device diag Download Verify External Data d a Cut Ra lam The following dialog box will be displayed Network Configurator 1 Downloading parameters to selected devices will start e OK 3 Click the Yes Button to download the tag data link parameters to the Eth erNet IP Unit The following dialog box will be displayed if any of the CPU Units is not in PROGRAM mode e Display When All EtherNet IP Units and Built in EtherNet IP Ports are Revision 2 or Higher 179 Network Configurator Operations Section 6 2 List of Device that are executing The following devices are not in program made Product Name Comment amp 1921682501 CJ2B EIP21 E4 1921682502 CJ1W EIP21 0J2 Download after changed to Program mode Download with Current mode j If the Download after changed to Program mode Button is clicked
112. area words Target node PLC s operating and error information and registered normal target node information CPU Bus Unit Sys tem Setup Not used Non volatile memory within Ether Net IP Unit See note The following settings are stored in the EtherNet IP Unit s non volatile memory Note Unlike the regular Ethernet Units the CPU Bus Unit Setup Area in the CPU Unit is not used for these settings 1 Unit Setup communications settings for the EtherNet IP Unit such as the IP ad dress DNS server settings host name baud rate FINS UDP settings and FINS TCP settings 2 Tag data link settings device parameters Media access method Transfer specifica CSMA CD tions Modulation method Baseband Transmission paths Star form Baud rate 100 Mbit s 100Base TX Transmission media Shielded twisted pair STP cable Categories 100 Q at 5 5e Transmission dis tance 100 m distance between hub and node Number of cascade connections There is no limitation when a switching hub is used Current consumption Unit 410 mA max at 5 V DC Weight 94 g max Dimensions 31 x 90 x 65 mm W x H x D Other general specifications Other specifications conform to the general specifications of the CJ series Note If tag data links are being used use 100Base TX Otherwise 10Base T can be used but this is not recommended 11
113. be filtered by using a switching hub that sup ports IGMP snooping 7 The EtherNet IP Unit uses the TCP UDP port numbers shown in the fol lowing table Service Protocol Port number Remarks Tag data links UDP 2222 Fixed value Class 3 UCMM TCP UDP 44818 DNS UDP 53 FINS UDP service UDP 9600 Port numbers in the Unit FINS TCP service TCP 9600 Setup can be changed with the CX Programmer FTP TCP 20 21 SNTP UDP 123 SNMP UDP 161 SNMP trap UDP 162 8 Network symbols can be used only with a CJ2H CPU6L EIP CPU Unit 1 2 4 Dimensions CS1W EIP21 a CS MS wy wey Aa Od rs PURO UNIT pd No PA rw oo T er x16 EtherNet IP 130 mm 192 168 250 1 SUBNET MASK 255 255 255 0 100BASE TX 10BASE T LE 101 mm 14 EtherNet IP Unit and Built in EtherNet IP Port Specifications Section 1 2 CJ1W EIP21 65 mm 90 mm IP ADDRESS 192 168 250 1 SUBNET MASK 255 255 255 0 100BASE TX 10BASE T 2 7mm omron SYSMAC CPU64 EIP PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER OPEN ae Y EtherNet IP PERIPHERAL 90 mm PORT 100BASE TX 10BASE T ve
114. being written to EEPROM the error log may be corrupted When the Unit starts it performs a checksum test on the error log data read from EEPROM to detect corrupted data 14 4 3 FINS Commands for Error Logs The following FINS commands can be sent to the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port to read or clear the error log Command code Function name ERROR LOG READ ERROR LOG CLEAR For details refer to Appendix E FINS Commands Addressed to EtherNet IP Units or Built in EtherNet IP Ports 352 Error Log Function Section 14 4 14 4 4 Error Log Error Codes Error CPU Unit watchdog timer error Detail code First byte 00 hex Second byte 00 hex Saved in EEPROM Yes CPU Unit service monitoring error Monitoring time ms Yes Other CPU error Bit D11 Unit not in Registered I O Tables Other bits are reserved for system use Yes I O bus error 00 hex 00 hex Yes CPU Unit initialization error 00 hex 00 hex Yes Event timed out MRC main command SRC subcommand Yes CPU Unit memory error 01 hex Read error 02 hex Write error 03 hex Routing tables 50 hex CPU Bus Unit Area CIO or DM Yes CPU Unit fatal error 00 hex 00 hex Tag database error 00 hex 00 hex Resend count exceeded send failed Node address setting error Send failed Remote node not in network send fail
115. command however are not necessarily the settings actually used for operation The settings that are actually used for operation can be confirmed using CONTROLLER DATA READ page 380 and ADDRESS INFORMATION READ page 402 This command is supported for CJ series EtherNet IP Units only Command Block 27 67 Command code Response Block Command Response Number of IP address Subnet mask code code addresses FINS node number Parameters Number of Addresses Response The number of sets of FINS node addresses IP addresses and subnet masks being returned The EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port is always 0001 1 decimal FINS Node Address Response Node address set on the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port hexadecimal 403 FINS Commands Addressed to EtherNet IP Units or Built in EtherNet IP Ports Appendix E IP Address Response The local IP address set in the CPU Bus Unit System Setup for the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port is returned in order starting from the leftmost bytes in hexadecimal If the local IP address set in the allocated words in the DM Area is enabled 0 0 0 0 is returned Subnet Mask Response The subnet mask set in the CPU Bus Unit System Setup for the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port is returned in order starting from the leftmost bytes in hexadecimal Response Codes 0000 Normal end 1001 Command too large EXPLICIT MES
116. control bit operation starts CIO Area Allocations Section 4 2 Error Log Stored Manipulated Unit operation Indicates that an error record is registered in the error log Indicates that no error records are registered in the error log Also turned OFF when an error log clear request is received Communications Word n 12 contains status flags related to the tag data links as shown in the Status 1 following diagram EtherNet IP Unit to CPU Unit n 12 n 12 All Tag Data Links Operating Tag Data Links Operating Verification Error Manipulated Verification Error Tag Data Link Error Invalid Communications Parameter Tag Refresh Error Tag Database Error Unit operation Indicates that the information registered for a target node in the tag data link parameters is different from the actual node information Main causes e The specified target does not exist e The variable name does not match e The connection size is differ ent e Connection resources are insufficient Indicates that a verification error has not occurred Also turned OFF when a verifica tion error is cleared Not used Tag Data Link Error Indicates that there were two or more errors in a connection as an originator This status does not indicate the following errors e Connection as a target e Connection timeout due to a Link OFF Error with the switc
117. cycle time Parallel processing with syn chronous memory access One CPU Unit cycle time Parallel processing with asyn chronous memory access 0 2 ms peripheral servicing time 1 ms max for peripheral servicing of each Special I O Unit CPU Bus Unit peripheral port RS 232C port and Inner Board Note CJ2 CPU Units support only Normal Mode For details refer to the CPU Unit s Operation Manual The following table shows the CPU Bus Unit service processing time which depends on the CPU Unit s CPU processing mode setting CPU execution mode Processing time details Normal Mode See note 4 of CPU Unit cycle time 10 for CJ2 CPU Units Priority peripheral servicing EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port is given prior ity Time slice peripheral servicing execution time EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port is not given priority Set peripheral servicing time Default 4 of CPU Unit cycle time Parallel processing with syn 4 of CPU Unit cycle time chronous memory access Parallel processing with asyn chronous memory access 1 ms max Note CJ2 CPU Units support only Normal Mode For details refer to the CPU Unit s Operation Manual Depending on the actual operating environment the transmission time may be longer than the one calculated with the equations given here The following factors can cause longer transmission times other traf
118. data from the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port Model number version IP address subnet mask FINS UDP port number mode settings Ethernet address Command Block 05 01 y Command code Response Block Command Response Model number Version IP address Subnet FINS UDP Mode Ethernet address code code mask port number setting Model number Version Response The model number and version of the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port are returned as ASCII char acters occupying 20 bytes each i e 20 characters each If all bytes are not used the remaining bytes will be all spaces ASCII 20 Hex Example Model CS1W EIP21 CJ1W EIP21 or CJ2B EIP21 Example Version V2 00 By convention the model number of the built in EtherNet IP ports on a CJ2H CPULILI EIP CPU Unit is CJ2B EIP21 IP Address Subnet Mask Response The IP address and subnet mask of the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port are returned as 4 bytes each FINS UDP Port Number Response The UDP port number of the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port for FINS is returned as 2 bytes 380 FINS Commands Addressed to EtherNet IP Units or Built in EtherNet IP Ports Appendix E Mode Setting Response The mode setting in the system setup is returned 15 14 13 12 1110 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 L Bit 1 Broadcast setting Bits 2 and 3 IP address conversion method Bit 4 UDP port number setting for FINS
119. details refer to 3 8 TCP IP and Link Settings CJ1W EIP21 Edit Parameters TCP IP Ethemet FINS UDP FINS TCP FTP Auto Adjust Time Status Area SNMP SNMP Trap IP Address Not use DNS Use the following address C Use DNS a IP Address Q isd 158 1 1 Primary DNS Server 1 225 255 0 eisista Secondary DNS Server Default Gateway 0 0 0 0 Domain Name C Get IP address from the BOOTP server The BOOTP setting is valid only for next unit IP Router Table restart power restoration Then the BOOTP setting will be cleared The obtained IP address will be automatically IP Address Gateway Address Insert saved as system setting in the unit Broadcast All 4 3BSD All0 4 2BSD Set Defaults TCP IP and Link Settings Section 3 8 If the IP address is set in the TCP IP Tab Page that IP address setting will be displayed in the IP Address Display Setting Area words m 98 and m 99 in the DM Area words allocated to the Unit port 3 8 TCP IP and Link Settings This section describes the TCP IP related settings such as the local IP address and subnet mask for the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port Use the CX Programmer to make these settings The settings are stored in non volatile memory in the Unit Note Unlike the Ethernet Units the TCP IP settings of the EtherNet IP Unit and built in EtherNet IP port are not stored in the CPU Unit s CPU Bus Unit Sy
120. external factor affecting the PLC operation Not doing so may result in serious accidents e Emergency stop circuits interlock circuits limit circuits and similar safety measures must be provided in external control circuits e The PLC will turn OFF all outputs when its self diagnosis function detects any error or when a severe failure alarm FALS instruction is executed As a countermeasure for such errors external safety measures must be provided to ensure safety in the system e The PLC outputs may remain ON or OFF due to deposits on or burning of the output relays or destruction of the output transistors As a counter measure for such problems external safety measures must be provided to ensure safety in the system e When the 24 V DC output service power supply to the PLC is over loaded or short circuited the voltage may drop and result in the outputs being turned OFF As a countermeasure for such problems external safety measures must be provided to ensure safety in the system Execute online editing only after confirming that no adverse effects will be caused by extending the cycle time Otherwise the input signals may not be readable e Emergency stop circuits interlock circuits limit circuits and similar safety measures must be provided in external control circuits Fail safe measures must be taken by the customer to ensure safety in the event of incorrect missing or abnormal signals caused by broken signal line
121. file to the remote host Memory Card or EM File Memory A destination file name can be used to specify the name the file is stored under in the Memory Card or EM File Memory Any existing file with the same name in the remote host Memory Card or EM File Memory will be overwritten by the contents of the transferred file If an error occurs during file transfer the file being transferred will be deleted and the transmission will end in an error mput FILE NAME Allows the use of a wildcard character to transfer multiple local files to the remote host Memory Card or EM File Memory 299 Using FTP Commands Section 11 5 Any existing file with the same name in the remote host Memory Card or EM File Memory will be overwritten by the contents of the transferred file If an error occurs during file transfer the file being transferred will be deleted and the transmission of that file will end in an error However mput execution will continue and remaining files will be transferred delete Format delete FILE NAME Function Deletes the specified remote file from the Memory Card or EM File Memory mdelete Format mdelete FILE NAME Function Allows the use of a wildcard character to delete multiple remote files from the Memory Card or EM File Memory close Format close Function Disconnects the FTP server of the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port bye Format bye Function Ends the FTP client quit Forma
122. following transmission to tails e Correct the the SNMP trap 07xx SNMP trap set tings e Check the com munications path EtherNet IP Unit or built in Ether Net IP port cable connections hubs routers and servers and cor rect any prob lems Lit red FO IP Address The IP address The Unit will be 0211 Check the IP Duplication of the EtherNet offline and unable to addresses set on IP Unit or built in Communicate Errors other nodes EtherNet IP port will be returned to all Restart the Ether is the same as communications Net IP Unit or built the IP address requests in EtherNet IP port set for another e Data exchanges after correcting the node refreshing will con IP address settings tinue with the CPU to eliminate dupli Unit cations The Unit Error Occurred Flag n 10 bit 00 Network Error Occurred Flag n 10 bit 01 and IP Address Duplication Error Flag n 10 bit 06 will go ON Flashing F3 Address mis The target IP e Operation will con Check the IP red match address conver tinue with the set IP address and the sion method is address as the local Node Address Set set to Automatic generation but the last byte of the local IP address does not match the value set on the Node Address Setting Switch IP address The Address Mis match Flag n 14 bit 14 will turn ON ting Switch setting 345 Connection Status Codes and Error Processing
123. hex Status Name Invalid attribute value list Appendix D Description of Status The service is returning the list of attributes supplied with status information for those attributes that were invalid Embedded service error An embedded service resulted in an error Vendor specific error A vendor specific error has been encountered The Additional Code Field of the Error Response defines the particular error encountered Use of this Gen eral Error Code should only be performed when none of the Error Codes pre sented in this table or within an Object Class definition accurately reflect the error Invalid parameter A parameter associated with the request was invalid This code is used when a parameter does not meet the requirements of this specification and or the requirements defined in an Application Object Specification Write once value or medium already written An attempt was made to write to a write once medium e g WORM drive PROM that has already been written or to modify a value that cannot be changed once established Invalid Reply Received An invalid reply is received e g reply service code does not match the request service code or reply message is shorter than the minimum expected reply size This status code can serve for other causes of invalid replies Reserved by CIP for future extensions Key Failure in path The Key Segment that was included as the first segment in
124. in the preparation of this manual Nevertheless OMRON assumes no responsibility for errors or omissions Neither is any liability assumed for damages resulting from the use of the information contained in this publication TABLE OF CONTENTS PRECAUTIONS eect seed on eeren eaea Xl 1 Intended Audience jz rone pe a ee Waheed og ESR ee Ee SAO ea os xxii 2 General Precautions iri 30s eid E E E aia E E E O RA ea Fees xxii 3 Safety Precautions ss arga rna ETERA Che ope E EEE EEA E E Bod elegy aE es xxii 4 Operating Environment Precautions 0 0 0 cece eee eee XXiV 5 Application Precautions 0 0 0 0 ec enrere rreren XXiV 6 Conformance to EC Directives 0 eect eee eet eee rene n eet eeeaenee xxvi SECTION 1 Features and System Configuration ssssssoses 1 1 1 Overview of EtherNet IP Unit and Built in EtherNet IP Port 0 2 1 2 EtherNet IP Unit and Built in EtherNet IP Port Specifications 10 1 3 Nomenclature and Functions 0 cece eee e een teen eens 17 1 4 Network Configurator Overview 0 0 00 ccc eee eee 24 SECTION 2 Designing the EtherNet IP System 27 2 1 Design Procedures e eesto a eas ne ete eee eee ee 28 2 2 Selecting the Network Devices 0 0 cece a a 34 2 3 Checking Bandwidth Usage and Adjusting the RPI 0 0 0 000 38 SECTION 3 Installation and Initial Setup 0ee000002 53
125. internal table Prohibiting Dynamically With EtherNet IP Units and built in EtherNet IP ports it is possible to prohibit Changing Remote IP protect against dynamic changes to remote IP addresses by each method Addresses automatic generation IP address table or combined method Use the CX Programmer to make this setting When dynamically changing remote destination IP addresses is prohibited the internal table for each method is maintained in the same state it had when the power was turned ON or restarted Therefore protection can be provided against access using FINS UDP from personal computers or other devices that have dynamically changing IP addresses To prohibit dynamic changes clear the selection of the Dynamic change the target IP addresses Option on the FINS UDP Tab Page in the Edit Parameters Dialog Box of the CX Pro grammer Using the ETN11 With EtherNet IP Units and built in EtherNet IP ports operating specifications compatible Mode can be made compatible with the CS1W ETN11 CJ1W ETN11 for all methods automatic generation dynamic I O address table or combined Dynamic changes however are prohibited for the destination IP address in ETN11 compatible mode While in ETN11 compatible mode the following operations will be performed the same as they are for the CS1W ETN11 CJ1W ETN11 for FINS UDP command data sent from a UDP port number other than the local FINS UDP port number default 9600 set ion the FINS UDP
126. l Delete all of unused Tag Sets Usage Count 2 256 l Import To From File Cancel To place more than one input symbol input tag imported from the CX Programmer into one tag set you must delete the input tags that were reg istered to separate input tag sets Select the tag sets for the symbols that are included in the one tag set and click the Delete Button A confirmation message will be displayed Click the No Button to delete only the tag sets Network Configurator t Selected Tag sets and Tags that the Tag sets have will be deleted e TF you select No it will delete the Tag sets only To create a new tag set for more than one tag click the New Button To place more than one tag in an existing tag set double click the tab set or select it and click the Edit Button The Edit Tag Set Dialog Box will be displayed Imported tags that are not registered in another tag set will be displayed in the Candidate Tag List Area on the right Click the Right Arrow Button to add tags individually 161 Network Configurator Operations Section 6 2 Edit Tag Set PLC Status Name NO1InData Not Include Olnclude Tag List CandidateTag List Name Name Ove Size Bit 5 NO1_InData b N02 InData 4Byte OK Cancel 4 You can change tag set names in this dialog box To confirm a change click the OK Button in the dialog box 5 Perform steps 1 to 3 for all the devices that will perform tag data
127. last two digits of the local IP address of the Ether Net IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port Default IP address 192 168 250 node address With the factory default node address setting of 01 the default IP address is 192 168 250 1 The node address can be set to any number in the setting range 01 to FE as long as the same address is not set on another node in the network If the node address setting is changed during operation the MS Indicator will flash red 23 Network Configurator Overview Section 1 4 1 4 Network Configurator Overview 1 4 1 Overview The Network Configurator Ver 3 0 or higher is a software package designed for building setting and controlling a multi vendor EtherNet IP Network using OMRON s EtherNet IP It is included in CX One version 3 0 The Network Configurator provides the following functions for building setting and control ling EtherNet IP Network Control The Network configuration can be created and edited regardless of whether the Network Configurator is online or offline The Network configuration can be read from a file or the network Hardware EDS File EDS files used by the Network Configurator can be installed and deleted Control 1 4 2 Network Configurator Requirements Operating environment Refer to the CX One Ver 3 0 Setup Manual W463 CXONE ALUILIC V3 CXONE ALLILID V3 Network CS1 CJ1 CJ2 connection Serial interface CPU Unit s Perip
128. links 162 Network Configurator Operations Section 6 2 6 2 6 Setting Connections with Target Devices Originator Only Note Connection Settings Connections Tab Registering Devices in the Register Device List 1 2 3 After creating the tag sets click the Connections Tab at the top of the Edit Device Parameters Dialog Box and set the following connection information e The target devices with which connections will be opened e Whether the tag sets are input or output tag sets e The length of the packet intervals RPI Make the Connections settings in the originator only The Connections set tings are not necessary in the target device Make the Connections settings after creating tag sets for all of the devices involved in tag data links 1 Display the originator device s Edit Device Parameters Dialog Box by dou ble clicking the device s icon in the Network Configuration Window or right clicking the device s icon and selecting Parameter Edit from the pop up menu 2 Click the Connections Tab at the top of the Edit Device Parameters Dialog Box All of the devices registered in the network except the local node will be displayed Edit Device Parameters Connections Tag Sets Unregister Device List Product Name 44 192 168 250 2 CJ1W EIP21 CJ2 192 168 250 3 CJ1w EIP21 CJ2 Connections 0 256 0 0 T 0 lt Register Device List Product Name 192 168 250 1 CJ2B EIP21 Variable Tar
129. log Box Edit Device Parameters Connections Tag Sets Unregister Device List Product Name Connections 8 256 0 4 T Register Device List Product Name 192 168 250 1 CJ2B EIP21 Variable Target Variable 9 192 168 250 2 002 C Sa CN01_01 Input TagSet2_192 168 250 1 TagSet2_192 168 250 2 192 168 250 3 003 C 23 CN01_02 Input TagSet3_192 168 250 1 TagSet3_192 168 250 3 P 192 158 250 4 004 C oh CNO1_03 Input TagSet4_192 168 250 1 TagSet4_192 168 250 4 P 192 168 250 5 005 C Sa CN01_04 Input TagSet5_192 168 250 1 TagSet5_192 168 250 5 EdtAl Change TargetNode ID To FromFie OK Cancel 79 Other Parameters Section 3 10 3 10 Other Parameters In addition to the tag data link parameters the EtherNet IP Unit and built in EtherNet IP port also have the following communications and operation parameters e FINS UDP e FINS TCP e FTP e Auto Adjust Time e Status Area SNMP SNMP Trap These parameters are set as Unit Setup from the CX Programmer The parameter settings are saved in flash memory in the EtherNet IP Unit or CPU Unit See note Note The CPU Bus Unit Setup Area is not used for tag data link settings for an EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port This point is different from the operation of Ethernet Units Using FINS UDP Tab Page in Edit Setting Function Parameters Dialog Box FINS UDP FINS UDP Port Specifies the
130. mode Always select binary mode for binary files extensions IOM STD or OBJ in the CS Cu series file memory and other program files with extensions such as CXP Using the FTP Server Function Section 11 3 11 3 Using the FTP Server Function 11 3 1 Procedure 1 2 3 Note Make the basic settings Refer to Initial Settings on page 54 When using a user set FTP login name and password With the CX Programmer online right click the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port in the IO Table Dialog Box of the CX Programmer and se lect Edit Unit Setup Set the following on the FTP Tab Page of the Edit Parameters Dialog Box FTP login name FTP password Select Transfer to PLC from the Options Menu and click the Yes Button The setting data will be transferred to the CPU Bus Unit System Setup Area in the CPU Unit When reading from and writing to the Memory Card Mount the Memory Card into the CPU Unit Connect the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port using the FTP cli ent software Enter the FTP login name and password set in the Unit Setup and log into the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port Note Once logged in the ftp commands can be used such as cd Change Directory and get Obtain File Search in the following directories for the required file in the Memory Card mounted to the CPU Unit or the EM File Memory File memory type Directory Memory Card MEMCARD
131. necessary to de lete the tag from the tag set in which it was originally registered 154 Network Configurator Operations Section 6 2 Open the Edit Device Parameters Dialog Box select the tag set containing the tag that you want to delete and click the Delete Button in the Edit Tag Dialog Box If there are other tags registered in that tag set it is possible to delete just one tag by selecting the tag that you want to delete in the Edit Tag Set Dialog Box and clicking the Button Edit Device Parameters Connections Tag Sets In Consume Out Produce Over Size Bit ID D00000 2Byte Auto fee D00001 Pte Auto D00002 2Byte Auto D00003 2Byte Auto New Edit Delete Expand All Collapse All Edit Tags Delete all of unused Tag Sets Usage Count 4 256 Import To From File OK Cancel At this point a confirmation dialog box will be displayed to confirm that you want to delete the selected tag set and the tags contained in that tag set Network Configurator Selected Tag sets and Tags that the Tag sets have will be deleted OK e TF you select No it will delete the Tag sets only If the No Button is clicked only the tag set will be deleted Click the No But ton 155 Network Configurator Operations Section 6 2 156 13 In order to edit a registered tag set and add tags either double click the tag set or select the tag set and cl
132. not equipped with any functions that require a DNS server so these settings are not used The 75 TCP IP and Link Settings Domain Name IP Router Table Section 3 8 functionality required to use a DNS server is not provided on EtherNet IP Units with unit version 1 0 The DNS server cannot be used with these Units Sets the domain name of the domain to which the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port belongs The EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port does not use a domain name in actual communications Set the IP router table to route EtherNet IP communications for specific nodes through an IP router other than the default gateway Settings on the Ethernet Tab Page Link Setting Note Note The following settings are provided on the Ethernet Tab Page of the Unit Setup for the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port e Link settings baud rate and half full duplex Sets the communications baud rate Setting Meaning Auto default The baud rate with the switching hub is detected automat ically If possible the Unit operates in 100Base T full duplex 10 Mbps Half Duplex Operates in 10Base T half duplex 10 Mbps Full Duplex Operates in 10Base T full duplex 100 Mbps Half Duplex Operates in 100Base TX half duplex 100 Mbps Full Duplex Operates in 100Base TX full duplex Adjust the EtherNet IP Unit s link settings to match the communications set tings of the connec
133. not given priority Parallel processing with syn One CPU Unit cycle time chronous memory access Parallel processing with asyn 0 2 ms peripheral servicing time 1 ms max for chronous memory access peripheral servicing of each Special I O Unit CPU Bus Unit peripheral port RS 232C port and Inner Board Note CJ2 CPU Units support only Normal Mode For details refer to the CPU Unit s Operation Manual 282 Message Service Transmission Delay Section 10 3 CPU Bus Unit Service Processing Time Remote Node The following table shows the CPU Bus Unit service processing time which depends on the CPU Unit s CPU processing mode setting CPU execution mode Processing time details Normal Mode See note Set peripheral servicing time Default 4 of CPU Unit cycle time 10 for CJ2 CPU Units EtherNet IP Unit or Time slice peripheral servicing built in EtherNet IP execution time port is given prior ity EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port is not given priority Set peripheral servicing time Default 4 of CPU Unit cycle time 10 for CJ2 CPU Units 1 ms max Priority peripheral servicing Set peripheral servicing time Default 4 of CPU Unit cycle time Parallel processing with syn chronous memory access Parallel processing with asyn chronous memory access Note CJ2 CPU Units support only Normal Mode For details refer to the CPU Unit s Ope
134. of write data bytes that can be specified depends on the model of the CPU Unit and the data area being written Do not exceed the boundary of the data areas for the PLC you are using Byte Data Write Service Code 1E Hex 268 Byte Data Write writes data to an I O memory area in a CPU Unit The write word data is in byte units The command block is specified in high to low byte order as shown in the following diagram Receiving Explicit Messages Section 9 2 Command Block C4 1E 2F The class ID depends on the unit version eS Slee Aes sf etl Version 2 0 The class ID is C4 wp Cp Version 1 0 The class ID is 2F Class ID Address L Word data L Word data L Service Instance ID Address H Code Word data H Word data H Write data 200 bytes max Note A body format of either 8 bits or 16 bits is possible Response Block 9E Service Code Parameters Service code command response IE Hex is specified for commands For responses the highest bit will turn ON and 9E Hex will be returned Class ID command Always C4 2F The class ID depends on the unit version The class ID is C4 for unit version 2 0 and 2F for unit version 1 0 Instance ID command The type of memory area to which the data will be written is specified as shown in the following table Instance ID Hex CPU Unit memory area Word range for write 0000 to 6143 DM D00000 to D3276
135. or built in EtherNet IP port can obtain the clock informa tion from the SNTP server see note 1 at a particular time or when a desig nated bit turns ON and then refresh the internal clock information of the CPU Unit to which it is mounted referred to as the local CPU Unit Intranet SNTP server Automatic clock adjustment i The clock information can be broadcast to other CPU Units on the same Network Ethernet EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port Clock data is obtained from the SNTP server and written at a particular time or when a designated bit turns ON Note 1 The SNTP Simple Network Time Protocol server is used to control the time on the LAN 2 An error will occur in the following CPU Units when the automatic clock adjustment function is executed under the conditions shown in the table CPU Unit Conditions CPU Units manufactured on or When the CPU execution mode is set to other before January 31 2003 lot num than normal mode priority peripheral servicing bers 030131 or earlier mode parallel processing with synchronous CJ1G CPU memory access mode or parallel processing CJ1H CPU with asynchronous memory access mode CS1G CPU AND CS1H CPU When the CPU Unit operating mode is set to RUN or MONITOR mode 3 The manufacturing date can be determined from the lot number on the side or top corner of
136. related EMC standards so that they can be more easily built into other devices or the overall machine The actual products have been checked for conformity to EMC standards see the following note Whether the products conform to the standards in the system used by the customer however must be checked by the customer EMC related performance of the OMRON devices that comply with EC Direc tives will vary depending on the configuration wiring and other conditions of the equipment or control panel on which the OMRON devices are installed The customer must therefore perform the final check to confirm that devices and the overall machine conform to EMC standards Applicable EMS Electromagnetic Susceptibility and EMI Electromagnetic Interference Standards in the EMC Electromagnetic Compatibility stan dards are as follows EtherNet IP Unit EMS EMI CS1W EIP21 EN61000 6 2 EN61000 6 4 CJ1W EIP21 Radiated emission 10 m regulations Low Voltage Directive Always ensure that devices operating at voltages of 50 to 1 000 V AC and 75 to 1 500 V DC meet the required safety standards for the PLC EN61131 2 SECTION 1 Features and System Configuration This section introduces the functions and protocols used in EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port communications services 1 1 Overview of EtherNet IP Unit and Built in EtherNet IP Port 2 1 1 1 EtherNet IP Unit Features 0
137. s words These words contain control bits and flags the target node PLC s operating and error information Unit status communications status registered normal target node infor mation and FINS TCP connection status Allocated DM Area words CPU Bus Unit words 100 words Unit one unit number s words These words contain the IP address display setting area User set area Any usable data area words Target node PLC s operating and error information and registered normal target node information CPU Bus Unit Sys tem Setup Not used Non volatile memory within Ether Net IP Unit See note The following settings are stored in the EtherNet IP Unit s non volatile memory Note Unlike the regular Ethernet Units the CPU Bus Unit Setup Area in the CPU Unit is not used for these settings 1 Unit setup communications settings for the EtherNet IP Unit such as the IP ad dress DNS server settings host name baud rate FINS UDP settings and FINS TCP settings 2 Tag data link settings device parameters Media access method Transfer specifica CSMA CD tions Modulation method Baseband Transmission paths Star form Baud rate 100 Mbit s 100Base TX Transmission media Shielded twisted pair STP cable Categories 100 Q at 5 5e Transmission dis tance 100 m distance between hub and node Number of cascade connections There is n
138. size of the tag in the Size Field in bytes 7 Click the Regist Button to register the tag The next consecutive data area address will be automatically input in the Edit Tag Dialog Box s Name Field so that the next tag can be edited When necessary change the address and input a data size When you are fin ished registering tags click the Close Button 8 Click the Out Produce Tab and click the New Button The Edit Tag Dialog Box will be displayed like the dialog box for input tags except for the Over Load setting The Over Load setting determines whether outputs are cleared or continue their previous status when outputs are turned OFF with the PLC s Output OFF function Output inhibit settings are not required for input reception tag sets e Follow the output inhibit function Enabled default Output data is cleared to 0 when a PLC output inhibit occurs e Do not follow the output inhibit function Disabled Output data maintains its previous status even after a PLC output in hibit occurs 152 Network Configurator Operations Section 6 2 Edit Tag Name 0000 Size Over Load O Disable Enable Select Disable or Enable Note When any of the following errors occurs in the originator PLC while tag data links are in progress the connection will be forcibly disconnected e Fatal CPU Unit error e I O refreshing error e CPU Unit WDT error e I O bus error 9 When you are finished registering the required ta
139. stop in the following cases e Hardware error e IP Address Duplication Error BOOTP Server Error e Basic Ethernet Settings Error e Memory Error MAC Address Error Indicates that the tag data link is stopped Turned ON in the following cases e The Unit is set as the origi nator and the power supply was turned ON or the Unit was restarted e The Unit is set as the origi nator and the Tag Data Link Start Bit was turned ON Operating IP Address Change ON if the node address set ting is different from the set ting when the power was turned ON OFF if the node address set ting is the same as the setting when the power was turned ON Not used User Setting Area Enabled Indicates that the user set tings area data is enabled ON when user settings have been specified as the layout of the allocated CIO Area and refreshing of the user settings area has started Indicates that the user set tings area data is invalid The bit is turned OFF in the following cases because communications stop e The allocated CIO Area lay out is set to default settings e The allocated CIO Area lay out is set to user settings but one of the following prob lems occurred e A Layout Setting Error occurred Not used Multiple Switches ON Error ON when two or more control bits are ON simultaneously Unused bits are ignored Turned OFF when the next
140. tables can be created in the following ways e Using the CX Programmer offline e Using the CX Programmer online to create the I O table based on the Units mounted to the PLC e Using the Programming Console to create the I O table based on the Units mounted to the PLC e Using the CPU Unit s automatic I O allocation at startup This method is available for the CJ Series only 3 6 2 Connecting Programming Devices to the PLC To create the I O tables connect a Programming Device such as a CX Pro grammer or Programming Console to the PLC Applicable Programming Devices The following Programming Devices can be used with CS CJ series PLCs Programming Console Model number Key Sheet required Recommended cable required C200H PRO27 E CS1W KS001 E CS1W CN224 cable length 2 0 m CS1W CN624 cable length 6 0 m CQM1 PROO01 E CS1W CN1 14 cable length 0 1 m Note A Programming Console cannot be used with the CJ2H CPULIL EIP CPU Units Use the CX Programmer CX Programmer Version 3 20 or Higher and CX Integrator The operations are explained here using a Programming Console For details regarding the CX Programmer and the CX Integrator refer to the CX Pro grammer User s Manual Refer to the CX Integrator Operation Manual W445 for connection procedures and operating procedures for the CX Integrator CX Integrator is software that comes with CX One and is automatically installed when CX One is ins
141. target timed out Check the power supply and cable wiring of the devices in the commu nications path including the target and switches If performance has dropped due to heavy load change the performance set tings For example increase the timeout time or RPI setting Error code returned from target The connection opening pro cess timed out There was no response from the target Check the power supply and cable wiring of the devices in the communications path including the target and switches Error code returned from target There was a parameter error in the frame used to open the con nection This error does not occur Depends on the tar get s specifications Contact the target device s manufac turer Depends on the orig inator s specifica tions Contact the originator device s manufacturer Error occurred at originator or error code returned from target The tag data link s allowable bandwidth pps was exceeded Check the origina tor and target con nection settings number of con nections and RPI Check the target s connection settings number of connec tions and RPI Check the originator and target connec tion settings number of connections and RPI Error code returned from target There was a parameter error in the frame used to open the con nection This error does not occur Depends on the tar get s specifications Contact t
142. target variable select the con nection as shown below and click the Edit Button Register Device List Product Name 192 168 250 1 CJTW EIP21 Variable Target Variable 2 192 168 250 2 002 C Sa CN01_01 Input TagSet2_192 168 250 1 TagSet2_192 168 250 2 s Icon When normal f New Editall Change TargetNode ID To From File 6 2 16 Changing Devices Devices that are registered in a network configuration with the Network Con figurator can be changed Select Change Device from the Device Menu to display a list of the devices that can be changed to Select the desired device A device can be changed only when there is complete or upward compatibility with the device being changed to Device Changes Device after change CJ1W EIP CJ2B EIP21 CJ2 Device before change 2 1 2 1 CJ1W EIP21 OK OK CS1W EIP21 3 OK OK CJ1W EIP21 OK CS1W EIP21 OK CJ1W EIP CJ2 OK if no vari OK if no vari ables in tags ables in tags CJ2B EIP21 E OK if no vari OK if no vari ables in tags ables in tags 191 Network Configurator Operations Section 6 2 6 2 17 Displaying Device Status Device status is displayed using the following icons in Maintenance Mode To enter maintenance mode select Large Icons Maintenance Mode from the View Menu EtherNet IP_1 mw 8 J Fe 192 168 250 1 192 168 250 2 192 168 250 3 192 168 250 4 CJ2B EI
143. the CPU Unit 4 The lot numbers are as follows YYMMDDnnnn in which YY indicates the last two digits of the year MM the month DD the day and nnnn the serial number 5 In accordance with SNTP protocol specifications automatic adjustment will not be possible from February 7 2036 In EtherNet IP Units or built in EtherNet IP ports this function will no longer operate from February 7 2036 an error message will not be displayed 312 Using the Automatic Clock Adjustment Function 12 1 2 Specifications Section 12 2 Item Specification Protocol SNTP Port number 123 UDP Can also be set from the CX Programmer in the Unit Setup Adjustment timing Automatic fixed time and manual manual only cannot be set Access to SNTP server Writes the clock information from the SNTP server to the local CPU Unit Obtains the clock information from the SNTP server set up on the Network and applies the information obtained to the local CPU Unit Refresh timing When the automatic clock adjustment switch is turned from OFF to ON and at a specified time 12 2 Using the Automatic Clock Adjustment Function 12 2 1 Procedure 1 2 3 1 Make the basic settings Refer to Initial Settings on page 54 2 With the CX Programmer online right click the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port in the IO Table Dialog Box of the CX Programmer and se lect Edit Unit Setup Set the followi
144. the Hardware List for each version Creating EDS Files EDS File Create The EDS files are required by the Network Configurator in order to create a network configuration To create an EDS file use the following procedure 1 Select EDS File Create 2 Set the device information and I O information The device information can be obtained from the device on the network if the network is online 3 The device can be added to the Hardware List as a new device just like installing an EDS file Note Device parameters cannot be set with the Network Configurators EDS file creation function Obtain a proper EDS file from the manufacturer of the device to make device parameter settings for the device Deleting EDS Files EDS File Delete To delete an EDS file use the following procedure 407 EDS File Management Appendix F 1 Select the device from the Hardware List 2 Select EDS File Delete The following confirmation window will be displayed 3 Click the Yes Button The selected device will be deleted from the Hardware List together with the EDS file Saving EDS Files EDS File Save To save the EDS file use the following procedure 1 Select the device from the Hardware List 2 Select EDS file Save As The following window will be displayed to specify the name of the folder where the EDS file will be saved and the name of the EDS file Save EDS File Save in CQ Eds 30 2 pem R 3F86M DRT141 eds
145. the different types of switching hubs Multicast L4 QoS Remarks filtering Unmanaged L2 switching hub None None lt Managed L2 switching hub Provided Provided Both functions must be set with a special software tool OMRON W4S1 series Switching None Provided L4 QoS is set using Hubs a switch No soft ware tool is neces sary Note If the Network Configurator is used to set the connection type in the connec tion settings to a multicast connection multicast packets will be used If the connection type is set to a point to point connection multicast packets will not be used 2 2 5 Precautions When Selecting a Switching Hub The functions supported by the switching hub may affect tag data link trans mission delays and the configuration In addition if the switching hub supports advanced functions special settings are required for those functions 35 Selecting the Network Devices Section 2 2 When selecting a switching hub it is necessary to consider whether the switching hub will be selected based on the kind and amount of communica tions that will be performed in the network or the kind of switching hub that you want to use Refer to the following precautions when selecting a switching hub Refer to 2 3 Checking Bandwidth Usage and Adjusting the RPI to estimate the communications load for tag data links Selecting the Switching Hub Based on the Types of Network Communications Executing T
146. the path does not match the destination module The object specific status shall indicate which part of the key check failed Path Size Invalid The size of the path which was sent with the Service Request is either not large enough to allow the Request to be routed to an object or too much rout ing data was included Unexpected attribute in list An attempt was made to set an attribute that is not able to be set at this time Invalid Member ID The Member ID specified in the request does not exist in the specified Class Instance Attribute Member not settable A request to modify a non modifiable member was received Group 2 only server general failure This error code may only be reported by DeviceNet group 2 only servers with 4K or less code space and only in place of Service not supported Attribute not supported and Attribute not settable Reserved by CIP for future extensions 376 Reserved for Object Class and service errors This range of error codes is to be used to indicate Object Class specific errors Use of this range should only be performed when none of the Error Codes pre sented in this table accurately reflect the error that was encountered CIP Message Communications Appendix D Example of Additional Status in case that General Status Is 01 Hex Status of Connection Manager Object General Status Additional hex Status hex 0100 Explanation Connection
147. these two tag sets Originator device Target device Connection Information IP address Target IP address Originator tag set SP1_IN Target tag set SP1_OUT Packet interval RPI Tag Set Input Tags Tag Set Output Tags Tag set name SP1_IN Tag set name SP1_OUT PLC status Tag i Tag ii There are both input and output tag sets Each tag set can contain only input tags or only output tags The same input tag cannot be included in more than one input tag set Each tag set can contain one or more tags 135 Overview of Tag Data Links Section 6 1 m Tag Sets with Only One Tag With basic Network Configurator procedures each tag set contains only one One tag each Each tag is set using a text string of the network symbol or physical address tag CPU Unit Tag set SP1_IN I O memory tag a Tag set SP2_OUT tag b l a CPU Unit Tag set SP1_OUT tag c I O memory OH Tag set SP2_IN tag d 4 Connection Connection OH O EtherNet IP m Tag Sets with Multiple Tags One tag each Each tag is set using a text string of the network symbol or physical address Note Specifications 136 As shown below tags can be created i to 8 tags totalling 722 words CPU Unit I O memory Tag set SP1_IN Tag set SP2_OUT grou
148. turned ON Bits 00 to 15 correspond to unit numbers 0 to F The ERR ALM indicator on the front of the CPU Unit will flash but CPU operation will continue Section 4 5 Settings 0 No error 1 Error A42700 to A42715 CPU Bus Unit Set ting Error Unit Number Flags When a CPU Bus Unit Setting Error occurs A40203 and the corresponding flag in A27 are turned ON Bits 00 to 15 correspond to unit numbers 0 to F The ERR ALM indicator on the front of the CPU Unit will flash but CPU operation will continue 4 5 2 Read Write Bits User Settings A50100 to AS50115 CPU Bus Unit Restart Bits Description Bits A50100 through A50115 can be turned ON to reset CPU Bus Units number 0 through 15 respectively The Restart Bits are turned OFF automatically when restarting is completed The CPU Bus Unit Initializing Flags A30200 to A30215 will turn ON when initialization of the Units begins and turn OFF when it is completed 0 No setting error 1 Setting error Settings OFF to ON Unit restarted Automatically turned OFF by system after restart processing has been completed 109 Auxiliary Area Data Section 4 5 110 This section explains how to manage and use IP addresses 5 1 5 2 5 3 IPS AAreSSeS 9 ices eS aner a SETS SRE Gd eile eee gag 5 1 1 IP Address Configuration 0 0 00 00 0 0020 e eee 5 1 2 Allocating IP Addresses 0 0 0 cee eee eee e
149. will be given at NN Socket send error NN A data send error occurred The error code will be given at NN Timeout 900 seconds closing control connection The connection was closed because the client did not respond for 15 minutes Too many open files Too many sockets have been created Write access denied Write access denied FINS error 0 x 2101 Writing is not possible 301 Checking FTP Status Section 11 6 PPP Path name XXX IP address YY Port number MM FINS error code NN Socket error code 11 6 Checking FTP Status 11 6 1 FTP Status Flag 302 n 13 The current status of the FTP server can be obtained from the service status in the words allocated to the EtherNet IP Unit in the CPU Bus Unit Area in the CIO Area The word containing the FTP Status Flag can be computed as fol lows CIO 1500 25 x unit number 13 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 lal Note FTP Status Flag Status of bit 00 1 FTP server busy a user is connected 0 FTP server free 1 File operations for files on the Memory Card are performed during FTP communications Do not remove the Memory Card or turn OFF power to the PLC while FTP is being used 2 When using File Memory Instruction from the program in the CPU Unit program exclusive control using the FTP Status Flag so that the same data is not manipulated simultaneously by more than one instruction Usin
150. 0 49 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 22 21 20 19 16 50 32 51 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 48 52 79 78 TE 76 75 74 73 72 71 70 69 68 67 64 54 111 110 109 108 107 106 105 104 103 102 101 100 99 98 97 96 55 122 116 115 114 na 112 56 138 132 128 57 144 58 175 174 173 172 171 170 169 168 167 166 165 164 163 162 160 59 191 190 189 188 187 186 185 184 183 182 181 180 179 178 176 60 207 206 205 204 203 202 201 200 197 196 195 194 192 61 223 222 221 219 218 217 213 212 211 210 208 62 239 238 237 236 235 234 233 232 231 230 229 228 227 226 225 224 63 255 254 253 252 251 250 249 248 247 246 245 244 243 242 241 240 by Target Node PLC ON A fatal or non fatal error occurred Error Flags in the corresponding PLC No error occurred in the PLC 107 Auxiliary Area Data 4 5 Auxiliary Area Data The following table and descriptions cover the words and bits in the CPU Unit s Auxiliary Area that are related to the EtherNet IP Unit Read only Bits Words 4 5 1 Word s A20200 to A20207 Communications Port Enabled Flags Function Bits A20200 to A20207 turn ON when a network instruction SEND RECV CMND or PMCR can be executed with the corresponding port number Bits 00 to 07 correspond to communications ports 0 to 7 Section 4 5 Settings 0 Network communi cations running 1 No network com munications running A203 to A210
151. 0 106 33 5 295 13 989 M 192 168 250 9 CS1W EIP21 43 00 106 33 5 295 13 989 M g 192 168 250 10 CS1W EIP21 74 67 106 33 9 642 13 989 M p 192 168 250 11 CJ1W EIP21 43 00 106 33 5 295 13 989 M g 192 168 250 12 CJ1W EIP21 43 00 106 33 5 295 13 989 M 192 168 250 13 CJ1W EIP21 43 00 106 33 5 295 13 989 M g 192 168 250 14 CJ1W EIP21 43 00 106 33 5 295 13 989 M 192 168 250 15 CJ1W EIP21 43 00 106 33 5 295 13 989 M g 192 168 250 16 CJ1W EIP21 43 00 106 33 5 295 13 989 M 192 168 250 117 CJ1W EIP21 43 00 106 33 5 295 13 989 M 192 168 250 18 CJ1W EIP21 43 00 106 33 5 295 13 989 M g 192 168 250 19 CJ1W EIP21 43 00 106 33 5 295 13 989 M 192 168 250 20 CJ1W EIP21 43 00 106 33 5 295 13 989 M NVNNMNYNYNYNYNYNYNY NY NNN NNN DY NY Set Packet Interval RPI Total usage of IP multicast addresses 40 Network Total of Max Mbit s 16 342Mbit s In this case if there is no multicast filter the value becomes 106 33 If there is no multicast filter for a switching hub communications errors may occur depending on the communications load of the EtherNet IP Unit or built in Eth erNet IP Unit port Method 3 Changing Only a Particular Connection s RPI In this example we want a faster tag data links for just a particular connection of device 192 168 250 1 Double click device 192 168 250 1 in the Network Configuration Win
152. 0 words 3 I 3 3 1 2 3 1 Select Wizard from the Data Link Menu The Datalink Wizard Dialog Box will be displayed E Datalink Wizard Datalink Wizard will make the datalink table data Please specify the memory area start address size The nodes which participate the datalink have to be created by Network Configurator Datalink Configuration Areal Area Memory co o v Memory Start Address Start Address Size CH Size CH Enable Over Load Cancel 2 Select the memory area here W in the Memory Field and enter the start ing address here 0 and number of words here 50 in the Start Address and Size Fields for Area 1 3 Select the memory area here D in the Memory Field and enter the start ing address here 50 and number of words here 100 in the Start Ad dress and Size Fields for Area 2 4 Select the Enable Over Load Check Box if the Over Load function is nec essary 145 Network Configurator Operations Section 6 2 E Datalink Wizard Datalink Wizard will make the datalink table data Please specify the memory area start address size The nodes which participate the datalink have to be created by Network Configurator Datalink Configuration Areal Area2 Memory Ww Memory D Start ddress Q Start Address sp Size CH 100 Size CH 100 Enable Over Load 5 Click the OK Button The following dialog box will be displayed data
153. 00 Inner Board unmounted 0000 Main Rack 0000 Rack 01 0000 Rack 02 ey 0000 Rack 03 70 Setting the Local IP Address Section 3 7 3 7 Setting the Local IP Address This section describes the 3 ways to set the local I O address of an EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port Method 1 Using the default IP address The default IP address is 192 168 250 Node_address The node address is set with the rotary switches on the front of the EtherNet IP Unit or for the built in EtherNet IP port on the front of the CPU Unit This method can be used to make a temporary or preliminary connection to the Ethernet In this case leave the TCP IP Con figuration and the allocated DM area IP address settings at their default values 0 0 0 0 Method 2 Setting an IP address in the CPU Unit s allocated DM area If you want to set a particular local IP address and store that set ting in the CPU Unit set it in the EtherNet IP Unit s allocated DM area The IP address can be set from the CX Programmer Pro gramming Console or ladder program Method 3 Setting the TCP IP Configuration from the CX Programmer If you want to set a particular local IP address and store that set ting in the EtherNet IP Unit set the IP address from the CX Pro grammer When FINS communications are being used it is necessary to show the cor respondence between the IP addresses and FINS node addresses Refer t
154. 0207 is turned ON when an error occurs during the transmission of data between the CPU and CPU Bus Units The ERR ALM indicator on the front of the CPU Unit will flash but CPU operation will continue The Unit where the error occurred will stop The unit number of the CPU Bus Unit involved is stored in word A422 0 No unit number error 1 Unit number error A40300 to A40308 Memory Error Location When a memory error occurs the Memory Error Flag A40115 is turned ON and one of the following flags is turned ON to indicate the memory area where the error occurred A40300 User program A40304 PLC Setup A40305 Registered I O Tables A40307 Routing Tables The ERR ALM indicator on the front of the CPU Unit will light and CPU operation will stop 0 Normal 1 Error 108 A41000 to A41015 CPU Bus Unit Num ber Duplication Flags The Duplication Error Flag A40113 and the corresponding flag in A410 will be turned ON when a CPU Bus Units unit number has been duplicated Bits 00 to 15 correspond to unit numbers 0 to F The ERR ALM indicator on the front of the CPU Unit will light and CPU operation will stop 0 No duplication 1 Duplication Auxiliary Area Data A41700 to A41715 CPU Bus Unit Error Unit Number Flags Function When an error occurs in a data exchange between the CPU Unit and a CPU Bus Unit the CPU Bus Unit Error Flag A40207 and the corresponding flag in A417 are
155. 16 17 n 17 18 n 18 19 n 19 20 n 20 21 n 21 22 n 22 23 n 23 24 n 24 FINS TCP Connection Status EtherNet IP Unit gt CPU Unit Note The reserved words are regularly refreshed with all zeroes The functions of the allocated CIO Area words are described in the following section 4 2 2 Details of the Allocated CIO Area Words Unit Control Bits CPU Unit to EtherNet IP Unit n Tag Data Link Start Bit Tag Data Link Stop Bit Adjust Clock Bit Switch Status Manipulated Unit operation by Oto 1 Not used 2 Tag Data Link Start ON User The tag data link starts when this bit Bit is switched from OFF to ON OFF Unit Turned OFF by Unit after the tag data link starts operating 91 CIO Area Allocations Section 4 2 Switch Status Manipulated Unit operation by Not used Tag Data Link Stop The tag data link stops when this bit Bit is switched from OFF to ON Turned OFF by Unit after the tag data link stops operating Adjust Clock Bit The clock time is automatically adjusted when this bit is switched from OFF to ON Turned OFF by Unit after the clock time has been adjusted Tag Data Link Start Bit Bit 2 Tag Data Link Stop Bit Bit 4 Adjust Clock Bit Bit 5 Target Node PLC Operating Information EtherNet IP Unit to CPU Unit n 2ton 5 92 Not used Start the tag data links by switching th
156. 192 168 250 5 CS1W EIP21 C 192 168 250 6 C51 W EIP21 FJ 192 168 250 7 CS1W EIP21 C 192 168 250 8 CS1W EIP21 lt C 192 168 250 9 CS1W EIP21 192 168 250 110 CS1W EIP21 7 192 168 250 11 CJ1W EIP21 C 192 168 250 12 CJ1W EIP21 C 192 168 250 13 CJ1W EIP21 C 192 168 250 14 CJ1W EIP21 0 192 168 250 15 CJ1W EIP21 0 192 168 250 116 CJ1W EIP21 019 019 019 0O19 The percentage of the allowed tag data link bandwidth being used Usage of Capacity increases to 74 67 for devices 192 168 250 1 and 192 168 250 10 which indicates that the RPI is set to a higher speed for these devices connections 49 Checking Bandwidth Usage and Adjusting the RPI Section 2 3 The Usage of Capacity values also indicate that the Usage of Capacity has increased from 39 67 to 43 00 for all of the other devices which connect with devices 192 168 250 1 and 192 168 250 10 Usage of Device Bandwidth Comment Usage of Capac Mbit s without Usage of IP mult _ g 192 168 250 1 CS1W EIP21 74 67 106 33 9 642 13 989 M 192 168 250 2 CS1W EIP21 43 00 106 33 5 295 13 989 M g 192 168 250 3 CS1W EIP21 43 00 106 33 5 295 13 989 M 192 168 250 4 CS1W EIP21 43 00 106 33 5 295 13 989 M g 192 168 250 5 CS1W EIP21 43 00 106 33 5 295 13 989 M 192 168 250 6 CS1W EIP21 43 00 106 33 5 295 13 989 M g 192 168 250 7 CS1W EIP21 43 00 106 33 5 295 13 989 M 192 168 250 8 CS1W EIP21 43 0
157. 2 0 Up to 3 levels Send FINS communications function Receive Message communications functions Send Explicit message communications function Receive 198 Overview Section 7 1 Overall Structure CPU Unit EtherNet IP Unit CMND 490 instruction CMND 490 instruction 2810 Hex OMRON special message communications FINS message EtherNet IP message communications Explicit message Note With the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port message communica tions are possible even if the I O link function is disabled Ethernet EtherNet IP network 199 FINS Message Communications Section 7 2 7 2 FINS Message Communications Messages containing FINS commands can be exchanged over the Ethernet network between nodes that support FINS messages Note FINS message communications can be executed without any particular restrictions over the Ethernet network with OMRON Ethernet Units CS1W ETN21 or CJ1W ETN21 computers CX One or Fins Gateway applications and NS series Programmable Terminals Type of FINS message Data send receive commands Any kind of FINS command Network SEND RECV instructions CMND 490 instructions communications instructions PLC to PLC both must CS CJ series PLC CS CJ series PLC CS CJ series PLC CS CJ series PL
158. 2 168 250 2 Eth erNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port IP address Port number 9600 CX Programmer s FINS UDP Tab Page in Edit Parameters Dialog Box Same as for System Configuration Example 1 Routing Table Settings and Transfer to Each PLC Set the routing tables with CX Integrator and transfer them 1 Using CX Integrator connect online and select Routing table Settings Then create FINS local routing tables a local network table and a relay network table Example PLC 1 Routing Table Settings e Local Network Table Unitnumber Local network number 0 1 1 2 e Relay Network Table None Example PLC 2 and PLC 3 Routing Table Settings e Local Network Table Local network number e Relay Network Table In order to relay from PLC2 3 to the final network number 1 it is necessary to relay via node address 1 i e the Controller Link Unit on relay network number 2 Final network number Relay network number Relay node address 2 Save the routing table file File Save local routing table file 3 Next to connect online select Communication Settings from the Net work Menu For each PLC register a PLC with a direct serial connection node address 0 and select it 4 With the CX Integrator select Work Online from the Network Menu Select Tools Start Routing table read the saved file and select Op tions Transfer to PLC Click Yes to transfer the ro
159. 2 PLC Communications Data Areas The following table shows the I O data areas involved when SEND 090 and RECV 098 are used CIO Area CIO 0000 to CIO 6143 Work Area W000 to W511 Holding Area H000 to H1535 Auxiliary Area A000 to A959 See note 1 Timer Area TIMOO00 to 4095 Counter Area CNT0000 to 4095 DM Area D00000 to D32767 EM Area E00000 to E32767 See note 2 Note 1 Data cannot be written to words A000 to A447 in the Auxiliary Area 2 A maximum of 13 banks in the EM Area can be used for CS1 CJ1 CPU Unit A maximum of 25 banks in the EM Area can be used for CJ2 CPU Unit For details regarding the EM Area refer to the operation manual for the PLC that is used Refer to the operation manual for your CPU Unit to confirm EM Area support 231 Communicating between OMRON PLCs Section 8 6 8 6 3 Using SEND 090 RECV 098 and CMND 490 SEND 090 232 ee Make the settings shown below when using the SEND 090 RECV 098 and CMND 490 instructions in the user s ladder diagram program in the PC The SEND 090 instruction sends the data in n number of words starting from the beginning word S at the local node to the words starting from the begin ning word D at the remote destination node node address N Local node Destination node number N 15 0 D gt Number n of words n S Local node beginning word D Destination beginning word C First word of contr
160. 230 Guest logged in J 3 Enter FTP commands underlined in the following diagram to read and write files The following directory tree is used in this example i root EM MEMCARD ABC subdirectory DEFIOM file r N ftp gt ls lt File names read 200 PORT command successful 150 opening data connection for Is IPaddress port Obytes MEMCARD EM Results 226 Transfer complete bytes received in 0 seconds bytes s J Change to MEMCARD ftp gt cd MEMCARD lt 4 directory 250 CWD command successful jo Results ftp gt get ABC DEF IOM lt Transfer DEF IOM from 200 PORT command successful ABC directory 150 opening data connection for abc def iom IPaddress port bytes gt Results 226 Transfer complete bytes received in seconds bytes s N P 295 Using FTP Commands Section 11 5 11 5 Using FTP Commands This section describes the FTP commands which the host computer FTP cli ent can send to the FTP server of the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port The descriptions should also apply to most UNIX workstations but slight differences may arise Refer to your workstation s operation manuals for details 11 5 1 Table of Commands The FTP commands which can be sent to the EtherNet IP Unit or built in Eth erNet IP port are listed in the following table Command Description Connects the specified host FTP server Sp
161. 250 11 CJ1W EIP21 39 67 39 67 4 837 4 837 Mbi 192 168 250 12 CJTW EIP21 39 67 39 67 4 837 4 837 Mbi 192 168 250 13 CJ1W EIP21 39 67 39 67 4 837 4 837 Mbi P 192 168 250 14 CJTW EIP21 39 67 39 67 4 837 4 837 Mbi 192 168 250 15 CJ1W EIP21 39 67 39 67 4 837 4 837 Mbi 192 168 250 16 CJTW EIP21 39 67 39 67 4 837 4 837 Mbi 192 168 250 17 CJ1W EIP21 39 67 39 67 4 837 4 837 Mbi 192 168 250 18 CJ1W EIP21 39 67 39 67 4 837 4 837 Mbi 192 168 250 19 CJTW EIP21 39 67 39 67 4 837 4 837 Mbi 192 168 250 20 CJ1W EIP21 39 67 39 67 4 837 4 837 Mbi Set Packet Interval RPI Total usage of IP multicast addresses Network Total of Max Mbit s 7 190Mbit s Method 1 Same Packet Interval Setting for All Connections The percentage of the allowed tag data link bandwidth being used Usage of Capacity was 39 67 with the RPI set to 10 0 ms for all of the connections so the RPI will be set to 5 0 ms with a target of 80 or less of the allowable bandwidth Click the Set Packet Interval RPI Button at the bottom of the Usage of Device Bandwidth Dialog Box The Set Packet Interval RPI Dialog Box will be displayed Input 5 0 ms as the new RPI value and click the OK Button Set Packet Interval RPD Packet Interval RPD 5 ms 05 100000 ms Target Device 192 168 250 1 CS1W EIP21 192 168 250 2 C51 W EIP21 192 168 250 3 CS1W EIP21
162. 3 11 SECTION 4 Memory Allocations This section describes the words allocated in the CIO Area and the DM Area for EtherNet IP Units or built in EtherNet IP ports 4 1 Overview of Memory Allocated to the EtherNet IP Unit 88 4 2 CIO Area AN Ocations oiea a na e a E E adnate At eee 90 4 2 1 Overview of the Allocated CIO Area Words 4 90 4 2 2 Details of the Allocated CIO Area Words 004 91 4 3 DM Area Allocations 0 000 een eens 103 4 3 1 Overview of the Allocated DM Area Words 4 103 4 3 2 Details of the Allocated DM Area Words 00005 103 4 4 User Settings Area ci aoe eee oS ee ee E ele 105 4 4 1 Overview of the User Settings Area 0 00004 105 4 4 2 User Settings Area 0 ee eee 105 4 5 Auxiliary Area Data es cni e ce eee 108 4 5 1 Read only Bits Words 0 00 0 0c eee ee eee 108 4 5 2 Read Write Bits User Settings 0 0 c eee eee ee 109 87 Overview of Memory Allocated to the EtherNet IP Unit Section 4 1 4 1 Overview of Memory Allocated to the EtherNet IP Unit The following CPU Unit words are allocated to the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port e CPU Unit s allocated CIO Area words Contains software switch and status information e CPU Unit s allocated DM Area words Contains the IP Address Display Setting Area e CPU Unit s user settings area Contains status information This ar
163. 4 Start the tag data links cyclic communications Verify that the node address displayed on the EtherNet IP Units 7 seg ment LED stops flashing and stays lit Note If an error occurs the Unit s node address will be displayed alter nately with the error code such as d5 verification error target non existent d6 failed to establish connection or d9 tag data link error 5 Create the ladder program and transfer the program to the CS CJ series CPU Unit 6 Switch the CS CJ series CPU Unit to RUN or MONITOR mode Settings Required for the Message Communications Service Execute a CMND 490 instruction in the CS CJ series CPU Unit s user program 55 Switch Settings Section 3 2 3 2 Switch Settings 3 2 1 CS series EtherNet IP Units Setting the Unit Number Note The unit number is used to identify individual CPU Bus Units when more than one CPU Bus Unit is mounted to the same PLC Use a small screwdriver to make the setting taking care not to damage the rotary switch The unit num ber is factory set to 0 OV aT No 1 Turn OFF the power supply before setting the unit number 2 If the unit number is being set for the first time or changed then I O tables must be created for the PLC 3 With CS series and CJ series PLCs words are automatically allocated in the CIO Area and DM Area according to the unit numbers that are set For details refer to SECTION 4 Memory Allocations Setting the Node
164. 490 operand S first command word and continuing with words with higher addresses in I O memory in the command block format C Command Format Example Get_Attribute_Single Service to Identity Object Request path 28 10 00 00 05 DC 52 02 20 06 24 01 OA OC 06 00 Command Transport Message t Message code ID monitoring time request size Service code Time Out Ticks Unconnected Send service 52 Hex Priority Time Tick Request path size 2 words 02 Hex Instance ID 8 bit class ID 20 Hex 8 bit instance ID 24 Hex Class ID Connection Manager 06 Hex Routing service data ____ gt Request path Route path 01 02 20 01 24 01 08 00 12 OD 31 39 32 2E 31 36 t t Route path 9 2 1 6 size 8 words Route path size 13 bytes Instance ID Ethernet port 12 Hex L Service code Get_Attribute_Single service Class ID identity object 8 bit class ID Request path size 2 words 8 bit ingtance ID 24 Hex lt ___ Last hop data pie Routing service data Route path 38 2E 32 35 30 2E 32 00 8 2 5 6 2 T Padding data i Routing service data 253 Sending Explicit Messages Section 9 1 Setting the Command Data for CMND 490
165. 5 43 21 0 Message No 0 1 exists 0 does not exist Message No 1 1 exists 0 does not exist Message No 2 1 exists 0 does not exist Message No 3 1 exists 0 does not exist Message No 4 1 exists 0 does not exist Message No 5 1 exists 0 does not exist Message No 6 1 exists 0 does not exist Message No 7 1 exists 0 does not exist e Error Code The highest priority error code of the errors existing when the command is executed will be returned in 2 byte decimal from low to high bytes If there are no errors the error code will be 0000 Note For information on the severity of error codes refer to the CS1 Series CPU Unit Operation Manual W339 or the CJ Series CPU Unit Op eration Manual W393 e Error Messages If the above error codes have occurred when FAL FALS instructions are executed with registered messages those messages are returned in 16 byte ASCII If there are no registered messages or if the error codes have not occurred due to execution of FAL FALS instructions the code is returned in ASCII with 20 Hex space in 16 bytes Byte Data Read Service Code 1C Hex Byte Data Read reads any I O memory area data in a CPU Unit The read word data is in byte units The response block data is returned in low to high byte order Command Block 1C amp amp The class ID depends on the unit version Version 2 0 The class ID is C4 Version 1 0
166. 7 WR W000 to W511 HR HO00 to H1535 EM banks 0 to 18 En_00000 to En_32767 n 0 to 18 Address L Address H command The address of the first word to which the data will be written is specified in hexadecimal as shown below Address L The lower 2 digits when the first word address is displayed in 4 digit hexadecimal Address H The higher 2 digits when the first word address is displayed in 4 digit hexadecimal Write data response The specified area and write data is returned in order from word H higher byte bits 8 to 15 to word L lower byte bits O to 7 For byte data write specify an even number Important Points The actual address L address H and number of write data bytes that can be specified depends on the model of the CPU Unit and the data area being written Do not exceed the boundary of the data areas for the PLC you are using Word Data Write Service Code 1F Hex Word Data Write writes data to any I O memory area in a CPU Unit The write word data is in word units The response block data is returned in low to high byte order 269 Receiving Explicit Messages Section 9 2 Command Block C4 1F 2F The class ID depends on the unit version CY f te Et aa aaa Version 2 0 The class ID is C4 i Version 1 0 The class ID is 2F Class ID Address L Word data H Word data H Service Instance ID Address H ode Word data L Word data L
167. 8 4 1 Routing Table Overview 00 0 0 e eee eee eee 217 8 4 2 Connecting and Using a Peripheral Device for the PLC 218 8 4 3 Routing Table Setting Examples 000 219 8 5 Using FINS Applications 0 00 0 eee eee ee eee 221 8 5 1 CX Programmer CX Server 0 0 00 e eee ee eee 221 8 5 2 1FinsGateway e or sas Sars i Se da eee 225 8 6 Communicating between OMRON PLCs 0 000000 00 230 8 6 1 Communications Specifications 0000005 230 8 6 2 PLC Communications Data Areas 00000 231 8 6 3 Using SEND 090 RECV 098 and CMND 490 232 8 6 4 Writing Programs 00 0 cee eee eee 236 8 6 5 Program Example 0 0 0 eee 240 8 7 Precautions on High Traffic in FINS Communications 242 207 Overview of FINS Communications Section 8 1 8 1 8 1 1 208 Overview of FINS Communications Communications On an Ethernet Network The EtherNet IP Units and built in EtherNet IP ports support the FINS com munications service which can be used simultaneously with the CIP commu nications service FINS communications data is sent and received as UDP IP packets or TCP IP packets PLC EtherNet IP Unit or host computer Packet FINS command Ethernet EtherNet IP Packet FINS response EtherNet IP Unit PLC In the FINS communications service both an IP address for
168. 9D Service Code Word data H Word data H Word data L Word data L Ka 2 Read data 200 bytes max Section 9 2 Service code command response ID Hex is specified for commands For responses the highest bit will turn ON and 9D Hex will be returned Class ID command Always C4 2F The class ID depends on the unit version The class ID is C4 for unit version 2 0 and 2F for unit version 1 0 Instance ID command The type of memory area that will read the data is specified as shown in the following table Instance ID Hex CPU Unit memory area for read Word range 0000 to 6143 DM D00000 to D32767 WR W000 to W511 HR HO00 to H1535 EM banks 0 to 18 En_00000 to En_32767 n 0 to 18 Address L Address H command The address of the first word to read the data from is specified in hexadecimal as shown below Address L The lower 2 digits when the first word address is given in 4 digit hexadecimal Address H The higher 2 digits when the first word address is given in 4 digit hexadecimal No of Read Words command The number of words of read data is speci fied in 1 byte 2 digit hexadecimal The range is 01 to 64 Hex 1 to 100 deci mal Read data response The specified area word and byte data is returned in order from word L low byte bits 0 to 7 to word H high byte bits 8 to 15 The actual address L address H and number
169. BC DEFO0 1234 5678 9ABC DEFO 1234 5678 9ABC DEFO Note FREAD 700 will not be able to read the last byte in a file that has been written to the Memory Card if the file contains an odd number of bytes Add 00 hexa decimal to the end of the file if necessary to write an even number of bytes to the Memory Card Note The UM and DM Areas contain binary data Set the data type to binary using the type command before reading or writing files using FTP Refer to type on page 299 Note For details on how to use File Memory Instructions refer to the CS CJ Series Instructions Reference Manual W340 307 FTP File Transfer Time 11 8 FTP File Transfer Time File transfers using FTP can require 30 or 40 minutes depending on the capacity of the file Approximate file transfer time are provided in the following table for reference 308 Note All times are in seconds unless otherwise specified E CS1 CPU Units CJ1 CPU Units File system CPU Unit status Operating mode Memory Card PROGRAM Section 11 8 EM File Memory PROGRAM Cycle time Transfers using put 1 KB 0 7s 0 4s 30 KB 45s 2 58S 60 KB 7 48 5 0s 120 KB 14 4 s 11 0s Transfers using get 1 KB 0 3s 0 2s 30 KB 2 85 1 9s 60 KB 49s 3 8 s 120 KB 9 6s 8 6 s CS1 H CPU Units CJ1 H CPU Units CJ1 R CPU Units CJ2 H CPU Units File system CPU Un
170. Bit 5 TCP port number setting for FINS TCP Bit 8 Transmission speed baud rate Bit 9 SNTP server specification method Broadcast Address Setting Meaning Broadcast with host number set to all ones 4 3BSD specifications Broadcast with host number set to all zeroes 4 2BSD specifications Meaning Automatic generation method dynamic Automatic generation method static IP address table reference method Combined method IP address table reference automatic generation dynamic FINS UDP Port Number Setting Bit 4 Meaning 0 Default 9600 1 Unit Setup value FINS TCP Port Number Setting Bit 5 Meaning 0 Default 9600 1 Unit Setup value Baud Rate Setting Bit 8 Meaning 0 Automatic detection 1 Fixed SNTP Server Specification Method Bit 9 Meaning 0 IP address 1 Host name Ethernet Address Response The Ethernet address of the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port is returned Note This Ethernet address is listed on the label on the side of the EtherNet IP Unit or for a built in EtherNet IP port on the CPU Unit 381 FINS Commands Addressed to EtherNet IP Units or Built in EtherNet IP Ports Appendix E Response Codes 0000 Normal end 1001 Command too large CONTROLLER STATUS READ Reads the controller status Command Block 06 01 u Command code Response Block Command Response Communications
171. C be CS CJ series PLCs with a CS CJ series Eth Command to erNet IP Unit built in F lyf EtherNeviP Unit EtherNet IP port or Command Ethernet Units See note 1 Note Inter network com munications are possible with Command to Ethernet networks CPU Unit or other networks such as Controller Link See note 2 Data length excluding SEND instruction 990 words RECV CMND instruction 1 990 bytes max command code instruction 990 words CS CJ series PLC Command Note 1 When two or more Communications Units including the EtherNet IP Units and built in EtherNet IP ports are mounted to a CS CJ series PLC and FINS messages are being used the EtherNet IP Units and built in Ether Net IP ports must be registered in the CS CJ series PLC s local network routing table The commands will not be sent if the Unit is not registered in the routing tables 2 When a CS CJ series EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port is con nected to an Ethernet network message communications can be conduct ed between networks including other Ethernet networks as well as other networks such as Controller Link and SYSMAC LINK Up to eight levels of networks can be crossed provided that routing tables containing local network tables and relay network tables have been registered in the CPU Units of each PLC on the network 3 A Programming Device connected to the CPU Unit of a PLC connected to the network ca
172. Cat No W465 E1 03 EtherNet IP Units OPERATION MANUAL CS1W EIP21 100Base TX CJ1W EIP21 100Base TX CJ2H CPU6L EIP 100Base TX EtherNet IP Units Operation Manual Revised December 2008 Notice OMRON products are manufactured for use according to proper procedures by a qualified operator and only for the purposes described in this manual The following conventions are used to indicate and classify precautions in this manual Always heed the information provided with them Failure to heed precautions can result in injury to people or dam age to property N DANGER Indicates an imminently hazardous situation which if not avoided will result in death or serious injury Additionally there may be severe property damage Z N WARNING Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which if not avoided could result in death or serious injury Additionally there may be severe property damage N Caution Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which if not avoided may result in minor or moderate injury or property damage OMRON Product References All OMRON products are capitalized in this manual The word Unit is also capitalized when it refers to an OMRON product regardless of whether or not it appears in the proper name of the product The abbreviation Ch which appears in some displays and on some OMRON products often means word and is abbreviated Wd in documentation in this sense The ab
173. Communications Port Completion Codes These words contain the completion codes for the corresponding port numbers when network instructions SEND RECV CMND or PMCR have been executed Words A203 to A210 correspond to communications ports 0 to 7 0000 No error Not 0000 Error code A21900 to A21907 Communications Port Error Flags Bits A21900 to A21907 turn ON when an error occurred during execution of a network instruction SEND RECV CMND or PMCR Bits 00 to 07 correspond to communications ports 0 to 7 0 Normal end 1 Error end A30200 to A30215 CPU Bus Unit Initializing Flags Bits A30200 through A30215 turn ON while the corresponding CPU Bus Units Units 0 through 15 respectively are initializing The bits will turn ON either when power is turned ON or when a CPU Bus Unit Restart Bit A50100 to A50115 is turned ON 0 Not initializing 1 Initializing System will automatically turn the flag OFF when ini tialization has been completed A40203 CPU Bus Unit Set ting Error Flag Non fatal error Bit A40203 is turned ON when the CPU Bus Units actually installed differ from the Units registered in the I O tables The ERR ALM indicator on the front of the CPU Unit will flash but CPU operation will continue The unit number of the CPU Bus Unit involved is stored in word A427 0 No setting error 1 Setting error A40207 CPU Bus Unit Error Flag Non fatal error Bit A4
174. D 367 401 sockets reading status 401 TCP sockets status 367 testing communications 387 specifications 10 CJ series general specifications 11 12 communications specifications 13 CS series general specifications 10 FINS communications 230 FTP server 291 message communications 203 Network Configurator 24 startup procedure 54 static electricity xxiv precautions xxv status reading memory status 399 reading protocol status 395 reading socket status 401 status flags for tag data links 196 subnet mask 113 subnet masks 75 reading from Unit 380 switch Node Address Setting Switch 23 switching hub connection methods 62 environment precautions 62 functions 35 precautions when selecting 35 recommended models 34 switching hub types 34 symbol table 134 SYSMAC BUS 2 230 SYSMAC LINK 230 system configuration 4 changing 31 T tag 135 136 tag data link connection 132 tag data link parameters downloading 133 178 setting 133 uploading 181 verifying 182 Tag Data Link Start Bit 92 Tag Data Link Stop Bit 92 tag data links checking bandwidth usage 38 data areas 135 delay time 273 functions 133 T O response time 276 ladder programming 193 maximum T O response time 279 overview 132 required settings 54 specifications 133 status flags 196 structure 132 tag data links cyclic communications 6 tag set 133 135 136 tag sets creating 150 target 132 target devices setting
175. D A451 Work WR Area Parameter 3 f Project lt For Help press F1 NewPLC1 Offline rung 0 0 0 100 NUN 1 Start the CX Programmer and open the project that was saved 2 From the devices registered in the Network Configurator double click the icon of the device for which to import the network symbols The Edit Device Parameter Dialog Box will be displayed You can also right click the icon and select Device Parameters Edit from the pop up menu 3 Click the Import Button on the Tag Sets Tab Page of the Edit Device Pa rameter Dialog Box 159 Network Configurator Operations Section 6 2 Edit Device Parameters Connections Tag Sets In Consume Out Produce Name New Edit Tags Delete all of unused Tag Sets Usage Count 0 256 Ce To From File A confirmation message will be displayed Click the Yes Button t All of the network variables will be imported e OK The symbols will be imported as shown below on the Tag Sets Tab Page Each symbol will be imported into a different tag set and the device param eters will be automatically edited The symbol name will be used for the tag set name 160 Network Configurator Operations Section 6 2 Edit Device Parameters Connections Tag Sets In Consume Out Produce Name NO1_InData N02_InData New Edit Delete Expand All Collapse All New eet Dette LEmendat Cotepseat Edit Tags
176. DE2XCompoNet Master Unit CJIW CRM21 MODE3 CompoNet Master Unit CJIW CRM21 MODE8 CompoNet Master Unit GJ1W DRM21 DeviceNet Master Unit CJT W EIP21 EtherNet IP Unit for CJ CJTW ETN11 Ethernet Unit CJIW ETN21 ETN11 Mode Ethernet Unit CJTW ETN21 ETN21 Mode Ethernet Unit CJIW FLN22 FL net Unit 100BaseTX 4 Enter the unit number of the EtherNet IP Unit and click the OK Button Add Unit Unit name EtherNet IP Unit for GJ Unit type CGJ1W EIP21 Unit J input range 0 15 Comment The EtherNet IP Unit will appear in the PLC IO Table Window 69 Creating I O Tables Section 3 6 th PLG IO Table NewPLC1 File Edit View Options Help alka gle elass T CJ1H CPU65H Inner Board Qg 0000 Main Rack q 00 1500 CJ1W EIP21 EtherNet IP Unit for CJ Unit 7 01 0000 Empty Slot q 02 0000 Empty Slot 7 03 0000 Empty Slot wf a MANNI Cun Clas 5 Connect the CX Programmer online to the PLC and transfer the I O tables to the PLC by selecting Options Transfer to PLC Note The built in EtherNet IP port on a CU2 CPU Unit is registered in the I O tables by default It is registered as a built in port Inner Board with a model number of CJ2B EIP21 You cannot delete a built in port from the I O tables PLC 10 Table NewPLCI fa SIAR File Edit View Options Help anla alle sle elal T CJ2H CPU65 EIP aa Built in Port Inner Board 7 500 CJ2B EIP21 Built In EtherNet IP Port for CJ2 g 09
177. Data Creation Word Contents Meaning D0005 00 10 Number of reception words 16 D0006 00 03 Source network number 3 D0007 20 00 Source node number 32 Source unit address 0 D0008 07 05 Response required Communications port No used 7 Number of retries 5 D0009 00 00 Response monitor time Default A total of 16 words of data beginning from word A100 at network number 3 node number 32 unit address 0 the PLC is received at word CIO 2000 onwards of the local node 120002 A20207 See note 1 m Reset Input Creation 120002 A21907 Reception Error Display 120002 120003 A21907 I Reception Data Processing XFER 70 If there is no reception processing completion error the 16 words of data received from word CIO 2000 on wards is stored at D00040 onwards Note 1 With CS CJ series PLCs the Communications Port Enabled Flags at bits 0 to 7 in word A202 turn OFF even when the PCMR 260 instruction is be ing executed using the ports corresponding to those flags 2 Before using the sample program as is confirm that the memory areas words and bits used in the sample program are not already being used in the user program o r by Special I O Units 241 Precautions on High Traffic in FINS Communications Section 8 7 8 7 Precautions on High Traffic in FINS Communications 242 When applications are constructed using FINS communications servic
178. E 3G3MV PDRT2 eds E 3G3FV PDRT1 5IN eds E 3G3PV PDRT1 SINV1 eds E 3G3FY PDRT1 5INV1 eds E 3G3PV PDRT2 eds E 3G3FV PDRT2 eds E 3G3RY P105T8 DRT E eds E 3G3MV PDRT1 51N eds E 3G3RY PDRT2 eds E 3G3MV PDRT1 5INV1 eds E 3G8F7 DRM21 eds lt File name Save as type Electronic Data Sheet eds Device Information Device Type Product Name Revision 3 Input the folder and file names and click the Save Button The EDS file will be saved Searching EDS Files EDS File Search To search the devices EDS files displayed in the Hardware List use the following procedure 1 Select EDS file Find The following window will be displayed Find EDS File Find what Match case 2 Input the character string and click the Find Next Button 3 When there is a matching device found the cursor will move to that position 4 To quit the search operation click the Cancel Button Note 1 The device will be found if it is located below the present cursor position 2 To search all the devices select Hardware in the Hardware List before performing the search pro cedure 408 EDS File Management Displaying EDS File Properties EDS File Property To display the properties of the EDS file use the following procedure 1 Select the desired hardware device from the Hardware List 2 Select EDS File Property The following window will be displayed CJ1W EIP21 Rev 1 Property Ge
179. ECV 098 With the RECV 098 instruction the data in m number of words starting from the beginning word S at the remote node node address M is received at the words starting from the beginning word D at the local node Local node Remote node number N 15 0 15 0 s Number m of words m RECV 98 S S Remote node beginning word D D Local beginning word C C First word of control data below 15 o 15 10 87 3 0 c i i c 3 o o Number of reception words m L Oar todo tts ties 0001 to 03DE Hex 1 to 990 words Communications port number 0 to 7 15 1 87 0 c 0 0 i Response 0 Required Destination network number 00 Hex Local network 01 to 7F Hex 1 to 127 1 Not required 15 11 87 o C 2 C 4 1 L if 1 L L P inati F Response monitor time Gestation Unt eco 0000 Heny 2 10 to 1F Hex Unit 0 to 15 0001 to FFFF Hex 0 1 to 6 553 5 s E1 Hex Inner Board in units of 0 1 s FE Hex Unit connected to network Remote node number M send source 00 to FE Hex 0 to 254 The range of node addresses is different for networks other than Ethernet Note The message services function does not guarantee that a message will reach the destination node A message may be lost during transmission due to fac tors such as noise In order to prevent this from occurring when using mes sage services it is common to set up retry processing at the node from which instructions are iss
180. EDS file is correct Check the origina tors connection set tings Error code returned from target The Product Type did not match when opening connection This error does not occur Depends on the tar get s specifications Contact the target device s manufac turer Confirm that the tar get device s EDS file is correct Check the origina tors connection set tings Error code returned from target The Major Minor Revisions did not match when opening con nection Check the major and minor revi sions set for the target device and connection If nec essary obtain the EDS file and set it again Depends on the tar get s specifications Contact the target device s manufac turer Confirm that the tar get device s EDS file is correct Check the origina tors connection set tings 348 Error code returned from target The tag set specified in the con nection s target variables does not exist Check whether the originator and target tag sets and tags are set correctly CJ2 CPU Units Only Check sym bol settings in the CPU Unit Depends on the tar get s specifications Contact the target device s manufac turer Check the origina tor s connection set tings Check whether the target s tag sets and tags are set cor rectly CJ2 CPU Units Only Check symbol set tings in the CPU Unit Connection Status Codes and
181. FILE COPY Copies files from one file memory to another file memory in the same sys tem FILE NAME CHANGE Changes a file name MEMORY AREA FILE TRANSFER Transfers or compares data between the I O memory area and the file memory PARAMETER AREA FILE TRANSFER Transfers or compares data between the parameter area and the file memory PROGRAM AREA FILE TRANSFER Transfers or compares data between the UM User Memory area and the file memory CREATE DELETE DIRECTORY Creates or deletes a directory Debugging FORCED SET RESET Force sets or force resets bits or releases force set status FORCED SET RESET CANCEL Cancels all bits that have been force set or force reset 8 6 4 Writing Programs Programs incorporating the SEND 090 RECV 098 and CMND 490 instructions are generally created using the Communications Port Enabled Flag and the Communications Port Error Flag as input conditions CS CJ series CPU Units have eight communications ports Only one instruction can be executed at any given port at one time however so the program must not overlap the use of any of the ports A program example is provided below Communications port EtherNet IP Unit CPU Unit H Instruction 1 A Instruction 2 H Instruction 3 PE g 1 linstruction 4 eee H Instruction 5 sp eee Instruction 6 S Instruction 7 rents H Instruction 8
182. For parity errors generated when data transferred between CS CJ series CPU Bus Unit and CPU Unit For watchdog timer errors in CS CJ series CPU Bus Unit 0400 to 040F CPU Bus settings error last 2 digits are binary code for the Unit No System error FAL FAL instruction executed Note Error clear codes are 1 word 2 byte data so the above codes are specified with the low byte first The low to high bytes for the above codes are set as high to low bytes in I O memory when setting the codes as data for operand S of CMND 490 For example to specify battery error OOF7 Hex specify the error code as F7 Hex followed by 00 Hex as shown in the following diagram 10 C4 oo 65 F7 00 2F The class ID depends on the unit version B Version 2 0 The class ID is C4 t Version 1 0 The class ID is 2F Class ID Attribute ID Service Code Attribute Value Instance ID 263 Receiving Explicit Messages Section 9 2 CPU Unit Status Read Service Code 40 Hex This PLC Object service reads status details operation status operating mode fatal and non fatal errors etc from the CPU Unit Command Block C4 40 2F 00 i 3 The class ID depends on the unit version Version 2 0 The class ID is C4 Version 1 0 The class ID is 2F Class ID Service Code Instance ID Note A body format of either 8 bits or 16 bits is possible Response Bloc
183. Get the time informa Required tion from the SNTP server Auto Adjust Time Optional Retry timer Optional Change when the default set ting of 10 seconds is unacceptable Adjust Time Optional IP Address Required 3 8 TCP IP and Link Port No Rarely required Settings on page 73 Change when a set ting other than the default setting of 53 is required Retry timer Optional Change when the default set ting of 10 seconds is unacceptable Note When the Server specification type field in Auto Adjust Time Tab is set to Host name 314 Using the Automatic Clock Adjustment Function Section 12 2 12 2 3 Auto Adjust Time The contents in the CPU Bus Unit System Setup that are set for using mail send and receive functions are shown in the CX Programmer s Edit Parame ters Dialog Box CJ1W EIP21 Edit Parameters TCP IP Ethemet FINS UDP FINS TCP FTP Auto Adjust Time Status Area SNMP SNMP Trap Not get the time information from the SNTP server Get the time information from the SNTP server Auto Adjust Time fo fo 5 fo h m s Server Specification Type IP Address Host Name Port No 0 default 123 Retry Timer sec 0 default 10 Adjust Time g h m 12 00 to 13 00 Set Defaults Cancel Contents Default Get the time Enable to set the CPU Unit s clock to the time at the Not information from S
184. ID command The instance ID of the destination of the explicit message Service data Command response The data defined for the services codes No of bytes received response The number of bytes received from the destination node address remote node Destination node address remote node The node address of the OMRON Special I O Slave Unit or Slave manufac tured by another company to which the explicit message was sent is returned Error code response An error code defined in EtherNet IP 1 byte general status and 2 byte addi tional status is returned The data format is DeviceNet compatible 2 bytes total so the returned Error Code is converted to the 1 byte general status and a 1 byte additional status high byte only 1 e The EXPLICIT MESSAGE SEND command is used to send an EtherNet IP defined explicit message to another company s node and receive a response e Unlike other FINS commands the destination of a EXPLICIT MESSAGE SEND command s control data is the local node s EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port and the actual destination node is specified in the command s route path Always specify the local node s EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port in the CMND 490 instruction s control data An error will occur if another node s Master Unit is specified as the destination e When an EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port receives an explicit message it automatic
185. INS node address IP address host number m IP Address Table Method and Combined Method With these methods the IP address and the FINS node address setting in the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port have no particular relationship Set both the FINS node address and the IP address so that they are not dupli cated in the network Sending FINS Messages When the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port sends a FINS mes from EtherNet IP Units or sage it is necessary to determine the remote node s IP address UDP port Built in EtherNet IP Ports number and TCP port number The relationships between all addresses such as remote FINS node addresses and IP addresses are managed by an internal table at the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port Remote FINS node Remote IP address Connection Remote port address Example number Example 192 168 250 1 192 168 250 2 192 168 250 254 When the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port is turned ON or restarted the internal table is generated automatically from the various set tings that have been made Depending on the setting method used data such as remote IP addresses may be changed dynamically Dynamic changes can be prohibited 115 IP Addresses in FINS Communications Section 5 2
186. IP routers such as broadband routers interfacing with the Internet All other nodes in the intranet including the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port are allocated private addresses Intranet Personal computer CX Programmer etc Firewall I Section 5 3 Private address Internet Global address Intranet poe ef i _ Global address ze router Firewall Communications Services That Require Global Addresses for EtherNet IP Units and built in EtherNet IP ports 126 Private address required Be Soe eae eae ae eee Not output to Internet A Not output to Internet Private address Personal computer CX Programmer etc I I Ethernet EtherNet IP i T l I I A global address is required for the IP addresses of the EtherNet IP Units and built in EtherNet IP port when the following communications services are used over the Internet e FINS communications services e Explicit message communications services Private and Global Addresses Section 5 3 5 3 2 Using a Private Address for the EtherNet IP Unit Intranet FINS communications FINS TCP client computer Explicit messages with CX Programmer etc or CIP client computer with Network Config
187. In this case 17 EtherNet IP Units or built in EtherNet IP ports are being used and one Unit is receiving 200 words of data from each of the other Units at a packet interval RPI of 5 ms Thus 16 tag data link connections are used The length of the cables between the Units is 50 m for all connections Send processing delay 5 ms x 15 5 100 0 7475 ms Cable delay 545 ns x 50 m 100 272 5 ns Switching hub delay 0 7 ms Receive processing delay 1 16 x 0 043 ms 1 688 ms Tag data link delay 0 7475 ms 0 0002725 ms 0 7 ms 1 688 ms 3 14 ms EHA EGR ee 0 PLC 1 PLC 2 PLC 3 PLC 17 5ms 2 200 words 5ms 3 200 words 200 words x16 5ms 17 200 words 275 I O Response Time in Tag Data Links Section 10 2 10 2 I O Response Time in Tag Data Links 10 2 1 Timing of Data Exchanges The following diagram shows the timing of tag data link exchanges between the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port and CPU Unit The data exchange is processed during the CPU Unit s peripheral servicing for Special I O Units and CPU Bus Units Send data is processed at regular intervals and received data is processed together with the send data when new data has been received from other nodes The following diagram shows the timing of data exchanges CPU Unit s cycle time k gt Basic Basic PLC processing pro Program VO refreshi
188. J1W EIP21 EIP Other company s device Configuration 3 Other company s device CS1W EIP21 CJ1W EIP21 CJ2H CPU EIP The following table shows the likely causes of the errors causes for each con figuration and connection status code Source of error Normal status code The connection has been opened and the tag data link is communicating normally Handling Configuration 1 Configuration 2 Configuration 3 Error code returned from target Attempted to open multiple con nections at the same connec tion This error does not occur Depends on the tar get s specifications Contact the target device s manufac turer for details on preventing the error from occurring in the future Depends on the orig inator s specifica tions Contact the origina tor device s manufac turer for details on preventing the error from occurring in the future Error code returned from target Attempted to open a connection with an unsupported transport class This error does not occur Confirm that the tar get supports Class 1 Confirm that the originator supports Class 1 Duplicate consumers Attempted to open multiple con nections for single consumer data If the tag data link is stopped or started this error may occur accord ing to the timing but the system will recover automati cally Depends on the tar get s spec
189. J2 after the Unit settings were made Flashing red IP Advanced Settings Error Unit operation Flag status There is an error in the parameter set tings stored in the Unit s non volatile memory An error can occur when power is interrupted while data is being written to non volatile memory The Unit Error Occurred Flag n 10 bit 00 and Invalid Communications Parameter Flag n 12 bit 04 will go ON Section 14 2 Countermeasure Download the Unit Setup from the tab pages of the Edit Parameters Dialog Box of the CX Pro grammer and download the device parameters from the Network Configurator If the error recurs replace the Ether Net IP Unit or fora built in EtherNet IP port the CPU Unit Identify the error log data correct the settings and then download the Unit Setup from the tab pages of the Edit Parameters Dialog Box of the CX Programmer Flashing red 342 Ethernet Basic Settings Error Download the set tings from the TCP IP or Ethernet Tab Pages of the Edit Parameters Dialog Box of the CX Pro grammer or down load the TCP IP settings from the Network Configu rator Using the LED Indicators and Display for Troubleshooting Errors Related to the Network Indicator 7 segment Section 14 2 The 7 segment display alternates between the node address and error code Ethernet Link Not Detected The link wit
190. LE FREAD 700 and WRITE DATA FILE FWRIT 701 in the CPU Unit The CSV format is configured according to the specified FREAD 700 and FWRIT 701 parameters as follows Data format Use of CRs and CR position Words delimited by commas e No CRs Double words delimited by com CR after every 10 fields mas e CR after each field e CR after every 2 fields e CR after every 4 fields e CR after every 5 fields e CR after every 16 fields If word data from the I O memory 1234 hexadecimal 5678 hexadecimal up to DEFO hexadecimal is contained in an attached file in CSV format the word data will be converted into ASCII format in word or double word units The words are delimited by inserting comma delimiters 2C and CRs after specified fields CR LF ODOA 306 Using File Memory Section 11 7 Example Data format using words delimited by commas with CRs after every 10 fields I O memory 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1234 5678 9ABC DEFO 1234 5678 9ABC DEFO 1234 5678 10 9ABC DEFO 1234 5678 9ABC DEFO 1234 5678 9ABC DEFO CSV file contents 31 32 33 34 2C 35 36 37 38 2C 39 41 42 43 2C 123 4 567 8 9 ABC 35 36 37 38 op oa 39 41 42 43 2C 5 6 7 8 CRI LFI9 ABC TXT file displayed as text 1234 5678 9ABC DEFO 1234 5678 9ABC DEFO 1234 5678 9A
191. LOSED Connection closed 00000001 LISTEN Waiting for connection 00000002 SYN SENT SYN sent in active status 00000003 SYN RECEIVED SYN received and sent 00000004 ESTABLISHED Already established 00000005 CLOSE WAIT FIN received and waiting for completion 00000006 FIN WAIT 1 Completed and FIN sent 00000007 CLOSING Completed and exchanged FIN Awaiting ACK 00000008 LAST ACK FIN sent and completed Awaiting ACK 00000009 FIN WAIT 2 Completed and ACK received Awaiting FIN 0000000A TIME WAIT After closing pauses twice the maximum seg ment life 2MSL 390 FINS Commands Addressed to EtherNet IP Units or Built in EtherNet IP Ports Appendix E Response Codes Response code Description Normal end Node address setting error Local IP address setting error CPU Unit error execution not possible Command too large Command too small Connection number not set from 1 to 16 IP ADDRESS TABLE WRITE Writes the IP address table Command Block Command Number IP address Te IP address code of records table records table records Response Block Command Response code code Parameters Number of Records Command The number of records to write is specified in hexadecimal between 0000 and 0020 0 to 32 decimal in the command If this value is set to 0 the IP address table will be cleared so that no records are registered IP Address Table Records
192. Memory Card ftp gt put PLAN IOM File written 200 PORT command successful 150 opening data connection for plan iom IPaddress port 226 Transfer complete bytes received in seconds bytes s ftp gt E 8 End FTP ftp gt bye FTP ended 221 Goodbye m 310 SECTION 12 Automatic Clock Adjustment Function This section provides an overview of the automatic clock adjustment function including details on specifications required settings operations from CX Programmer and troubleshooting 12 1 Automatic Clock Adjustment 0 00 0 00 cee eee eee ee 312 2 1 1 tOVErvieW eis coisceeed she REGS Sk Saks D dee ae Game as eet g bed 312 12 1 2 Specifications iae hse Geil Ween a E AA 313 12 2 Using the Automatic Clock Adjustment Function 313 122221 Procedure io sasoe sus dots otis date wag ta sw al sci oe Sees 313 12 2 2 Settings Required for Automatic Clock Adjustment Function 314 12 2 3 Auto Adjust Time 0 0c eee ee eee eee 315 12 3 Automatic Clock Adjustment Switch 0 00 0 000000000008 316 12 4 Automatic Clock Adjustment Error Processing 005 316 12 4 1 Automatic Clock Adjustment SNTP Errors 316 12 4 2 Error Log Error Codes for the Automatic Clock Adjustment Function 316 311 Automatic Clock Adjustment Section 12 1 12 1 Automatic Clock Adjustment 12 1 1 Overview The EtherNet IP Unit
193. NS UDP FINS commands are sent from individual appli cations to the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port the respective remote IP addresses and remote port numbers in the internal table are dynamically changed With this method as well FINS nodes are allocated individually for each appli cation on the computer and the respective FINS TCP port numbers that are used are also allocated individually Each application is positioned with a FINS TCP client and requests the opening of a connection with the FINS TCP server of the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port When the connection is established the respective remote IP address and remote port number in the internal table are dynamically changed 5 2 4 Related Products and Communications Setting Methods Models Supporting Automatic Generation Method Dynamic Product Model Series Supports automatic Version generation method dynamic CS series Ethernet 100BASE TX CS1W ETN21_ Yes Unit 10BASE 5 CS1W ETNO1 No Set by automatic 10BASE T CS1W ETN11 generation method or combined method Com munications are not pos sible with personal computers with variable IP addresses CJ series Ethernet 100BASE TX CJ1W ETN21 Yes Unit 10BASE T CJIW ETN11 No Set by automatic CV CVM1 series 10BASE 5 CV500 ETNO1 generation method or Ethernet Unit combined method Com munications are not pos FinsGateway Version 4 xx OF sible with personal lower computer
194. NTP server s clock selected the SNTP The clock can be changed only for the CPU Unit to disabled Server which the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port is mounted Auto Adjust Set the time at which the SNTP server is to be Time accessed to synchronize the clocks When the time that is set here arrives the SNTP server is accessed and the CPU Unit clock is adjusted to match the SNTP server clock Server specifi Select whether the SNTP server used for automatic IP Address cation type clock adjustment is to be specified by IP address or by host domain name i e by host name IP Address Set the IP address for the SNTP server that is to be used for automatic clock adjustment This setting is enabled only when server specification by IP address has been selected Host name Set the host domain name i e the host name for the SNTP server that is to be used for automatic clock adjustment This setting is enabled only when server specification by host name has been selected Port No Set the port number for connecting to the SNTP 0 server that is to be used for automatic clock adjust Number ment This setting does not normally need to be 123 is changed used 315 Automatic Clock Adjustment Switch Section 12 3 Contents Default Retry timer Set the time to elapse before retrying when a connec tion to the SNTP server fails This setting does not normally need to be changed
195. O1 FinsGateway Version 4 xx or lower Version 2003 or higher No Set manually so that automatic settings can be used with the automatic generation method Supports IP address table method Programmable Terminal NS Series Open Network Controller ONC No Set manually FINS communications are not possible with personal computers set automati cally by DHCP IP Addresses in FINS Communications Section 5 2 Models that Can Use the Combined Method Model Series Version CS1W ETN21 CS1W ETNO1 CS1W ETN11 CJ1W ETN21 CJ1W ETN11 CV500 ETNO1 Product Supports combined method 100BASE TX 10BASE 5 10BASE T 100BASE TX 10BASE T 10BASE 5 CS series Ethernet Unit No No CJ series Ethernet Unit CV CVM1 series Ethernet Unit FinsGateway No No Version 4 xx or No lower Version 2003 or higher Programmable Terminal NS Series Open Network Controller ONC Yes No Set manually FINS communications are not possible with personal computers set automati cally by DHCP 5 2 5 Pairing IP Addresses and FINS Node Addresses The following table shows the methods for pairing IP address and FINS node addresses and the relation between fixed and variable address for both FINS UDP and FINS TCP Communi IP address determination cations method Method of pairing of IP addresses and FINS node addresses Client pers
196. P Unit CPU Unit 31 oS ees ee ee ee a ies T de PLC f i arget node s operating information i 16 words EtherNet IP Unit gt CPU Unit 47 Be ee el 48 Target node PLC s error information EtherNet IP Unit gt CPU Unit 16 words 63 Le ee Registered Target These flags indicate the registration status of the target nodes and are valid Node Table only when the EtherNet IP Unit is the originator of the connection For details EtherNet IP Unit to on the default settings refer to 4 2 2 Details of the Allocated CIO Area Words CPU Unit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 3 2 1 0 0 o 1 16 2 36 32 3 55 52 48 4 7 nafa fo fo fo 64 5 85 jee fes es es ee or 0 6 103 98 97 96 7 119 118 117 116 115 114 113 112 8 135 130 129 128 9 151 150 149 148 147 146 145 144 10 reel aes see teal tee Aah ee 11 183 Bene 177 176 12 199 193 192 14 231 228 Paces 225 224 is ES eee cael oes Oe eae by Registered Target Indicates that the node s tag Node Flags data link is registered Indicates that the node s tag data link is not registered 105 User Settings Area Section 4 4 Normal Target Node Table EtherNet IP Unit to CPU Unit Target Node PLC Operating Information EtherNet IP Unit to CPU Unit 106 These flags indicate the connection status of the target nodes With revision 2 or higher the flag turns ON after all data for multiple co
197. P port The following example shows how to use the PING command in the host com puter Command Method Input the following command at the host computer s prompt ping IP_address host_name The destination is specified by its IP address or host name If the host name is used the host name must be defined in the etc hosts file Note The PING command is not supported by some host computers 84 Communications Test Section 3 11 Application Example In this example a PING command is sent to the node at IP address 130 25 36 8 The in the example represents the host computer prompt Normal Execution ping 130 25 36 8 lt Executes the PING command PING 130 25 36 8 56 data bytes 64 bytes from 130 25 36 8 icmp_seq 0 time 0 ms 64 bytes from 130 25 36 8 icmp_seq 0 time 0 ms 64 bytes from 130 25 36 8 icmp_seq 0 time 0 ms lt Press the Ctrl C Keys to cancel execution 130 25 36 8 PING Statistics 9 packets transmitted 9 packets received 0 packets loss round trip ms min avg max 0 1 16 Error Occurred png 130 25 36 8 lt Executes the PING command PING 130 25 36 8 56 data bytes lt Press the Ctrl C Keys to cancel execution 130 25 36 8 PING Statistics 9 packets transmitted 9 packets received 0 packets loss Refer to the OS command reference manual for your computer for details on using the PING command 85 Communications Test 86 Section
198. P21 GUT W EIP21 CJ CJ1W EIP21 CJ CUT WHEIP21 CU C AD Eee gray Offline Default no configuration turquoise edge green Idle CPU Unit of PLC is in PROGRAM mode Communications normal CPU Unit of PLC is in RUN or MONI blue TOR mode Warning A non fatal error has occurred in the CPU Unit of the yellow PLC red Alarm A fatal error has occurred in the CPU Unit of the PLC 192 Ladder Programming with Tag Data Links Section 6 3 6 3 Ladder Programming with Tag Data Links 6 3 1 Ladder Programming Related to Tag Data Links Example of Programming to Detect Normal Status If data in the ladder program is linked by tag data links add conditions 1 to 4 in the ladder program for that data If you want to use target node PLC flags as input conditions add conditions 5 and 6 For details on the various flags refer to 4 2 CIO Area Allocations Conditions showing the EtherNet IP Unit s Tag Data Links are enabled 1 The Unit Error Occurred Flag n 10 bit 00 is OFF 2 and the Online Flag n 11 bit 00 is ON 3 and the Tag Data Link Operating Flag n 11 bit 01 is ON Conditions showing that connections are established with the target device and tag data links are operating 4 The corresponding Normal Target Node Flag in words n 20 to n 23 is ON The location of the Normal Target Node Flags depends on the layout set ting For details on the layout s
199. PU Unit status read write CPU Unit I O memory read write Explicit messages can be received from the following sources e EtherNet IP nodes made by other manufacturers OMRON PLCs with a CS CJ series EtherNet IP Unit or a CPU Unit with a built in EtherNet IP port Messages from CS CU series EtherNet IP Units and built in EtherNet IP ports must be CIP unconnected messages UCMM Messages from CS CJ series EtherNet IP Units and built in EtherNet IP ports must be CIP unconnected messages UCMM Example CS CJ series CS CJ series EtherNet IP Unit EtherNet IP Unit CS Cu series Other company s CS CJ series CPU Unit Ethernet node CPU Unit Explicit messages can be sent Note For an EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port with version 2 0 or higher change the class ID of the PLC Object from 2F hex to C4 hex When using a PLC Object with a DeviceNet Unit or EtherNet IP Unit with ver sion 1 0 and converting to EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port with a version 2 0 or higher the class ID must be changed according to the commu nications application 258 Receiving Explicit Messages 9 2 1 List of PLC Object Services Section 9 2 PLC Objects provide the following services Status Read Write for CPU Units Services Service Class ID code CPU Unit Informa tion Read C4 Hex 2F Hex See note CPU Unit Write CPU Unit Status Read Instance ID Request service data
200. Particular Device s RPI Setting The usage of capacity can be adjusted for only a particular device by changing the packet intervals RPI for all of the device s connections to gether In this case the usage of capacity will also change for the devices that are the target devices of the connection which was adjusted a Click the Set Packet Interval RPI Button at the bottom of the Usage of Device Bandwidth Dialog Box Set Packet Interval RPD b The Set Packet Interval RPI Dialog Box will be displayed In the Tar get Device Area deselect the target devices that are not being adjust ed by removing the check marks Set Packet Interval RPD Packet Interval RPD 500 ms 05 100000 ms Target Device c Input a new RPI value and click the OK Button Method 3 Changing a Particular Connection s RPI Setting The usage of capacity can be adjusted by individually changing the packet intervals RPI setting for a particular connection In this case the usage of capacity will also change for the device that is the target device of the connection which was adjusted Checking Bandwidth Usage and Adjusting the RPI Section 2 3 Click the Close Button at the bottom of the Usage of Device Bandwidth Dialog Box Double click the device that is set as the originator of the desired con nection The Edit Device Parameters Dialog Box will be displayed Edit Device Parameters Cc Connections Tag Sets Un
201. RECV or FAL is executed the instruction s processing will have higher priority so the data processing time may be longer 10 2 3 Effect on the CPU Unit s Cycle Time The CPU Unit s cycle time is affected when the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port refreshes tag data and status data with the CPU Unit This effect depends on the size of the tag data links and can be approximated with the values in the following table When there are multiple EtherNet IP Units or built in EtherNet IP ports the effect is cumulative CPU Unit Effect of EtherNet IP Unit or built Total effect when tag data links are being used in EtherNet IP port only 0 25 ms 0 25 ms 1 5 ms Number of words x 1 us 0 17 ms 0 17 ms 0 1 ms Number of words x 0 7 us 0 1 ms 0 1 ms 0 1 ms Number of words x 0 7 us 0 2 ms 0 2 ms 1 5 ms Number of words x 1 us 0 1 ms 0 1 ms 0 1 ms Number of words x 0 7 us CPU Rack 0 1 ms CPU Rack Value from left column 0 1 ms No of words trans Expansion Rack 0 13 ms ferred x 0 33 us See note 2 Expansion Rack Value from left column 0 1 ms No of words transferred x 0 45 us Long distance 0 2 ms x Coefficient 2 0 2 ms x Coefficient 2 1 5 ms Number of words x 1 us x Rack Coefficient 3 Note 1 When one of the listed CPU Bus Units is mounted in a CS series Long distance Rack the I O refreshing time is extended by the distance to the Rack in which the Unit
202. Register the rout ing tables in the CPU Unit again and restart the CPU Unit Replace the CPU Unit if the error recurs A memory error has occurred for the tag data base in the CPU Unit CJ2 CPU Unit only e lf a symbol tag name is specified in the tag data link or Unit Status Area refreshing the user specified status area is stopped and tag data links will oper ate as follows e Tag data link com munications will be stopped for origina tor connections e Communications will continue for target connection If PLC status is included in the communications data the target node PLC error flag for the relevant target node will be turned ON Note Recovery is possible from this error If recovery is achieved the tag data links will be restarted to return to nor mal status Download the tag data to the CPU Unit again Replace the CPU Unit if the error recurs Flashing red CPU Unit event servic ing timeout A timeout occurred during an operation such as reading the routing tables to the CPU Unit Operation stops Replace the Ether Net IP Unit or fora built in EtherNet IP port the CPU Unit if the error recurs when the Unit is restarted Flashing red Routing table error There is a logic error in the rout ing table set tings The Unit continues operating without the routing tables Create the routing tables again Flashing red
203. SAGE SEND Sends a explicit request message to the specified object and receives a response The rightmost 8 bits of the remote destination IP address are used as the remote MAC ID and the remote IP address is the network ID of the local IP address the rightmost 8 bits of the remote IP address Command Block j ke of T SS 28 01 468 bytes max l A E A A _ Command Class ID Instance ID Service Data code Service Code Destination node address Response Block ko e Sa 28 01 00 00 498 bytes max E a ee ree 3 Command End Number of Service Data code code bytes received Service Code Destination node address remote node Response Codes Response code Description Normal end The local node s network has not started up Local node setting error A BOOTP errors occurs and the IP address is undetermined Duplicate address error The remote node s network has not started up Remote node busy cannot send No response returned from remote node Monitoring timer timed out Command length exceeds maximum command length Command length is less than minimum command length Command block format does not match Header error 404 FINS Commands Addressed to EtherNet IP Units or Built in EtherNet IP Ports Appendix E 110B Response length exceeds maximum response length 2211 Unit is busy
204. SE Intel R PR07100 YE Network Connection Packet Scheduler FINS IP Conversion Automatic generation Dynamic Automatic generation Static Donot support DHCP client IP table automatic generation IP address table r Cancel A e UDP port number Set the local UDP port number for the personal com puter Ethernet port The default is 9600 e Priority Network Card If multiple Network Cards are mounted at the personal computer select the Network Card that is to be given priority e FINS IP address conver Set the IP address conversion method sion e UDP Nodes Tab Page Automatic Generation Method Dynamic or Passive ETN_UNIT Properties About Network Communication Unit UDP nodes TCF nodes Network number 0 Network type Ethernet Node IP address Model Automatically Conversion 226 Using FINS Applications Section 8 5 e UDP Nodes Tab Page IP Address Table Method or Combined Method ETN_UNIT Properties About Network Communication Unit UDP nodes TCP nodes Network number 0 Network type Ethernet Node IP address Model i amp Add Delete Property Explore cowl amy Click the Add Button and then set the IP address table in the following Ether net Node Definition Dialog Box Ethernet Node Definition Node number 0 aed ao IP address fo fo io jo r Cancel C e Node address Set the remote FINS node address e IP address S
205. Status with the Network Configurator for details on reading the error codes on the Error History Tab Page e For information on preventing high loads in FINS communi cations refer to 8 7 Precautions on High Traffic in FINS Communications 14 6 Troubleshooting with FINS Response Codes The cause of errors that occur when using the SEND 090 RECV 098 or CMND 490 instructions can be identified from the response codes Refer to the description of Communications Port Completion Codes in 8 6 4 Writing Programs for the storage locations of response codes generated by the SEND 090 RECV 098 or CMND 490 instructions This section describes the completion codes produced by EtherNet IP Units For details on completion codes produced by CPU Units other CPU Bus Units or computers equipped with FINS services refer to the device s opera tion manual The 6 7 and 15 bits of the response codes have specific functions The 6 bit will be ON when a non fatal error has occurred in the PLC at the remote node the 7 bit will be ON when a fatal error has occurred in the PLC at the remote node and the 15 bit will be ON when a network relay error has occurred The following table explains the meaning of the completion codes First byte Second byte BE 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 t 0 Main response code RES Sub response code SRES PLC Fatal Error Flag ia PLC Non fatal Error Flag
206. TNO1 CS1W ETN11 CJ1W ETN11 Ethernet Units Oper ation Manual Describes the installation and operation of the 10Base 5 and 10Base T Ethernet Units CS1G H CPU H CS1G H CPU CS1W SCU21 CS1W SCB21 41 EIP CJ2H CPU6 CJ2H CPU6 V1 CJ1G H CPU CJ1G CPU CJ1W SCU41 H Communications Commands Refer ence Manual Describes the C series Host Link and FINS communi cations commands used when sending communications commands to CS series and CJ series CPU Units CJ2H CPU6 CJ2H CPU6 CJ series CJ2 CPU Unit Hardware User s Manual Provides hardware information for the CJ2 CPU Units Information is included on features system configuration component names component functions installation setting procedures and troubleshooting Use together with the CJU series CJ2 CPU Unit Software User s Manual W473 xii CJ2H CPU6 CJ2H CPU6 CJ series CJ2 CPU Unit Software User s Manual Provides software information for the CJ2 CPU Units Information is included on CPU Unit operation internal memory programming setting procedures and CPU Unit functions Use together with the CU series CJ2 CPU Unit Hardware User s Manual W472 Manual number CJ2H CPU6L1 EIP CJ2H CPU6L CS1G H CPU CS1G H CPU H V1 CJ1G H CPU
207. TP server Not use DNS Use the following IP address O Use DNS Speed amp Duplex Speed amp Duplex Auto he Get from the Device L Set to the Device Close 3 Make the necessary settings The IP address is set here Setup TCP IP Configuration Target IP Address 192 168 250 New Configuration O Get the IP address via BOOTP server Not use DNS Use the following IP address O Use DNS IPAddress 192 168 1 1 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Default Gateway o o0 80 0 Speed amp Duplex Speed amp Duplex Auto Get from the Device Set to the Device 4 Transfer the settings to the EtherNet IP Unit Note 1 The transfer function for IP address settings is defined by ODVA specifi cations Target devices that do not support these specifications cannot be set 2 When setting the IP address of the target device with the Network Con figurator connect the devices one at a time and download the TCP IP Configuration s IP address parameters 3 The EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port will restart automatically when the TCP IP Configuration s IP address parameters are downloaded to the Unit from the Network Configurator The Unit must restart in order to enable the parameter settings Download the TCP IP Configuration s IP address parameters only after verifying that restarting the Unit will not cause any problems in the system 4 If the target node addre
208. Take appropriate measures to ensure that the specified power with the rated voltage and frequency is supplied Be particularly careful in places where the power supply is unstable An incorrect power supply may result in malfunction e Install external breakers and take other safety measures against short cir cuiting in external wiring Insufficient safety measures e Make sure that all the Backplane mounting screws terminal block screws and cable connector screws are tightened to the torque specified in the relevant manuals Incorrect tightening torque may result in malfunction e Leave the label attached to the Unit when wiring Removing the label may result in malfunction if foreign matter enters the Unit e Remove the label after the completion of wiring to ensure proper heat dis sipation Leaving the label attached may result in malfunction e Use crimp terminals for wiring Do not connect bare stranded wires directly to terminals Connection of bare stranded wires may result in burning e Observe the following precautions when wiring the communications cable e Separate the communications cables from the power lines or high ten sion lines e Do not bend the communications cables past their natural bending ra dius e Do not pull on the communications cables e Do not place heavy objects on top of the communications cables e Always lay communications cable inside ducts e Use appropriate communications cables e Make s
209. The number of packets addressed to other networks that have been discarded Always 0 Note Refer to MEMORY STATUS READ on page 399 for details on the short buffer ICMP Status Response Ten types 46 items of ICMP status information occupying 4 bytes each are returned in the following sequence Each value is returned as an 8 digit hexadecimal value 1 w 396 The number of times the ICMP error routine was called The ICMP error routine uses ICMP packets to inform the source about errors The routine is called when an illegal packet is received error in IP option processing or error in relay processing or if the object port does not exist when using UDP Always 0 Always 0 Total number of outputs of each packet type during ICMP output The 19 statistical values are returned in the order shown below Contents are defined for 13 types only all other types contain 0 Only 0 3 14 16 and 18 are counted by the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port Echo reply Undefined always 0 Destination unreachable Source quench Routing redirect FINS Commands Addressed to EtherNet IP Units or Built in EtherNet IP Ports Type number Description Undefined always 0 Echo Undefined always 0 Time exceeded Parameter problem Time stamp Time stamp reply Information request Information request reply Address mask request Address mask reply A
210. This is called Instance ID Different Instance ID is assigned to each Object As for Object Class standardized by ODVA Instance ID is given to it according to the ODVA method On the other hand vendor s own Instance ID is decided independently by the vendor Each Attribute also has Attribute ID Each Object is accessed to by using Class ID Instance ID and Attribute ID In the device you can designate Object by specifying these three IDs When requesting Service you should specify Class ID Instance ID and Attribute ID Instance ID and Attribute ID may not be required depending on the Service The Class ID Instance ID and Attribute ID identify a location in the device and are known as the request path casio 2 Attribute 3 Instance ID 1 Instance ID 1 EZ Class ID 1 Device 370 CIP Message Communications Appendix D Route Path Route Path In the CIP unlike the internet protocol the transmission frame contains a complete relay route from the trans mission node to the reception node The described route is called the route path The route path is described as EPATH type The basic concept of the route path is as follows First of all specify a network port of the transmission node with the destination network and specify a node address called the Link Address on that network For the relay node similarly specify a net
211. Total number Total number Total number Total number Total number code code status 3 of of of of of packets received receive errors packets sent send errors send collisions Parameters Communications Status 3 Response 15 14 13 12 1110 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit 2 EtherNet IP basic setting error Bit 3 IP address table error Bit 4 IP router table error Bit 6 Routing table error Bit 9 EtherNet IP advanced setting error Bit 10 BOOTP server error Bit 11 SNTP server error Bit 14 Address mismatch Bit 15 Non volatile memory error Ethernet Basic Setting Error Meaning No error An error such as an invalid IP address was detected during the validity check of parameters related to the TCP IP Interface Object and Ether Link Object Meaning No error Error detected More than 32 records invalid IP address or invalid FINS node address 382 FINS Commands Addressed to EtherNet IP Units or Built in EtherNet IP Ports Appendix E IP Router Table Error Bit 3 Meaning 0 No error 1 Error detected More than 8 records or invalid IP address Routing Table Error Bit 6 Meaning 0 No error 1 Error detected in routing table check Ethernet Advanced Setting Error Bit 9 Meaning 0 No error An error was detected during the validity check of vendor specific parameters for the TCP IP Interface Object and Ether Link Object BOOTP Server Error Bi
212. U Unit Underlined text is keyed in from the FTP client The workstation prompt is indi cated as and the cursor is indicated as W 1 2 3 1 Start FTP and connect to the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port ftg cs1 FTP started connected to cs1 220 IPaddress CS1W ETN21 FTP server FTP version ready Name cs1 root W 2 Enter the login name Name cs1 root CONFIDENTIAL Login name 230 Guest logged in ftp gt E 3 Make sure the Memory Card is inserted The MEMCARD directory will be displayed if there is a Memory Card in the CPU Unit ftp gt Is_ Make sure the Memory Card is inserted 200 PORT command successful 150 opening data connection for Is IPaddress port 0 bytes MEMCARD 226 Transfer complete 15 bytes received in 0 seconds bytes s ftp gt E 309 Host Computer Application Example Section 11 9 4 Change to the MEMCARD directory ftp gt cd MEMCARD Change to MEMCARD directory 250 CWD command successful ftp gt E 5 Change data type to binary ftp gt type binary Binary data type set 200 Type set to I ftp gt E 6 Transfer the file RESULT IOM to the workstation ftp gt get RESULT IOM File read 200 PORT command successful 150 opening data connection for result iom IPaddress port bytes 226 Transfer complete bytes received in seconds bytes s ftp gt E 7 Write the file PLAN IOM to the
213. U Unit set it with the CPU Unit s allocated DM Area words CS CJ Series only e If you want to set a particular IP address and store that local IP address in the EtherNet IP Unit or CPU UNit set the IP address in the TCP IP set tings of the Unit Setup from the CX Programmer e If you want to set a particular IP address and obtain the IP address auto matically from the BOOTP server TCP IP settings of the Unit Setup from the CX Programmer For details refer to 3 8 TCP IP and Link Settings Operation and management of a network can become very difficult if too many nodes are connected on a single network In such a case it can be help ful to configure the system so that a single network is divided up into several subnetworks This can be done by using part of the host number as a subnet number Internally the network can be treated as a number of subnetworks but from the outside it acts as a single network and uses only a single Net work ID To establish subnetworks the Host ID in the IP address is divided into a Sub net ID and a Host ID by using a setting called the Subnet Mask The Subnet Mask indicates which part of the Host ID is to be used as the Subnet ID All bits in the Subnet Mask that correspond to the bits in the IP address used either as the Network ID or Subnet ID are set to 1 and the remaining bits which correspond to the bits in the IP address actually used for the Host ID are set to 0 The following example
214. Unit s I O table is not registered Operation stops Create the I O table Flashing red Simple backup function restore error The simple backup func tion s data resto ration failed The settings of the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port are all cleared unless the backup file does not exist a Memory Card is not mounted or the PLC model does not match Perform the simple backup operation again If the error recurs replace the Memory Card or EtherNet IP Unit or for a built in EtherNet IP port the CPU Unit Flashing red 336 I O bus error An error occurred while exchanging data with the CPU Unit e If the Unit is the orig inator of the tag data link connection it stops communica tions e If the Unit is the tar get of the tag data link connection and the PLC status is included in the com munications data the corresponding Target Node PLC Error Flag will be turned ON Check and correct the CPU Unit s operating environ ment Using the LED Indicators and Display for Troubleshooting Indicator Flashing red 7 segment CPU Unit memory error A parity error occurred during an operation such as reading the routing tables Unit operation Flag status Records the error in the error log If the routing tables were being read the rout ing tables are treated as missing Section 14 2 Countermeasure
215. Unit must restart to enable the parameter settings Download the device parameters only after verifying that restarting the Unit will not cause any problems in the system 2 After the device parameters have been downloaded compare the param eters and verify that the saved parameters are correct 3 Before operating the actual system always verify that the devices in the network are operating as expected in the system design Restarting Actual 23 Operating the Actual System System Operation Start operating the system 33 Selecting the Network Devices Section 2 2 2 2 Selecting the Network Devices 2 2 1 Recommended Network Devices The following table shows the devices recommended for use with the Ether Net IP Model number Inquires Cisco Systems Inc Consult the manufacturer Cisco Systems Inc Main Corpo rate HQ Contec USA Inc Consult the manufacturer CONTEC USA Inc Phoenix Contact Consult the manufacturer Phoenix Contact USA Customer Service Twisted pair 100BASE TX cable Fujikura F LINK E 0 5mm x 4P Fujikura America Inc EtherNet IP compliant cable Connectors STP Plug Modular Panduit Corporation MPS588 Panduit Corporation US Headquar plug ters Boots Tsuko Company MK boot IV LB Tsuko Company Japan Headquar ters Note 1 Always use a switching hub when using tag data links in the network 2 If a repeater hub is used for EtherNet IP tag d
216. When multiple Communications Units are mounted to a single PLC i e CPU Unit e When routing tables are used for one or more other nodes on the same network It is not necessary to set routing tables if one Communications Unit is mounted to the PLC and the nodes are connected as one network The rout ing tables are required not only for nodes communicating via the FINS com munications service but also for all relay nodes on the network 8 4 1 Routing Table Overview Local Network Table Relay Network Table Note The routing tables describe the transmission path for FINS messages when the FINS communications are used It consists of two tables A local network table and a relay network table The local network table is a table describing the correspondences among unit numbers of the Communications Units and Boards mounted to each node Example Unit 04 Unit 05 Unit 06 Unit 07 Local Network Table Local network Unit number address 1 04 2 05 3 06 Network 1 i ox Network 2 Network 3 Network 4 1 The unit number is set 0 to F 1 to 15 using the rotary switch on the front of the EtherNet IP Unit built in port 2 The network address is the number of the network 1 to 127 to which the Communications Unit or Board is connected It is set when the local net work table is created A relay table is a table that shows the nodes to which data should be sent first in or
217. X Integrator and transfer it to each PLC 5 Create a ladder program that includes the SEND 090 RECV 098 and CMND 490 instructions Routing tables are required in the following situations e When communicating with a PLC or computer on another network e g remote programming or monitoring using FINS messages or a CX Pro grammer e When multiple Communications Units are mounted to a single PLC i e CPU Unit e When routing tables are used for one or more other nodes on the same network It is not necessary to set routing tables if one Communications Unit is mounted to the PLC and the nodes are connected as one network 211 FINS TCP Method Section 8 3 8 3 FINS TCP Method 8 3 1 Overview FINS TCP Features The FINS TCP method is a FINS communications method that uses the TCP IP protocol TCP IP is a connection type communications protocol Before a message is sent from one node to another it is necessary to establish a vir tual circuit i e a connection Once a connection has been established com munications are quite reliable The arrival of data that is sent via the connection is confirmed by an acknowledgement ACK response and retries are executed automatically as required When FINS TCP is used it must be determined which node is the server and which nodes are the clients For communications between a personal computer and a PLC the computer should normally be set as the client and the PLC as the ser
218. X Programmer to make the Unit settings for the EtherNet IP Unit Unit version CX Programmer Ver 7 1 or lower Ver 8 0 Ver 8 02 or higher Unit version 1 0 OK Unit version 2 0 OK The following auto update must be applied to use CX Programmer version 8 0 CX Common Components CPS Upgrade Software 2008 08 0302 Unit Version Notation In this manual the unit version of a EtherNet IP Unit is given as shown in the following table Product nameplate Notation used in this manual Special remarks Ver 1 0 or later number Ethernet Unit Ver 1 0 or later See note Information without reference to specific Unit shown to right of the lot Versions applies to all versions of the Unit number Note Some Support Software products call the EtherNet IP Unit version the revi sion Revision is also sometimes used in this manual CIP Revisions and The CIP revisions corresponding to the unit versions of the EtherNet IP Unit Unit Versions are given in the following table Unit version CIP revision Version 1 0 Revision 1 1 Version 2 0 Revision 2 1 XX This section provides general precautions for using the CS CJ series EtherNet IP Units and built in EtherNet IP ports PRECAUTIONS The information contained in this section is important for the safe and reliable application of EtherNet IP Units or built in EtherNet IP ports You must read this section and understand the information contained befo
219. a link connections are set for node 2 the originator and node 1 the target The packet interval RPI for produced data 1 is set to 10 ms The packet interval RPI for produced data 2 is set to 15 ms In this case produced data 1 is sent from node 1 to node 2 every 10 ms and produced data 2 is sent from node 1 to node 2 every 15 ms as shown in the following diagram Node 1 Node 2 Target Produced data 1 Originator Produced data 2 10 ms Produced data 1 15 ms 10 ms Produced data 2 Produced data 1 In a tag data link the number of packets transferred each second is called the bandwidth used or PPS packets per second The PPS is calculated from the RPI as follows for each connection PPS used in a connection pps 1 000 RPI ms The following equation is used to calculate the total number of packets trans ferred by each EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port in 1 second Unit s total PPS Total PPS of originator connections Total PPS of target connections See note Note Connections set as target connections must be added too The maximum number of packets that the Unit can transfer in 1 second called the allowed Unit bandwidth is 6 000 pps so set the connection below this maximum value Example Node 1 has both originator and target connections with send RPI of 100 ms and 2 ms and receive RPI of 1 ms Node 2 has originator connections only with receive RPI of
220. a method whereby a DHCP server collectively manages all of the IP address in a network Nodes that are functioning as clients acquire IP addresses from the DHCP IP Addresses in FINS Communications Section 5 2 server whenever the system is started Therefore at a personal computer using the DHCP service IP addresses may be different with each system startup DHCP service is mainly used for automatic settings in devices such as per sonal computers that are used for client applications Nodes used for server applications such as mail servers are normally allocated fixed IP addresses EtherNet IP Units and built in EtherNet IP ports in PLC systems are also allo cated fixed IP addresses Simultaneously Running Multiple Applications on a Personal Computer FINS UDP Communications Method FINS TCP Communications Method In communications involving previous models multiple communications appli cations were configured on personal computers according to data accessing uses and the fact that no more than one UDP port number for FINS commu nications could be used on any given computer created a problem This Eth erNet IP Unit provides a practical solution with an internal table that pairs remote nodes applications with FINS node addresses enabling dynamic changes FINS nodes are allocated individually for each application on the computer and the respective FINS UDP port numbers that are used are also allocated individually When FI
221. abel 192 168 250 1 SUBNET MASK 255 255 255 0 Affix the label on the front of the EtherNet IP Unit between the node address switches and the Ethernet connector EtherNet iF A 192 168 250 1 SUBNET MASK 255 255 255 0 100BASE TX 10BASE T A EtherNet IP Units or built in EtherNet IP port is equipped with the following indicators that indicate the operating status of the node itself and the overall network CS1W EIP21 EACS EIP NS COMM 100M 10M The MS Module Status indicator indicates the status of the node itself and the NS Network Status indicator indicates the status of the network The COMM 100M and 10M indicators indicate the status of Ethernet com munications The MS and NS indicators can be green or red The COMM 100M and 10M indicators are yellow These indicators can be lit flashing or not lit The fol lowing table shows the meaning of these indicator conditions Refer to SECTION 14 Troubleshooting and Error Processing for details on using these indicators for troubleshooting 19 Nomenclature and Functions Indicator Module Status LED status Lit Section 1 3 Indicated operating status Fatal error Flashing Recoverable error Lit Normal Not lit Power supply OFF Network Status Lit Fatal error Flashing Recoverable error Lit Tag data link and message connections established Flashing Tag da
222. aced Clean the EtherNet IP Unit regularly as described below in order to keep the network in its optimal operating condition e Wipe the Unit daily with a dry soft cloth e When a spot can t be removed with a dry cloth dampen the cloth with a neutral cleanser 2 solution wring out the cloth and wipe the Unit e A smudge may remain on the Unit from gum vinyl or tape that was left on for a long time Remove the smudge when cleaning Never use volatile solvents such as paint thinner benzene or chemical wipes These substances could damage the surface of the Unit Be sure to inspect the system periodically to keep it in its optimal operating condition In general inspect the system once every 6 to 12 months but inspect more frequently if the system is used with high temperature or humid ity or under dirty dusty conditions Prepare the following equipment before inspecting the system Have a standard and Phillips head screwdriver multimeter alcohol and a clean cloth Depending on the system conditions a synchroscope oscilloscope ther mometer or hygrometer to measure humidity might be needed Check the items in the following table and correct any items that are below standard Standard Inspection Ambient and cabinet temperature 0 to 55 C Thermometer conditions Ambient and cabinet humidity 10 to 90 with no condensa Hygrometer tion or icing Dust dirt accumulation None Visual Installation
223. acket discarded 00 hex 06 hex BOOTP 07 hex SNMP 08 hex SNMP Trap 355 Troubleshooting Section 14 5 Detail code Saved in First byte Second byte EEPROM Link OFF error 00 hex 00 hex Verification error Tag data link only Connection instance num Lower byte of IP address ber 0 to 255 Note For details on identifying the cause of the verification error refer to 14 3 Connection Status Codes and Error Processing This error will not be stored when a target node is missing for version 2 0 or higher Tag data link error 00 hex Lower byte of IP address CPU Bus Unit error Variable CPU Bus Unit memory error 01 Read error 02 hex Network parame 02 Write error ter 06 hex Error log 09 hex Identity data OE hex Unit name OF hex Ethernet basic setting 10 hex Ethernet advanced setting 11 hex MAC address 12 hex Status area layout setting 14 hex Term Tag address resolution memory write error Note If a memory error occurs in the error log area of EEPROM the record will not be stored in EEPROM 14 5 Troubleshooting 14 5 1 CPU Unit s ERR ALM Indicator Lit or Flashing Use the following table to troubleshoot the system when the CPU Unit s ERR ALM indicator is lit or flashing when the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port is mounted An I O verification Confirm that the Unit is connected properly error occurred e Check th
224. adcast data Destination unit address FE EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port Response no response flag 1 no response ERROR LOG READ Reads the error log Command Block Command Beginning Number code record of number records Response Block Command Response Maximum Number Number Error log data Error log data code code number of stored of of stored records records records Parameters Beginning Record Number Command The first record to be read The first record number can be specified in the range between 0000 and 003F 0 to 63 decimal where 0000 is the oldest record Number of Records Command Response The number of records to read is specified between 0001 and 0040 1 to 64 decimal in the command The response returns the actual number of records read Maximum Number of Stored Records Response Indicates the maximum number of records that can be stored in the error log The maximum number of error log records depends on the model of CPU Unit or CPU Bus Unit being used In an EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port the maximum number of stored records is fixed at 40 64 decimal Number of Stored Records Response The number of records stored at the time the command is executed is returned Error Log Data Response The specified number of error log records from the beginning record number is returned sequentially The total number of bytes in the error log is calculate
225. ads may be caused by problems in communications particularly FINS communications and UDP sock ets If these values are consistently high check your applications 1 The number of times an attempt was made to secure a short buffer without WAIT when there were no short buffers available 2 The number of times an attempt was made to secure a short buffer with WAIT when there were no short buffers available 3 The number of times an attempt was made to release and secure a short buffer already being used by an other socket when there were no short buffers available 400 FINS Commands Addressed to EtherNet IP Units or Built in EtherNet IP Ports Appendix E Precautions All the above values are set to 0 if Ethernet communications functions are stopped due to improper settings in the system setup These values are cleared when the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port is started or reset Values will be counted only until the maximum values are reached Response Codes 0000 Normal end 1001 Command too large SOCKET STATUS READ Reads the network socket status of the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port Command Block 27 64 _ Command code Response Block a Aa Command Response Socket status 9 77777777777 Socket status code code Parameters Socket Status Response Returns eight types of information in records of 32 bytes each A maximum of 62 records can be returned The format o
226. ag Data Links Only Executing Tag Data Links and Message Communications We recommend using an L2 switching hub without multicast filtering or an L2 switching hub with multicast filtering Using an L2 switching hub with multicast filtering prevents increased traffic due to unnecessary multicast packets so the tag data links can operate at higher speed If either of the following conditions exists the amount traffic will be the same for both kinds of L2 switching hubs with or without multicast fil tering e The tag data links are set to share the same data with all nodes in the net work The multicast packets are transferred to all nodes in the network just like a broadcast e The tag data link settings are all one to one unicast and multicast pack ets cannot be used If multicast filters are being used settings must be made in the switching hub There must be enough multicast filters for all of the networks being used We recommend using an L2 switching hub with multicast filtering and L4 QoS By setting tag data links for higher priority transmission it is possible to pre vent problems such as transmission delays due to message communications traffic and packet losses due to buffer overflow Settings must be made in the switching hub to enable this function and give higher priority to tag data link packets Special settings must be made in the switching hub when using the multicast filtering function and L4 QoS functio
227. al Device Q Wrong Device Comment CJ2B EIP21 Q Wrong Connection s CNO1_01 Register Unregister Q Wrong Tag Set s TagSet1_19 Register Unregister Q Wrong Tag Set s TagSet2_19 Register Unregister Q Wrong Tag s 0000 Registrati Register Unregister Q Wrong Tag s 0010 Registrati Register Unregister e Differences Found in the Device Type Network Configurator x Invalid device type e Click the OK Button or the Close Button 5 If multiple nodes have been selected the following message will be dis played Click the Yes Button Network Configurator N Verifying parameters to next selected device will start e OK Yes The comparison results will be displayed in order of the selected nodes 6 2 11 Starting and Stopping Tag Data Links Automatically Tag data links will start operating automatically immediately after the tag data Starting Tag Data link parameters are downloaded from the Network Configurator They will Links also start automatically when the power to the PLC is turned ON or the CPU Unit is restarted Starting and Stopping All Tag Data Links on the Network Using the Network All tag data links on the network can be started and stopped by selecting I O Configurator Connection Start Stop from the Network Menu Using Software Switches Software switches allocated to the Unit in the CPU Unit can be used to start and stop all of the tag data links on the netw
228. al network table Relay network table Local CPU Bus End Relay Relay No network Unit No No network network node 1 030 06 1 010 030 015 2 2 020 030 015 3 3 Using FINS Applications Section 8 5 8 5 Using FINS Applications 8 5 1 CX Programmer CX Server The following examples show how to connect online from a CX Programmer on an Ethernet network to a PLC on the Ethernet network m System Configuration Example 1 No Routing In this example an online connection is made by FINS UDP to a PLC on an Ethernet network PLC1 in the diagram below from a CX Programmer CX Integrator connected to the Ethernet network Conditions e FINS UDP method e IP Address Conversion Automatic Dynamic generation method CX Programmer CX Integrator Node number 1 EtherNet IP Unit IP address 192 168 250 1 IP address conversion Automatic generation method dynamic EtherNet IP Unit node number 2 EtherNet IP Unit IP address 192 168 250 2 lt Q Target PLC1 Ethernet port Ethernet or EtherNet IP Network address None FINS UDP method CX Programmer s Change PLC Dialog Box Settings for target PLC PLC1 s Change PLC Dialog Box Setting PLC name PLC1 Network classification Ethernet Network Tab Page FINS transmission source address 0 FINS destination Network number 0 Node address 2 Frame length 2 000 bytes Response monitor time 2 seconds Driver Tab Page Workstation node addres
229. all connections the usage of capacity will basi cally increase proportionally as the RPI is made shorter Example If the RPI is set to 50 ms for all connections and the usage of capacity is 40 the usage of capacity may increase to 80 when the RPI is reduced to 25 ms for all connections Performing message communications or other network operations from the Network Configurator such as monitoring or other operations that place a Checking Bandwidth Usage and Adjusting the RPI Section 2 3 load on the network or from the user application when the tag data link band width usage of capacity is between 80 and 100 can create an excessive load on the network and result in timeouts If timeouts occur increase one or all of the RPI settings or reduce the usage of capacity 2 3 3 Adjusting Device Bandwidth Usage Switching Hubs without Multicast Filtering 100 Mbps Hubs Switching Hubs with Multicast Filtering 100 Mbps Hubs Is the network bandwidth usage under 100 Mbps for each node If any node exceeds 100 Mbps change the connections settings such as the RPI Is the usage of capacity under 100 for each nodes If any node exceeds 100 change the connections settings such as the RPI Is the total network bandwidth usage under 100 Mbps If the total bandwidth usage exceeds 100 Mbps the bandwidth of part of the transmission path e g a switching hub or media converter had been exceeded as the result of ho
230. ally returns a response to the message e A time of 2 s is used for request service processing timeouts Set the CMND 490 instruction s timeout set value to 2 s or longer When there is a timeout the error code will be 0102 hex When the CMND 490 instruction s timeout set value is less than 2 s a FINS timeout error response of 0205 hex may occur For details on the parameters of explicit messages refer to the EtherNet IP specifications The Open DeviceNet Vendor Association Inc ODVA can be contacted at the following address to obtain copies of the EtherNet IP and CIP specifi cations ODVA Headquarters 4220 Varsity Drive Suite A Ann Arbor Michigan 48108 5006 USA TEL 1 734 975 8840 FAX 1 734 922 0027 Email odva odva org WEB www odva org Sending Explicit Messages 9 1 1 Section 9 1 Sending Explicit Messages Using CMND 490 With a CS CJ series EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port a CMND 490 in the CPU Unit s ladder program can send CIP UCMM explicit messages Send the CIP UCMM explicit message s command data in a FINS command following the 2810 hex FINS command code The CIP UCMM explicit message s response is received following the 2810 hex FINS command code and the FINS completion code The following command is used CMND S D S First command word D First response word C First control data word Command data is set in order starting with the word specified for the CMND
231. alue in this case Extended Link oe A Segment Type Address Size Port Identifier Link Address Size 5 4 3 2 1 he H 0AN Link Address e ee ee ee eee Link Address 7 6 5 4 3210 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Always set the Link Address to an even number of bytes If there is an odd number of bytes pad the Link Address with 00 so that it has an even number of bytes Logical Segment The Logical Segment is used to specify the request path Segment Format Bits OOOO gt Segment Type Logical Type a Format Logical Type Description 4 3 Class ID Instance ID Member ID Connection Point Attribute ID Special Do not use the logical addressing definition for the Logical Format Service ID Do not use the logical addressing definition for the Logical Format Reserved l olololo 0 0 O Oo Oj OoOoj oj o Logical Format Description 1 0 8 bit logical address 16 bit logical address 32 bit logical address Reserved The 32 bit logical address format is reserved and cannot be used The 8 bit and 16 bit logical address can be used for the Class ID and Instance ID which specify the request path 373 CIP Message Communications Appendix D The 8 bit logical address can be used for the Attribute ID Use the Attribute ID when requesting a Service of a particular Object of a particular device Example of CIP Message Creation
232. and press down the Memory Card Power Supply Switch for 3 seconds DIP switch settings Memory Card EtherNet IP Unit CPU Unit Power Supply Switch All data All setup data Memory Card Compare This operation will compare the data in the EtherNet IP Unit or built in Ether Net IP port setup file in the Memory Card with the device parameters in the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port When the Memory Card Power Supply Switch is pressed the MCPWR indica tor on the front of the CPU Unit will flash once and then remain lit while data is being compared The BUSY indicator will flash while data is being com pared If the data matches the MCPWR and BUSY indicators will turn OFF If the MCPWR and BUSY indicators both flash it means that the data does not match or that an error has occurred Data backed up for revision 1 1 using a simple backup can be restored to an EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port with revision 2 1 but an error will occur in the comparison When changing the unit version refer to 6 2 16 Changing Devices for information on the Network Configurator device change function 13 3 Using the Backup Tool Overview 324 The PLC Backup Tool of the CX Programmer can be used to back up com pare and restore data for all Units or only specified Units in the PLC that is connected online Specified backup PLC Backup Tool folder Default folder C Backup yymmdd_hhmm
233. and so on 8 6 1 Communications Specifications The following table shows the specifications for PLC communications using the SEND 090 RECV 098 and CMND 490 instructions Item Specifications Destination 1 1 SEND 090 RECV 098 CMND 490 instructions 1 N SEND 090 CMND 490 instructions broadcasting Data length SEND 090 990 words 1 980 bytes max broadcasting 727 words 1 454 bytes RECV 098 990 words 1 980 bytes max CMND 490 1 990 bytes max broadcasting 1 462 bytes after FINS com mand code Data contents The following data is sent and received with the execution of each instruction SEND 090 Sends request for remote node to receive data and receives response data RECV 098 Sends request for remote node to send data and receives response data CMND 490 Sends any FINS command and receives response data Communications Ports 0 to 7 Eight transmissions can occur simultaneously port number Response moni 0000 tor time 2 s default 0001 to FFFF 0 1 to 6 553 5 s in 0 1 s increments specified by user Number of retries 0 to 15 retries Note 1 The maximum data length is limited to 512 bytes for data exchange be tween the PLC and SYSMAC LINK Systems or the PLC and SYSMAC BUS 2 Remote I O Systems 2 When broadcasting do not require a response Use the FINS UDP method for broadcasting 230 Communicating between OMRON PLCs Section 8 6 8 6
234. ary DNS Server Sub net Mask 255 255 255 Secondary DNS Server Default Gateway 0 0 0 0 Domain Name l Get IP address from the BOOTP server The BOOTP setting is valid only for next unit IP Router Table testart power restoration Then the BOOTP setting will be cleared The obtained IP address will be automatically IP Address Gateway Address Insert saved as system setting in the unit Broadcast All 4 38SD All0 4 2BSD Set Defaults 4 Place the CX Programmer online with the PLC and transfer the settings to the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port 5 After transferring the settings a message will ask if you want to restart the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port The Unit port must be restart ed to enable the settings 6 Check the 7 segment display for the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port 7 If the 7 segment display is tested again after it goes OFF and finally displays the IP address it indicates that the EtherNet IP Unit has recognized the new TCP IP Configuration settings the IP address in this case Note 1 The EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port must restart in order to enable the parameter settings that are transferred to it Verify that restart ing the Unit port will not cause any problems in the system before restart ing it 2 If the target node address IP address is not set correctly invalid device parameters may be se
235. ata links cyclic communi cations the network s communications load will increase data collisions will occur frequently and stable communications will be impossible 2 2 2 Network Devices Manufactured by OMRON The following network devices are manufactured by OMRON for EtherNet IP networks Function Number of Error detection ports output Switching Hub W4S1 03B Packet priority control QoS None EtherNet IP control data priority W4S1 05B Failure detection Broadcast None storm LSI error detection 10 W4S1 05C 100Base TX Auto Negotiation Provided 2 2 3 Switching Hub Types Unmanaged Layer 2 L2 These switching hubs use the Ethernet MAC address to switch ports Ordi Switching Hubs nary switching hubs have this function Switching hub functions and settings cannot be changed Managed Layer 2 L2 These switching hubs use the Ethernet address to switch ports Switching hub Switching Hubs functions and settings can be changed using special software tools for switch ing hubs running on a network node Analytical data can also be collected These switching hubs provide more advanced functions that unmanaged layer 2 switching hubs 34 Selecting the Network Devices Section 2 2 2 2 4 Switching Hub Functions This section describes the switching hub functions that are important when using an EtherNet IP network When using an EtherNet IP Unit set the follow ing two functions e Multicast
236. ath size Time Out Ticks i Service code when necessary Priority Time Tick Routing rie Last hop a Routing service data data service data 246 e Last Hop Format The following format does not include the route path I I I 2810 Hex Command Transport Message code ID monitoring time 3 502 bytes max gt at splat ie Ge P denis Si St ay Request path size Request data variable length variable length Request path size Service code Sending Explicit Messages Section 9 1 Response Block The following normal response is returned to a transmitted CIP UCMM MES SAGE SEND command if it was completed normally I 2810 Hex 0000 Hex Command Response Transport No of bytes code code D received 502 bytes max o0 00 00 l l Hex Hex Hex Service response data variable length Reserved General status Reserved Service code response The following response is returned if an error occurs in a transmitted CIP UCMM MESSAGE SEND command 2810 Hex 0000 Hex Command Response Transport No of bytes code code ID received ki 502 bytes max as gt 00 Hex Additional status Service variable length response data Additional status size variable length General status Res
237. ator for each connection In this system it is 10 ms e Total tag data link delay This is the total tag data link delay including the send processing delay receive processing delay switching hub delay and cable delay In this sys tem itis 11 ms For details on estimating the total network delay refer to 10 1 2 Tag Data Link Delay Time e Input ON delay This is the time it takes from the input being executed until the bit actually goes ON In this system it is 1 5 ms e Output ON delay This is the time it takes from the output being indicated in the PLC until the output actually occurs In this system it is 2 0 ms 278 I O Response Time in Tag Data Links Section 10 2 e Cycle time of PLC at node address 1 The PLC 1 cycle time is 10 ms e Cycle time of PLC at node address 7 The PLC 7 cycle time is 15 ms e Number of Send Data Exchanges in Node Address 1 The total send data is 14 800 words 7 400 x 2 with two data exchanges based on the data size The PLC cycle time is 10 ms the time affect on the CPU Unit cycle time is 5 38 ms and the data processing time for the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port is 6 92 ms Therefore the number of data exchanges is doubled to four exchanges Number of Receive Data Exchanges in Node Address 7 The receive data is the received data that is exchanged but the communi cations refreshing periods may overlap so the total must be calculated as 22 200 words 7 400 x 3 with th
238. atus 2 Connection Target PLC Status 5002 RUN ERROR Connected Status of FINS TCP Connections FINS TGP Connection No1 Section 14 1 Ethernet Information Error History The target PLC status is can be used when the PLC status is selected for all the target sets for both originator and target connections For those that are not selected the status will be grayed out Checking Status with the Network Configurator Section 14 1 Connection Tab Page The Connection Tab Page s Target Node Status Field shows the connection status of the target nodes that are connected with the EtherNet IP Unit as the tag data link originator The icon will be blue if the connection is normal or red if an error occurred In addition the Connection Status Area shows the current status each con nection that is set as the originator This information can be used to identify the cause of tag data link errors For details on the connection status refer to 14 3 Connection Status Codes and Error Processing Monitor Device Controller Error History Tag Status Ethernet Information Status 1 Status 2 Connection Error History Target Node Status am Start Connection Stop Connection Connection Status Connection Name Status 1921682502 002 CN01_01 00 0000 331 Checking Status with the Network Configurator Section 14 1 Error History Tab Page The Error History Tab Page displays the error log stored in the E
239. automatic clock adjustment function is not supported by certain CPU Units models lot numbers if they are in RUN or MONITOR mode 12 4 2 Error Log Error Codes for the Automatic Clock Adjustment Function When an error occurs while the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port is operating the error code detailed error code and time the error occurred are saved in the error log The following table provides a list of the error codes 316 Automatic Clock Adjustment Error Processing Section 12 4 The error log can be read by sending FINS commands to the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port or by using the mail receive function and specifying the ErrorLlogRead command Meaning Server set ting error Detailed error code 1st byte 00H DNS 03H SNTP 04H FTP O6H BOOTP 07H SNMP 08H SNMP Trap 09H FINS UDP OAH FINS TCP 2nd byte 01 IP address 02 Host name 03 Port number 04 Other parameters Correction Set the server settings correctly based on the information in the detailed error code EEPROM Server connection error 00H DNS 03H SNTP 04H FTP O6H BOOTP 07H SNMP 08H SNMP Trap 01 Specified host does not exist 02 No service at specified host 03 Timeout 04 Closed uni laterally by host 05 Cannot con nect because account infor mation does not match 06 Host name resolution error 07 Transmis sion error 08 Recepti
240. ay will indicate code H4 node address setting error and the EtherNet IP Unit will stop operating Switch Settings Section 3 2 3 2 2 CJ series EtherNet IP Units and CJ2 Built in EtherNet IP Port Setting the Unit Number Note The unit number is used to identify individual CPU Bus Units when more than one CPU Bus Unit is mounted to the same PLC Use a small screwdriver to make the setting taking care not to damage the rotary switch The unit num ber is factory set to 0 1 Turn OFF the power supply before setting the unit number 2 If the unit number is being set for the first time or changed then I O tables must be created for the PLC 3 With CS series and CJ series PLCs dedicated areas are automatically allocated in the CIO Area and DM Area according to the unit numbers that are set For details refer to SECTION 4 Memory Allocations Setting the Node Address Relationship to IP Addresses Note With the FINS communications service when there are multiple EtherNet IP Units connected to the Ethernet network the EtherNet IP Units are identified by node addresses Use the node address switches to set the node address between 01 and FE hexadecimal 1 to 254 decimal Do not set a number that has already been set for another node on the same network 01 to FE 1 to 254 decimal The left switch sets the sixteens digit most significant digit and the right switch sets the ones digit least significant digi
241. be restarted Confirmation of the window size is requested from the remote node when the continue timer times out The initial value of the timer is 5 s and confirmation processing will continue consecutively with increas ingly longer times until the maximum time of 60 s is reached 2MSL timer 60s The 2MSL timer starts at the TCP socket that first closes the socket and will run for 60 s in the TIME_WAIT status IP reassemble timer 12s A fragmented IP packet is discarded if it cannot be reassembled within 12 seconds ARP timer 20 min 3 min If a complete ARP table entry with an Ethernet address is not referred to for 20 minutes it is removed from the table An incomplete ARP table entry no response yet returned to the ARP request is removed from the table after 3 minutes Window size initial value of max imum window size 4 096 bytes The initial value of the maximum capacity used to control the conver gence of TCP sockets Actually the node negotiates with the remote node and uses the smaller of the values for the two nodes The window size will fluctuate with the available space in the TCP reception buffers of the remote node when processing communications Fragment size 1 500 bytes Data packets are fragmented into 1 500 byte IP packets UDP data is separated into 1 472 byte fragments before sending Segment size 1 024 bytes TCP data is separated into 1 024 byte units unless th
242. borted because change request received during pro cessing FINS TCP CONNECTION STATUS READ Reads the FINS TCP connection status Command Block eri Command FINS TCP code connection No 389 FINS Commands Addressed to EtherNet IP Units or Built in EtherNet IP Ports Appendix E Response Block Command Response FINS TCP Connection Local IP address Local TCP Remote IP Remote TCP TCP transition code code connection service port number address port number No FINS TCP Connection No Command Response Command Specifies in two bytes the FINS TCP connection number 1 to 16 for which the status is to be read Response Specifies the FINS TCP connection number 1 to 16 for which the status was read Connection Service Response Specifies the service that is being used for the FINS TCP connection as a number 0003 FINS TCP server 0004 FINS TCP client Local IP Address Response Specifies the IP address for the local node in hexadecimal Local TCP Port Number Response Specifies the TCP port number for the local node Remote IP Address Response Specifies the IP address for the remote node in hexadecimal Remote TCP Port Number Response Specifies the TCP port number for the remote node TCP Transitions Response Specifies the TCP connection status using the following numbers For details on TCP status changes refer to Appendix C TCP Status Transitions Meaning 00000000 C
243. breviation PLC means Programmable Controller PC is used however in some Program ming Device displays to mean Programmable Controller Visual Aids The following headings appear in the left column of the manual to help you locate different types of information Note Indicates information of particular interest for efficient and convenient opera tion of the product 1 2 3 1 Indicates lists of one sort or another such as procedures checklists etc Trademarks and Copyrights EtherNet IP is a registered trademark of the ODVA Open DeviceNet Vendor Association Ethernet is a trademark of the Xerox Corporation Microsoft Windows Windows NT Windows 2000 Windows XP and Windows Vista are registered trademarks of the Microsoft Corporation Other names of systems or products that appear in this document are trademarks or registered trade marks of the respective company OMRON 2007 All rights reserved No part of this publication may be reproduced stored in a retrieval system or transmitted in any form or by any means mechanical electronic photocopying recording or otherwise without the prior written permission of OMRON No patent liability is assumed with respect to the use of the information contained herein Moreover because OMRON is con stantly striving to improve its high quality products the information contained in this manual is subject to change without notice Every precaution has been taken
244. can be mounted to a single PLC except for CJ2 PLCs A maximum of seven EtherNet IP Units can be connected to a CJ2H CPU EIP CPU Unit making eight EtherNet IP ports including the built in EtherNet IP port If EtherNet IP Units are mounted in combination with other CPU Bus Units e g Controller Link Units the maximum total number of CPU Bus Units that can be mounted is 16 Mounting to a PLC Section 3 3 CPU Rack 10 Units max End cover SIPC End cover Expansion Backplane 10 Units max r 2 Up to eight EtherNet IP Units can be mounted F End cover Expansion Backplane 10 Units max 5 End Expansion Backplane 10 Units max R Oe ene PS Power Supply Unit CPU CPU Unit IC I O Control Unit Il O Interface Unit Note The CJ1W EIP21 EtherNet IP Units maximum current consumption is 410 mA Be sure that the total current consumption of all the Units connected to the same CPU Backplane or Expansion Backplane does not exceed the output capacity of the Power Supply Unit 3 3 3 Mounting Mount the EtherNet IP Unit to the Backplane using the following procedure 1 2 3 1 Hook the claw on the top of the Unit onto the Backplane Backplane 2 Insert the Unit into Backplane connectors and securely tighten the screw a
245. ccurs the output status depends on the specifications of the Unit being used When a communications error occurs for a Unit that is used along with output devices check the operat ing specifications and implement safety countermeasures The EtherNet IP Unit is automatically restarted after the parameters have been downloaded This restart is required to enable the tag set and con nection information that have been set Before downloading the parame ters check to confirm that restarting will not cause any problems with the equipment Do not disconnect the Ethernet cable or reset or turn OFF the power to the EtherNet IP Unit while the parameters are being downloaded For EtherNet IP Units or built in EtherNet IP ports with revision 2 or later the CPU Unit can download tag data link parameters in either RUN mode or MONITOR mode They can also be downloaded in PROGRAM mode For EtherNet IP Units with revision 1 tag data link parameters can be downloaded only when the CPU Unit is in PROGRAM mode Even for Units with revision 2 or later all CPU Units must be in PRO GRAM mode to download the parameters if any Units with revision 1 are included in the network Connect the Network Configurator online There are two ways to download the parameters Downloading to All Devices in the Network Select Network Download The following dialog box will be displayed Network Configurator Operations Section 6 2 Network Configurator i Enable
246. ces using UDP IP and TCP IP called FINS UDP and FINS TCP allowing flexible data exchange for different appli cations There are no particular restrictions when sending FINS messages to OMRON Ethernet Units CS1W ETN21 or CJ1W ETN21 in an Ethernet network Network Connections with DeviceNet Devices When a PLC has an EtherNet IP Unit and DeviceNet Unit mounted the PLC can be used as a gateway to exchange data with DeviceNet Devices through CIP messages Network Connections with Controller Link FTP Server Mutual connections of Controller Link and EtherNet IP are also supported using the FINS communications service The Controller Link connection allows a PLC on the Controller Link network to be monitored from a PLC on the EtherNet IP network Conversely data can be exchanged with a PLC on the EtherNet IP network from a PLC on the Controller Link network A built in FTP server is provided to enable transferring files in the PLC to and from a host computer This enables transferring large amounts of data from a client without any additional ladder programming Automatic PLC Clock Adjustment Note The clocks built into PLCs connected to Ethernet can be automatically adjusted to the time of the clock in the SNTP server If all of the clocks in the system are automatically adjusted to the same time time stamps can be used to analyze various production histories A separate SNTP server is necessary to automatically adjust
247. ces Supported services determine supported functions e PLC with a CS CJ series EtherNet IP Unit e PLC with a CS CJ series EtherNet IP Unit or built in or built in EtherNet IP port Supports the EtherNet IP port reading writing of the local CPU Unit s sta Supports the reading writing of a remote CPU Units tus information and I O memory data status information and I O memory data Note The CS CJ series EtherNet IP Units and built in EtherNet IP ports CS1W EIP21 CJ1W EIP21 or CJ2H CPULILI EIP contain a PLC Object so that other devices can read write the I O memory of the CPU Unit with the built in EtherNet IP port or the CPU Unit to which the EtherNet IP Unit is mounted 202 Message Communications Specifications Section 7 4 7 4 Message Communications Specifications Unit model number CS1W EIP21 CJ1W EIP21 or CU2H CPU Communications instructions Sending receiving data SEND and RECV instructions FINS commands CMND 490 instruction There are two kinds of FINS commands commands addressed to the CPU Unit and commands addressed to the CS CuU series EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port Sending Ether Net IP CIP UCMM messages CMND 490 instruction Sends CIP UCMM messages to other companies masters slaves or PLCs with a CS CJ series EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port mounted Number of desti nation nodes FINS
248. commend setting the subnet mask defined for the class Class Subnet mask 255 0 0 0 255 255 0 0 255 255 255 0 With the default setting 0 0 0 0 a subnet mask corresponding to the IP address class is used The following table shows the various parameters in the Unit Setup when only the IP address and subnet mask are set and other settings are left at their default values Setting Operating status Default gateway None IP routing disabled Preferred DNS server None Alternate DNS server None Host name None Domain name None Broadcasting 4 3 BSD specifications IP router table None Sets the default gateway s IP address This setting is not required when the default gateway is not being used Sets the IP address specification method for broadcasting with FINS UDP e All 1 s 4 3BSD Broadcasting is performed with the host ID set to all 1 s All O s 4 2BSD Broadcasting is performed with the host ID set to all 0 s Normally use the default setting of all 1 s 4 3BSD Preferred DNS Server and Alternate DNS Server When accessing another node from the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port using the host name the DNS server searches for the other node s IP address from the other node s host name to the DNS server These settings register the IP addresses of the preferred and alternate DNS servers that will perform the search At this time the EtherNet IP Unit is
249. communications parameters such as the IP address subnet mask FINS UDP parameters and FINS TCP parameters in the Unit Setup for the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port in the I O tables Refer to 3 8 TCP IP and Link Settings Refer to 3 10 Other Parameters 5 Saving the Project Save the project file containing the new settings 6 Quitting the CX Programmer Quit the CX Programmer Before performing the remaining procedures connect the network and then connect the CX Programmer and PLC Tag Data Link 7 Starting the Network Configurator Settings Offline Start the Network Configurator Procedures Refer to 6 2 1 Starting the Network Configurator 8 Registering Devices Use the Network Configurator to register devices in the EtherNet IP net work Refer to 6 2 3 Registering Devices 9 Setting Device Parameters Set the device parameters tag data link parameters for each device in the network configuration 28 Section 2 1 Design Procedures b X _ u ESE SSE Constructing the Actual System and Downloading Unit Setup Note Refer to 6 2 5 Creating Tag Sets and 6 2 6 Setting Connections with Target Devices Originator Only 10 Verifying the Network Bandwidth Being Used The network s communications load capacity is called the bandwidth Ver ify that the bandwidth used by the EtherNet IP tag data links does not ex ceed the allowed network bandw
250. connection is established seal FING node number eo Local FINS node number A i 5 f 2 The local device such as a personal s VI u aso A p f Local IP address S Local IP address T computer sends notification that its 7 FINS node number is A A request to open a connection is received in TCP IP protocol from the re mote device i e the client either a personal computer an EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port and the connection is established Notification is received from the remote node i e the client of the remote node s FINS node address The local device provides notification of the local FINS node address The EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port changes the internal node correspondence table FINS node address IP address and TCP port number FINS messages can then be sent and received EtherNet IP Unit server CPU Unit IP address FINS node number transmission Ethernet EtherNet IP IP address FINS node number transmission A The FINS node number 3 The EtherNet IP Unit sends notification that is converted for each its FINS node number is B connection number 4 The internal node correspondence table is changed 5 It then becomes possible to send and receive FINS messages Setting FINS TCP The procedure for setting FINS TCP connections involves the items d
251. connections 163 Target Node PLC Error Flags 93 107 Target Node PLC Operating Flags 93 107 TCP communications sockets status 367 status 397 TCP status transitions 367 TCP IP 73 terminal blocks xxiii timeout errors 359 timers 365 to 80 troubleshooting 356 twisted pair cable recommended models 34 twisted pair cables Index precautions 61 type command 291 296 299 U unicast communications 134 unit numbers setting 56 57 Unit replacement 320 unit setup 5 28 80 Unit Status 1 Flags 93 Unit Status 2 Flags 95 Unregister Device List 164 uploading tag data link parameters 181 user command 291 296 297 user name specifying 297 User Settings Area 105 using FTP commands 296 V verifying tag data link parameters 182 W wiring precautions 64 421 Index 422 Revision History A manual revision code appears as a suffix to the catalog number on the front cover of the manual Cat No W465 E1 03 Revision code The following table outlines the changes made to the manual during each revision Page numbers refer to the previous version Revision code June 2007 Revised content Original production July 2008 Added information for CJ series CJ2 CPU Units and for new unit version 2 0 func tions December 2008 Added the CJ series CJ2 CPU Units CU2H CPULIL 423 Revision History 424 Authorized Distributor
252. ction Connection I O type When making tag data links in a CS1W EIP21 CU1W EIP21 or CJ2B EIP21 select Input Only Tag type When making tag data links in other devices select the con nection I O type specified in that device s EDS file Use the Input Only ID type setting when another company s node is the originator and does not support connection set tings with the Tag type setting Connection Type Selects whether the data is sent in a multicast or unicast The default setting is multicast e Multicast connection Select when the same data is shared by multiple nodes This setting is usually selected e Point to Point connection Select when the same data is not being shared by multiple nodes In a unicast transmission other nodes are not bur dened with an unnecessary load Note Refer to 6 1 3 Overview of Operation for details on using multicast and unicast transmissions and counting the number of connections Packet Interval RPI Sets the data refreshing interval packet interval of each con nection between the originator and target The interval can be set between 0 5 and 10 000 ms in 0 5 ms units The default setting is 50 ms data refreshed once every 50 ms 167 Network Configurator Operations Section 6 2 Setting Function Timeout Value Sets the time until a connection timeout is detected The time out value is set as a multiple of the packet interval RPI and can be se
253. ction Details 11 2 1 File Types The file system in the CPU Unit that can be accessed by the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port includes files in any Memory Card mounted in the CPU Unit and files in the EM file memory The directory tree is shown below i root a MEMCARD Memory card directory EM EM file memory directory A connection will be initially made to the root directory Note 1 The date of the MEMCARD directory displayed for Is or dir commands in the root directory will be the date of the file system volume label 2 The login date will be displayed for EM files and for MEMCARD if a volume label has not been created 291 FTP Server Function Details Section 11 2 11 2 2 Connecting to the FTP Server 292 Note The host computer must connect to the FTP server before the FTP server functions can be used The login name and password set in the Unit Setup will be used when connecting The default FTP login name is CONFIDENTIAL and no password is required The FTP server in the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port can con nect to only one client at a time If a client attempts to connect when the FTP server is in use a message will be returned and connection will be refused When general purpose FTP software is used files can be transferred and read using a graphical user interface similar to Explorer Login Name and Password Setting The default login name for FTP is CONFIDENTIAL and
254. ctions for individual target devices is refreshed in the CPU Unit With revision 1 each flag immedi ately turns ON when all connections are established These words show the status of nodes 0 to 63 only If it is necessary to show the status of nodes higher than node 63 select user settings as the layout pattern For details refer to 4 4 User Settings Area 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 fis rafiafre rfrofele 7 eo s 4 s 2 fo 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 48 Status Manipulated Unit operation by Normal Target Node Revision 1 Flags immediately Flags turn ON when all connections are established Revision 2 or higher Flags turn ON after all data for multiple connections for the target device is refreshed in the CPU Unit Indicates that the connection is not established Word n 24 shows the status of FINS TCP connections For details refer to SECTION 8 FINS Communications 15 14 13 12 1110 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 n 24 Status Manipulated Unit operation by FINS TCP Connec Turned ON by the Unit when a tion 1 connection is established Turned OFF by the Unit when the connection is terminated FINS TCP Connec Turned ON by the Unit when a tion 2 connection is established Turned OFF by the Unit when the connection is terminated 101
255. cuted from the host computer by sending the corresponding FINS command with a UDP IP or TCP IP header attached For example it is possible to connect online via Ethernet from FINS communi cations applications such as the CX Programmer and to perform remote pro gramming and monitoring See note Use CX Programmer version 4 0 to use TCP IP For lower versions of CX Pro grammer FinsGateway Version 2003 or higher is required to use TCP IP Overview of EtherNet IP Unit and Built in EtherNet IP Port Section 1 1 EtherNet IP Unit The FINS gateway function enables access to PLCs on not only the same Ethernet network but on various other networks including SYSMAC LINK and Controller Link Section 1 2 EtherNet IP Unit and Built in EtherNet IP Port Specifications 1 2 EtherNet IP Unit and Built in EtherNet IP Port Specifications 1 2 1 General Specifications The general specifications conform to those of the CS series and CJ series PLCs 1 2 2 Unit Specifications CS series EtherNet IP Units Item Specifications Model number CS1W EIP21 Type 100Base TX See note Applicable PLCs CS series PLCs Unit classification CS series CPU Bus Unit Mounting location CPU Rack or Expansion Rack Number of Units that can be mounted 8 max including Expansion Racks CPU Unit words used Allocated CIO Area words CPU Bus Unit words 25 words Unit one unit number
256. d Block Command Destination IP address Timeout code value Response Block Command Response code code Parameters Destination IP Address Command The IP address in hexadecimal of the destination node for the PING command echo request packet Timeout Value Command The wait time for the echo reply packet The value is set in seconds The timeout time is set at 20 seconds if the value is specified as 0 If the echo reply packet is not received within the set time limit the code for a timeout error will be set as the results storage response code Remarks PING Command The PING command runs the echoback test using the ICMP protocol When the PING command is executed an echo request packet is sent to the remote node ICMP Correct communications are confirmed when the returned response packet is received normally The echo reply packet is automatically returned by the remote node ICMP Response Codes Response code Description Normal end echo reply received from the remote node Timeout error Command too large Command too small Zero destination address PING command currently being executed High traffic at Unit cannot execute service FINS TCP CONNECTION REMOTE NODE CHANGE REQUEST Requests a remote node change for the FINS TCP connection The default destination IP address in a connection in which the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port is used as a client is the destination IP address set u
257. d IP addresses are dynamically changed by a method such as DHCP EtherNet IP Unit CPU Unit Lo Personal computer Remote FINS node number Change Zr Must be fixed registration Automatic generation Local FINS node number ae r dynamic setting l A an be changed Internal table Local IP address i Remote IP address Local IP address Local FINS node number IP address FINS command Ethernet EtherNet IP IP address FINS response For the remote IP address a response is returned to the changed IP address 116 IP Addresses in FINS Communications Section 5 2 Automatic Generation Static Personal computer Local FINS node number ry Local IP address 4 A Must be fixed A Must be fixed Internal table With the static method as well the following values are set for addresses in the internal table when the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port is turned ON or restarted e Remote IP address Local IP address network number remote FINS node address e Remote UDP port number UDP port number set for local Unit e Connection method FINS UDP With the static method however data in an internal table that has been gener ated is not freely changed EtherNet IP Unit CPU Unit Remote FINS node number
258. d as the number of records x 10 bytes record Each error log record thus comprises 10 bytes configured as follows 386 FINS Commands Addressed to EtherNet IP Units or Built in EtherNet IP Ports Appendix E 1st byte 10th byte Errorcode Detailed Minutes Second Day Hour Year Month information Error Code Detailed Information Details of the error stored in the record Refer to 14 4 4 Error Log Error Codes for details Minute Second Day Hour Year Month Indicate the time at which the error stored in the record occurred Precautions e If the error log contains fewer records than the number specified in the number of records parameter all records stored in the error log at the time the command is executed will be returned and the command exe cuted will end normally Response Codes Response code Description Normal end Command too large Command too small Beginning record number is out of range The number of read records is 0 ERROR LOG CLEAR Clears the error log for the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP ports and resets the number of stored records to 0 Command Block 21 03 Command code Response Block Command Response code code Response Codes 0000 Normal end 1001 Command too large PING Performs processing equivalent to a UNIX computer s PING command see below 387 FINS Commands Addressed to EtherNet IP Units or Built in EtherNet IP Ports Appendix E Comman
259. d data sizes number of nodes the switching hub being used and cable lengths Each delay is described in detail below The send processing delay is the delay that occurs within the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port when data packets are sent once each packet interval This delay varies with the RPI error shown in the following graph so the send processing time is the maximum value for each RPI Packet interval RPI RPI error 0 5 to 1 000 ms 15 RPI 100 1 000 ms to 10 000 ms 5 of the RPI 273 Communications System Section 10 1 RPI error 0 1 000 2 000 3 000 4 000 5 000 6 000 7 000 8 000 9 000 10 000 RPI ms Cable Delay The cable delay is the time required for the data signal to pass through the cable and reach the destination When an STP shielded twisted pair cable of category 5 5e or higher is being used the maximum cable delay is 545 ns 100 m The cable delay represents a very small percentage of the total tag data link delay Switching Hub Delay The switching hub delay is the delay time between the arrival of the packet at the switching hub and the output of the packet from the hub s transmission port This delay depends on the total number of connections used for recep tion and data sizes used in the tag data links In addition this delay depends on the switching hub maker and model but the delay can be approximated with the following table For a
260. d for manufacturing purposes even when tolerances are shown PERFORMANCE DATA Performance data given in this manual is provided as a guide for the user in determining suitability and does not constitute a warranty It may represent the result of OMRON s test conditions and the users must correlate it to actual application requirements Actual performance is subject to the OMRON Warranty and Limitations of Liability ERRORS AND OMISSIONS The information in this manual has been carefully checked and is believed to be accurate however no responsibility is assumed for clerical typographical or proofreading errors or omissions xvii xviii Unit Versions of CS CJ series Unit Versions Notation of Unit Versions on Products Confirming Unit Versions with Support Software Note A unit version has been introduced to manage Units in the CS CJ Series according to differences in functionality accompanying Unit upgrades The unit version is given to the right of the lot number on the nameplate of the products for which unit versions are being managed as shown below CS1W EIP21 CJ1W EIP21 Product nameplate a omron csiw OO0 OO UNIT Ta Lot No 040401 0000 Unit version A for unit version 1 0 as OMRON Corporation MADE IN JAPAN E CJ2H CPU Product nameplate EIP OO UNIT Lot No 080701 omron CJ2H O0 CPU Ver 1 0
261. d in tag sets of both the sending and receiv ing nodes e f the Output OFF function Output Inhibit is enabled in the output produce tag settings all of the output data will be OFF if a fatal error occurs in the CPU Unit or the Output OFF Bit is turned ON Check the status of the output producer PLC The tag data links Check whether the baud rate is set to 10 Mbps or a 10M or start and stop com 100M repeater hub is being used The tag data link perfor municating inter mance is based on the use of switching hubs The 6 000 pps mittently bandwidth listed in the specifications is achieved when the Unit auto negotiates to full duplex 100 Mbps communica tions e Refer to 14 1 Checking Status with the Network Configurator for details on checking the error counters on the Monitor Device Window s Ethernet Information Tab Page The error and discarded packet counters indicate problems such as noise in the communications path the use of substandard cables damaged cables connectors loose connectors abnormally high communications load or incorrect wiring loops in the switching hub wiring e Contact the switching hub manufacturer to determine whether there are any problems with the transfer capacity of the switching hubs in the communications path If switching hubs are arranged in a cascade connection there may be a heavy load concentrated at a mid level switching hub In the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP po
262. data does not arrive in time for tag data link transmission and processing is delayed until the next tag data link 4 The data exchange for CPU Unit 7 receive data is divided over three cy cles a b and c the data cannot be exchanged in cycles a and b so it is exchanged in the second cycle c and the processing is delayed for 279 I O Response Time in Tag Data Links Section 10 2 about 3 1 cycles The data could not be exchanged in the first cycle c because it arrived just after the first cycle b and was not in time for the cycle c data exchange preparation The maximum tag data link I O response time is calculated as follows Input ON delay 1 5 ms PLC 1 cycle time x 2 x 2 10 0 ms x 2 x 2 Refresh period RPI 10 0 ms Total network delay 11 0 ms PLC 7 cycle time x 3 1 15 0 ms x 3 1 Output ON delay 2 0 ms Total tag data link I O response time Approx 124 5 ms Note The I O response time may be longer due to noise or other events Minimum Tag Data Link I O Response Input P Time t Input device I O processing aarti Data exchange 1 cycle time wid e B E i I PLC 1 processing A B _ Send data exchange Transmission time gl l Tag data link i Sah PLC 7 processing Output device Tag data link I O response time Output The minimum tag data link I O response time which occurs when there ar
263. ddress table method 115 117 private address 126 prohibiting dynamic changes of remote IP address 119 relationship to FINS node address 114 125 responding to computers with changed IP address 122 418 Index IP Address Display Setting Area 103 IP Address field 314 315 IP ADDRESS TABLE READ 393 IP addresses allocating 112 configuration 112 IP communications IP addresses reading from Units 380 reading tables 393 IP router tables reading 394 status 396 IP ROUTER TABLE READ 394 L ladder programming for tag data links 193 LED indicators 19 using for troubleshooting 335 link setting baud rate 76 local network table 217 locking devices precautions xxv Login field 294 Low Voltage Directive xxvi ls command 291 296 297 M maintenance 320 maximum tag data link I O response time 279 mdelete command 291 296 300 memory allocation 88 Memory Card 322 restoring data 323 Memory Cards 291 303 deleting files 300 displaying directories 297 See also FTP server transferring files from host 299 transferring files to host 299 MEMORY STATUS READ 399 message communications 7 243 errors 204 specifications 203 message communications functions 197 message communications service required settings 55 mget command 291 296 299 mkdir command 291 296 mode settings reading from Unit 380 mounting procedure 59 mput command 291 296 299 MS indicator
264. de Area 1 and area 2 can be set for each row The columns are as follows e IN OUT Specifies whether the link inputs data to the node or outputs data from the node OUT can be selected only once Once OUT has been selected for one row N will automatically be selected for other rows A asterisk will be displayed if the Over Load function is disabled See note Note The Over Load function is used to clear output data when all out puts are turned OFF from the CPU Unit of the PLC This setting is not necessary for inputs a Over Load function enabled Output data will be cleared to all ze ros when all outputs from the PLC are turned OFF from the CPU Unit b Over Load function disabled Output data will be maintained even when all outputs from the PLC are turned OFF from the CPU Unit e Area 1 Link CH The physical address of the first word in link area 1 e Area 1 Size The number of words in link area 1 See note e Area 2 Link CH The physical address of the first word in link area 2 e Area 2 Size The number of words in link area 2 See note Note With the Network Configurator the PLC status will be shown at the beginning of each area The PLC status includes the CPU Unit op erating status operating information and error information e Tag Set Name If the Wizard is used the names will be automatically assigned using consecutive IP addresses in the following form for both input and output tags TagSet1_192168 250 1
265. de Communications Port 1 Completion Code Communications Port 2 Completion Code Communications Port 3 Completion Code Communications Port 4 Completion Code Communications Port 5 Completion Code Communications Port 6 Completion Code Communications Port 7 Completion Code The meanings of the communications port completion codes are the same as those for FINS commands and responses Bits 08 to 15 in the communica tions port completion code correspond to the first byte of the response code and bits 00 to 07 correspond to the second byte For details refer to 14 6 Troubleshooting with FINS Response Codes Communications Port Error Flag and Completion Codes CMND 490 Errors that occur when CMND 490 is used generate a Communications Port Error Flag and are recorded in a communications port completion code only in the following cases e When a response timeout error has occurred e When the number of communications data bytes exceeds the maximum value for the Unit i e 2 000 bytes for the EtherNet IP Unit or built in Eth erNet IP port e When the actual number of response bytes is greater than the number of reception bytes that has been set The response is not stored in this case Errors other than these are recorded in the response codes of the responses stored from the beginning response storage word onwards Be careful of these because there are no Communications Port Error Flags and they are not recor
266. ded in a communications port completion code Timing of Communications Flag Changes 238 e The Communications Port Enabled Flag remains OFF during communica tions and turns ON when they are completed regardless of whether or not an error occurs e The Communications Port Error Flag retains its status until the next trans mission or reception e The Communications Port Error Flag turns OFF with the execution of the next communications instruction even if there was an abnormal comple tion Communicating between OMRON PLCs Section 8 6 Example Communications Port Enabled Flag Communications instruction Instruction 1 Instruction2 Instruction 3 SEND 090 RECV 098 CMND 490 i being executed being executed being executed Communications Port Error Flag a Communications Port 0000 0000 i 0000 Completion Code Completion 0202 0000 Normal completion 0000 Normal completion Unit address setting error 239 Communicating between OMRON PLCs 8 6 5 Program Example Execution condition A20207 000000 See note 1 120002 s s KEEP 120000 120001 120000 MOV 21 000A D00000 MOV 21 0002 D00001 MOV 21 0400 D00002 MOV 21 0705 D00003 MOV 21 0064 D00004 XFER 70 000A 0000 D00010 SEND 90 D00010 D00020 D00000 120000 A20207 See note 1 H DIFU 13 120001
267. der to send data to a network that is not connected to the local node It shows the correspondence between the address of the final destination net work and the network address and node address of the first relay point of the path to reach there When internetwork communications are carried out the end network can be reached by following the relay points 217 Routing Tables Section 8 4 PLC 1 local node PLC 2 relay node The following example shows routing tables for sending data from PLC 1 the local node network address 1 node address 1 to PLC 4 the destination node network address 3 node address 2 Node 2 PLC 3 Unit 0 relay node PLC 4 destination node Node 1 Unit 1 Node 2 iii 1 pe 2 Ly Network 1 i i Network 2 Network 3 PLC 1 PLC 2 PLC 3 End network relay network table relay network table local network table Local network Unit address number To go to network 3 first go to node 2 at network 2 To go to network 3 To go to network 3 The network is the same first go to node 3 at according to the local SO gO to node 2 at network 3 network 1 network table go through unit number 1 of the local CPU Rack Note In the above example the routing tables required for a message to reach PLC 4 from PLC 1 are shown Additional settings would be required in the rout ing tables for a message to reach PLC 1 from PLC 4 Ref
268. dow Edit Device Parameters Connections Tag Sets Unregister Device List Product Name Connections 38 256 0 19 T 19 Register Device List Product Name 192 168 250 1 CS1W EIP21 Variable Target Variable 9 192 168 250 2 002 CSTW i CN01_01 Dnput TagSet2_192 168 250 1 TagSet2 192 168 250 2 192 168 250 3 003 CS1W S CNO1_02 Dnput TagSet3_192 168 250 1 TagSet3_192 168 250 3 192 168 2504 004 CSTW S CNO 03 Input TagSet4 192 168 250 1 TagSet4 192 168 250 4 192 168 2505 005 CS1W SONDI 04 Input TagSet5 192 168 250 1 TagSet5 192 168 2505 192 168 250 6 006 CS1W S CNO 05 Input TagSet6 192 168 250 1 TagSet6 192 168 250 6 192 168 2507 007 CS1W v Edit All Change Target Node ID To From File EE 50 Checking Bandwidth Usage and Adjusting the RPI Section 2 3 Information about the connection with device 192 168 250 20 is registered in the Register Device List Double click this connection to edit the settings 192 168 250 20 CJ1W EIP21 Edit Connection Connection Name CNO1_19 Input Only Tae type Connection I O Type Packet Interval RPD Input from Target Device Consume Variable Produce Variable Connection Type 110 ms 05 100000 ms Timeout Value Packet Interval RPD x 4 TaeSet20 192 168 2501 22Byte Output to Target Device Produce Variable Consume Variable Connection Type Originator Device Node Add
269. dows XP SP2 or Higher or Windows Vista Appendix G 1 Select Control Panel from the Windows Start Menu and change the display to Classic View OU E gt Control Panel Name Control Panel Home e Classic View e Add Hardware 2 Open the Administrative Tools and select Windows Firewall with Advanced Security from the dialog box that is displayed cheduler 3 Select Inbound Rules under Windows Firewall with Advanced Security on Local Computer on the left side of the Windows Firewall with Advanced Security Dialog Box P Windows Firewall with Advanced Security File Action View Help es i af th Advance 3 Inbound Rules Outbound Rules a Ah vit Bu Connection Security Rules B Monitoring 4 Select New Rule under Inbound Rules in the Actions Area on the right side of the dialog box Actions Inbound Rules a an New Rule 5 Make the following settings for each step in the New Inbound Rule Wizard Dialog Box clicking the Next But ton to move between steps Rule Type Select Custom Program Select All Programs Protocol and Ports Select ICMPv4 as the protocol type Protocol type ICMPv4 NA Protocol number Select Any IP address for everything Select Allow the connection Select Domain Private and Public Enter any name e g Omron_EI IP 6 Click the Finish Button The rule that you defined will be registered in the Inbound Rules e g Omron_EIP
270. dragging the devices from the Hardware List and dropping them in the Network Con figuration Window To drag and drop an icon click and hold the left mouse button over the icon move the icon to the destination and release the mouse button The icon will be displayed in the Network Configuration Window as shown in the following diagram EtherNet IP_1 Si Network Configurator 4 EtherNet IP Hardware Us Vendor 4 Omron Corporation 3 Communications Adapter 192 168 250 1 CITW EIP21 CSIW EIP21 CS1W EIP21 g fr DeviceT ype Drag and drop icons from the Hardware List Hardware List Name in hardware list EtherNet IP Unit EtherNet IP Unit revision See note 1 CJ2B EIP21 Rev 2 Built in EtherNet IP port on CJ2 CPU Unit CU2H CPULILI EIP CJ1W EIP21 Rev 1 or 2 CJ1W EIP21 EtherNet IP Unit connected to CJ1 CPU Unit CS1W EIP21 Rev 1 or 2 CS1W EIP21 EtherNet IP Unit connected to CJ1 CPU Unit CJ1W EIP21 CJ2 Rev 2 CJ1W EIP21 EtherNet IP Unit connected to CU2 CPU Unit Note 1 The unit version is displayed as Rev in the Network Configurator dis plays so it is shown here as Rev 1 and Rev 2 2 When mounting the CJ1W EIP21 to a CJ2 CPU Unit select CJ1W EIP21 CJ2 from the Hardware List 2 Click the right mouse button over the registered device s icon to display the pop up menu and select Change Node Address Change IP Address
271. dress A fixed number is assigned to each EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port and it cannot be changed e IP address Use the default IP address 192 168 250 FINS_node number set the address in the allocated DM Area words or set the address on the TCP IP Tab Page of the Edit Parameters Dialog Box from the CX Program mer e FINS UDP port No Use the default FINS UDP port number 9600 or set the number on the FINS UDP Tab Page of the Edit Parameters Dialog Box from the CX Pro grammer e FINS TCP port No Use the default FINS TCP port number 9600 or set the number on the FINS UDP Tab Page of the Edit Parameters Dialog Box from the CX Pro grammer e FINS node address Set the number using the Node Address Setting Switches NODE NO on the front of the Ether Net IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port Pairing IP Addresses with A particular IP address is allocated to each communications node including FINS Node Addresses at EtherNet IP Units and built in EtherNet IP ports The IP address must be Local Nodes paired with the FINS node address 1 to 254 by one of the following methods m Automatic Generation Method Dynamic Static Set the relationship between the IP address and the FINS node address set ting in the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port according to the follow ing equation If the setting does not conform to this equation a setting error will be generated and the MS Indicator will flash red F
272. dresses in FINS Communications 0 000 ees 114 5 3 Private and Global Addresses 0 00 00 ccc eee cece eee eee eee 126 SECTION 6 Tag Data Link Functions 00eeeeeeeeeee 131 6 1 Overview of Tag Data Links 2 0 cee eee 132 6 2 Network Configurator Operations 0 00 e cece eee eee 139 6 3 Ladder Programming with Tag Data Links 00 cece eee ee eee 193 SECTION 7 Message Communications Functions 197 To A OVETVICW tenis hna sae bab T EERE agate dane ahaa byere th AE walle se Ble shi be fe ete 198 7 2 FINS Message Communications 0 0 200 7 3 Explicit Message Communications 0 00 0 cece eee eee 202 7 4 Message Communications Specifications 00 203 7 5 Message Communications Error Indications 0 00 0 e eee eee eee 204 7 6 Message Communications Errors 2 0 0 ee tee ene 205 SECTION 8 FINS Communications ccccccccccccccceee 207 8 1 Overview of FINS Communications 0 0 0 0 eee ce ee eee eee 208 8 2 FINS UDP Method eseria ee hd ohne aap aea koe ea eg Wide alee alae Bs 210 8 3 FINS TCP Method 2 240eehe tet E sae BG te ete bene dass Ve ee eee dees 212 8 4 Routms Tables lt s c2 07 02 etc ges c ach te jess Maegan eer eee a entered A 217 8 5 Using FINS Applications 0 0 00 eee ccc ete ene ea 221 8 6 Communicating between OMRON PLCs 0 0 0 eee 230 8 7 Precau
273. dth The Usage of Device Bandwidth Dialog Box will be displayed Checking Bandwidth Usage and Adjusting the RPI Section 2 3 Usage of Device Bandwidth Comment Usage of Capacity Mbit s without M Usage of IP multic 1921 68 2501 CS1W EIP21 1 00 4 00 0 048 0 048 Mbit s 1921 68 250 2 CJT W EIP21 1 00 4 00 0 048 0 048 Mbit s Set Packet Interval RPD Total usage of IP multicast addresses 2 Network Total of Max Mbit s 0 048Mbit s The Usage of Capacity column will show the percentage of the allowed tag data link bandwidth being used and the Mbit s column will show the net work bandwidth being used 3 The usage of capacity can be adjusted by changing the associated devic es RPI settings The RPI settings can be adjusted with the following 3 methods Method 1 Same Packet Interval Set for all Connections The usage of capacity can be adjusted by changing the RPI for all of the connections at the same time a Click the Set Packet Interval RPI Button at the bottom of the Usage of Device Bandwidth Dialog Box Set Packet Interval RPD b The Set Packet Interval RPI Dialog Box will be displayed Input a new RPI value and click the OK Button Set Packet Interval RPD Packet Interval RPD 50 0 ms 05 100000 ms Target Device I 192 168 250 1 CS1W EIP21 td 192 168 250 2 CJ1W EIP21 43 Checking Bandwidth Usage and Adjusting the RPI Section 2 3 44 Method 2 Changing a
274. e NK NUONNNN gt Copy To Clipboard To save the check results click the Copy To Clipboard Button and paste the results to the clipboard or other file Click the OK Button The following message will be displayed Click the OK Button again to return to the EtherNet IP Datalink Tool Window 148 Network Configurator Operations Section 6 2 DatalmkTool Failed to save file because Datalink table data is invalid b No Table Inconsistencies The following message will be displayed Click the OK Button DatalinkTool x 8 Select Exit from the File Menu The EtherNet IP Datalink Tool will be exited and you ll return to the Network Configurator 9 Click the icon for each node and check the settings made with the EtherNet IP Datalink Tool in the Edit Device Parameters Dialog Box 149 Network Configurator Operations Section 6 2 6 2 5 Creating Tag Sets Converting I O Memory Addresses Creating a Tag Set 1 2 3 1 Double click the icon of the device for which a tag set is being created to display the Edit Device Parameters Dialog Box Right click the icon to dis play the pop up menu and select Parameter Edit EtherNet IP_1 ae ee a EH g a Open tal Save as pe Register to other Device External Data gt Cut Copy X Delete Change Node Address Change Device Comment Ey Property 2 Click the Tag Sets Tab at the top of the Edit Device Pa
275. e RJ45 8 pin Modular Connector conforming to ISO 8877 Connector pin Signal name Signal direction Transmission data Transmission data Reception data Not used Not used Reception data Not used Not used Frame ground iNo A N I e a 3 5 2 Connecting the Cable N Caution Turn OFF the PLC s power supply before connecting or disconnecting twisted pair cable N Caution Allow enough space for the bending radius of the twisted pair cable as shown in below omron 35 mm 64 Connecting to the Network Section 3 5 1 2 3 1 Lay the twisted pair cable 2 Connect the cable to the switching hub Be sure to press in the cable until it locks into place 3 Connect the twisted pair cable to the connector on the EtherNet IP Unit Be sure to press the connectors both the switching hub side and Ethernet side until they lock into place Example CS1W EIP21 RJ45 Modular Connector EtherNet IP Unit 65 Creating I O Tables Section 3 6 3 6 Creating I O Tables 3 6 1 I O Table Overview I O tables are used to identify Units mounted to the PLC and to allocate I O to them With CS series and CJ series PLCs whenever there is a change to the Unit configuration it is necessary to create I O tables and register the mounted Units in the CPU Unit The I O
276. e 352 14 4 3 FINS Commands for Error Logs 0 0 0 2 0000 352 14 4 4 Error Log Error Codes 0 0 00 0 000000 c eee eee eee 353 1425 Troubleshooting a mr ce putes aoe adam es See eae ana eee i 356 14 5 1 CPU Unit s ERR ALM Indicator Lit or Flashing 356 14 5 2 General Ethernet Problems 0000 357 14 5 3 Tag Data Links Fail to Start 2 2 0 0 00 00 0000 eee 357 14 5 4 Tag Data Link Problems 0 0 0 0 000 0000 358 14 5 5 Message Timeout Problems 00000000000 359 14 6 Troubleshooting with FINS Response Codes 004 359 327 Checking Status with the Network Configurator Section 14 1 14 1 Checking Status with the Network Configurator 14 1 1 The Network Configurator s Device Monitor Function Status 1 Tab Page 328 Note Connect the Network Configurator online select the device to be checked right click to display the pop up menu and select Monitor EtherNet IP 1 Parameter gt 192 s i Reset e _ _ _ _ e_ ss The Monitor Device Dialog Box will be displayed If a communications error occurs during monitoring the dialog box will con tinue to show the last information that was collected To start monitoring again close the Monitor Device Dialog Box and then open the dialog box again The information displayed on the Status 1 Tab Page shows the status of the flags in the following allocat
277. e FINS com Setup munications service Up to 16 APIs can be used at a time and they are identified by connection numbers 1 to 16 The EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port can thus simulta neously execute the FINS communications service by TCP with up to 16 remote nodes Protection Setting Select this check box to refuse connection requests from any IP address not set as the target IP address when the server client setting is set to a server and the target IP address is set to any value other than 0 0 0 0 This check box can be selected to prevent inappropriate opera tions on the PLC for FINS commands from specific nodes When necessary set the routing tables using the CX Integrator Using FTP Tab Page in Edit Setting Function Parameters Dialog Box Not Use FTP or Specifies whether to use FTP FTP connections from external Use FTP devices will not be possible if Not Use FTP is specified Login Sets the login name for FTP connections to the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port from external devices Password Sets the password for FTP connections to the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port from external devices Port No Sets the FTP port number of the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port It is normally not necessary to change this setting Two ports are used with the FTP a control port and a data transfer port Only the control port can be set The data transfer port num
278. e I O table with the I O Table Verification operation and correct it if necessary After correcting it perform the I O Table Create operation A CPU Bus Unit e The CPU Bus Unit model registered in the I O tables does setting error not match the model of CPU Bus Unit actually mounted occurred Check the I O tables with the I O Table Verification operation and correct it if necessary After correcting the I O tables perform the I O Table Create operation A CPU Bus error e Confirm that the Unit is connected properly occurred e Restart the Unit Replace the Unit if it doesn t restart An I O Bus error e Confirm that the Unit is connected properly occurred e Restart the Unit Replace the Unit if it doesn t restart For details refer to the CPU Unit s Operation Manual 356 Troubleshooting Section 14 5 14 5 2 General Ethernet Problems The 100M and 10M Indicators on the EtherNet IP Unit or CPU Unit are both OFF e Confirm that the cable being used has the correct ratings e Confirm that the cable is properly connected to the switching hub and the hub s power supply is ON The 7 segment dis play will indicate error E1 e If the switching hub s settings can be changed confirm that the Ethernet link settings are the same as the settings for the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port For details refer to 3 4 Network Installation The NS Indicator on the EtherNet IP Unit or CPU U
279. e Network Configuration File Save a network configuration file containing all of the devices verified pa rameters Refer to 6 2 13 Saving the Network Configuration File 4 Closing the Network Configurator Exit from the Network Configurator Changing the Actual Refer to the modified specifications and make the necessary changes such System Configuration as changing network wiring changing IP addresses adding devices and deleting devices 5 Clearing Parameters in Added Devices Clear the various parameters stored in the added devices Refer to 6 2 12 Clearing the Device Parameters Note Before connecting newly added devices to the network clear the parameters set in the devices The EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port will restart automatically when the Unit s device parameters are cleared reset from the Network Configurator The Unit must restart in order to enable the cleared parameter settings default settings Clear reset the device parameters only after verifying that restarting the Unit will not cause any problems in the sys tem 6 Setting Unit Setup for the EtherNet IP Unit or Built in EtherNet IP Port Set the Unit Setup from the CX Programmer for the EtherNet IP Unit or Built in EtherNet IP port Refer to 3 8 TCP IP and Link Settings Refer to 3 10 Other Parameters 31 Section 2 1 Design Procedures Eee a Note Changing Tag Data Link Settings 32 Note 7 Set IP Address for Oth
280. e configured as follows If you would not like to use a multi cast connection please clear off the check box M Originator Addr Originator Variable Target Address Target Variable 1921682501 NO1_InData 1921682502 NO1_OutData j Cancel Click the OK Button to start processing 4 A device connection structure tree will be displayed when processing has been completed Device s Connection Structure Tree Based on Slave Device Target Display Option Display Route Path Display the detail of Connection Structure EN Network Configurator EtherNet IP_1 amp 1921682501 CJ2B EIP21 192 168 250 2 CJ2B EIP21 5 Use the device connection structure tree as required to change the RPI and timeout settings Device Connection Connection settings can be displayed on the network configuration Select Structure Tree View Device s Connection Structure Tree from the Network Menu 172 Network Configurator Operations Section 6 2 x Device s Connection Structure Tree Display Type Based on Master Device Originator Based on Slave Device Target Display Option Display Route Path Structure Network Configurator EtherNet IP_1 192168 250 1 CJ2B EIP21 5 NO1_InData M 500ms p 192 168 2502 CJ2B EIP21 LS NO1_OutData e The Display the detail of Connection Check Box can be used to switch between device level and connection level di
281. e contents of the Routing Table Area as the set tings for FINS network Overview of EtherNet IP Unit and Built in EtherNet IP Port Section 1 1 If FINS service is not used the CX Integrator can be used without setting the network address in the routing tables in the EtherNet IP Unit or built in Ether Net IP port Personal computer running Windows CX Integrator Routing table settings EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port CS CJ series CPU Unit 1 1 5 Communications Services Overview The following communications services are supported CIP Common Industrial Protocol Communications Services Tag Data Links A program is not required to perform cyclic data exchanges with other devices Cyclic Communications in the EtherNet IP network Normally the tag data links in an EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port are started by grouping the tags created with the Network Configurator into a tag set and establishing a connection with the target device using that group of tags One connection is used per group tag set Up to 256 connections can be registered The following table shows the tag and tag set specifications of the CS1W EIP21 CJ1W EIP21 and CJ2H CPULIL EIP Total size of all tags lt 184 832 words Maximum size of 1 tag set lt 722 words The maximum size is 721 words when the tag set includes the PLC status Maximum size of
282. e for Tag Data Links 38 2 3 2 Tag Data Link Devices 0 0 0 40 2 3 3 Adjusting Device Bandwidth Usage 00 41 2 3 4 Checking the Device Bandwidth Usage and Resetting the RPI 42 2 3 5 RPI Setting Examples 0 000 000 e eee ee eee 46 27 Design Procedures Section 2 1 2 1 Design Procedures This section describes how to design an EtherNet IP system in the following two cases 1 Establishing a new EtherNet IP system 2 Modifying an established EtherNet system 2 1 1 Establishing a New EtherNet IP System This section describes how to use the Network Configurator to construct a new EtherNet IP system by designing the new system and downloading the parameters to the network devices Selecting a Switching Always use a switching hub when using tag data links Select a switching hub Hub with the functions required for the communications being used in the network Refer to 2 2 Selecting the Network Devices Unit Setup Offline 1 Starting the CX Programmer Procedures Start the CX Programmer 2 Creating a New Project Create a new project and set the device type of the PLC 3 Registering the EtherNet IP Unit in the I O Tables Register an EtherNet IP Unit in the correct location in the I O tables The CJ2 built in EtherNet IP port will be registered in I O tables by default Refer to 3 6 3 Procedure for Creating I O Tables 4 Configuring the Unit Set the
283. e memory itself This error will occur in the following cases 1 An error oc curred while writing the er ror log An error oc curred while writing the device pa rameters Note This error does not indicate checksum errors detected when reading data Unit operation Flag status Case 1 The error record remains in RAM only Subsequent writes to non volatile memory are all ignored Other than that normal operation continues Error records con tinue to be written to RAM Case 2 Tag data links and message communica tions will continue operating The Unit Error Occurred Flag n 10 bit 00 Unit Memory Error Flag n 10 bit 04 and Non volatile Memory Error Flag n 14 bit 15 will turn ON Countermeasure Download the Unit Setup from the tab pages of the Edit Parameters Dialog Box of the CX Pro grammer and download the device parameters from the Network Configurator If the error recurs replace the Ether Net IP Unit or fora built in EtherNet IP port the CPU Unit 341 Using the LED Indicators and Display for Troubleshooting Indicator Flashing red 7 segment Device Param eters Error The I O Area set in the device parameters does not exist in the CPU Unit or the EM Area was converted to file memory A checksum error or logic error was detected in the parameters The Unit was mounted to a different PLC e g from CJ1 to C
284. e no processing delays is calculated as follows Input ON delay 1 5 ms PLC 1 cycle time 10 0 ms Transmission time for 722 words of send data Approx 0 12 ms PLC 7 cycle time 15 0 ms Output ON delay 2 0 ms Total tag data link I O response time Approx 28 62 ms When the baud rate is 100 Mbps the transmission time can be calculated with the following equation If a network delay does not occur just this transmis sion time is added Transmission time Number of send data words x 2 74 x 8 x 0 00001 ms Note The I O response time may be longer due to noise or other events 280 Message Service Transmission Delay Section 10 3 10 3 Message Service Transmission Delay This section explains the maximum transmission delay that can occur between the execution of a SEND 090 RECV 098 or CMND 490 instruc tion in the ladder program until completion of the instruction This delay does not include the time required for the tag data link or the execution time of the ladder program itself 10 3 1 Maximum Transmission Delays Excluding Delays in the Network Use the following equation to calculate the maximum transmission delay that can occur between the execution of a SEND 090 or RECV 098 instruction in the ladder program until completion of the instruction SEND 090 Instruction Execution of SEND 090 in user program CPU Bus Unit service cycle Local node CPU Bus Unit servic
285. e performed The switching hub functions shown in the following table determine the perfor mance of tag data links Item Description Buffer capacity This is the amount of data that can be buffered when packets accumulate at the switching hub Multicast filtering This function transfers multicast packets to specific nodes only QoS function This function performs priority control on packet transfers The following table shows the tag data link settings that can be made for indi vidual EtherNet IP Units as well as the setting ranges Contents Settings Network bandwidth Physical Ethernet baud rate 100 Mbps or 10 Mbps Allowed tag data link com Maximum number of tag data link 6 000 pps max munications bandwidth packets that can be processed in 1 second pps packets per second Connection resources Number of connections that can 256 max be established Packet interval RPI Refresh cycle for tag data 0 5 to 10 000 ms in Requested Packet Interval 0 5 ms units When the tag data link settings exceed the capabilities of the switching hub being used increase the RPI value Particularly when using a switching hub that does not support multicast filtering the settings must be made consider ing that multicast packets will be sent even to nodes without connection set tings In addition if the required tag data link performance cannot be achieved with the switching hub s capabilities reeva
286. e processing time Y Local node Send processing Y Transmission delay Y Receive processing i CPU Bus Unit service cycle iy Remote node Maximum transmission delay H CPU Bus Unit service Y processing time Remote node f CPU data set y processing Maximum transmission delay CPU Bus Unit service cycle local node CPU Bus Unit service processing time local node Send processing Transmission delay Receive processing CPU Bus Unit service cycle remote node CPU Bus Unit service processing time remote node CPU Bus Unit Service The following table shows the service cycle which depends on the CPU Unit s Cycle Local Node CPU processing mode setting CPU execution mode Processing time details Normal Mode See note Priority peripheral servicing Parallel processing with syn chronous memory access One CPU Unit cycle time Parallel processing with asyn chronous memory access 0 2 ms peripheral servicing time 1 ms max for peripheral servicing of each Special I O Unit CPU Bus Unit peripheral port RS 232C port and Inner Board Note CJ2 CPU Units support only Normal Mode 281 Message Service Transmission Delay Section 10 3 For details refer to the CPU Unit s Operation Manual CPU Bus Unit Service The following table shows the CPU Bus Unit service processing time which Node Time Local depends on the CPU Units CPU processing mode set
287. e segments are dif ferent in which case it will be separated into 536 byte units TTL Time to Live 30 Decremented each time an IP router is passed Keep alive timer First time 5 min Resend 5 s x 5 times The keep alive timer is used for the keep alive function with TCP connec tions It must be used with UCMM Class 3 Note The hold time is 3 s for the UCMM service Class 3 service and tag data link open close processing 365 Ethernet Network Parameters Appendix B 366 Appendix C TCP Status Transitions The TCP socket status can be confirmed using the socket status data returned for the FINS command SOCKET STATUS READ 27 64 RECEIVED FIN WAIT 2 CLOSED ACTIVE OPEN snd SYN Passive OPEN LISTEN rev SYN snd SYN ACK rev SYN snd ACK rcv ACK of SYN rev SYN ACK snd ACK ESTABLISHED CLOSE rev FIN snd FIN snd ACK CLOSED WAIT rev FIN CLOSE rev ACK of FIN snd ACK CLOSING LAST ACK rev ACK of FIN rev ACK of FIN rev FIN snd ACK Timeout 2MSL gt TIME WAIT CLOSED Status Meaning CLOSED Connection closed LISTEN Waiting for connection SYN SENT SYN sent in active status SYN RECEIVED SYN received and sent ESTABLISHED Already established CLOSE WAIT FIN received and waiting for completion FIN WAIT 1 Completed and FIN sent
288. e time Internal table This a table of correspondences for remote FINS node addresses remote IP addresses TCP UDP and remote port numbers It is created automatically when power is turned ON to the PLC or when the Ethernet Unit is restarted and it is automatically changed when a connection is established by means of the FINS TCP method or when a FINS command received The following functions are enabled by using this table e IP address conversion using the FINS UDP method e Automatic FINS node address conversion after a connection is established using the FINS TCP method e Automatic client FINS node address allocation using the FINS TCP method e Simultaneous connection of multiple FINS applications 209 FINS UDP Method 8 2 FINS UDP Method 8 2 1 Overview FINS UDP Features FINS UDP Frame Format 210 Section 8 2 The FINS UDP method is a FINS communications method that uses the UDP IP protocol UDP IP is a connectionless communications protocol When a message is sent from one node to another the two nodes have an equal rela tionship and there is no clear connection If using TCP is like making a tele phone call then UDP is more like delivering a memo by hand Although the UDP protocol is fast data communications are less reliable than with TCP In particular when sending large amounts of data involving significant routing the user must program measures such as retries into applications in order to imp
289. ea can be used only when the allo cated CIO Area words are set to user settings Note The EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port has the following two data areas in its non volatile memory Unlike the Ethernet Units settings are not stored in the CPU Unit s CPU Bus Unit Sys tem Setup Area e Unit Setup Settings such as the IP address and FINS UDP set tings The Unit Setup is set from the CX Programmer e Device parameter settings Settings such as the tag data link set ting parameters The device parameter settings are made from the Network Configurator 88 Overview of Memory Allocated to the EtherNet IP Unit Section 4 1 CPU Unit EtherNet IP Unit Allocated CIO Area words Allocated to the Unit as a CPU Bus Unit Local memory CIO 1500 Flags and control bits Unit number 0 C1071901 25 words 2 l 2 25 words Target node PLC s operating ClO 1524 and error information Unit CIO 1525 status communications status registered normal Unit number 1 a a 25 words target node and FINS TCP connection status i CIO 1549 CIO 1875 Unit number 15 a 2 25 words CIO 1899 User Settings Area Local memory Set in Network Configurator gt 64 words Target node PLC s operating 64 words and error information and registered normal target nod Allocated DM Area words Allocated to the Unit as a CPU Bus Unit
290. ecifies user name for the remote FTP server Displays the Memory Card file names Display the Memory Card file names and details Changes a file name Creates a new directory in the working directory in the remote host Deletes a new directory from the working directory in the remote host Changes the Ethernet Unit work directory to the specified directory Changes the working directory at the remote host to the parent direc tory Displays the Ethernet Unit work directory Specifies the data type of transferred files Transfers the specified file from the Memory Card to the local host Transfers multiple files from the Memory Card to the local host Transfers the specified local file to the Memory Card Transfers multiple local files to the Memory Card Deletes the specified file from the Memory Card Deletes multiple files from the Memory Card Disconnects the FTP server Closes the FTP client Closes the FTP client e The EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port is considered to be the remote host and the host computer FTP client is considered to be the local host e A remote file is a file on the Memory Card or in EM File Memory in the CPU Unit A local file is one in the host computer FTP client e The parent directory is the directory one above the working directory 11 5 2 Using the Commands open Format open IP_address or host_name_of_ FTP
291. ections Check the consistency of connection parameters for network configuration files that have been read Refer to 6 2 15 Checking Connections Changing Target Device Parameters If the target device parameters are changed they will no longer agree with the parameter information registered in the originator device where the target device is registered Be sure to check connections for network configuration files that have had parameters changed 13 Verifying the Network Bandwidth Being Used Verify that the bandwidth used by the EtherNet IP tag data links does not exceed the allowed network bandwidth If the bandwidth exceeds the allowed level adjust the RPI Refer to 2 3 Checking Bandwidth Usage and Adjusting the RPI 14 Recalculating and Verifying the Maximum Response Time Calculate the maximum response time of all of the tag data links and verify that the response time meets the design requirements If the response time does not meet the required specifications evaluate and correct the network configuration by taking steps such as using a different switching hub or dividing the network Design Procedures Section 2 1 Refer to 2 2 Selecting the Network Devices Refer to SECTION 10 Communications Performance and Communi cations Load 15 Saving the Network Configuration File Save the modified network configuration file Refer to 6 2 13 Saving the Network Configuration File 16 Closing the Network Configurator Exit f
292. ectory already exists FINS error 0 x 2107 The specified file or directory name already exists File or directory name illegal File or directory name illegal FINS error 0 x 110C The file or directory name is incorrect File read error FINS error O x 1104 File read error FINS error O x 110B An error occurs when reading the file File write error FINS error O x 2106 File write error FINS error O x 2107 An error occurs when reading the file FINS error MRES 0 x XX SRES 0 x XX Some other FINS error has occurred Length of directory name too long The path name of the directory is too long No space to create entry FINS error 0 x 2103 There are too many files to create a new one No such device FINS error 0 x 2301 The file device cannot be found No such file or directory No such file or directory FINS error 0 x 2006 No such file or directory FINS error O x 2106 The specified file or directory does not exist Not enough memory The communications buffers are full Not enough space in the system FINS error 1104 The file device is full PLC communication error timeout File access timed out Socket canceled The socket was canceled Socket error NN A socket bind error occurred The error code will be given at NN Socket receive error NN A data reception error occurred The error code
293. ed No Unit with specified unit address send failed CPU Unit error send failed Destination address not in routing tables send failed Not registered in routing tables send failed Routing table error send failed Too many relay points send failed Command too long send failed Header error send failed Internal buffers full packet discarded Illegal packet discarded Local node busy send failed Unexpected routing error Service not supported in current mode packet discarded Internal send buffer full packet discarded Maximum frame size exceeded routing failed Response timeout packet discarded FINS Command Bit 15 OFF Bits 08 to 14 Source network address Bits 00 to 07 Source node address FINS Response Bit 15 ON Bits 08 to 14 Destination network address Bits 00 to 07 Destination node address CIP Frame FFFF Communications controller error 00 hex 01 hex IP address duplication Port number always 02 Lower byte of IP address Logic error in setting table 00 hex 02 hex Network parame ters 03 hex Routing tables 04 hex Unit Setup OE hex Unit name 12 hex Status area layout setting error 13 hex Status area layout setting verification error 15 hex Installation in a PLC of another series e g from CJ1 to CJ2 after setting the Unit 353 Error Log Function Section 14 4
294. ed CIO Area words Unit status 1 Unit status 2 Communications status 1 Communications status 2 and Communications status 3 There will be a check mark in the box when the corresponding flag is ON In addition the Target Node Status Field shows the connection status of the target nodes that are connected with the EtherNet IP Unit as the tag data link originator The icon will be blue if the connection is normal or red if an error occurred Checking Status with the Network Configurator Section 14 1 Status 2 Tab Page Monitor Device Controller Error History Tag Status Ethernet Information Status 1 Status 2 Connection Error History Unit Status i ie Tag Data Link M M Network Status All Tag Data Link Tag Data Link Ethernet Link Status Target Node Status am The Status 2 Tab Page s Target PLC Status Field shows the status of the tar get node PLCs that are connected with the EtherNet IP Unit as the tag data link originator The icon will be blue if the CPU Unit is in RUN mode or MONI TOR mode gray if it is in PROGRAM mode or red if an error occurred The Connected Status of FINS TCP Connections Field shows the status of FINS TCP connections There will be a check mark in the box when the corre sponding connection is established connected 329 Checking Status with the Network Configurator Note 330 Monitor Device Controller Error History Status 1 Tag Status St
295. ed according to the scale of the network Classes D and E are not used The configuration of the IP address for each of these classes is shown in the following diagram Bit 31 23 0 Class A 0 Network number 7 bits Host number 24 bits Bit 31 15 0 Class B 1 0 Network number 14 bits Host number 16 bits Bit 31 7 0 ClassC 1 110 Network number 21 bits Host number 8 bits Bit 31 0 ClassD 1 1 1 0 Multicast address Cannot be used Bit 31 0 ClassE 1 1 1 1 Identification address Cannot be used The number of networks in each class and the number of nodes possible on the network differ according to the class Number of networks Number of hosts Small 2 4_9 max 16 777 214 max Medium 216_2 max 65 534 max Large 28_2 max 254 max The 32 bits of an IP address are divided into four sections of eight bits each and expressed as a punctuated number IP addresses are represented by the decimal equivalent of each of the four octets in the 32 bit address each sepa rated by a period For example the binary address 10000010 00111010 00010001 00100000 would be represented as 130 58 17 32 Note The same network number must be set for every node on the same Ethernet network 5 1 2 Allocating IP Addresses IP Internet Protocol is a standard communications protocol used throughout the world and is designed to enable communications between any Ethern
296. ed from specified devices only the up load operation will be cancelled and the upload will not be performed e Clicking the Cancel Button The upload operation will be cancelled and the upload will not be per formed e Uploading Individually from Particular Devices 181 Network Configurator Operations Section 6 2 3 Select the icon of the EtherNet IP Unit from which you want to upload To select multiple nodes press and hold the Shift Key while selecting addi tional icons In the following example 2 nodes are selected 192 168 250 1 and 192 168 250 2 After selecting the icons click the right mouse button over the icon to dis play the pop up menu and select Parameter Upload EtherNet 1P_1 _ a 92 192 168 250 1 192 CS1W EIP21 cS g d Reset _ lt E Register to other Device r Download External Data gt po The following confirmation dialog box will be displayed Network Configurator Uploading parameters from selected devices will start e OK Click the Yes Button or No Button During the upload the following progress monitor will be displayed to show the progress of the upload Uploading Device Parameter 192 168 250 1 as Uploading Parameter COTTE The following dialog box will be displayed indicating that the upload was completed Network Configurator 1 Upload of device parameter was completed 6 2 10 Veri
297. ee 5 1 3 EtherNet IP Unit IP Address Settings 5 1 4 Subnet Masks 0 00 eee eee SA3 MCUDR vis access fecal aes aa 2G Bana diac Gd toe he acd aes Se se ene IP Addresses in FINS Communications 00 0000 00005 5 2 1 Specifying Nodes in FINS Communications Services 5 2 2 Pairing Addresses in Internal Tables 5 2 3 Application Examples 0 00 00 cee eee eee eee 5 2 4 Related Products and Communications Setting Methods 5 2 5 Pairing IP Addresses and FINS Node Addresses Private and Global Addresses 0 0 0 2 e eee eee eee 5 3 1 Private and Global Addresses 0 000 000 0000 00 5 3 2 Using a Private Address for the EtherNet IP Unit 5 3 3 EtherNet IP Unit with a Global Address SECTION 5 Determining IP Addresses 112 112 112 113 113 114 114 114 116 122 123 125 126 126 127 129 111 IP Addresses Section 5 1 5 1 IP Addresses 5 1 1 IP Address Configuration IP addresses are made up of 32 bits of binary data divided into four 8 bit fields called octets These four octets provide the network number net ID and host number host ID The network number identifies the network and the host number identifies the node or host on the network The network numbers in an IP address are divided into three classes A B and C so that the address system can be select
298. end command response messages between nodes on the Ethernet network The messages can be sent between a computer and PLC between two PLCs between an OMRON PLC and a master made by another company or between slaves The messages can be used to send receive data read time data error logs and other data or con trol operation e g by force setting resetting bits There are two types of messages FINS messages and explicit messages FINS messages Explicit messages Outline Message communications for Standard ODVA message communi OMRON products that use the cations using the CIP protocol FINS protocol Remote e Computer with an Ethernet inter e Computer with an Ethernet inter device face face e OMRON PLCs with a CS CUJ e Another company s masters or series EtherNet IP Unit built in slaves EtherNet IP port or Ethernet OMRON PLCs with a CS Cu Unit series EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port Features Send and receive the various e Supports message communica FINS commands to provide an tions with other companies Ether even greater range of services Net IP devices than the CIP UCMM messages Gg CJ Series e Provide transparency in mes e CS1W EIP21 sage communications with other OMRON networks such as Con CJ1W EIP21 troller Link SYSMAC LINK and CJ2H CPU Ethernet CS1 CJ1 CPU Units with unit version 2 0 or later or CJ2 CPU Units Up to 8 levels CPU Units with unit version earlier than
299. er Multicast filter IN OUT Output with no overload is marked otal Size If it includes PLC Status data NetworkConfigurator will show the additional 2 bytes as a size 1CH 2bytes FA F2 F3 F4 F5 F F7 F8 F9 F10 Help Edit Cell Show Prey Show Next hsert Delete Move Down Move Up Datalink Check the Node Node TagSet TagSet TagSet TagSet Wizard table NUM Ready 7 After entering all of the settings in the data link table select Save from the File Menu A consistency check will be performed on the table and the re sults will be displayed a Table Inconsistencies The following Check Result Dialog Box will be displayed Correct the data link table according to the displayed information Check Result Check Result Type Node Line No Contents Error 192 168 250 2 Target node is not yet input Please input target node IP Address Error 192 168 250 2 Target variable is not yet input Please input target variable Error 192 168 250 2 RPI is not yet input Please input RPI Error 192 168 250 1 The combination of the target node and target variable is invalid be Error 192 168 250 1 The combination of the target node and target variable is invalid be Error 192 168 250 2 The combination of the target node and target variable is invalid be Error 192 168 250 3 The combination of the target node and target variable is invalid be Error 192 168 250 3 The combination of the target node and target variable is invalid b
300. er Devices Use the Network Configurator to set IP addresses for devices other than the EtherNet IP Unit or Built in EtherNet IP port 1 Before connecting a device to the network set a suitable IP address 2 When setting the local IP address for the EtherNet IP Unit or built in Eth erNet IP port with the Network Configurator connect the node one at a time and download the TCP IP setting parameters The EtherNet IP Unit will restart automatically when the TCP IP setting parameters are downloaded to the Unit from the Network Configurator The Unit must restart in order to enable the parameter settings Download the TCP IP setting parameters only after verifying that restarting the Unit will not cause any problems in the system 8 Starting the Network Configurator Start the Network Configurator to redesign the network 9 Reading the Network Configuration File Read the previously saved network configuration file Refer to 6 2 14 Reading a Network Configuration File 10 Changing the Network Configuration Make the changes required in the system redesign such as adding devic es deleting devices and changing IP addresses Refer to 3 8 TCP IP and Link Settings 11 Changing the Device Parameters Change the device parameters for each device in the network configura tion as required in the system redesign Refer to 6 2 5 Creating Tag Sets and 6 2 6 Setting Connections with Target Devices Originator Only 12 Checking Conn
301. er to 8 4 3 Rout ing Table Setting Examples for routing table setting examples 8 4 2 Connecting and Using a Peripheral Device for the PLC 218 Routing tables must be created by a CX Integrator connected to the PLC They cannot be created using a Programming Console For details on how to connect and use the CX Integrator refer to the CxX Integrator Operation Manual W445 CX Integrator is automatically installed when CX One is installed Note 1 When routing tables are transferred from the CX Integrator to the PLC all of the CPU Bus Unit are reset so that the routing tables that have been cre ated can be read and enabled Before transferring the routing tables con firm that there will be no problems in the system when the CPU Bus Units are reset 2 To transfer routing tables for multiple nodes to a PLC in one batch connect the CX Integrator to a PLC with only one Communications Unit mounted Routing tables cannot be transferred to other nodes from a PLC with mul tiple Communications Units mounted 3 Routing tables can only be transferred as a batch to multiple nodes within the same network as the PLC to which the CX Integrator is connected Routing Tables Section 8 4 8 4 3 Routing Table Setting Examples m Example 1 Local Network Table for a PLC With Multiple Units Mounted This example shows the local network table settings for a PLC to which multi ple CPU Bus Units are mounted Ethernet EtherNet IP network Cont
302. erNet IP Units or Built in EtherNet IP Ports Appendix E Pa rameters IP Status Response Twe Ive types of IP status information occupying 4 bytes each are returned in the following sequence Each value is returned as an 8 digit hexadecimal value 1 2 3 10 11 12 Total number of IP packets received The number of IP packets discarded due to an error with the checksum in the packet header The number of IP packets discarded because the received packet was larger than the overall packet length value in the packet header The number of IP packets discarded because the minimum size of the IP header data could not be stored in the first short buffer See note when an attempt was made to store the packet The number of packets discarded for one of the following reasons The IP header length value in the IP header was smaller than the smallest size of the IP header The size of the first short buffer See note was smaller than the IP header length value in the IP header when storing the packet The number of IP packets discarded because the IP header length was larger than the overall packet length value in the packet header The number of fragmented packets received The number of received fragmented IP packets discarded because a queue for reassembly could not be secured The number of fragmented IP packets discarded because they could not be reassembled within 12 seconds after being received Always 0
303. eration Flag status Records the error in the error log Operation stops Countermeasure Restart the CPU Unit Replace the Ether Net IP Unit or for the built in Ether Net IP port the CPU Unit if the error recurs This section explains how to identify and correct errors based on the tag data link s connection status The connection status can be read using the Connec tion Tab Page of the Network Configurators Monitor Device Window For details refer to 14 1 1 The Network Configurator s Device Monitor Function 1 The connection status has the same meaning as the Connection Manag ers General and Additional error response codes as defined in the CIP specifications 2 The Open DeviceNet Vendor Association Inc ODVA can be contacted at the following address to obtain a copy of the CIP specifications ODVA Headquarters 4220 Varsity Drive Suite A Ann Arbor Michigan 48108 5006 USA TEL 1 734 975 8840 FAX 1 734 922 0027 346 Connection Status Codes and Error Processing Section 14 3 Connection status General Additional Status Status hex hex Email odva odva org WEB www odva org The following table shows the possible originator target configurations Configuration Configuration 1 CJ2H CPU Originator CS1W EIP21 CJ1W EIP21 EIP CS1W EIP21 CJ1W EIP21 CJ2H CPU EIP Configuration 2 CS1W EIP21 CJ2H CPU C
304. ers Connections Tag Sets Unregister Device List Product Name 192 168 250 3 CJ1W E1P21 CJ2 Connections 1 256 0 1 7 0 Register Device List Product Name 192 168 250 1 CJ2B E1P21 Variable Target Variable 4 192 168 250 2 002 C Ga TEST Input D00000 D00000 EditAl Change Target Node ID To From File Indicates the IP address of the originator where the connection was set Hosea 192 168 2502 68 250 3 Teeeeeeeeeeeerengereeeeeneenenened CSI Ww EIP21 JI We EIP21 2 192 168 2501 3 Repeat the Connections setting procedure until all of the connections have been set Note After completing the settings always click the OK Button before closing the Edit Device Parameters Dialog Box and performing an other operation If the Cancel Button is clicked and the dialog box is closed the new settings will be discarded 169 Network Configurator Operations Section 6 2 4 If the tag set s size is changed in either the originator or target after the connection was set the size will not match the other node and a parameter data mismatch will occur In this case if the connection settings have been changed be sure to check the connections Refer to 6 2 15 Checking Connections Automatically Setting Tag set names set for devices can be automatically detected to automatically Connections set connections between input and output tag sets with the same name or the same names excluding
305. ers Program ming Manual Describes programming tasks file memory and other functions for the CS series CJ series and NS J series PLCs Use together with the Programmable Controllers Opera tion Manual W339 for CS series PLCs and W393 for CJ series PLCs CS1G H CPU H CS1G H CPU V1 CJ1G H CPU CJ1G CPU NSJL NSJL H Programmable Con trollers Instructions Reference Manual Describes the ladder diagram programming instructions supported by CS series and CJ series PCs Use together with the Programmable Controllers Operation Manual W339 for CS series PLCs and W393 for CJ series PLCs and the Programmable Controllers Programming Manual W394 CXONE AL CXONE AL CS One Ver 3 0 Setup Manual Describes the setup procedures for the CX One Informa tion is also provided on the operating environment for the CX One WS02 CXPC CX Programmer Operation Manual Provides information on how to use the CX Programmer a Windows based programming device Use together with the Programmable Controllers Operation Manual W339 for CS series PLCs and W393 for CJ series PLCs Programmable Controllers Programming Manual W394 and the Programmable Controllers Instructions Reference Manual W340 to perform programming N WARNING Failure to read and understand the i
306. erted FINS message com munications are executed In this way remote FINS node addresses and remote IP addresses are paired for each connection Therefore with the FINS TCP method there is no need to set IP address conversions i e pairing FINS node addresses with IP addresses as with FINS UDP On the other hand it is necessary to set the remote IP address for each connection in the FINS TCP Tab Page of the Net work Configurator s Edit Parameters Dialog Box The internal table is changed after connections are established The EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port executes the following pro cessing when the FINS TCP method is used m Local Device FINS TCP Client 1 Connections are established in TCP IP protocol with the remote IP ad dresses set for FINS TCP connections in the FINS TCP Tab Page of the CX Programmer s Edit Parameters Dialog Box 2 The remote node i e the server is notified of the FINS node address for the local device 3 Notification is received from the remote node i e the server of the re mote node s FINS node address 4 The EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port changes the internal table FINS node address IP address and TCP port number 5 FINS messages can then be sent and received IP Addresses in FINS Communications Section 5 2 m Local Device FINS TCP Server 1 2 3 4 Personal computer or EtherNet IP Unit client 1 The
307. ertisement to be received if the transmission window is smaller than necessary and the resend timer is not set If no window advertisement is received within the time limit the number of segments permitted by the transmission window are sent If the trans mission window is set to 0 a window probe 1 octet of data is sent before the timer restarts The number of times no segment was sent or received within the time set on the hold timer The number of times the hold packet is resent Always 0 The number of times the hold packet is sent without response before the connection is cut off 2 Send Information 40 Bytes Ten information items are returned in the following sequence OFN O BS GO DO rae 9 10 The total number of packets sent The number of data packets sent The number of data bytes sent The number of data packets resent The number of data bytes resent The number of ACK packets sent The number of window probes 1 octet of data sent The number of emergency data packets sent Always 0 The number of window advertisement packets sent The number of control packets SYN FIN RST sent 3 Receive Information 84 Bytes Twenty one information items are returned in the following sequence OF ON The total number of packets received The number of packets received continuously The number of bytes received continuously The number of received packets discarded due to an incorrect checksum The number
308. erved Service code response The following response is returned if the CIP UCMM MESSAGE SEND com mand could not be sent or timed out 2810 Hex i See note Command Response code code Note There may be additional data depending on the response code e g for a relay error Parameters Transport ID command response When multiple CIP UCMM MESSAGE SEND commands are being sent the Transport ID identifies the commands This Transport ID is returned unchanged in the response Message monitoring time command Specifies the monitoring time in 10 ms units in order to monitor the time from the point that the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port extracts the CIP explicit message from this command until a response is received The moni toring time can be set between 0 01 and 655 35 s Service code command response In the command this code is the service code defined for EtherNet IP In the response bit 15 of the service code specified in the command is turned ON and the resulting value is returned 247 Sending Explicit Messages 248 Section 9 1 In the routing format for rely hops the first service code in the routing service data is 52 Hex which is the Unconnected Send service Request path size command Specifies the number of words of data that are specified in the request path field In the routing format for relay hops the first request path size in the routing serv
309. ervices 244 253 258 259 243 Sending Explicit Messages Section 9 1 9 1 Sending Explicit Messages CS CuJ series EtherNet IP Units and built in EtherNet IP ports can send explicit messages Only CIP unconnected message UCMM communications can be used to send explicit messages Explicit messages can be sent to the following destinations e EtherNet IP Units made by other manufacturers e Other PLCs with a CS CJ series EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port Example CS CJ series EtherNet IP Unit P Other manufacturer s CS CJ series CPU Unit EtherNet IP node Explicit messages can be sent Explicit message L Ethernet EtherNet IP CS CJ series CPU Unit When the destination is another company s EtherNet IP node an explicit mes sage can be sent to the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port using FINS command code 28 01 or 28 10 through the Connection Manager class s Unconnected Send service as shown in the following diagram Other company s CPU Unit EtherNet IP Unit EtherNet IP node Explicit FINS FINS Explicit message header mad header messag a l LP EtherNet IP Note Use 28 01 for the network FINS command code FINS Response Response header man header i EE ae When sending an explicit message set the local node s EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port as the destination of the FINS command and not the actual destination othe
310. es communications errors from multiple response timeouts may occasionally occur due to high traffic depending on the system configuration and the appli cation programs This section describes precautions for systems with high traffic in FINS communications m Conditions for High Traffic A heavy communications load may occur at an EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port if FINS messages and CIP messages from multiple nodes are concentrated on that EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port The EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port and the CPU Unit may have insuf ficient processing capacity for the volume of FINS messages commands that are coming from the network For example suppose that approximately 20 ms are required to process a sin gle FINS frame i e 20 ms from the time that the command is received at the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port until a response is sent If 100 or more FINS frames commands are received at once from multiple communi cating nodes it will take approximately 2 seconds to send a response to the last command If a timeout is set at the remote node for 2 seconds or less then a timeout will be generated A retry will begin due to the timeout and the traffic to the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port will thus be increased even further until ultimately the responses to all the nodes will be too slow At this point the system is overloaded m Avoiding Errors due to
311. es received from remote nodes This can be used effectively when the remote node is a device such as a personal computer and IP addresses are dynami cally changed by a method such as DHCP 117 IP Addresses in FINS Communications Section 5 2 Combined Method 118 Example When FINS Command is Sent FINS node number IP address table FINS node IP address number Node number in IP address table 19 153 214 0 62 20 153 214 0 129 PP address 153 214 0 129 23 153 218 51 8 FINS command sent When FINS Command is Received FINS node number 153 218 51 10 IP address 153 218 51 10 Changed FINS response returned The combined method combines the IP address table method and the auto matic generation method dynamic First the IP address table is referenced Then if the applicable FINS node address is found the corresponding IP address is read If the FINS node address is not found the IP address is calculated using the automatic genera tion method dynamic The internal table will be as follows e FINS Node Address Registered to IP Address Table The following address is registered to the internal table e Remote IP address IP address registered in IP address table e Remote UDP port number UDP port number set for local Unit e Connection method FINS UDP e FINS Node Address Not Registered to IP Address Table The following address is registered to the internal table e Rem
312. escribed Connections below The settings are made individually for each connection numbers 1 to 16 on the FINS TCP Tab Page of the Edit Parameters Dialog Box of the CX Programmer m Local Device Server 1 2 3 1 2 Set the server Set IP addresses for the devices to be connected If the option for protection of IP addresses is selected set the IP addresses for clients where connections are permitted This step can be omitted Automatic FINS node address allocation If the client generally a personal computer supports FINS TCP and if it is to be used without setting a FINS node address the value set here from 239 to 254 can be allocated to the client The default settings should nor mally be used m Local Device Client 1 2 3 4 Set the client 121 IP Addresses in FINS Communications Section 5 2 2 Set IP addresses for the devices to be connected Set the IP address for the remote EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port i e the server connected by FINS TCP This setting must be made if this EtherNet IP Unit will be used as a FINS TCP client 5 2 3 Application Examples Responding to Computers with Changed IP Addresses FINS UDP Communications Method FINS TCP Communications Method 122 Note With FINS UDP whether using the automatic conversion method dynamic the IP address table method or the combined method remote FINS node addresses and remote IP addresses in the i
313. ess Subnet mask code Response Block Command Response code code Parameters IP Address Command Specify the local IP address of the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port using 4 pairs of 2 digit hexadec imal numbers in the range 00 00 00 00 to FF FF FF FF 0 0 0 0 to 255 255 255 255 decimal Specify 0 0 0 0 to enable the local IP address set in the allocated DM Area words Example 150 31 2 83 96 1F 02 53 Subnet Mask Command Specify the local IP address of the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port using 4 pairs of hexadecimal numbers in the range 00 00 00 00 to FF FF FF FF 0 0 0 0 to 255 255 255 255 decimal Example 255 255 255 255 FF FF FF 00 392 FINS Commands Addressed to EtherNet IP Units or Built in EtherNet IP Ports Appendix E Response Codes Response code Description Normal end Command too large Command too small Precautions e The local IP address and subnet mask set by this command are written to the CPU Bus Unit System Setup for the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port e The new local IP address and subnet mask settings will become effective when the PLC or EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port is restarted IP ADDRESS TABLE READ Reads the IP address table Command Block Command Number of code records Response Block Command Response Maximum Number Number IP address IP address code code number of stored of records table
314. essed to EtherNet IP Units or Built in EtherNet IP Ports I O memory area access Command code MR SR MEMORY AREA READ Function Reads the contents of consecutive I O memory area words MEMORY AREA WRITE Writes the contents of consecutive I O memory area words MEMORY AREA FILL Writes the same data to the specified range of I O memory area words MULTIPLE MEMORY AREA READ Reads the contents of specified non consecutive I O memory area words MEMORY AREA TRANSFER Copies the contents of consecutive I O memory area words to another I O memory area Parameter access registered I O tables routing tables etc PARAMETER AREA READ Reads the contents of consecutive parameter area words PARAMETER AREA WRITE Writes the contents of consecutive parameter area words PARAMETER AREA FILL CLEAR Writes the same data to the specified range of parameter area words Program area access PROGRAM AREA READ Reads the UM User Memory area PROGRAM AREA WRITE Writes to the UM User Memory area PROGRAM AREA CLEAR Clears the UM User Memory area Operating mode changes RUN Changes the CPU Unit s operating mode to RUN or MONITOR STOP Changes the CPU Unit s operating mode to PROGRAM Machine configura tion reading CPU UNIT DATA READ Reads CPU Unit data CONNECTION DATA READ Reads the model numbers of the de
315. essed to EtherNet IP Units or Built in EtherNet IP Ports Command code Function name Remarks MRC SRC RESET CONTROLLER DATA READ CONTROLLER STATUS READ INTERNODE ECHO TEST BROADCAST TEST RESULTS READ BROADCAST DATA SEND ERROR LOG READ ERROR LOG CLEAR PING FINS TCP CONNECTION REMOTE NODE CHANGE REQUEST FINS TCP CONNECTION STATUS READ IP ADDRESS TABLE WRITE IP ADDRESS WRITE IP ADDRESS TABLE READ IP ROUTER TABLE READ PROTOCOL STATUS READ MEMORY STATUS READ SOCKET STATUS READ ADDRESS INFORMATION READ IP ADDRESS READ EXPLICIT MESSAGE SEND CIP UCMM MESSAGE SEND RESET Resets the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port Command Block ue Command code Response Block ejoj Command Response code code 379 FINS Commands Addressed to EtherNet IP Units or Built in EtherNet IP Ports Appendix E Precautions e No response will be returned if the command ends normally A response will be returned only if an error occurs e In some cases send requests SEND 192 RECV 193 instructions made from the PLC to the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port just before execution of the RESET command may not be executed e Applications that use TCP IP such as FINS TCP communications services are closed immediately before resetting Response Codes 1001 Command too large CONTROLLER DATA READ Reads the following
316. estination node address Response Block Normal Response a ec Dee E cae __ Service data Service code Command Response No of bytes code code received Destination node address remote node Error Responses The following response is returned if an error occurs for the explicit message 28 01 00 00 94 Seo Error code Service code 94 Hex Command Response No of bytes code code received Destination node address remote node The following response is returned if the explicit message cannot be sent or times out 28 01 Command Response code code Parameters Destination node address command The node address of the destination of the explicit message The node address of the local EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port is specified in the control data for the CMND 490 but the node address of the actual destination is specified here in the FINS command The destination node address cannot be set to 00 hex or FF hex Service code command response A service code defined for EtherNet IP In a normal response bit 15 of the ser vice code specified in the command will be turned ON and returned In an error response 94 Hex will always be returned 251 Sending Explicit Messages Description 252 Note Section 9 1 Class ID command The class ID of the destination of the explicit message Instance
317. et nodes regardless of the networks on which they exist To achieve this net work numbers are allocated by the Network Solutions InterNIC Registration Services to ensure that all Ethernet networks have unique numbers regard less of where they exist The local system administrator is left the responsibil ity of allocating unique host numbers locally You therefore should obtain a network number from the InterNIC Registration Services to ensure unique ness and allow for future network expansions if required 112 IP Addresses Section 5 1 5 1 3 EtherNet IP Unit IP Address Settings 5 1 4 Subnet Masks An IP address must be set even for the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port before Ethernet communications can proceed Use one of the following methods to set the IP address of the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port Either use the default IP address setting use a Programming Device to set a particular IP address in the DM Area words CS CJ Series only allo cated to the Unit as a CPU Bus Unit or set a particular IP address in the Eth erNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port e If you want to connect the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port immediately the default IP address is 192 168 250 Node_address The node address is set with the Node Address Setting Switches on the front of the EtherNet IP Unit or CPU Unit e If you want to set a particular IP address and store that local IP address in the CP
318. et for the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port as shown in the following table There may be additional delays due to the other devices in the network such as switch ing hubs Baud rate 100Base TX Command Delay time 0 0118 ms Response Number of words transferred x 0 0013 0 0118 ms 10Base T Command 0 0157 ms Response Command 0 704 ms Number of words transferred x 0 0019 0 0157 ms Response Number of words being transferred x 0 003 0 704 ms The following table shows the CPU Bus Unit service cycle which depends on the CPU Unit s CPU processing mode setting CPU execution mode Processing time details One CPU Unit cycle time Normal Mode See note Priority peripheral servicing EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port is given prior ity Time slice instruction execution time EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port is not given priority One CPU Unit cycle time Parallel processing with syn chronous memory access One CPU Unit cycle time Parallel processing with asyn chronous memory access 0 2 ms peripheral servicing time 1 ms max for peripheral servicing of each Special I O Unit CPU Bus Unit peripheral port RS 232C port and Inner Board Note CJ2 CPU Units support only Normal Mode For details refer to the CPU Unit s Operation Manual The following table shows the CPU Bus Unit service p
319. et the remote IP address 227 Using FINS Applications e TCP Nodes Tab Page Section 8 5 ETN_UNIT Properties About Network Communication Unit UDP nodes TCP nodes Network number 0 Network type Ethernet Node IP address Model Portno Keepdlive Click the Add Button and then set the IP address table in the following Ether net Node Definition Dialog Box IP address lo lo fo lo TCP setting TCP port number 0 keep alive on e Node address e IP address e Destination port number e Keep alive setting Cancel C Set the remote FINS node address Set the remote IP address Set the FINS TCP port number for the remote node Normally the PLC s default setting of 9600 should be specified Sets the keep alive function Normally this should be selected 3 Starting FinsGateway ETN UNIT Service Select ETN_UNIT from Services under the Basic Tab in the FinsGateway Setup Window and then click the Start Button 228 Using FINS Applications Section 8 5 m System Configuration Example 3 Connecting the CX Programmer Online CX Programmer CX Integrator Ethernet port Node number IP address 192 168 250 1 FinsGateWay Version 2003 Using the FINS TCP Method In this example an online connection is made by FINS TCP to a PLC on an Ethernet network PLC1 in the diagram below from a CX Programmer CX Integrator connected to the Ethernet network Conditions e
320. ettings Editing All Connections Network Configurator Operations Section 6 2 The connection settings between the originator and all of the target devices selected in the Register Device List can be edited together in a table There is another method in which connections are edited individually Select the Connections Tab and click the Edit All Button The following Edit All Connections Dialog Box will be displayed Edit All Connections Target Device Connection Name Connection I O Type In Out Target Variable Originator Variable Connection Type RPI Timeout Value The following table describes the various settings in the dialog box Setting Function Target Device Selects the target device Connection Name Any name can be given to the connection up to 32 charac ters If this field is left blank a default name will be assigned This Connection Name can be used for comments Connection I O Type When making tag data links in a CS1W EIP21 CU1W EIP21 or CJ2B EIP21 select Input Only Tag type When making tag data links in other devices select the con nection I O type specified in that device s EDS file Use the Input Only ID type setting when another company s node is the originator and does not support connection set tings with the Tag type setting In Out The connections I O is automatically displayed based on the selected connection e Input Only J
321. ettings refer to 4 2 2 Details of the Allocated CIO Area Words Note With revision 2 or higher the Normal Target Node Flag will turn ON only after the data for all connections for the target device has been refreshed in the CPU Unit With revision 1 the Normal Target Node Flag will turn ON after the data for only one connection for the tar get device has been refreshed in the CPU Unit Condition showing that the Target Node PLC is operating OMRON PLCs only 5 The corresponding Target Node PLC Operating Flag in words n 2 to n 5 is ON Condition showing the Target Node PLC s fatal or non fatal error status OMRON PLCs only 6 The corresponding Target Node PLC Error Flag in words n 6 to n 9 is OFF When you want to use the Target Node PLC Error Flag the PLC status must be included in the tag sets for both the originator and target Include the PLC status by using the Network Configurator to select the Include Op tions in the Edit Tag Set Dialog Boxes For details refer to 6 3 2 Status Flags Related to Tag Data Links The following programming can be used to confirm that normal communica tions are being performed for each target node If the PLC status is included in the tag data the status of the PLC can also be detected 193 Ladder Programming with Tag Data Links Section 6 3 Programming for Revision 2 or Higher Tag Data Link Normal Target Node PLC Operating PLC Error Operating Flag 1 Flag 1 Flag
322. etwork EtherNet IP Data Links from the Network Con figurator menus and input the tag data link settings 2 Execute a table check F10 using the Datalink Tool to see if there are any mistakes in the settings 3 Select File Save from the Datalink Tool menus to save the set tings 4 Close the Datalink Tool b Use the following procedure to set the tag data links between PLCs us ing tag specifications together with physical addresses 1 Select the device and then select Device Parameters Edit from the menu Click the Edit Tag Button on the Tag Set Tab Page and create input and output tags Set the tag name PLC symbol name or PLC memory address physical address of the first word and the size 2 Create the tag set on the Tag Set Tab Page 3 For the originator device set the target device and connection on the Connection Tab Page i e set the node to connect to the re quested packet interval and the tag set 3 Download the settings from the Network Configurator to the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port 1 Connect the Network Configurator e When connecting through a CJ2 USB serial port select Option Se lect Interface CJ2 USB Serial Port e When connecting through a CS1 CJ1 serial port select Option Se lect Interface CS CJ1 Serial Port EIP Unit I F e When connecting through Ethernet select Option Select Interface Ethernet I F 2 Download the tag data link parameter settings
323. excessive noise Connection Failed The connection could not be established because device parameters such as the variable name and size did not match in the originator and target or con nection resources are insufficient The Unit will periodi cally attempt to reconnect to the tar get The Verification Error Flag n 12 bit 00 and Unit Error Occurred Flag n 10 bit 00 will go ON Correct the device parameter settings and download the device parameters again from the Net work Configurator 340 Tag Data Link Error A timeout occurred in the tag data link Tag data was not received from the target within the speci fied timeout time The Unit will periodi cally attempt to reconnect to the tar get where the error occurred The Tag Data Link Error Flag n 12 bit 02 Unit Error Occurred Flag n 10 bit 00 and Network Error Occurred Flag n 10 bit 01 will go ON Check the follow ing items e Is the registered node s power supply ON els the cable con nected els the cable dam aged or loose els there excessive noise Using the LED Indicators and Display for Troubleshooting Errors Related to Memory Access Indicator Flashing red 7 segment Section 14 2 The 7 segment display alternates between the node address and error code Memory Access Error An error occurred in the Unit s non vola til
324. externally connect to the None EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port via FTP Port No FTP port number of the EtherNet IP Unit or O built in EtherNet IP port 21 is used This setting does not normally need to be changed FTP uses two ports a port for control and a port for data transfer Set the control port only The data transfer port uses the value set for the control port 1 294 FTP Server Application Example Section 11 4 11 4 FTP Server Application Example The following procedure shows how to use the FTP server by connection with the default login name CONFIDENTIAL No password is required Note The login name and a password must be set in the CPU Bus Setup for the Ethernet Unit in the CPU Unit to use any login name other than CONFIDEN TIAL Note When general purpose FTP software is used files can be transferred and read using a graphical user interface similar to Explorer 1 2 3 1 Make sure that a Memory Card is inserted in the CPU Unit and turn ON the power supply to the PLC If EM File Memory is to be used create the EM File Memory 2 Connect to the FTP server from a computer on the Ethernet by entering the text that is underlined in the following diagram IP address of the Ethernet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port ftp 150 31 2 83 connected to 150 31 2 83 Results 220 IPaddress CJ1W EIP21 FTP server FTP version ready Name CONFIDENTIAL Login name
325. f each record is shown below Protocol 4 bytes The protocol used for the socket is returned as a number 00 00 00 06 TCP 00 00 00 11 UDP Receive Queue 4 bytes The number of bytes in the reception queue Send Queue 4 bytes The number of bytes in the send queue Local IP Address 4 bytes The local IP address allocated to the socket Local Port Number 4 bytes The local port number allocated to the socket Remote IP Address 4 bytes The remote IP address allocated to the socket 401 FINS Commands Addressed to EtherNet IP Units or Built in EtherNet IP Ports Appendix E Remote Port Number 4 bytes The remote port number allocated to the socket TCP Transitions 4 bytes The TCP connection status is returned as one of the numbers shown in the following table Refer to Appendix C TCP Status Transitions for a diagram of transitions Number 00 00 00 00 CLOSED Status Closed 00 00 00 01 LISTEN Waiting for connection 00 00 00 02 SYN SENT SYN sent in active status 00 00 00 03 SYN RECEIVED SYN received and sent 00 00 00 04 ESTABLISHED Already established 00 00 00 05 CLOSE WAIT Received FIN waiting to close 00 00 00 06 FIN WAIT 1 Completed and FIN sent 00 00 00 07 CLOSING Completed and exchanged FIN Awaiting ACK 00 00 00 08 LAST ACK FIN sent and completed Awaiting ACK 00 00 00 09 FIN WAIT 2 Close comple
326. fic on the network win dow sizes of network nodes other traffic at the EtherNet IP Unit or built in Eth erNet IP port itself e g simultaneous tag data link communications and the system configuration Message Service Transmission Delay Example Calculation Section 10 3 In this example RECV 098 is used to receive 256 words of data from another PLC The maximum transmission delay is calculated based on the following operating conditions e Local node s CPU cycle time 10 ms e Local node s CPU execution mode Normal e Local node s CPU peripheral servicing time Default 4 e Remote node s CPU cycle time 15 ms e Remote node s CPU execution mode Normal e Remote node s CPU peripheral servicing time Default 4 e Baud rate 100Base TX Item Calculated value CPU Bus Unit service cycle local 10 ms node 1 CPU Bus Unit service processing 0 4 ms time local node 1 Send processing command 0 550 ms 0 5 ms Transmission delay command 0 0118 ms 0 1 ms Receive processing command 0 704 ms 0 7 ms CPU Bus Unit service cycle remote 15 ms node CPU Bus Unit service processing 0 6 ms time remote node Send processing command 256 x 0 002 0 550 1 062 1 1 ms Transmission delay command 256 x 0 0013 0 0118 0 3446 0 3 ms Receive processing command 256 x 0 003 0 704 1 472 1 5 ms CPU Bus Unit service cycle l
327. filtering e QoS Quality of Service for TCP UDP port numbers L4 Multicast Filtering Multicast filtering transfers multicast packets to the specific nodes only This function is implemented in the switching hub as IGMP Snooping or GMRP Specific nodes are nodes equipped with an IGMP client that have made transfer requests to the switching hub OMRON EtherNet IP Units are equipped with an IGMP client When the hub does not use multicast filtering multicast packets are sent to all nodes just like broadcast packets which increases the traffic in the network Settings must be made in the switching hub to enable this function There must be enough multicast filters for the network being used QoS Quality of Service This function controls the priority of packet transmissions so that packets can Function for TCP UDP be sent with higher priority to a particular IP address or TCP UDP port The Port Numbers L4 TCP and UDP protocols are called transport layer protocols leading to the name L4 layer 4 QoS function When tag data links and message communications are executed on the same network tag data links can be sent at higher priority to prevent problems such as transmission delays due to message communications traffic and packet losses due to buffer overflow Settings must be made in the switching hub to enable this function and give higher priority to tag data link packets Support for the above two functions is as follows for
328. fying the Tag Data Links 182 Tag data link parameters such as the tag set settings and connection set tings can be compared with the EtherNet IP Units in the EtherNet IP network The following procedure shows how to compare the parameters For details on connecting to the network from the Network Configurator refer to 6 2 7 Connecting the Network Configurator to the Network Network Configurator Operations Section 6 2 Verifying the Network Compare the list of registered devices in the Network Configuration Window Configuration with the devices connected on the EtherNet IP network and check the IP addresses and device types This function cannot be used to verify device parameters 1 2 3 1 Connect the Network Configurator to the network 2 The following progress monitor will be displayed to show the progress as data is read from the network and compared Uploading Device Information 192 168 250 1 3 The results of the comparison between the network configuration file and data from the network are displayed as follows e Differences Not Found in the Comparison Network Configurator x 1 J No differences found e Differences Found in the Comparison Comparison Result Description Local Network Q Wrong device type 192 168 2 CJ2B EIP21 Not present Q Wrong device type 192 168 2 CJ1W EIP21 CJiW EIP21 C e Differences Found in the Device Type 183 Network Configurator Operation
329. g File Memory Section 11 7 11 7 Using File Memory There are two media that can be used to store files in memory for CS CJ series PLCs e Memory Cards e EM File Memory CPU Unit Memory Card EM File Memory File File 11 7 1 File Memory Memory type Capacity File data recognized by CPU Unit Flash memory 8 MB HMC EF861 e Complete user program 15 MB HMC EF171 e Specified portions of I O Memory 30 MB HMC EF371 e Parameter area data e g PLC Setup Max capacity of EM Area All EM Area banks in CPU Unit from specified bank in I O Memory specified in PLC Setup 11 7 2 File Types E File Names Files are distinguished by assigning file names and extensions The following characters can be used in file names and extensions Alphanumeric characters A to Z and 0 to 9 Names converted to all caps L amp A _ The following characters cannot be used in files names and extensions 2 3 lt gt spaces File names are not case sensitive and will be converted to all caps in the PLC file system File names can be up to 8 character long with 3 character exten sions An error will occur if a file name or extension is too long The first period in a file name will be taken as the delimiter between the file name and extension Extensions are determined by the file type E Directories Up to five levels of directories including root as the first level can be created as file
330. g data link settings device parameters Transfer specifica tions Media access method CSMA CD Modulation method Baseband Transmission paths Star form Baud rate 100 Mbit s 100Base TX Transmission media Shielded twisted pair STP cable Categories 100 Q at 5 5e Transmission dis tance 100 m distance between hub and node Number of cascade connections There is no limitation when a switching hub is used Current consumption Unit Weight Dimensions For CJ2 CPU Units refer to the CU2 CPU Hardware Operation Manual W472 Other general specifications Note Other specifications conform to the general specifications of the CJ2 or built in Ether Net IP port CU2 CPU Unit If tag data links are being used use 100Base TX Otherwise 10Base T can be used but this is not recommended 12 EtherNet IP Unit and Built in EtherNet IP Port Specifications Section 1 2 1 2 3 Communications Specifications Item CS1 CJ1 CIP service Tag data links Cyclic com munications Number of connections 256 Packet interval refresh cycle 0 5 to 10 000 ms in 0 5 ms units Can be set independently for each connection Data is refreshed over the network at the preset interval and does not depend on the number of nodes Allowed communications bandwidth per Unit 6000 pps See note 1 Number of tag sets 256 Tag types
331. g of this error code is defined by each vendor so it depends on the tar get s specifications Contact the target device s manufac turer The meaning of this error code is defined by each vendor so it depends on the origi nator s specifica tions Contact the origina tor device s manufac turer Error code generated in origina tor New data could not be obtained from the CPU Unit when open ing connection The Unit will automatically retry and attempt to open the connection again This error may occur if the CPU Unit s cycle time was long when opening the con nection or the specified EM bank was converted to file memory If the cycle time was too long the problem will be resolved automat ically If the EM bank is set as file memory change the storage loca tion for the tag data The meaning of this error code is defined by each vendor so it depends on the tar get s specifications Contact the target device s manufac turer The meaning of this error code is defined by each vendor so it depends on the origi nator s specifica tions Contact the origina tor device s manufac turer 351 Error Log Function Section 14 4 14 4 Error Log Function Errors detected by the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port are stored in the error log along with the date and time of their occurrence The error log can be read and cleared fro
332. get Variable To From File OK Cancel 163 Network Configurator Operations Section 6 2 3 Inthe Unregister Device List select the target device that requires connec tion settings by clicking the device so its color changes to gray and click the _ Button The selected target device will be displayed in the Reg ister Device List as shown in the following diagram Edit Device Parameters Connections Tag Sets Unregister Device List Product Name d 192 168 250 3 C 1w E1P21 CJ2 Connections 0 256 0 0 T 0 lt Register Device List Product Name 192 168 250 1 CJ2B EIP21 Variable Target Variable P 192 168 250 2 002 C Edit All Change Target Node ID To From File Cancel 4 Target node IDs are assigned to devices registered in the Register Device List This target node ID determines the location in the originator node PLC of the Target Node PLC Operating Flag Target Node PLC Error Flag Reg istered Target Node Flag and Normal Target Node Flag By default the target ID is automatically set to the rightmost 8 bits of the IP address In the example above the target device s IP address is 192 168 250 2 so the device number is 002 If a target node ID is duplicated and you want to change the device number click the Change Target Node ID Button and change the target ID Change Target Node ID x New Target Node ID Range 0 255 Cancel 164 Connections S
333. gs click the OK Button at the bottom of the Edit Tags Dialog Box In Consume Out Produce Name D00000 D00001 D00002 D00003 New Edit Delete Usage count 5 256 10 At this point a confirmation dialog box will be displayed to check whether the registered tag names will registered without changes as tag sets A tag set can contain up to 8 tags but tag sets will be registered with one tag per tag set if the tags are registered as tag sets In this case the Yes Button is clicked to register one tag per tag set 153 Network Configurator Operations Section 6 2 Network Configurator t The new Tags will be registered as Tag sets e If the No Button is clicked more tags can be registered at the end of the tag set Refer to step 18 for details on adding tags to the end of the tag set Changing and Registering 11 The following dialog box will be displayed when the tags in the Edit Tags Tag Sets Dialog Box are registered directly as tag sets Edit Device Parameters Connections Tag Sets In Consume Out Produce Name DOOOOO D00001 D00002 D00003 New Edit Delete Expand all Collapse All Edit Tags Delete all of unused Tag Sets Usage Count 4 256 Import To From File g OK Cancel 12 If an input tag has already been registered in an input tag set and you want to change its registration to a different input tag set it is
334. gs and performance characteristics of the product are sufficient for the systems machines and equipment and be sure to provide the systems machines and equipment with double safety mechanisms This manual provides information for programming and operating the Unit Be sure to read this manual before attempting to use the Unit and keep this man ual close at hand for reference during operation It is extremely important that a PLC and all PLC Units be used for the speci fied purpose and under the specified conditions especially in applications that can directly or indirectly affect human life You must consult with your OMRON representative before applying a PLC System to the above mentioned appli cations Safety Precautions N WARNING Z N WARNING N WARNING Do not attempt to take any Unit apart while the power is being supplied Doing so may result in electric shock Do not touch any of the terminals or terminal blocks while the power is being supplied Doing so may result in electric shock Do not attempt to disassemble repair or modify any Units Any attempt to do so may result in malfunction fire or electric shock Safety Precautions N WARNING A Caution A Caution A Caution A Caution 3 Provide safety measures in external circuits i e not in the Programmable Controller including the following items to ensure safety in the system if an abnormality occurs due to malfunction of the PLC or another
335. h between switching hubs e g to 1 Gbps If these countermea sures are not possible change the connection settings e g the RPI set tings and adjust the bandwidth for all cascade connections until the total network bandwidth is not exceeded Performing message communications or other network operations from the Network Configurator such as monitoring or other operations that place a load on the network or from the user application when the tag data link band width usage of capacity is between 80 and 100 can create an excessive load on the network and result in timeouts If timeouts occur increase one or all of the RPI settings or reduce the usage of capacity 2 3 4 Checking the Device Bandwidth Usage and Resetting the RPI 42 1 2 3 The usage of capacity can be checked offline by inputting the RPI values in the Network Configurator s tag data link connection settings Check the usage of capacity and change the RPI settings If the required communications per formance cannot be achieved by changing the settings reevaluate the net work starting with the network configuration 1 Make the required settings in the Network Configurator s Network Config uration Window 2 Click the Detail Button in the Usage of Device Bandwidth Area at the bot tom of the Network Configuration Window C EtherNet IP_1 E E 192 168 250 1 192 168 250 2 CS1w ElP21 CJTW EIP21 2 250 2 2 250 1 Usage of Device Bandwi
336. h the switching hub could not be detected Note This error will not occur when data links are not set for version 2 0 or higher Unit operation Flag status e The Unit will be offline and unable to communicate Errors will be returned to all communications requests e Data exchanges refreshing will con tinue with the CPU Unit The Unit Error Occurred Flag n 10 bit 00 Network Error Occurred Flag n 10 bit 01 and Link OFF Error Flag n 10 bit 09 will go ON The Link Status Flag n 13 bit 14 will go OFF Countermeasure Check the follow ing items els the cable con nected els the cable dam aged or loose e Is there excessive noise 343 Using the LED Indicators and Display for Troubleshooting Indicator 344 7 segment Server Con nection Error An error occurred in communica tions with the DNS server Unit operation Flag status The DNS Server Error Flag n 14 bit 05 will turn ON Section 14 2 Countermeasure Perform one of the following e Correct the DNS server settings e Check the com munications path EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port cable connec tions hubs rout ers and servers and correct any problems An error occurred with the BOOTP server 1 There was no response from the BOOTP serv er The BOOTP server at tempted to set an invalid IP address in the EtherNet
337. hange to switching hubs with enough multicast filters or change the con nection settings such as the RPI settings Is the usage of capacity without multicast filtering under 100 for each node If any node exceeds 100 the multicast filtering function of the switch ing hub may not be working normally If the number of multicast filters supported by the switching hub is less than the number of multicast IP addresses in the network the bandwidth of part of the transmission path e g a switching hub or media converter had been exceeded as the result of how the network was wired e g switch hub or cascade connec tion causing a tag data link to operate abnormally Calculate the number of multicast filters necessary for the switching hubs on the network and change to switching hubs with enough multicast filters or change the con nection settings such as the RPI settings 41 Note Checking Bandwidth Usage and Adjusting the RPI Section 2 3 e Is the total network bandwidth usage under 100 Mbps If the total bandwidth usage exceeds 100 Mbps the bandwidth of part of the transmission path e g a switching hub or media converter had been exceeded as the result of how the network was wired e g switch hub or cascade connection causing a tag data link to operate abnor mally Check the bandwidth of the transmission path for all cascade con nections If the bandwidth is exceeded rewire the network or increase the bandwidt
338. he CPU Units will remain in PROGRAM mode Network Configurator The following dialog box will be displayed indicating that the download was completed Network Configurator 6 2 9 Uploading Tag Data Link Parameters 1 2 3 Tag data link parameters such as the tag set settings and connection set tings can be uploaded from EtherNet IP Units in the EtherNet IP network The following procedure shows how to upload the parameters For details on connecting to the network from the Network Configurator refer to 6 2 7 Con necting the Network Configurator to the Network Connect the Network Configurator to the network 2 There are two ways to upload the parameters e Uploading from All Devices in the Network Select Network Upload The following dialog box will be displayed Network Configurator Uploading all devices parameters from network will start based on the current document OK TF you select No it will start as new document e Clicking the Yes Button Parameters will be uploaded only from the devices registered in the Net work Configuration Window Parameters will not be uploaded from devices that are not registered in the Network Configuration Window e Clicking the No Button e If parameters are being uploaded from all devices in the network the parameters will be newly uploaded from all devices The current net work configuration information will be lost If parameters are being upload
339. he data areas for the PLC you are using 270 SECTION 10 Communications Performance and Communications Load This section describes the communications performance in an EtherNet IP network and shows how to estimate the I O response times and transmission delays 10 1 Communications System 0 00 00 272 10 1 1 Tag Data Link Communications Method 272 10 1 2 Tag Data Link Delay Time 0 0000 273 10 2 I O Response Time in Tag Data Links 0 00008 276 10 2 1 Timing of Data Exchanges 0 00 00 erruen 276 10 2 2 Data Processing Time 00 0 02 eee eee eee eee 276 10 2 3 Effect on the CPU Unit s Cycle Time 00 277 10 2 4 Tag Data Link I O Response Time Calculation Example 278 10 3 Message Service Transmission Delay 00 0000 cee ee eee 281 10 3 1 Maximum Transmission Delays Excluding Delays in the Network 281 271 Communications System Section 10 1 10 1 Communications System 10 1 1 Tag Data Link Communications Method Packet Interval RPI Settings Packet Interval RPI and Bandwidth Usage PPS 272 In EtherNet IP tag data links the data transmission period is set for each con nection as the packet interval RPI The target device will send data pro duced data once each packet interval RPI regardless of the number of nodes Example In this example 2 tag dat
340. he directory used when logging into the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port No MEMCARD directory will exist if a Memory Card is not inserted in the PLC or if the Memory Card power indicator is not lit No EM directory will exist if EM File Memory does not exist cdup Changes the working directory at the remote host to the parent directory one directory above the current working directory Using FTP Commands type Format Function get Format Function mget Format Function put Format Function mput Format Function Section 11 5 type data_type Specifies the file data type The following data types are supported ascii Files are transferred as ASCII data binary image Files are transferred as binary data All files are treated by the PLC as binary files Before reading or writing any files always use the type command to set the file type to binary File con tents cannot be guaranteed if transferred as ASCII data The default file type is ASCII get FILE NAME receive file name Transfers the specified remote file from the Memory Card or EM File Memory to the local host A receive file name can be used to specify the name of the file in the local host mget FILE NAME Allows the use of a wildcard character to transfer multiple remote files from the Memory Card or EM File Memory to the local host put file name DESTINATION FILE NAME Transfers the specified local
341. he file will be transferred to memory starting at D20000 at startup Program files AUTOEXEC Complete user pro gram e There must be a program file in the Mem ory Card when the automatic file transfer function is used at startup e Contains all the programs for cyclic tasks and interrupt tasks as well as task infor mation for one CPU Unit Parameter area file AUTOEXEC e PLC Setup e Registered I O tables e Routing tables e CPU Bus Unit Setup and other setup data There must be a parameter file in the Memory Card when the automatic file transfer function is used at startup e Contains all of the parameter data for one CPU Unit e There is no need for the user to distinguish the various types of data contained in the file All parameters in the file will be automati cally transferred to specified locations in memory at startup Note 1 Refer to information on file memory in the CS CJ series Programmable Controllers Operation Manual W339 2 All files transferred automatically at startup must have the name AUTOEX EC 304 Using File Memory Section 11 7 11 7 3 Initializing File Memory Memory Initialization method Memory 1 Insert the Memory Card into the CPU Unit Cards 2 Initialize the Memory Card from a Programming Device Programming Consoles included EM File Mem 1 Specify in the PLC Setup the first bank to convert to file memory ory 2 Initiali
342. he target device s manufac turer Depends on the orig inator s specifica tions Contact the originator device s manufacturer Error code returned from target There was a parameter error in the frame used to open the con nection This error does not occur Depends on the tar get s specifications Contact the target device s manufac turer Depends on the orig inator s specifica tions Contact the originator device s manufacturer Error code returned from target There was a parameter error in the frame used to open the con nection This error does not occur Depends on the tar get s specifications Contact the target device s manufac turer Depends on the orig inator s specifica tions Contact the originator device s manufacturer 349 Connection Status Codes and Error Processing Connection status General Additional Status Status hex hex Source of error Error code returned from target There was a parameter error in the frame used to close the con nection Handling Section 14 3 Configuration 1 This error does not occur Configuration 2 Depends on the tar get s specifications Contact the target device s manufac turer Configuration 3 Depends on the orig inator s specifica tions Contact the originator device s manufacturer Error code generated in origina
343. hem to each PLC See note 1 Set the routing tables with CX Integrator and transfer it to each PLC 5 Create a ladder program that includes the SEND 090 RECV 098 and CMND 490 instructions 1 Routing tables are required in the following situations e When communicating with a PLC or computer on another network e g remote programming or monitoring using FINS messages or a CX Programmer e When multiple Communications Units are mounted to a single PLC i e CPU Unit 215 FINS TCP Method Section 8 3 e When routing tables are used for one or more other nodes on the same network It is not necessary to set routing tables if one Communications Unit is mounted to the PLC and the nodes are connected as one network 2 If EtherNet IP is selected for CX Programmer communications FINS message communications and remote programming monitoring from the CX Programmer will be possible as long as CIP routing is possible for the entire communications path Routing tables do not need to be set If FINS messages are sent from a PLC however then routing tables must be set 216 Routing Tables Section 8 4 8 4 Routing Tables When the FINS communications service is used routing tables must be cre ated in advance Routing tables are required in the following circumstances e When communicating with a PLC or computer on another network e g remote programming or monitoring using FINS messages or a CX Pro grammer e
344. heral or RS 232C port CPU Units USB or RS 232C port Ethernet interface EtherNet IP Units Ethernet port CPU Unit s Ethernet port EtherNet IP Unit s Ethernet port Location on Network A single node address is used only when directly connected to EtherNet IP Number of Units that can be A single Network Configurator per Network More than one Configurator cannot be method connected to Network used in the same system Main func Network control e The Network configuration can be created and edited regardless of whether the tions functions Network Configurator is online or offline e The Network configuration can be read from a file or the network Configuration The EDS files used by the Network Configurator can be installed and deleted functions Supported file formats Configurator network configuration files nvf Configuration files ncf created using the Network Configurator for EtherNet IP version 2 can be imported by selecting External Data Import from the File Menu 24 Network Configurator Overview Section 1 4 1 4 3 Precautions When Using the Network Configurator Only an OMRON EtherNet IP Unit can be set as the originator for a connec tion using the Network Configurator e The Network Configurator can be connected to the EtherNet IP network through the following ports e CS1 CJ1 series CPU Unit s serial port peripheral or RS 232C or Ethernet port on EtherNet IP Unit
345. hernet segment Use the FINS UDP method between those nodes Note FINS UDP offers a slight advantage in performance e When FINS nodes are connected over multiple IP network layers Use the FINS TCP method between those nodes Note FINS TCP offers superior communications quality e When the quality of connections is unreliable as with wireless LAN Use the FINS TCP method between those nodes Note FINS TCP offers superior communications quality 8 1 3 FINS Communications Service Specifications Item Specifications Number of nodes 254 Message length 2 012 bytes max Number of buffers 192 Protocol name FINS UDP method FINS TCP method Protocol used UDP IP TCP IP Number of connections 16 Port number 9600 default Can be changed 9600 default Can be changed Protection No Yes Specification of client IP addresses when Unit is used as a server Other Items set for each UDP port e Broadcast e P Address Conversion Items set for each connection e Server client specification e Remote IP address specification When client Specify the IP address of the remote Unit server When server Specify IP addresses of clients permitted to con nect e Automatic FINS node address allocation Specify automatic allocation of client FINS node addresses e Keep alive Specify whether remote node keep alive is to be used TCP IP Setting e Remote node keep aliv
346. higher the appro priate frames are separated out automatically so there is normally no need to be pay attention to it at the application layer The TCP port number is the number for TCP to identify the application layer i e the FINS communications service in this case When communications are executed using TCP IP this port number must be allocated for the com munications service The default setting for the TCP port number i e the TCP port number of the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port is 9600 To set another number make the setting for the FINS TCP port on the FINS TCP Tab Page of the CX Programmer s Edit Parameters Dialog Box The FINS TCP port number set in the FINS Configuration Tab Page is used by the FINS TCP server s TCP socket The FINS TCP client s TCP socket uses any TCP port number that can be used at that node With the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port and FinsGateway Ver 2003 or higher an unused TCP port is automatically detected and utilized At the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port a TCP IP frame that is received is recognized as a FINS frame according to the remote TCP port number in the frame FINS TCP allows up to 16 FINS TCP connections to be established simulta neously and these 16 connections are managed at the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port by connection numbers When setting FINS TCP con nection settings in the FINS TCP Tab Page of the Network
347. hing hub Indicates that the errors listed above did not occur Not used 97 CIO Area Allocations 98 Invalid Communi cations Parameter Manipulated Section 4 2 Unit operation ON when there was an error in the validation check of tag data link parameters stored in the Unit s non volatile mem ory and a checksum error occurred Includes parame ters related to basic Ethernet settings The tag data links will stop OFF when the validation check of parameters in non volatile memory was normal Tag Refresh Error ON when a specified data area or address range is not supported in tag data links OFF when the specified data areas and addresses are sup ported in tag data links Tag Database Error ON if a tag database error occurs in the CPU Unit when a symbol name is used incor rectly in a setting for the Eth erNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port tag data link status area allocations setting etc CUZH CPU6 EIP only OFF when a symbol name is not used in a setting for the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port when a tag database error has not occurred or when a previous error has been cleared Not used All Tag Data Links Operating Indicates that tag data links are communicating in all con nections as the originator Indicates that a tag data link failed in on or more connec tions as the originator
348. ical equipment amusement machines vehicles safety equipment and installations subject to separate industry or government regulations e Systems machines and equipment that could present a risk to life or property Please know and observe all prohibitions of use applicable to the products NEVER USE THE PRODUCTS FOR AN APPLICATION INVOLVING SERIOUS RISK TO LIFE OR PROPERTY WITHOUT ENSURING THAT THE SYSTEM AS A WHOLE HAS BEEN DESIGNED TO ADDRESS THE RISKS AND THAT THE OMRON PRODUCTS ARE PROPERLY RATED AND INSTALLED FOR THE INTENDED USE WITHIN THE OVERALL EQUIPMENT OR SYSTEM PROGRAMMABLE PRODUCTS OMRON shall not be responsible for the user s programming of a programmable product or any consequence thereof xvi Disclaimers CHANGE IN SPECIFICATIONS Product specifications and accessories may be changed at any time based on improvements and other reasons It is our practice to change model numbers when published ratings or features are changed or when significant construction changes are made However some specifications of the products may be changed without any notice When in doubt special model numbers may be assigned to fix or establish key specifications for your application on your request Please consult with your OMRON representative at any time to confirm actual specifications of purchased products DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS Dimensions and weights are nominal and are not to be use
349. ice data is 02 Hex Request path command Specifies the request path class ID instance ID etc in bytes If there is an odd number of bytes pad the last byte with a 0 so that the data is in full word units In the routing format for relay hops the first request path in the routing ser vice data is 20 06 24 01 Hex Connection Manager For details refer to the description of the Route Path in Appendix D CIP Message Communications Request data command In the command specify the data determined by the service code In the response the reception data determined by the service code will be returned Priority Time tick command The timeout time specified by the Priority Time Tick is used as a base value to specify the actual timeout value For details refer to the description of the Pri ority Time Ticks and Time Out Ticks at the end of Appendix D CIP Message Communications Time Out Ticks command Specifies the base value of the timeout time For details refer to the descrip tion of the Priority Time Ticks and Time Out Ticks at the end of Appendix D CIP Message Communications Message request size command Specifies the number of bytes of data from the second service code to the request data The data size is specified in LSB MSB order For example if there are 400 bytes the data size is 0190 hex bytes which is entered as 90 01 hex Padding data command If the message request size specifies a
350. ices for information on the Network Configurator device change function Operating Methods Backing Up EtherNet IP Set pins 7 and 8 of the DIP switch on the front panel of the CPU Unit as Unit or Built in EtherNet IP shown in the following table and press the Memory Card Power Supply fone A to the Switch for 3 seconds with the Memory Card inserted into the slot Release the switch when the BUSY indicator lights DIP switch settings SW7 ON SW8 OFF 322 Simple Backup Function Note Restoring the EtherNet IP Unit or Built in EtherNet IP Port Setup File from the Memory Card Reading and Setting the Data in the Unit Note Section 13 2 EtherNet IP Unit CPU Unit Memory Card Power Supply Switch All setup data Memory Card All data This operation will create an EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port set tings file and write that file to the Memory Card along with the other backup files When the Memory Card Power Supply Switch is pressed the MCPWR indicator on the front of the CPU Unit will flash once and then remain lit while data is being written If the data is written normally the MCPWR indicator will turn OFF The BUSY indicator will flash while the data is being written The backup operation will fail if it is performed after the device parameters were not downloaded successfully from the Network Configurator or CX Pro grammer Perform the backup operation only if the device parameters we
351. ick the Edit Button The Edit Tag Set Dialog Box will be displayed Edit Tag Set PLC Status Name DOO000 Not Include Include Tag List CandidateT ag List Name Over il Name Over Size Bit D00000 D00001 2Byte The Tag List on the left side of the dialog box shows the tags that are al ready registered and the Candidate Tag Liston the right side of the dialog box shows the other tags that have not been registered yet To add a tag select it in the Candidate Tag List and click the lt Button When the PLC status is being included in the tag set select the Include Option at the upper right corner of the dialog box PLC Status Not Include Include If you want to change the tag set s name it can be changed in this dialog box To save the changes click the OK Button at the bottom of the Edit Tag Set Dialog Box Click the OK Button at the bottom of the Edit Device Parameters Dialog Box Network Configurator Operations Section 6 2 18 If you want to just add new tags and register the tag set first register the tags with steps 1 to 9 In this example input tags D00004 and D00005 have been newly added In Consume Out Produce Name 5 D00000 5000001 5 D00002 D00003 5 D00004 D00005 New Edt Delete Usage count 6 256 OK Cancel 19 When you are finished registering the required tags click the OK Button at the bottom of the Edit Tags Dialog Box
352. idth If the bandwidth exceeds the allowed level adjust the RPI Refer to 2 3 Checking Bandwidth Usage and Adjusting the RPI 11 Calculating and Verifying the Maximum Response Time Calculate the maximum response time of all of the tag data links and verify that the response time meets the required specifications If the response time does not meet the required specifications evaluate and correct the network configuration by taking steps such as dividing the network Refer to SECTION 10 Communications Performance and Communi cations Load 12 Saving the Network Configuration File Save the network configuration file with the completed design Refer to 6 2 13 Saving the Network Configuration File 13 Closing the Network Configurator Exit from the Network Configurator The next steps are wiring the network and connecting the Network Configura tor to the network Wire the network install the actual devices and set the devices IP addresses 14 Clearing the Devices Various Parameters Clear the various parameters stored in the new devices that will be used in the system Refer to 6 2 12 Clearing the Device Parameters Before connecting newly added devices to the network clear the parameters set in the devices The EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port will restart automatically when the Unit s device parameters are cleared reset from the Network Configurator The Unit must restart in order to enable the cleared
353. ifications Contact the target device s manufac turer If the tag data link is stopped or started this error may occur according to the tim ing but the system will recover automat ically Error code returned from target Attempted to close a connec tion but that connection was already closed This error does not occur This error does not occur This is not an error because the connec tion is already closed Error code returned from target Attempted to open a connection with an unsupported connection type This error does not occur Check which con nection types can be used by the target Contact the manu facturer Only multicast and point to point can be set Check which con nection types can be used by the origina tor An error will occur if a connection other than multicast or point to point is set Error code returned from target The connection size settings are different in the originator and target Check the connection sizes set in the originator and target 347 Connection Status Codes and Error Processing Connection status General Additional Status Status hex hex Source of error Error code returned from target The target was unable to open the connection because of its operating status such as down loading settings Handling Section 14 3 Configuration 1 Check whether the tag data link is
354. implicit communications which allows cyclic communications called tag data links in this manual with EtherNet IP devices Data can be exchanged at high speed between Controllers and devices using high volume tag sets up to 184 832 words between PLCs Tag Data Link Cyclic Communications Cycle Time Note Tag data links cyclic communications can operate at the cyclic period speci fied for each application regardless of the number of nodes Data is exchanged over the network at the refresh cycle set for each connection so the communications refresh cycle will not increase even if the number of nodes is increased i e the synchronicity of the connection s data is pre served Since the refresh cycle can be set for each connection each application can communicate at its ideal refresh cycle For example a processes interlocks can be transferred at high speed while the production commands and the sta tus monitor information are transferred at low speed The communications load to the nodes must be within the Units allowed com munications bandwidth Communicating with FINS Messages FINS TCP and FINS UDP Data can be exchanged with other OMRON FA devices using SEND RECV and CMND instructions from the ladder program because EtherNet IP sup ports OMRON s standard FINS message communications services Overview of EtherNet IP Unit and Built in EtherNet IP Port Section 1 1 Note There are two kinds of message servi
355. in Use or Duplicate Forward Open 0103 Transport Class and Trigger combination not supported 0106 Ownership Conflict 0107 Connection not found at target application 0108 Invalid Connection Type Indicates a problem with either the Connection Type or Prior ity of the Connection 0109 Invalid Connection Size 0110 Device not configured 0111 RPI not supported May also indicate problem with connection time out multiplier or production inhibit time 0113 Connection Manager cannot support any more connections 0114 Either the Vendor Id or the Product Code in the key segment did not match the device 0115 Product Type in the key segment did not match the device 0116 Major or Minor Revision information in the key segment did not match the device 0117 Invalid Connection Point 0118 Invalid Configuration Format 0119 Connection request fails since there is no controlling connection currently open 011A Target Application cannot support any more connections 011B RPI is smaller than the Production Inhibit Time 0203 Connection cannot be closed since the connection has timed out 0204 Unconnected Send timed out waiting for a response 0205 Parameter Error in Unconnected Send Service 0206 Message too large for Unconnected message service 0207 Unconnected acknowledge without reply 0301 No buffer
356. in the TCP IP Configuration left at its default setting and an IP address is set in the allocated DM Area words the IP Address Display Setting Area in words m 98 and m 99 The IP address can be written in the two IP Address Display Setting Area words using the CX Programmer or the Programming Console To enable the new IP Address setting the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port must be restarted or the PLC s power must be turned OFF and then ON again Beginning word m D30000 100 x unit number 15 14 13 12 1110 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 m 98 1 3 4 m 99 5 7 8 IP Address 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Hex D 2 The following table shows the various Unit Setup when only the IP Address Display Setting Area is set and the other TCP IP Configuration settings are left at their default values Setting Operating status IP address IP address set in words m 98 and m 99 IP Address Dis play Setting Area of the DM Area words allocated to the EtherNet IP Unit as a CPU Bus Unit Subnet mask Determined by class of the IP address Default gateway None IP routing disabled Preferred DNS server None Alternate DNS server None Host name None Domain name None Baud rate Auto detect Method 3 Setting the TCP IP Configuration from the Network Configurator With this method set the IP address from the CX Programmer s TCP IP Tab Page in the Edit Parameters Dialog Box For
357. in which the EtherNet IP Unit is mounted and includes the PLC status as status flags in the data trans ferred by the tag data links When the PLC status is specified as an output produce tag it is actually transferred as the tag set s leading data in the following format 15 14 13 12 141 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 PLC Operating Flag PLC Error Flag To receive the PLC status specify the PLC status in an input consume tag in the reception tag set as well When the PLC status is specified in an input tag the PLC status flags will be reflected in the corresponding location in the tag data link s Target Node PLC Operating Flags and Target Node PLC Error Flags The following example shows the relationship between the Target Node PLC Operating Flag location and target ID of the target node with 192 168 250 2 IP address 192 168 250 2 Last byte 2 Target ID 002 Target Node PLC Operating Flags 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 i 0 n2 15 14 13 12 14 40 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 o n 3 n 4 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 n 5 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 48 CPU Unit CPU Unit PLC status PLC status when included PLC status ae PLC status when included a O memory a S Input tag set I O memory a Cae g Connection i c h Target data link sta
358. ing error Routing tables Remote node is not set in the routing tables Set the destination address in the routing tables Routing tables not registered Routing tables Destination is unknown because there are no routing tables Set routing tables at the local node remote node and any relay nodes Routing table error Routing tables Routing table error Set the routing tables cor rectly Too many relay points Network con figuration The maximum number of network levels 3 was exceeded in the com mand Redesign the network or reconsider the routing tables to reduce the number of relay nodes in the command Troubleshooting with FINS Response Codes Main response code Sub response code Value and meaning Command format error Value and meaning Command too long Item to check Command data Likely cause The command is too long The command exceeded 1 473 bytes when broad casting Command too short Command data The command is too short Section 14 6 Corrective action Check the command format of the command and set it cor rectly Number of items does not match amount of data Command data The specified number of items does not match the amount of write data Check the number of items and amount of data and make them agree Header parameter error Command data Data for another node on the
359. ing to solve Area type error Out of address range Size error Not exist PLC I F error Data was exchanged normally The physical address for the tag is being resolved When the resolution is completed normally a connec tion will be established and the data exchange will start The area e g EM bank specified by the tag setting does not exist in the CPU Unit A connection will not be established for a tag for which this error occurs The area specified by the tag setting is outside of the area address range in the CPU Unit A connection will not be established for a tag for which this error occurs Different sizes are set for the network symbol and the tag settings Connections will not be opened for tags with this error A network symbol is not set in the symbol table in the CPU Unit for the specified tag setting A connection will not be established for a tag for which this error occurs There is a problem in the bus interface with the CPU Unit Determine the cause based on the indicators and the error log 333 Checking Status with the Network Configurator Section 14 1 If the status is not OK check the tag data link settings or the network symbol settings in the symbol table in the CJ2 CPU Unit Monitor Device Status 1 Status 2 Connection Error History Controller Error History Tag Status Ethernet Information Name Status 5 000010 Ok 000020 Ok D00030 Ok N01 _hData Ok N02 hData
360. ional to install your system e Do not install Ethernet equipment near sources of noise If a noisy envi ronment is unavoidable take adequate measures against noise interfer ence such as installing network components in grounded metal cases or using optical cable in the system e When installing an EtherNet IP network that combines an information sys tem with the control system and the communications load may be heavy due to tag data links we recommend configuring the network so that the load does not affect communications For example install the tag data links in a segment that is separate from the information network Note The maximum current consumption of the CS1W EIP21 and CJ1W EIP21 EtherNet IP Units is 410 mA Be sure that the total current consumption of all the Units connected to the same CPU Backplane or Expansion Backplane does not exceed the output capacity of the Power Supply Unit 3 4 2 Recommended Products The following table shows the devices recommended for use with the Ether Net IP Unit 2 2 Selecting the Network Devices 3 4 3 Precautions Precautions on Laying Twisted pair Cable e Noise resistance may be reduced by ground loops which can occur due to improper shield connections and grounding Ground the shield at one location as shown in the following diagram e Do not connect the shield to the EtherNet IP Unit s connector e If a cable connects two hubs connect the shields at only one end
361. ipulated Unit operation by Not used Basic Ethernet One of the following parame Settings Error ters is invalid e TCP IP Configuration set tings IP address subnet mask or Link settings OFF when the parameters above are valid ON when the IP address table IP Address Table Error information is incorrect OFF when the IP address table information is correct 99 CIO Area Allocations Section 4 2 Registered Target Node Table EtherNet IP Unit to CPU Unit n 16 ton 19 100 IP Router Table Error Manipulated Unit operation ON when the IP router table information is incorrect OFF when the IP router table information is correct Not used Routing Table Error ON when the routing table information is incorrect OFF when the routing table information is correct Not used Ethernet Expan sion Settings Error One of the following parame ters is invalid e FINS settings OFF when the parameters above are valid BOOTP Server Error One of the following errors occurred when using the BOOTP server e The IP address received from the BOOTP server is incorrect eA communications timeout occurred with the server OFF when the errors listed above did not occur Not used Address Mismatch ON when the target IP address conversion method is set to Automatic generation but the local IP address hos
362. is 01 to C8 Hex 1 to 200 decimal No of bytes received response The number of bytes received from the destination node address remote node is returned in hexadecimal Destination node address response The node address of the CS CJ series EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port that returned the response is returned in hexadecimal Read data response The specified area word and byte data is returned in order from word H high byte bits 8 to 15 to word L low byte bits O to 7 If an odd number is specified for the number of read bytes the last 1 byte of data will be read to the high word The actual address L address H and number of read bytes that can be spec ified depends on the model of the CPU Unit and the data area being read Do not exceed the boundary of the data areas for the PLC you are using Word Data Read Service Code 1D Hex Command Block Word Data Read reads I O memory area data in a CPU Unit The read word data is in word units The response block data is returned in low to high byte order C4 1D 2F The class ID depends on the unit version E Version 2 0 The class ID is C4 ay ey Version 1 0 The class ID is 2F Class ID Address L No of words read Service Instance ID Address H Code Note A body format of either 8 bits or 16 bits is possible 267 Receiving Explicit Messages Response Block Parameters Important Points
363. is bit from OFF to ON If the tag data links are already operating the signal will be ignored The tag data link starts operating automatically after the tag data link parameter settings are down loaded from the Network Configurator the CPU Unit s power is turned ON or the Unit is restarted If the tag data links have been stopped by turning the Tag Data Link Stop Bit n bit 04 from OFF to ON the tag data links can be restarted by turning this Tag Data Link Start Bit n bit 02 from OFF to ON Once the tag data links start the EtherNet IP Unit automatically turns OFF the Tag Data Link Start Bit Do not force this bit ON or OFF until it is automatically turned OFF by the Unit Stop the tag data links by switching this bit from OFF to ON Once the tag data links have been stopped they will remain stopped until the Unit is restarted or the Tag Data Link Start Bit is turned ON The tag data links will also start operating automatically when the tag data link parameter settings are downloaded from the Network Configurator If the tag data links are already stopped the signal will be ignored Message communications can be performed while the tag data links are stopped Once the tag data links have stopped the EtherNet IP Unit automatically turns OFF the Tag Data Link Stop Bit Do not force this bit ON or OFF until it is automatically turned OFF by the Unit Automatically adjust the time on the clock by switching this bit from OFF to
364. is mounted regardless of the model of the CPU Unit The following graph shows the coefficients 2 and 3 required to cal culate this effect 277 I O Response Time in Tag Data Links Section 10 2 Coefficient 4 i i ate led Sate a Distance to Long distance Rack m 2 The additional time for CJ2H CPU Units with unit version 1 1 or later will be as follows if high speed interrupts are enabled 0 1 ms Number of words transferred x 0 87 us 10 2 4 Tag Data Link I O Response Time Calculation Example When using the tag data link functions of the EtherNet IP Unit or built in Ether Net IP port there is a time lag between the point when the data link area s data changes due to an input at a node and the point when the change is out put at another node s data link area This time lag is called the tag data link I O response time This example shows how to calculate the minimum and maximum I O response times in the following configuration EIP EtherNet IP Unit PLC E PLC E Packet interval RPI Node 1 send data exchanges 2 times 7 400 words x 2 times P P Node 7 receive data exchanges 2 times 7 400 words x 3 times 1 7 a Le 0O Input LR xxxx LR xxxx re O e The following processing times are required in this system configuration e Packet interval RPI This is the communications refreshing period set in the Configur
365. it status Operating mode Memory Card PROGRAM EM File Memory PROGRAM Cycle time Transfers using put 1 KB 0 5s 0 2s 30 KB 1 8s 0 7s 60 KB 3 28s 1 58s 120 KB 6 2 s 3 6 s Transfers using get 1 KB 0 2s 0 2s 30 KB 1 75 1 0s 60 KB 2 58S 2 38S 120 KB 49s 4 9s 1 The above times assume that the Fixed Peripheral Servicing Time in the PLC Setup is set to the default value of 4 2 If the Fixed Peripheral Servicing Time in the PLC Setup is increased FTP files will be transferred faster Host Computer Application Example Section 11 9 11 9 Host Computer Application Example The following procedure provides an example of FTP operations from a host computer In this example the following assumptions are made e The IP address of the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port is regis tered in etc hosts on the host name as cs1 e The default FTP login name is being used CONFIDENTIAL e A processing results data file called RESULT IOM already exists on the Memory Card in the CPU Unit e A processing instructions data file called PLAN IOM already exists on the workstation The following procedure transfers the processing results file RESULT IOM from the Memory Card in the CPU Unit to the workstation and then the pro cessing instructions file PLAN IOM is transferred from the workstation to the Memory Card in the CP
366. k Co Service Code Detailed status Parameters Service code command response 40 Hex is specified for commands For responses the highest bit will turn ON and CO Hex will be returned Class ID command Always C4 2F The class ID depends on the unit version The class ID is C4 for unit version 2 0 and 2F for unit version 1 0 Instance ID command Always 00 Hex Read data response The read data is given in the following table The data is returned after the service code in the order shown in the table high to low Operation Status RUN mode Fatal error information L Fatal error information H Non fatal error information L Non fatal error information H Message exists does not exist L Message exists does not exist H Error code L Error code H Error message 16 bytes e Operation status Returns the operation status of the CPU Unit in 1 byte 2 digit hexadecimal The values of bits 3 to 6 are not fixed Always mask them when address ing the status data 264 Receiving Explicit Messages Section 9 2 Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Unspecified t Operation status 0 Stopped User program is not being executed 1 Operating User program is being executed Flash memory access status CS1H CJ1 H CJ1M and CS1D only 0 Memory is not being written 1 Memory is being written Battery status CS1H CJ1 H CJ1M and CS1D only 0
367. k s send data will be restored automati cally when this bit is turned OFF The 7 segment display alternates between the node address and error code Multiple Switches ON Two or more software switches were ON simulta neously ora second soft ware switch was turned ON before a prior operation was completed Unit operation Flag status The error code will be displayed on the 7 segment display for 30 seconds and the Multiple Switches ON Error Flag n 11 bit 14 will go ON The error display will be cleared the next time that a settings operation is com pleted normally Countermeasure Execute control bit operations one ata time 339 Using the LED Indicators and Display for Troubleshooting Errors Related to the Tag Data Links Indicator 7 segment Section 14 2 The 7 segment display alternates between the node address and error code Verification Error target non existent The target regis tered in the device parame ters does not exist Unit operation Flag status The Unit will periodi cally attempt to reconnect to the tar get The Verification Error Flag n 12 bit 00 Unit Error Occurred Flag n 10 bit 00 and Network Error Occurred Flag n 10 bit 01 will go ON Countermeasure Check the follow ing items e Is the registered node s power supply ON els the cable con nected els the cable dam aged or loose els there
368. k functions and related Network Configurator operations 6 1 Overview of Tag Data Links 0 0 0 0 ee eee ee 132 6 1 1 Tag DataLinks 00 0 eee 132 6 1 2 Tag Data Link Functions and Specifications 133 6 1 3 Overview of Operation 2 0 0 0 eee eee eee 133 6 1 4 Tag Data Link Data Areas 000 0 cece eee ee 135 6 2 Network Configurator Operations 0 00 02 cee eee eee 139 6 2 1 Starting the Network Configurator 00 139 6 2 2 Setting Procedure 0 ee eee 141 6 2 3 Registering Devices 0 0 0 eee eee eee 142 6 2 4 Setting Tags Using Data Link Tables 0 0 0 143 6 2 5 Creating Tag Sets 2 eia e aE OA E eee eee 150 6 2 6 Setting Connections with Target Devices Originator Only 163 6 2 7 Connecting the Network Configurator to the Network 173 6 2 8 Downloading Tag Data Link Parameters 178 6 2 9 Uploading Tag Data Link Parameters 0 181 6 2 10 Verifying the Tag Data Links 0 00 0 182 6 2 11 Starting and Stopping Tag Data Links 185 6 2 12 Clearing the Device Parameters 00 0004 186 6 2 13 Saving the Network Configuration File 187 6 2 14 Reading a Network Configuration File 189 6 2 15 Checking Connections 0 00 eee 190 6 2 16 Changing
369. l Number of Packets Sent Response The total number of packets sent by the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port is returned Total Number of Errors Sent Response The total number of packet errors detected while the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port was sending is returned Total Number of Send Collisions Response Returns the number of packets damaged by 16 collisions with data from other nodes during EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port transmissions Precautions Counting of the total number of packets received total number of receive errors total number of packets sent total number of errors sent and total number of send collisions is discontinued when the counted value reaches the maximum value Response Codes 0000 Normal end 1001 Command too large INTERNODE ECHO TEST Performs an echoback test internode communications test between specified nodes Command Block Command Test data code Response Block os of 1 998 bytes max i i Aa Command Response Test data code code Parameters Test Data Command Response This command specifies the data to be sent to the specified nodes Up to 1 998 bytes can be specified The response sends back data identical to the data specified in the command An abnormality is assumed if the data returned in the response differs from the test data sent Precautions e The test destination node is the destination node specified i
370. l be displayed Restore to PLC Click this button to restore data The data in a backup file will be transferred to the PLC to restore the status that existed when the data was backed up Communications Settings Button Function Communications Settings Click this button to set communications condi tions for the target PLC The current PLC model and network type will be displayed Refer to the CX Programmer Operation Manual for detailed procedures 325 Using the Backup Tool Section 13 3 326 SECTION 14 Troubleshooting and Error Processing This section describes error processing periodic maintenance operations and troubleshooting procedures needed to keep the EtherNet IP network operating properly We recommend reading through the error processing procedures before operation so that operating errors can be identified and corrected more quickly 14 1 Checking Status with the Network Configurator 328 14 1 1 The Network Configurator s Device Monitor Function 328 14 2 Using the LED Indicators and Display for Troubleshooting 335 14 2 1 Errors Occurring at the EtherNet IP Unit or Built in EtherNet IP Port 335 14 3 Connection Status Codes and Error Processing 005 346 14 4 Error Log Function ecs soeur 0 0 0 cee cece eee 352 14 4 1 Error Log Data Specifications 0 000000000 352 14 4 2 Error Log Registration 00 0 00 ee
371. lags are enabled when the PLC status is included in the communications data for both the originator and target The data in this table is refreshed when neces sary Target Node PLC Error Flag Infor mation Layout set to default settings Words n 6 to n 9 Layout set to user settings Words n 48 to n 63 Note Corresponds to the PLC sta tus s PLC Error Flag Each flag indicates the error status logical OR of non fatal and fatal errors of the correspond ing target node PLC of connections in which the EtherNet IP Unit is the originator The flag corresponding to the target node s target ID will be ON if even one error is indicated in any of the connections with that target node Each node address s flag location i e target ID can be changed from the Network Configu rator The PLC status flags are enabled when the PLC status is included in the communications data for both the originator and target The data in this table is refreshed when neces sary Normal Target Node Flag Table Layout set to default settings Words n 20 to n 23 Layout set to user settings Words n 16 to n 31 Note Does not correspond to the PLC status Each flag indicates the connection status of the corresponding target node PLC of connec tions in which the EtherNet IP Unit is the origi nator The flag corresponding to the target node s target ID will be ON when connections are established for all connections with that
372. link table data will be created newly This operation will delete current datalink table data IF you have not saved the data it will be discarded YES Continue NO Cancel 6 Click the Yes Button to continue creating the data link table or click the No Button to cancel the operation If the creating the data link table is continued the data link table will be cre ated with the same size of data link for all registered nodes Examples are shown below 146 Network Configurator Operations Section 6 2 Automatic Allocation Results for Node 1 IP Address 192 168 250 1 Hj 01 f54f34_csy DatalinkTool DER Eile Edit Datalink Help Nodes Datalink Table data of selected node i Areal TaeSet Total Target RPI Ts Device IN OUT Link CH Size Li ize Name Size Node Variable ms 200 5 _ 8 2502 TagSet21 92 50 0 8 2503 TagSet3192 500 The number of PPS Without al PPS with connection 3 Multicast filter ay Multicast filter IN OUT Output with no overload is marked otal Size If it includes PLC Status data NetworkConfigurator will show the additional 2 bytes as a size 1CH 2bytes FA F2 F3 Fa F5 F F7 F8 F9 F10 Help Edit Cell Show Prev Show Next Ihsert Delete Move Down Move Up Datalink Check the Node Node TagSet TagSet TagSet TagSet Wizard table Ready Automatic Allocation Results for Node 2 IP Address 192 168 250 2 Hl 01 54434 csv DatalinkTo
373. local UDP port number to use in the FINS communi cations service The UDP uses the UDP port number to distinguish the application layer FINS communications service in this case e Default value 9 600 e User set value 1 to 65 535 Conversion Selects one of the following methods to convert from the FINS node address to an IP address FINS UDP only e Automatic generation dynamic setting e Automatic generation static setting e P address table e Combined method IP Address Table Sets the IP address table that defines the relationship between FINS node addresses and IP addresses This table is effective only when FINS UDP is being used and the IP address conversion method is set to the IP address table Dynamic change the tar Selects dynamic change of other FINS UDP nodes IP addresses get IP addresses To disable dynamic changes deselect this option by removing the check mark When necessary set the routing tables using the CX Integrator 80 Other Parameters Section 3 10 Using FINS TCP Tab Page in Edit Setting Function Parameters Dialog Box FINS TCP FINS TCP Port Specifies the local TCP port number to use in the FINS communi cations service The TCP uses the TCP port number to distinguish the application layer FINS communications service in this case e Default value 9 600 e User set value 1 to 65 535 FINS TCP Connection This is the network API used when TCP is used for th
374. luate the overall network configuration and correct it by taking steps such as selecting a different switching hub or splitting the network The following sections show how to check the device bandwidth being used by the tag data links in the designed network and how to set the appropriate values Note If the Network Configurator is used to set the connection type in the connec tion settings to a multicast connection multicast packets will be used If the connection type is set to a point to point connection multicast packets will not be used 2 3 1 Checking Bandwidth Usage for Tag Data Links The Network Configurator can display the bandwidth actually used for tag data links at each EtherNet IP Unit based on the connections set in the net work configuration 38 Checking Bandwidth Usage and Adjusting the RPI Section 2 3 The device bandwidth used by tag data links can be checked by clicking the Detail Button in the Usage of Device Bandwidth Area at the bottom of the Net work Configuration Window EtherNet IP_1 E E 192 168 250 1 CS1W EIP21 W Usage of Device Bandwidth 2 250 2 Comment Usage of Capacity Mbit s without M Usage of IP multic 1921 68 2501 CS1W EIP21 1 00 4 00 0 048 0 048 Mbit s 1921 68 250 2 CJT W EIP21 1 00 4 00 0 048 40 048 Mbit s Set Packet Interval RPD Total usage of IP multicast addresses o l 2 Network Total of Max Mbit s O 048Mbit s Item Description
375. m high to low bytes Read data 200 bytes max Address byte data Writes the specified node data in byte units The word data is specified in order from high to low bytes Write data 200 bytes max Address word data Writes the specified node data in word units The word data is specified in order from high to low bytes Write data 200 bytes max Note With a EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port with unit version 2 0 or later the PLC object class ID is C4 hex With unit version 1 0 the PLC object class ID is F2 hex The commands and responses for the explicit messages that can be sent and received are described on the following pages In the following command and response formats all boxes represent 1 byte each Receiving Explicit Messages Section 9 2 CPU Information Read Service Code 0E Hex Command Block Response Block Parameters Reads CPU Unit information including operating mode fatal non fatal errors and the CPU Unit model OE oe 00 The class ID depends on the unit version Version 2 0 The class ID is C4 Version 1 0 The class ID is 2F Class ID Attribute ID Instance ID Service Code Note A body format of either 8 bits or 16 bits is possible Service Code Attribute Value Service code command response OE Hex is specified for commands For responses the highest bit be ON and 8E Hex will be returned Class ID
376. m the Network Configurator Some error log records are cleared when the CPU Unit s power goes OFF and other records are not cleared 14 4 1 Error Log Data Specifications Each error is recorded as one record in the error log Record length 10 bytes record Number of records 64 records max Data type Binary time information BCD Structure of Each Record Bit 15 Bit 00 Error code Detail code Minutes Seconds Day of month Hour Year Month 14 4 2 Error Log Registration Error Log Storage Area When an error occurs information on the error and the time stamp are stored in the Unit s internal RAM as an error log record Serious errors are recorded in non volatile EEPROM as well as RAM The time read from the CPU Unit during cyclic servicing is used for the time stamp The error log records stored in EEPROM are copied to RAM when the Unit starts operating so these records are retained even when the Unit s power is turned OFF or the Unit is restarted When the error log is read the error log records in RAM are read When the error log is cleared the error log records in both RAM and EEPROM are erased Error Log Overflows The error log can record up to 64 records If another error occurs when the log is full the oldest record will be erased to make room for the new error record Power Interruptions when If the power supply is interrupted or the Unit is restarted while the error log is Saving to EEPROM
377. mat For example to specify word data 1234 hex specify 34 hex and then 12 hex To specify the double word data 12345678 hex specify 78 hex 56 hex 34 hex and then 12 hex The command blocks are shown in the following diagram Command Block Example 1234 hex Example 12345678 hex Service Data Service Data The format from CMND 490 operand S onwards will be set as follows Example 1234 hex Example 12345678 hex From higher byte From higher byte Bit 15 os o7 00 Bit 15 08 07 00 Sen sin _78 T 56 12 From lower byte Bit 15 08 07 00 From lower byte S n 5s o 07 o0 Bit S n 4 N E7 A o jN e _56 Similarly when the additional status data and service response data in the response block is in word 2 byte or double word 4 byte units such as word Sending Explicit Messages Section 9 1 data and ERROR CLEAR codes is also returned in the same order from low to high bytes in the response block Example Sending Explicit Messages Using CMND 490 _ EtherNet IP Unit with unit number O PLC s CMND 490 CPU instruction Unit Network address 01 hex Node address 05 hex Unit address 10 hex B Explicit message L EtherNet IP node of other manufacturer Operation The identity object information class ID 01 hex is read from the other com pany s EtherNet IP node at IP address 192 168 250 2 using the CIP UCMM MESSAGE SEND command 28 10 The command da
378. me Device Type Revision Refresh Option Cancel 3 Click the OK Button Select the network to be connected Select Connected Network Please select a network where the connected network was supported Target Network O Create new network EtherNet IP_1 The Network Configurator will connect to the EtherNet IP network If the Network Configurator is connected online properly On line will be dis played in the status bar at the bottom of the window The network connec tion icon will be displayed in blue in the Network Tab Page in which the Network Configurator is connected Network connection icon herNet IP_1 EtherNet IP_2 192 168 250 1 192 168 250 2 CS1W EIP21 CS1W EIP21 1 250 1 174 Network Configurator Operations Section 6 2 The connecting network can be switched by selecting Network Change Connect Network Select Connected Network Please select a network where the connected network was supported Target Network O Create new network Use the existing network EtherNet IP_1 v EtherNet IP_1 Connecting through the CPU Unit s Peripheral or RS 232C Port CS CJ Series Only Connect to the EtherNet IP Unit s Ethernet port via the CPU Unit s peripheral port or RS 232C port 1 2 3 1 Select Option Select Interface CS CJ1 Serial Port EIP Unit I F 2 Select Network Connect The following dialog box will be displayed Setup Interface Interface To
379. me 32 max Number of servers that can communicate at one time 32 max CIP routing CS1W EIP21 CJ1W EIP21 CJ2H CPU EIP FINS service FINS UDP Supported FINS TCP 16 connections max EtherNet IP conformance test Conforms to A5 Ethernet interface Note 10BASE T or 100BASE TX Auto Negotiation or fixed settings 1 In this case pps means packets per second and indicates the number of packets that can be processed in one second 2 To use 505 to 1 444 bytes as the data size the system must support the Large Forward Open standard an optional CIP specification The SYS 13 EtherNet IP Unit and Built in EtherNet IP Port Specifications Section 1 2 MAC CS Cu series Units support this standard but before connecting to nodes of other companies confirm that those devices also support it 3 If the maximum data size is exceeded the data refreshing with the CPU Unit will extend over two or more cycles 4 If status layout is selected in the user settings the maximum number of tags that can be received is 19 tags 5 If parameters are changed in the EtherNet IP Unit however the Ether Net IP Unit will be restarted When other nodes are communicating with the affected node the communications will temporarily time out and au tomatically recover later 6 Because the EtherNet IP Unit is equipped with an IGMP client unneces sary multicast packets can
380. memory available 0302 Network Bandwidth not available for data 0303 No Tag filters available 0304 Not Configured to send real time data 0311 Port specified in Port Segment Not Available 0312 Link Address specified in Port Segment Not Available 0315 Invalid Segment Type or Segment Value in Path 0316 Path and Connection not equal in close 0317 Either Segment not present or Encoded Value in Network Segment is invalid 0318 Link Address to Self Invalid 0319 Resources on Secondary Unavailable 031A Connection already established 031B Direct connection already established 031C Miscellaneous 031D Redundant connection mismatch 031F No connection resources exist for target path 0320 07FF Vendor specific 377 CIP Message Communications Appendix D Priority Time Ticks and Time Out Ticks Format of the Priority Time Tick Time tick Base value ms Maximum time out time ms that can be set in the time out ticks 0000 hex 255 0001 hex 510 0010 hex 1 020 0011 hex 2 040 0100 hex 4 080 0101 hex 8 160 0110 hex 16 320 0111 hex 128 32 640 1000 hex 256 65 280 1001 hex 512 130 560 1010 hex 1 024 261 120 1011 hex 2 048 522 240 1100 hex 4 096 1 044 480 1101 hex 8 192 2 088 960 1110 hex 16 389 4 177 920 1111 hex 32 768 8 355 840 378 Appendix E FINS Commands Addr
381. message com munications 1 N communications Explicit message communications 1 N communications Send functions CIP unconnected UCMM communications only Receive functions CIP unconnected UCMM and CIP connected Class 3 communications Transmission data length not includ ing the command code FINS message com munications e SEND 990 words 1 980 bytes max normally or 727 words 1 454 bytes max when broadcasting e RECV 990 words 1 980 bytes max e CMND 1 990 bytes max normally or 1 462 bytes max when broadcasting data after the FINS command code Explicit message communications CMND 492 bytes max No of simultaneous instructions One each for 8 ports ports 0 to 7 Refer to 3 25 Network Instructions in the CS CJ Series Programmable Con trollers Instructions Reference Manual W340 for information on ports logi cal ports Response monitoring time Default setting 2 s User setting 0 1 to 6553 5 s Retries Oto 15 Internetwork con nections Same network type Supports internetwork communications between Ethernet networks con nected to CS CJ series EtherNet IP Units and built in EtherNet IP ports up to 3 levels Different network type Supports internetwork communications between the EtherNet IP network connected to a CS CJ series EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port and other networks such as Controller Link or SYSMAC LINK up t
382. mited by tabs e CR after every 2 fields e CR after every 4 fields e CR after every 5 fields e CR after every 16 fields If data from the I O memory 1234 hexadecimal 5678 hexadecimal 9ABC hexadecimal etc is contained in an attached file in TXT format the data will be converted into ASCII format in words or double words The words are delimited by inserting tabs HT 09 and carriage returns CR after specified fields CR LF ODOA 305 Using File Memory Section 11 7 Example Data format using words delimited by tabs and CRs after every 10 fields I O memory 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1234 5678 9ABC DEFO 1234 5678 9ABC DEFO 1234 5678 10 9ABC DEFO 1234 5678 9ABC DEFO 1234 5678 9ABC DEFO TXT file contents 31 32 33 34 09 35 36 37 38 09 39 41 42 43 09 1 2 3 4 HT 5 6 7 8 HT 9 A B CHHT 35 36 37 38 op oa 39 41 42 43 09 5 6 7 8 CR LF 9 A B C HT TXT file displayed as text 1234L15678LI9ABCLIDEF0L11234L15678LI9ABCLIDEFOL11234115678 9ABCLIDEFOL11234L15678LI9ABCLIDEFO0L11234 15678LI9ABCLIDEFO U1 HT Used to display tab space when displayed as text m CSV Format The CSV format is a data format using comma delimiters that is specified by ladder instructions READ DATA FI
383. n Selecting the Switching Hub Based on the Hub s Supported Functions L2 Switching Hub without Multicast Filtering L2 Switching Hub with Multicast Filtering 36 We recommend this kind of switching hub when only tag data links are exe cuted and any of the following conditions is met e The tag data links are set to share the same data with all nodes in the net work The multicast packets are transferred to all nodes in the network just like a broadcast e The tag data link settings are all one to one unicast and multicast pack ets cannot be used e There is little traffic in the tag data links No special settings are required for an L2 switching hub without multicast fil tering We recommend this kind of switching hub when only tag data links are exe cuted and the following condition is met e There are many 1 N links where N represents some number of nodes in the network in the tag data link settings i e there are many multicast packets used or there is heavy traffic in the tag data links Special settings are required for an L2 switching hub with multicast filtering There must be enough multicast filters for the network being used Selecting the Network Devices Section 2 2 L3 Switching Hub with Multicast Filtering and L4 QoS Functions Note We recommend this kind of switching hub when both tag data links and mes sage communications are executed By setting tag data links for higher priority tra
384. n EtherNet IP Port in CJ2H CPUL L_ EIP omron SYSMAC H re INH a CPU64 EIP lt j LED Indicators PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER Ta lt q Unit number gusen W oe setting switch lt q Node address setting switches lt Label showing IP address 100BASE TX 1OBASE T Ethernet connector E Ethernet Address Notation A specific Ethernet address is allocated to all devices connected to the Ether net network The EtherNet IP Unit s address is listed in 12 digit hexadecimal on the right side of the Unit omron CS1W EIP21 ETHERNET IP UNIT Lot No OMRON Corporation MADE IN JAPAN 0000000001 Ethernet Address Ethernet address 12 digits Note 1 The Ethernet Address can also be checked with the CONTROLLER DATA READ command For details refer to Appendix E FINS Commands Addressed to EtherNet IP Units or Built in EtherNet IP Ports 2 An IP address label is included with the EtherNet IP Unit so the user can record the user set IP address and subnet mask on the label and affix the label to the front of the Unit When this label is affixed to the front of the Unit it is easy to confirm the Unit s IP address and subnet mask 18 Nomenclature and Functions Section 1 3 Indicators Status Indicators MS NS COMM 100M and 10M Example l
385. n be used to program and monitor another PLC that is on the network Up to eight levels of networks can be crossed for CS1 CJ1 series CPU Units with unit version 2 0 or later CJ2 CPU Units and CX Programmer version 4 0 or higher 200 FINS Message Communications Section 7 2 Up to 8 network levels including the EtherNet IP network can be crossed Controller Link Unit CS CJ series EtherNet IP Unit CS CJ series CPU Unit Controller Link Unit Note FINS commands sent and received by the CS CJ series EtherNet IP Unit include commands addressed to the CS CJU series CPU Unit and commands addressed to the CS CJ series EtherNet IP Unit 201 Explicit Message Communications Section 7 3 7 3 Explicit Message Communications Explicit messages defined in EtherNet IP can be used to send service requests to other companies EtherNet IP masters slaves and OMRON PLCs with CS CJ series EtherNet IP Units and built in EtherNet IP ports Note Specific FINS commands commands 2810 and 2801 are used to send explicit messages Explicit message Sending Receiving Network communi CIP UCMM messages can be sent to an EtherNet IP Automatically responds to explicit mes cations instruction Unit or built in EtherNet IP port by a CMND 490 sages from other devices instruction containing FINS command code 2810 Hex Functions supported Masters slaves made by other manufacturers e Masters made by other manufacturers in remote devi
386. n odd number of bytes use 00 hex as padding in the last byte The padding data is not required if there is an even number of bytes Route path size command Specifies the number of words of data that are specified in the route path field Route path command Specifies the path route path to the target device For details refer to the description of the Route Path in Appendix D CIP Message Communications No of bytes received response This hexadecimal value is returned to indicate the number of bytes of data received after the service code response General status response The general status defined in EtherNet IP is returned The normal response is 00 hex For details refer to the description of the Response Codes in Appen dix D CIP Message Communications Additional status size response Sending Explicit Messages Section 9 1 This hexadecimal value is returned to indicate the number of words of data in the additional status field Additional status response The additional status defined in EtherNet IP is returned For details refer to the description of the Response Codes in Appendix D CIP Message Commu nications Service response data response The reception data determined by the service code is returned Description e The CIP UCMM MESSAGE SEND command is used to send an Ether Net IP defined explicit message to another company s node and receive a response e Unlike other FINS commands
387. n the CMND 194 instruction operands e Always specify the unit address of the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port in the CMND 194 instruction 384 FINS Commands Addressed to EtherNet IP Units or Built in EtherNet IP Ports Response Codes Response code Description Normal end Command too large Command too small No test data BROADCAST TEST RESULTS READ Reads the results number of times data received of the broadcast test Command Block 08 02 Command code Response Block Command Response Times code code received Parameters Times Received Response Appendix E The number of times the data has been received normally during the broadcast send test is returned as a hexadecimal number The number of times received is cleared each time the result is read Response Codes 0000 Normal end 1001 Command too large BROADCAST DATA SEND Sends test data simultaneously to all nodes on the network Command Block Command Test data code Parameters Test Data Command This command specifies the data to be sent to the specified nodes Up to 1 460 bytes can be specified 385 FINS Commands Addressed to EtherNet IP Units or Built in EtherNet IP Ports Appendix E Precautions e No response is made to this command e When using this command set the FINS header parameters or the control data for the CMND 194 instruction as follows Destination node address FF bro
388. n the number specified in the number of records parame ter all the records contained in the IP address table when the command is executed will be returned and the command execution will end normally e An error response will be returned if the IP address conversion method in the system mode settings is set to the automatic generation method on the FINS UDP Tab Page of the Unit Response Codes Response code Description Normal end Command too large Command too small IP address conversion method is set to the automatic genera tion method IP ROUTER TABLE READ Reads the IP router table Command Block Command Number code of records Response Block Command Response Maximum Number Number IPr utor foals IP router code code number of stored of records table records table records of stored records records Number of Records Command Response The number of records to read is specified between 0000 and 0008 0 to 8 decimal in the command If this value is set to 0 the number of stored records will be returned but the IP router table records will not be returned The response returns the actual number of records read 394 FINS Commands Addressed to EtherNet IP Units or Built in EtherNet IP Ports Appendix E Maximum Number of Stored Records Response The maximum number of records that can be stored in the IP router table is returned The maximum number of stored records is fixed at 0008 8 records
389. nator and target PLCs Originator and target connections can be combined in a sin gle node 6 1 2 Tag Data Link Functions and Specifications Item Specification Communications Standard EtherNet IP implicit communications connection type type cyclic communications Setting method After allocating tags and setting connections with the Network Configurator the tag data link parameters are downloaded to all devices in the EtherNet IP network With a CU2H CPU6L EIP CPU Unit a symbol table can be created with the CX Programmer and then imported into the Network Configurator to allocate tags After the parameters are downloaded the EtherNet IP Units are restarted to start the tag data links Applicable CPU Unit data CIO Area DM Area EM Area Holding Area Work Area and symbols Symbols are sup ported by CJ2H CPU6L1 EIP only Number of words per tag 722 max 1 444 bytes Number of tags per Unit 256 max Tag sets Number of tags per tag set 8 max Number of words per tag set 722 max 1 444 bytes Number of tag sets per Unit 256 max Connections Number of connections per Unit 256 max Connection I O type Input Only Target devices are input devices data transmis sion only Connection type Each connection can be set for 1 to 1 unicast or 1 to N mul ticast communications Default Multicast Originators and Tar Nodes can be either the originator or target of
390. nder the FINS TCP Tab Page in the Unit Setup By sending this command to the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port the destination IP address for the specified connection can be changed to another IP address Remote node changes can be made only for connection numbers specified as FINS TCP clients in the Unit Setup 388 FINS Commands Addressed to EtherNet IP Units or Built in EtherNet IP Ports Appendix E Command Block Command FINS TCP Remote IP Remote TCP code connection No address port number Response Block ela Command Response code code Parameters FINS TCP Connection No Command Specifies in two bytes the FINS TCP connection number 1 to 16 for which the change is to be made Remote IP Address Command Specifies the remote node s IP address must be non zero in hexadecimal Remote Port Number Command Specifies the remote TCP port number must be non zero with this command Response Codes Response code Description Normal end Node address setting error Local IP address setting error CPU Unit error execution not possible Command too large Command too small Connection number not set from 1 to 16 Remote IP address set to 0 Remote TCP port number set to 0 Connection already established with specified remote node Specified connection number not set as FINS TCP client in Unit Setup Remote node change processing for specified connection number a
391. ndividual price of the product on which liability is asserted IN NO EVENT SHALL OMRON BE RESPONSIBLE FOR WARRANTY REPAIR OR OTHER CLAIMS REGARDING THE PRODUCTS UNLESS OMRON S ANALYSIS CONFIRMS THAT THE PRODUCTS WERE PROPERLY HANDLED STORED INSTALLED AND MAINTAINED AND NOT SUBJECT TO CONTAMINATION ABUSE MISUSE OR INAPPROPRIATE MODIFICATION OR REPAIR XV Application Considerations SUITABILITY FOR USE OMRON shall not be responsible for conformity with any standards codes or regulations that apply to the combination of products in the customer s application or use of the products At the customer s request OMRON will provide applicable third party certification documents identifying ratings and limitations of use that apply to the products This information by itself is not sufficient for a complete determination of the suitability of the products in combination with the end product machine system or other application or use The following are some examples of applications for which particular attention must be given This is not intended to be an exhaustive list of all possible uses of the products nor is it intended to imply that the uses listed may be suitable for the products e Outdoor use uses involving potential chemical contamination or electrical interference or conditions or uses not described in this manual e Nuclear energy control systems combustion systems railroad systems aviation systems med
392. ndix B Ethernet Network Parameters 4 096 bytes Description Maximum capacity of the TCP send buffer TCP receive buffer 4 096 bytes Maximum capacity of the TCP receive buffer UDP send buffer 9 000 bytes Maximum capacity of the UDP send buffer UDP receive buffer 9 016 bytes Maximum capacity of the UDP receive buffer FINS receive buffer 16 383 bytes Maximum capacity of the FINS receive buffer RAW send buffer 2 048 bytes Maximum capacity of the RAW send buffer RAW receive buffer 2 048 bytes Maximum capacity of the RAW receive buffer Hold timer 75 s See note The hold timer is used for active open processing of TCP sockets An ETIMEDOUT error will occur if connection is not completed within 758 Resend timer Initial value 250 ms Maximum value 64 s The resend timer is used to monitor completion of reception of arrival confirmations when transferring data via TCP sockets If the timer setting is exceeded before arrival confirmation is received data is resent Resends are performed from the first timeout 1 s through the 12th time out 64 s An ETIMEDOUT error will occur after the 12th timeout Continue timer Initial value 1s Maximum value 60s The continue timer starts if preparations have been completed to send data but the send window is too small either 0 or too small to send the data and the remote node has not requested that communications
393. ndows Start Menu E Starting from the IO Table Dialog Box in _CX Programmer To start the Network configurator select the Unit in the PLC IO Table Dialog Box and select either of the options for Start Special Application from the pop up menu ty PLG IO Table NewPLG1 File Edit View Options Help el alll v alal Ti CJ2H CPU65 EIP a4 Built in Port Inner Board 1500 GJ2B EIP21 Built In EtherNet IP Port for CJ2 Unit 0 g O900 Inner Board unm Change Unit No 4g 0000 Main Rack Unit Comment 00 11525 CJ1W EIP2 01 0000 Empty Slot 02 0000 Empty Slot 03 0000 Empty Slot 04 0000 Empty Slot Start with Settines Inherited 05 0000 Empty Slot Start Only 06 0000 Empty Slot 07 0000 Empty Slot 08 0000 Empty Slot 09 0000 Empty Slot 000 Rack 01 Unit Setup Save Parameters Load Parameters ATCELTI 0000 Rack 02 0000 Rack 03 GJ2H CGPU65 EIP Offline Note When the Network Configurator is started from Start with Settings Inherited in the I O table of the CX Programmer the Network Configurator will start with out inheriting the settings in the same way as for Start Only When the Network Configurator starts the following window will be displayed 139 Network Configurator Operations Section 6 2 Main Window 140 Untitled Network Configurator Eile Edit View Network Device EDSFile Tools Option Help Dae 2 e OEtherNet IP_1 amp Network Configurator G
394. neral crwelr2i Description Create Date Modify Date Revision Vendor Device Type Product Code Revision Catalog CJ1W EIP21 EDS File 05 19 2006 00 00 00 05 19 2006 00 00 00 1 0 Omron Corporation Communications Adapter 11 1 01 Appendix F The time and date that the EDS file was created will be displayed along with the device information 409 EDS File Management Appendix F 410 Appendix G EtherNet IP Connections from Windows XP SP2 or Higher or Windows Vista Better firewall security for Windows XP SP2 or higher and Windows Vista has increased the restrictions for data communications on Ethernet ports When using an EtherNet IP connection 1 to one of the following PLCs from an Ethernet port on a computer you must change the settings of the Windows Firewall to enable using CX Programmer or Network Configurator communications Applicable PLCs e CJ2H CPULILI EIP e CS1W CJ1W EIP CX Programmer e An EtherNet IP connection includes the following cases e An online connection with the network type set to EtherNet IP e An automatic online connection to a PLC on an EtherNet IP network when Auto Online EtherNet IP Node Online is selected from the PLC Menu Network Configurator e A connection made by selecting Option Select Interface Ethernet I F Note Windows Firewall is mainly designed to prevent inappropriate access from external devices e g via the
395. nformation provided in this manual may result in per sonal injury or death damage to the product or product failure Please read each section in its entirety and be sure you understand the information provided in the section and related sections before attempting any of the procedures or operations given xiii Xiv Read and Understand this Manual Please read and understand this manual before using the product Please consult your OMRON representative if you have any questions or comments Warranty and Limitations of Liability WARRANTY OMRON s exclusive warranty is that the products are free from defects in materials and workmanship for a period of one year or other period if specified from date of sale by OMRON OMRON MAKES NO WARRANTY OR REPRESENTATION EXPRESS OR IMPLIED REGARDING NON INFRINGEMENT MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR PARTICULAR PURPOSE OF THE PRODUCTS ANY BUYER OR USER ACKNOWLEDGES THAT THE BUYER OR USER ALONE HAS DETERMINED THAT THE PRODUCTS WILL SUITABLY MEET THE REQUIREMENTS OF THEIR INTENDED USE OMRON DISCLAIMS ALL OTHER WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED LIMITATIONS OF LIABILITY OMRON SHALL NOT BE RESPONSIBLE FOR SPECIAL INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES LOSS OF PROFITS OR COMMERCIAL LOSS IN ANY WAY CONNECTED WITH THE PRODUCTS WHETHER SUCH CLAIM IS BASED ON CONTRACT WARRANTY NEGLIGENCE OR STRICT LIABILITY In no event shall the responsibility of OMRON for any act exceed the i
396. nformation relevant to EtherNet IP Units or built in EtherNet IP ports Manual number CS1W EIP21 CJ1W EIP21 CJ2H CPU6 EtherNet IP Units Operation Manual this manual Contents Provides information on operating and installing Ether Net IP Units including details on basic settings tag data links and FINS communications Refer to the Communications Commands Reference Manual W342 for details on FINS commands that can be sent to CS series and CJ series CPU Units when using the FINS communications service Refer to the Ethernet Units Operation Manual Construction of Applications W421 for details on con structing host applications that use FINS communica tions CS1W ETN21 CJ1W ETN21 Ethernet Units Oper ation Manual Construction of Net works Provides information on operating and installing 100Base TX Ethernet Units including details on basic settings and FINS communications Refer to the Commu nications Commands Reference Manual W342 for details on FINS commands that can be sent to CS series and CJ series CPU Units when using the FINS communi cations service CS1W ETN21 CJ1W ETN21 Ethernet Units Oper ation Manual Construction of Applications Provides information on constructing host applications for 100Base TX Ethernet Units including functions for send ing receiving mail socket service automatic clock adjust ment FTP server functions and FINS communications CS1W E
397. ng 387 reading 386 error messages 301 flags FINS communications 382 message communications 204 205 Ethernet communications addresses reading from Unit 380 network parameters 363 parameters 363 365 Ethernet Connectors 64 Ethernet Units reading status 399 EtherNet IP Datalink Tool 78 143 EtherNet IP Unit Features 2 EtherNet IP Units resetting 379 ETN11 compatible mode 119 explicit message communications 197 243 explicit message communications service 126 128 explicit messages list of PLC object services 259 receiving 258 sending 244 sending using CMND 490 253 F FALS instruction xxiii FINS communications 243 overview 8 specifications 209 230 testing 387 FINS communications service 126 127 FINS communications services 114 FINS message communications 197 200 FINS node address relationship to IP address 114 125 FINS response codes troubleshooting with response codes 359 FINS TCP 212 communications 214 connection numbers 213 connection status 214 features 212 frame format 213 procedure 215 TCP port number 213 FINS TCP communications method 120 FINS TCP Connection Status Flags 101 FINS UDP 210 frame format 210 procedure 211 Index UDP port numbers 211 FINS UDP and FINS TCP comparison 209 FINS UDP communications methods 116 FinsGateway 225 flags Error Flags 382 FTP Status Flag 302 FTP 3 81 290 FTP server applicati
398. ng Area words m 98 and m 99 will be overwritten with the TCP IP Configuration s IP 103 DM Area Allocations Section 4 3 address even if a non zero IP address was set in the IP Address Display Setting Area words beforehand 2 It is not possible to set the following IP addresses If any of these values are set the ERH indicator will flash e IP addresses where all network number bits are 0 or 1 e IP addresses where all host number bits are 0 or 1 e IP addresses where all subnet number bits are 1 e IP addresses that start with 127 7F hexadecimal e g 127 35 21 16 104 User Settings Area Section 4 4 4 4 User Settings Area 4 4 1 Overview of the User Settings Area When the layout of the allocated CIO Area words is set to user settings the user settings area can be used in addition to the allocated ClO Area words and allocated DM Area words The beginning word of the user settings area can be set in the Status Area Tab Page in the Edit Parameters Dialog Box of the CX Programmer 4 4 2 User Settings Area The user can allocate any available area to contain the registered target node information normal target node informations target node PLC operating infor mation and target node PLC error information Offset Bit a 15 08 07 o Data direction rr 0 j Registered target node EtherNet IP Unit gt CPU Unit 16 words 15 i Normal target node i 16 words EtherNet I
399. ng Peripheral bro Progam pesseq execution servicing cesseg execution Data exchange processing If there is an interrupt for data exchange processing the CPU Unit s cycle time is extended by that interrupt processing time Refer to 10 2 2 Data Processing Time for details 10 2 2 Data Processing Time 276 Note The following formula approximates the time required for data exchange the data processing time Approximation of the data processing time 0 0008 x Number of data exchange words 1 0 ms The maximum number of tag data link words that can be transferred by one EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port is 184 832 words If the number of tag data link words exceeds the number of words that can be exchanged with the CPU Unit at one time the data will be divided and transferred in multiple data exchanges The following table shows the number of words that each CPU Unit can exchange at one time CPU Unit Number of words per data exchange CS CJ Series Output Send About 7 405 words max If there are more words the data will be divided Input Receive About 7 405 words max If there are more words the data will be divided Note The total amount of send data and receive data that can be exchanged at one time is about 14 810 words maximum The number of data exchanges may double as given in the following table according to the relation with the PLC cycle time and the data processing time Condi
400. ng on the Auto Adjust Time Tab Page of the Edit Parameters Dialog Box e SNTP server specification required e Access to the SNTP server is enabled when writing clock information from the SNTP server to the local CPU Unit when the Automatic Clock Adjust ment Switch is turned from OFF to ON and at a set automatic adjustment time e Automatic clock adjustment setting 3 To perform automatic clock adjustment manually turn the Automatic Clock Adjustment Switch from OFF to ON The Automatic Clock Adjustment Switch is word n bit 05 in the words allocated in the CPU Bus Unit Area where n CIO 1500 25 X unit number 4 Select Transfer to PLC from the Options Menu and click the Yes Button The Unit Setup CPU Bus System Setup will be transferred to the CPU Unit the setting data will be transferred to the CPU Bus Unit System Setup Area 313 Using the Automatic Clock Adjustment Function Section 12 2 12 2 2 Settings Required for Automatic Clock Adjustment Function The following settings must be set in the Unit Setup when using the automatic clock adjustment function CX Settings Setting conditions Reference Programmer tab Auto Adjust Server specification Required 12 2 3 Auto Adjust Time type Time on page 315 IP Address One or the other is Host name required depending on the Server specifi cation type setting Port No Rarely required Change when a set ting other than the default setting of 123 is required
401. nit control bits CPU Unit EtherNet IP Unit 1 n 1 Reserved EtherNet IP Unit CPU Unit 2 n 2 Target Node PLC Operating Information EtherNet IP Unit CPU Unit 3 n 3 4 words only 4 n 4 5 n 5 6 n 6 Target Node PLC Error Information EtherNet IP Unit gt CPU Unit 7 n 7 4 words only 8 n 8 9 n 9 10 n 10 Unit status 1 EtherNet IP Unit gt CPU Unit ao war oo Unitstatus2 0 12 n 12 Communications status 1 EtherNet IP Unit gt CPU Unit 13 nig Communications status2 14 nie oo Communications status3 15 n 15 Reserved EtherNet IP Unit gt CPU Unit 16 n i6 Registered Target Node EtherNet IP Unit CPU Unit 17 n 17 4 words only 18 n 18 19 n 19 20 n 20 Normal Target Node EtherNet IP Unit gt CPU Unit 21 n 21 4 words only 22 n 22 23 n 23 24 n 24 FINS TCP Connection Status EtherNet IP Unit CPU Unit Note The reserved words are regularly refreshed with all zeroes 90 CIO Area Allocations Section 4 2 User Settings Offset Bit 15 8 7 0 Data direction 0 n Unit control bits CPU Unit gt EtherNet IP Unit 1 n 1 Reserved EtherNet IP Unit gt CPU Unit 2 n 2 3 n 3 4 n 4 5 n 5 6 n 6 7 n 7 8 n 8 9 n 9 10 n 10 Unit status 1 EtherNet IP Unit CPU Unit Wom Unitstatus2 0 12 n 12 Communications status 1 EtherNet IP Unit CPU Unit 13 mig Communications status2 4oni4 oo Communications status3 15 n415 Reserved EtherNet IP Unit CPU Unit 16 n
402. nit is lit red e Check whether the same IP address is set on another node The 7 segment display will indicate error FO 14 5 3 Tag Data Links Fail to Start Use the following table to troubleshoot tag data links when the Tag Data Links Operating Flag bit 15 in Communications Status 1 does not go ON The indicators on the EtherNet IP Unit or CPU Unit are all OFF e Check whether power is being supplied to the PLC e Check whether the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port is mounted in the Backplane correctly e If a watchdog timer WDT error has occurred in the PLC fol low the procedures described in the PLC s Operation Man ual to correct the problem e All of the indicators for the EtherNet IP Unit or built in Ether Net IP port will be OFF if a CPU Bus Unit error has occurred Check for a CPU Bus Unit error e Restart the Unit Replace the Unit if it doesn t restart The MS indicator on the EtherNet IP Unit or CPU Unit is lit green but the NS indicator remains OFF e If the EtherNet IP Unit s 7 segment display is displaying an error code refer to the tables in 14 2 Using the LED Indica tors and Display for Troubleshooting e Confirm that the cables are properly connected to the switching hub and the power supply to the switching hub is ON e f data is being restored by the simple backup function wait until the restore operation is completed The MS indicator on the EtherNet IP Unit
403. nits e g Controller Link Units the maximum total number of CPU Bus Units that can be mounted is 8 Tighten PLC Backplane mounting screws to a torque of 0 9 N m and the Unit s screws to a torque of 0 4 N m CS1W BC023 BC033 BC053 BC083 BC103 CPU Backplane CS series CPU Rack with 2 3 5 8 or 10 slots Can be mounted in any slot 2 3 5 8 or 10 slots Expansion Backplane not possible with 2 slot CPU Backplane CS1W B1033 Bl1053 Bl083 BI103 CS series Expansion Backplane CS series Expansion Rack with Up to eight Units can be mounted 3 5 8 Or IN SIOIS gt to the slots shown in the diagrams Can be mounted in any slot on the left T 3 5 8 or 10 slots CS1W B1033 BI053 B1083 B1103 CS series Expansion Backplane CS series Expansion Rack with 3 5 8 or 10 slots Can be mounted in any slot P 3 5 8 or 10 slots CPU CPU Unit Note PS Power Supply Unit The CS1W EIP21 EtherNet IP Units maximum current consumption is 410 mA Be sure that the total current consumption of all the Units connected to the same CPU Backplane or Expansion Backplane does not exceed the output capacity of the Power Supply Unit 3 3 2 Mounting to a CJ series PLC 58 EtherNet IP Units can be mounted in a CJ series CPU Rack or a CJ series Expansion CPU Rack Connect the EtherNet IP Unit in any of the positions shown below using the sliders on the top and bottom of the Unit Up to eight EtherNet IP Units
404. nnection and exchanges data with the remote node The node that opens the connection is called the originator and the other node is called the target CPU Unit EtherNet IP Unit EtherNet IP Unit CPU Unit Produced tag Tag set name OUT1 Consumed tag Input Output clo k 7 WR Tag set name ABC Connection VO refreshing ce ree aren lag 100 VO refreshing Output ea Tag set name XYZ VO refreshing PLC status PLC status Ethernet EtherNet IP When communicating between two PLCs the originator opens a connection to input data from the target When communicating between a PLC and slave device the PLC opens the connection as the originator and inputs data from the target slave device or outputs data to the target 132 Overview of Tag Data Links Section 6 1 The packet interval RPI which sets the time interval for the data exchange can be set for each connection in the connection s settings The location and size of the data exchange areas are set as the produced tag output variable and consumed tag input variable Use the Network Configurator to make the settings If network symbols are used in connection settings these symbols must be set at both the origi
405. nnections for individual target devices is refreshed in the CPU Unit With revision 1 each flag immedi ately turns ON when all connections are established 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 16 10 9 7 3 o 17 26_ 25 23 20_ 19 16 18 36_ 35 32 19 s8 57 55 se 51 48 20 zy z z z s s ez 66 65 64 21 95 94 95 2 or o0 69 se 67 se a5 os as oe s1 00 22 106 105 104 108 100 96 23 122 ne 115 us n2 24 140 130 138 132 128 25 154 148 147 145 144 26 170 169 167 164 163 161 160 27 186 185 183 180 179 177 176 28 202 196 192 29 220 219 218 217 216 215 214 213 212 211 210 209 208 30 234 228 224 31 240 Manipulated Unit operation by Normal Target Node Revision 1 Flags immediately Flags turn ON when all connections are established Revision 2 or higher Flags turn ON after all data for multiple connections for the target device is refreshed in the CPU Unit Indicates that all connections are not established These flags indicate the operating status of the target node PLCs and are valid only when the EtherNet IP Unit is the originator The flags are valid only when the corresponding Normal Target Node Flag is ON If the corresponding Normal Target Node Flag is OFF the Target Node PLC Operating Flag indi cates the previous operating status For details on the default settings refer to
406. no password is set for the default login so login is possible by simply entering CONFIDENTIAL as the login name A user set login name and password can also be set in the User Setup CPU Bus Unit System Setup Login Messages Status Message Normal 220 XXX XX XX XX yyyyyyyyyy FTP server FTP Ver connection sion z zz ready Xxx xx xx xx IP address of EtherNet IP Unit or built in Ether Net IP port yyyyyyyyyy EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port model number e g CS1W EIP21 z zz Firmware version of EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port FTP server 221 FTP server busy Goodbye busy Setting Restrictions The following restrictions apply to login names and passwords e The login name and password must consist of alphanumeric characters hyphens and or underscores They are not case sensitive e A login name consists of 12 characters e A password consists of 8 characters e Always set a password when setting a new login name The login name will not be valid unless a password is set for it e If a login name is not set or contains illegal characters the default login name CONFIDENTIAL must be used No password is required and any password that is set will be ignored FTP File Transfer Mode FTP has two file transfer modes ASCII mode and binary mode Before start ing to transfer files use the type command specifies the data type of trans ferred files to select the required
407. not cleared or reset 6 2 13 Saving the Network Configuration File Device parameters set in the Network Configurator or device parameters uploaded from the network can be saved as a network configuration file 1 2 3 1 Select File Save As The following dialog box will be displayed 187 Network Configurator Operations Section 6 2 Save in O My Documents File name Untitled nvf Save as type Network Configuration File v3 nvf Option C Select target network The File name Field will contain Untitled nvf as the default file name 2 Input the file name and click the Save Button Save in My Documents File name Equip1 nvf Save as type Network Configuration File v3 nvf v Cancel Option C Select target network The network configuration file save operation is complete 3 When the network configuration is changed later the existing network con figuration file can be overwritten by selecting File Save or clicking the Button 4 You can select the Select target network Check Box in the Option Area to save a network configuration file with only the required networks Save in LO My Documents File name Equip1 nvf Save as type Network Configuration File v3 nvf v Cancel Option v Select target network Select the check boxes of the networks to save and click the OK Button 188 Network Configurator Operations Section 6 2 Select Target Net
408. nsmission it is possible to pre vent problems such as transmission delays due to message communications traffic and packet losses due to buffer overflow Settings must be made in the switching hub to enable this function and give higher priority to tag data link packets Special settings must be made in the switching hub when using the multicast filtering function and L4 QoS function There must be enough multicast filters for the network being used 1 Ask the switching hub manufacturer for setting procedures for the switch ing hub 2 Install the switching hub so that its environmental resistance capabilities are not exceeded Ask the switching hub manufacturer for information on the environmental resistance of the switch hub 37 Checking Bandwidth Usage and Adjusting the RPI Section 2 3 2 3 Checking Bandwidth Usage and Adjusting the RPI In an Ethernet network using a switching hub the network bandwidth is not shared by all of the nodes independent transmission paths are established between individual nodes through the switching hub A dedicated communications buffer is established in the switching hub for communications between the nodes and full duplex communications simulta neous transmission and reception are performed asynchronously with other transmission paths The communications load in other transmission paths does not affect communications so packet collisions do not occur and stable high speed communications can b
409. ntents 196 Target Node PLC Operating Flag Information Layout set to default settings Words n 2 to n 5 Layout set to user settings Words n 32 to n 47 Note Corresponds to the PLC status s PLC Operating Flag Each flag indicates the operating status of the corresponding target node PLC of connections in which the EtherNet IP Unit is the originator The flag corresponding to the target node s tar get ID will be ON when the PLC Operating Flags for all connections with that target node indicate that the PLC is operating Each node address s flag location i e target ID can be changed from the Network Configurator The PLC status flags are enabled when the PLC status is included in the communications data for both the originator and target The data in this table is refreshed when neces sary Target Node PLC Error Flag Infor mation Layout set to default settings Words n 6 to n 9 Layout set to user settings Words n 48 to n 63 Note Corresponds to the PLC status s PLC Error Flag Each flag indicates the error status logical OR of non fatal and fatal errors of the corresponding target node PLC of connections in which the Eth erNet IP Unit is the originator The flag corre sponding to the target node s target ID will be ON if even one error is indicated in any of the connections with that target node Each node address s flag location i e target ID can be changed from the Network Configurator
410. nternal table are changed after FINS messages are received Therefore even when a FINS command has been received from a personal computer a DHCP client computer for which the IP address is dynamically changed a response can still be sent back to the computer the DHCP client computer from which the command origi nated Personal computer client IP address changed acquired from DHCP server when connected FINS command sent L___ IP address FINS command Ethernet EtherNet IP EtherNet IP Unit with fixed IP address IP address FINS response Response sent back to changed IP address With FINS TCP FINS node addresses and IP addresses in the internal table are changed with each connection that is established Therefore even when a FINS command has been received from a personal computer a DHCP client computer for which the IP address is dynamically changed a response can still be sent back to the computer the DHCP client computer from which the command originated Personal computer client IP address changed acquired from DHCP server when connected FINS command sent __ IP address FINS command Ethernet EtherNet IP EtherNet IP Unit FINS TCP server with fixed IP address IP address FINS response Response sent back to changed IP address Automatic IP Address Setting by DHCP Service DHCP service is
411. o SECTION 5 Determining IP Addresses for an explanation of IP addresses as well as the correspondence between FINS node addresses and IP addresses The three setting methods are described in the following paragraphs Method 1 Using the Default IP Address 192 168 250 Node address When the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port is just mounted in the PLC and the I O table is created the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port will operate with its default IP address This default address is enabled when the local IP address in the allocated DM area and the TCP IP Configu ration are both set to their defaults 0 0 0 0 The default IP address is 192 168 250 Node_address where Node_address is the node address set with the rotary switches on the front of the EtherNet IP Unit This address is also used as the FINS node address The following table shows the various settings in the Unit Setup when the IP address and TCP IP Configuration are all set to their default values Setting Operating status IP address 192 168 250 Node_address Subnet mask 255 255 255 0 class C mask Default gateway None IP routing disabled Preferred DNS server None Alternate DNS server None Host name None Domain name None Baud rate Auto detect 71 Section 3 7 Setting the Local IP Address 72 Method 2 Setting the Address in the CPU Bus Unit s Allocated DM Area With this method an IP address is not set
412. o 3 lev els 203 Message Communications Error Indications Section 7 5 7 5 Message Communications Error Indications There are two ways to obtain information on communications errors that occur in message communications checking the EtherNet IP Unit s error log or checking its indicators 204 1 2 3 1 Each time a communications error occurs an error code is placed in an er ror record in the error log stored in RAM in the EtherNet IP Unit or CPU Unit with the built in EtherNet IP Port Up to 64 records can be stored in the error log The time and date that the error occurred are also recorded together The error log can be read or cleared from the CPU Unit by sending an FINS command to the EtherNet IP Unit Error Log Read Clear The contents of the error log can also be monitored from the Configurator Code Code 64 records Read out gt CPU Unit Monitor Configurator Code When a communications error has occurred details on the error are indi cated by the MS and NS indicators and the 7 segment display on the front panel of the EtherNet IP Unit or CPU Unit with the built in EtherNet IP port This information can be used for troubleshooting iia i FINS command Example Routing table error Flashing red 3 a 7 Not relevant SF tb o eT Communications status 3 15 00 lt U EtherNet IP CPU Unit Unit
413. o limitation when a switching hub is used Current consumption Unit 410 mA max at 5 V DC Weight 171 g max Dimensions 35 x 130 x 101 mm W x H x D Other general specifications 10 Other specifications conform to the general specifications of the CS series EtherNet IP Unit and Built in EtherNet IP Port Specifications Section 1 2 Note If tag data links are being used use 100Base TX Otherwise 10Base T can be used but this is not recommended CJ series EtherNet IP Unit Item Specifications Model number CJ1W EIP21 Type 100Base TX See note Applicable PLCs CJ series PLCs Unit classification CJ series CPU Bus Unit Mounting location CPU Rack or Expansion Rack Number of Units that can be mounted 8 max including Expansion Racks Note Up to seven EtherNet IP Units can be connected to a CU2H CPU Unit EIP CPU CPU Unit words used Allocated CIO Area words CPU Bus Unit words 25 words Unit one unit number s words These words contain control bits and flags the target node PLC s operating and error information Unit status communications status registered normal target node infor mation and FINS TCP connection status Allocated DM Area words CPU Bus Unit words 100 words Unit one unit number s words These words contain the IP address display setting area User set area Any usable data
414. ocal node 2 10 ms CPU Bus Unit service processing time local node 2 0 4 ms Maximum transmission delay 10 0 4 0 5 0 1 0 7 15 0 6 1 1 0 3 1 5 10 0 4 40 6 ms 287 Message Service Transmission Delay Section 10 3 288 SECTION 11 FTP Server This section describes the functions provided by the FTP server 11 1 Overview and Specifications 0 0 0 cece eee eee 290 Well Overviews ec a ee eee ae Pe ede Dee ee 290 TIA Specifications se eroen oa iri eee tia e ad cae eee R 291 11 2 FTP Server Function Details 0 00 0 2 291 11 2 1 File Typ 8 e005 24 esta cata ea ae aaa e Gand 291 11 2 2 Connecting to the FTP Server 0 000 292 11 3 Using the FTP Server Function 0 0 e eee eee eee 293 WS Procedure niea en aa ont Wes Sota Gitte Owe eer A NAE 293 11 3 2 List of Settings Required for the FTP Server Function 293 1 3 3 PIR Tab eich sch b Ge hha eae ede aes ce pees 294 11 4 FTP Server Application Example 0 0 0 0 2 ee eee ee eee 295 11 5 Using FTP Commands E ce ee 296 11 5 1 Table of Commands 00 0 0 0c eee ee eee 296 11 5 2 Using the Commands 0 0 0 e eee eee ee 296 11 5 3 Error Messages and FTP Status 00 00 0040 301 11 6 Checking FTP Status 0 0 2 e ee eee eee 302 T1 6 1 FTP Status Flag io oe dard s aoe det ba R koe ass 302 11 7 Using File Memor
415. of packets discarded because the TCP header was smaller than the minimum size for a TCP header or was larger than the IP packet The number of packets discarded because the TCP header and IP header could not be stored in the first short buffer The number of resent packets received 398 FINS Commands Addressed to EtherNet IP Units or Built in EtherNet IP Ports Appendix E 8 The number of bytes in the resend packets 9 The number of duplicated resend packets received 10 The number of bytes in the duplicated resend packets received 11 The number of out of range data packets received Always 0 12 The number of bytes in the out of range data packets received Always 0 13 The number of packets where the data was larger than the window 14 The number of bytes in the packets where the data was larger than the window 15 The number of packets received after closing 16 The number of window probe packets received 17 The number of resent ACK packets received 18 The number of ACK packets received with no data set 19 The number of ACK packets received 20 The number of ACK packets received for received transmission acknowledgements ACK 21 The number of window advertisement packets received UDP Status Response Three items of UDP information occupying 4 bytes each are returned in the following sequence Each value is returned as an 8 digit hexadecimal value 1 The number of packets discarded because the size
416. of the first short buffer was smaller than the minimum size 28 of the IP header and UDP header when the packet was stored 2 The number of packets discarded due to an incorrect checksum in the UDP header 3 The number of packets discarded because the IP overall length in the IP header was shorter than the UDP overall length in the UDP header Precautions All the above values are set to 0 if network operation stops due to incorrect settings in the system setup Counting will be stopped when a count reaches the maximum value The maximum values are as follows IP ICMP or UDP status 7FFFFFFF 2 147 483 647 decimal TC status FFFFFFFF 4 294 967 295 decimal Response Codes 0000 Normal end 1001 Command too large MEMORY STATUS READ Reads the status of the network memory for the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port The network memory contains 2 991 bytes that are used as required as for communications buffers for communications ser vicing The network memory consists of 23 928 short buffers 128 bytes each and 64 long buffers 1 024 bytes each Command Block Command code 399 FINS Commands Addressed to EtherNet IP Units or Built in EtherNet IP Ports Appendix E Response Block Command Response Memory status code code Parameters Memory Status Response A total of 23 data items in six areas are returned in the following order Each item consists of 4 bytes 1 Short Buffer Application Two items are
417. ol File Edit Datalink Help HSaGax Kv Datalink Table data of selected node Areal freee TaeSet Total Link CH Size Link CH Size Name Size wooo 100 D00050 100 TagSeti 192 200 wo DOOI5O 100 TasSet2 192 200 w200 D00250 100 TagSet31 92 200 192 The number of PPS Without lt gt PPS with connection jl Multicast filter 2 Multicast filter IN OUT Output with no overload is marked otal Size includes PLC Status data NetworkConfigurator will show the additional 2 bytes as a size 1CH 2bytes FA F2 F3 Fa F5 F F FB F9 F10 Help Edit Cell Show Prev Show Next Ihsert Delete Move Down Move Up Datalink Check the Node Node TagSet TagSet TagSet TagSet Wizard table NUM Ready 147 Network Configurator Operations Section 6 2 Automatic Allocation Results for Node 3 IP Address 192 168 250 3 B 01 54f34 csy DatalinkTool Eile Edit Datalink Help jeHSBeex Kv Nodes Datalink Table data of selected node P Areal Area2 IP Address Device TagSet Total Target RPI IN OUT Link CH Size Link CH Size Name Size Node Variable ms wooo 100 D00050 100 TagSeti 192 200 192 168 250 1 TagSeti 192 50 0 192 168 2501 CJ2B EIP21 192 168 250 2 CJ2B EIP21 i Wi00 100 DOOI5O 100 TagSet2192 200 192 168 2502 TaeSet2192 500 1921682503 OJ W EIP21 weoo 100 D00250 100 T gSet3192 200 A The number of 4 PPS Without 30 PPS with 90 connection Multicast filt
418. ol data below 15 0 15 10_ 87 3 o gt F Number of words n L Dumber ol mar i o ex 0 to 15 retries 0001 to 03DE Hex 1 to 990 words Communications port number 0 to 7 15 11 87 o wale Jal i Response A 0 Required l Destination network number 00 Hex Local network 1 Not required 01 to E Hex 1 to 127 15 1 87 l o i i C 2 i L C 4 A i i e Destination unit address L Response monitor time 00 Hex CPU Uni 0000 Hex 2 s 90 P P Hex Uai a 15 0001 to FFFF Hex 0 1 to 6 553 5 s E1 Hex Inner Board in units of 0 1 s FE Hex Unit connected to network Destination node number N 00 to FE Hex 0 to 254 The same data can be broadcast to all nodes on the network by setting the destination node number to FF Hex The range of node addresses is different for networks other than Ethernet Note The message service does not guarantee that a message will reach the desti nation node A message may be lost during transmission due to factors such as noise To prevent this from occurring when using message services it is common to set up retry processing at the node from which instructions are issued With the SEND 090 RECV 098 and CMND 490 instructions retry processing is executed automatically by specifying the number of retries so specify a number other than 0 Communicating between OMRON PLCs Section 8 6 R
419. olbus Network Address 0 Node Address 0 Unit No 0 COM Port COM3 Baud Rate 115200 Bit s 175 Network Configurator Operations Section 6 2 3 Input the EtherNet IP Unit s unit number in the Unit No Field select the connecting COM port number and click the OK Button Usually the Baud Rate is left at this setting The following dialog box will be displayed Select Connect Network Port Select a network port that you would like to connect Device Information Vendor ID Product Name Device Type Revision Refresh Option Cancel After clicking TCP 2 click the OK Button The Network Configurator will be connected to the EtherNet IP network If the Network Configurator is con nected online properly On line will be displayed in the status bar at the bot tom of the window Connecting through the CPU Unit s USB or RS 232C Port CJ2 CPU Units Only Connect to the EtherNet IP Unit s Ethernet port via the CPU Unit s USB port or RS 232C port 1 2 3 1 Select Option Select Interface CJ2 USB Serial Port to set the com munications interface 2 Select Network Connect The Setup Interface Dialog Box will be dis 176 played Setup Interface Port Type jEEI Port OMRO Baud Rate 115200 Bit s OK Cancel Set the port type to either USB or serial Set the port to use and then click the OK Button Leave the baud rate at the default setting The foll
420. ommunications Appendix D Terminology In CIP specifications Object Class Instance Attribute and Service are defined as follows Object An abstract representation of a particular component within a product Class A set of objects that all represent the same kind of system component A class is a generalization of an object All objects in a class are identical in form and behavior but may contain different attribute values Instance A specific and real physical occurrence of an object For example New Zealand is an instance of the object class Country The terms Object Instance and Object Instance all refer to a specific Instance Attribute A description of an externally visible characteristic or feature of an object Typically attributes provide status information or govern the operation of an Object For example the ASCII name of an object and the repeti tion rate of a cyclic object Service A function supported by an object and or object class CIP defines a set of common services and provides for the definition of Object Class and or Vendor Specific services Specifying an Object Address Request Path This is the basic concept involved in accessing an Object or Attribute Each Object Class has a Class ID There are two types of Class ID one is standardized by ODVA and the other is decided independently by each device vendor Each Object Instance also has ID
421. on error 09 Other error OAH Error in obtained IP address Take either of the following mea sures e Correct the set tings for each server e Inspect the com munications path EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port cable con nections hub router server and correct the situation that is causing the error Clock data write error 0001 Clock data could not be refreshed because of a CPU Unit error Clear the CPU Unit error 0002 Clock data could not be refreshed because the CPU Unit could not write clock data in that operation mode The automatic clock adjustment function is not supported by cer tain CPU Units models lot num bers if they are in RUN or MONI TOR mode See note 317 Automatic Clock Adjustment Error Processing Section 12 4 Note 1 For details on other error log information refer to the Operation Manual Construction of Networks SECTION 14 Troubleshooting and Error Pro cessing 2 An error will occur in the following CPU Units when the automatic clock adjustment function is executed under the conditions shown in the table CPU Unit Conditions CPU Units manufactured on or When the CPU execution mode is set to other before January 31 2003 lot num than normal mode priority peripheral servicing bers 030131 or earlier mode parallel processing with synchronous CJ1G CPU memory access mode or parallel processing
422. on 8 provides information on communicating on EtherNet IP Systems and interconnected net works using FINS commands The information provided in the section deals only with FINS communi cations in reference to EtherNet IP Units or built in EtherNet IP ports Section 9 describes message communications using FINS commands sent from the ladder program in the CPU Unit of the PLC Section 10 describes the communications performance in an EtherNet IP network and shows how to estimate the I O response times and transmission delays Section 11 describes the functions provided by the FTP server Section 12 provides an overview of the automatic clock adjustment function including details on spec ifications required settings operations from CX Programmer and troubleshooting Section 13 describes cleaning inspection and Unit replacement procedures as well as the Simple Backup Function Section 14 describes error processing periodic maintenance operations and troubleshooting proce dures needed to keep the EtherNet IP network operating properly We recommend reading through the error processing procedures before operation so that operating errors can be identified and corrected more quickly Appendices provide information on EtherNet IP network parameters the buffer configuration TCP status transitions ASCII characters maintenance and inspections xi Relevant Manuals The following table lists CS and CJ series manuals that contain i
423. on describes how to use the PING command to test communica tions with the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port 3 11 1 PING Command The PING command sends an echo request packet to a remote node and receives an echo response packet to confirm that the remote node is commu nicating correctly The PING command uses the ICMP echo request and responses The echo response packet is automatically returned in the ICMP The PING command is normally used to check the connections of remote nodes when configuring a network The EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port supports both the ICMP echo request and reply functions If the remote node returns a normal response to the PING command then the nodes are physically connected correctly and Ethernet node settings are cor rect EtherNet IP Unit Remote Node host computer or EtherNet IP Unit Echo response 3 11 2 EtherNet IP Unit or Built in EtherNet IP Port Operation The EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port automatically returns the echo response packet in response to an echo request packet sent by another node host computer or other EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port An echo request packet can be sent to another node by issuing the FINS command to execute the PING command from the PLC 3 11 3 Host Computer Operation The PING command can be executed from the host computer to send an echo request packet to an EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet I
424. on examples 295 commands 296 bye 300 cd 298 close 300 delete 300 dir 297 get 299 ls 297 mdelete 300 meget 299 mput 299 open 296 put 299 pwd 298 quitting 300 type 299 user 297 connecting 292 296 data type 299 displaying current directory 298 file types 291 protection 291 protocol 291 quitting 300 See also Memory Cards specifications 291 status 302 FTP Status Flag 302 full duplex 76 G gateway default gateway 75 general specifications 10 get command 291 296 299 308 Get the time information from the SNTP server field 314 315 global address 126 417 GMRP 35 H half duplex 76 high communications traffic preventing 242 host name 75 Host name field 314 315 T O allocations CIO Area 90 DM Area 103 T O memory address 138 T O response time 276 T O tables creating 66 overview 66 ICMP communications status 396 IGMP snooping 14 35 importing 159 indicators 19 using LED indicators for troubleshooting 335 initial settings 54 installation 53 cable connections 64 location xxiv mounting Unit to PLC 58 precautions 61 INTERNODE ECHO TEST 384 internode test command 384 IP address 74 112 automatic generation 115 automatic generation dynamic 116 automatic generation static 117 automatic IP address setting by DHCP service 122 combined method 118 determining IP addresses 112 global address 126 IP a
425. on number remote IP address has been set in the FINS TCP Tab Page of the Network Configurator s Edit Parameters Dialog Box it can be dynamically changed from the lad der program using a FINS command i e FINS TCP CONNECTION REMOTE NODE CHANGE REQUEST The following diagram shows the structure of a TCP packet sent over an Ethernet network Ethernet Ver 2 ip To FINS TCP header FINS frame FCS TCP packet As the diagram shows a nested structure is used with the FINS TCP method i e Ethernet Ver 2 IP frame TCP frame FINS TCP header frame and FINS frame A TCP data section FINS TCP header FINS frame that exceeds the segment size default setting of 1 024 bytes in the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port with automatic adjustment for optimum values between the nodes is split into TCP packets for transmission The split TCP data is then joined automatically at the remote node s TCP IP protocol layer The TCP IP protocol layer however cannot determine where the data has been split so the TCP data sections from multiple packets are all joined together Therefore when using the FINS TCP method FINS TCP headers must be added at the beginning of FINS frames in order to serve as FINS frame delimiters The length of the data in the following FINS frame is stored in the header allowing the frame to be separated out by the remote node With the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port and FinsGateway Ver 2003 or
426. onal computer of PLC FINS node IP address address Fixed Server PLC FINS node address IP address FINS UDP IP address conversion By pairing FINS Fixed node addresses with IP addresses in Ethernet Automatic gen eration method static Automatic gen eration method dynamic IP address table method Combined method Connection Fixed Fixed or variable Fixed Fixed or variable Fixed or variable Fixed or Fixed Automatic Fixed or By automatic conver sion of FINS node addresses at Ether Net IP Unit and remote node and method auto matic FINS node address conversion can be allo cated auto matically when not variable determined then sending and receiving data 125 Private and Global Addresses 5 3 Private and Global Addresses 5 3 1 Private and Global Addresses There are two kinds of IP addresses private and global e Global addresses These are IP addresses that connect directly to the Internet Allocated by application to NIC each address is unique in the world and as many as 4 3 million can be allocated worldwide e Private addresses These are IP addresses for Intranet LAN use and cannot connect directly to the Internet Frames that include private IP addresses are restricted by the router from being sent outside the LAN Generally as shown below global addresses in the intranet are allocated only to
427. ontact Informa tion Specifies the contact information as text This information can be read from the SNMP manager SNMP Location Informa tion Specifies the location information as text This information can be read from the SNMP manager Authentication Check 1 2 Setting Not use SNMP Trap ser vice or Use SNMP Trap service Specifies the SNMP managers that can access the PLC To restrict access to only specific SNMP managers specify the SNMP managers using IP addresses or host names Community names can also be specified e g public Ether one or two settings can be made Function Specifies whether to use the SNMP trap If not using the SNMP trap service is specified SNMP traps cannot be sent to the SNMP manager SNMP Trap Port Sets the port number to use to connect to the SNMP manager It is normally not necessary to change this setting Trap 1 2 Sets the SNMP manager destinations for SNMP traps The SNMP managers can be specified using IP addresses or host names Community names can also be specified e g public Either one or two trap destinations can be set 83 Communications Test Section 3 11 3 11 Communications Test If the basic settings in particular the IP address and subnet mask have been made correctly for the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port then it should be possible to communicate with nodes on the EtherNet IP network This secti
428. opping Tag Data Links Tag data links are automatically started when the data link parameters are downloaded from the Network Configurator Thereafter tag data links can be stopped and started for the entire network or individual devices from the Net work Configurator Starting and stopping tag data links for individual devices must be performed for the originator Software switches in allocated words can also be used to start and stop tag data links for the entire network Refer to 6 2 11 Starting and Stopping Tag Data Links for details 6 1 4 Tag Data Link Data Areas Tags Tag Sets Note Example Number of Tags in Tag Sets A data link between the local I O memory and a remote I O memory is called a tag A tag can be specified using a network symbol or a physical address When a connection is established from 1 to 8 tags including PLC status is configured as a tag set Each tag set represents the data that is linked for a tag data link connection Tag data links are thus created by connecting one tag set to another tag set A tag set name must be set for each tag set A connection is used to exchange data as a unit within which data concur rency is maintained Thus data concurrency is maintained for all the data exchanged for the tags in one data set In the following example input tags a to g at the originator are a tag set named SP1_IN and output tags i and ii are a tag set named SP1_OUT A connection is set between
429. or CPU Unit is lit green but the NS indicator contin ues to flash green e If the EtherNet IP Unit s 7 segment display is displaying an error code refer to the tables in 14 2 Using the LED Indica tors and Display for Troubleshooting e The NS indicator will continue to flash green if the tag data link settings have not been set in the Unit Use the Network Configurator to set the tag data link settings in the Unit and then restart the Unit The MS indicators is lit green on the EtherNet IP Unit or CPU Unit but the NS indicator con tinues to flash red e Identify the error code shown on the 7 segment display based on the tables in 14 2 Using the LED Indicators and Display for Troubleshooting and eliminate the cause of the error 357 Troubleshooting Section 14 5 14 5 4 Tag Data Link Problems The tag data isn t Observe the following precautions when writing application simultaneous programs e Maintain the simultaneity of data in connection units between the PLC and EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port e If another company s device is being used refer to that device s user s manual for details At startup the e When received data is used in the ladder program use the received data is All Tag Data Links Operating Flag in Communications Status OFF unexpectedly 1 or the Target Node PLC Operating Flag as a condition If the Target Node PLC Operating Flag is used the PLC status must be include
430. or Higher Tag Data Link Unit Error Operating Occurred n 11 bit 01 n 10 bit 00 Unit Error Occurred n 10 bit 00 10000 Release Flag Local node Error output Local node Error output The following type of programming can be used to process data only when the data links are operating normally The parts of the ladder program that use the data link area for the relevant node are processed only when the corresponding Normal Operation Flag is ON Additional part Normal Operation Flag Interlocks IL and ILC instructions and jumps JMP and JME instructions can also be used to process data only when the data links are operating normally as shown below Node A Data Link Normal Operation Flag Node A data processing Node B Data Link Normal Operation Flag Node B data processing Node C Data Link Normal Operation Flag Node C data processing LI LI LI LI LI LI 195 Section 6 3 Ladder Programming with Tag Data Links Note Even if an error occurs in communications with a target device the input data from the target device will remain stored in words allocated in memory to the local node To prevent malfunctions write the ladder program so that input data processing will not be performed when the Unit Error Occurred Flag word n 10 bit 00 is ON 6 3 2 Status Flags Related to Tag Data Links The status of the tag data links is reflected in the following words Name allocated area Co
431. ork e Starting tag data links Turn ON the Start Tag Data Link Switch word n bit 04 of the allocated words e Stopping tag data links Turn ON the Stop Tag Data Link Switch word n bit 02 of the allocated words 185 Network Configurator Operations Section 6 2 Starting and Stopping Tag Data Links for Individual Devices Using the Network You can start and stop tag data links for individual devices using the following Configurator buttons in the Monitor Device Dialog Box This applies only to tag data links for which the device is the originator Access the Monitor Device Dialog Box by selecting Monitor from the Device Menu Monitor Device Controller Error History Tag Status Ethernet Information Status 1 Status 2 Connection Error History Target Node Status m Start Connection Stop Connection Connection Status Connection Name Type Status 1921682502 002 CNO1_01 h 00 0000 C cose Start Connection Button Starts all connections for which the device is the originator Stop Connection Button Stops all connections for which the device is the originator Note Connections will be cut off if any of the following errors occurs in the CPU Unit that is the originator while tag data links are active e Fatal CPU Unit error e I O refresh error e CPU Unit WDT error e I O bus error 6 2 12 Clearing the Device Parameters The device parameters saved in the EtherNet IP Units in the EtherNet IP net w
432. ork can be cleared returned to their default settings The following proce dure shows how to clear the device parameters For details on connecting to the network from the Network Configurator refer to 6 2 7 Connecting the Net work Configurator to the Network 1 2 3 1 Connect the Network Configurator to the network 2 Select the icon of the EtherNet IP Unit in which you want to clear the device parameters In the following example 2 nodes are selected 192 168 250 1 and 192 168 250 2 To select multiple nodes press and hold the Shift Key while selecting additional icons 186 Network Configurator Operations Section 6 2 192 168 250 2 192 168 250 3 192 168 250 4 GS1W EIP21 CS1W EIP21 GS1W EIP21 2 192 168 250 2 4 192168 2501 192168 250 1 192 168 2501 3 Select Device Reset The following dialog box will be displayed Network Configurator t Selected devices will be reset e OK e Clicking the Yes Button The following dialog box will be displayed Reset Device Reset Type Emulate cycling power oO Return to the out of box configuration and then emulate cycling power i Cancel Select one of the following options and click the OK Button e Emulate cycling power Restarts the Unit e Return to the out of box configuration and then emulate cycling power Returns the Unit to its factory default settings and restarts the Unit e Clicking the No Button The device parameters are
433. ote IP address Local IP address network number FINS node address e Remote UDP port number UDP port number set for local Unit e Connection method FINS UDP With the combined method records of FINS nodes registered to the IP address table are not dynamically changed When the Unit is turned ON or restarted and the IP address of a remote FINS node is not registered in the IP table the IP address can be changed dynamically according to FINS mes sages received from the remote node This can be used effectively when the remote node is a device such as a personal computer and IP addresses are dynamically changed by a method such as DHCP IP Addresses in FINS Communications Section 5 2 Example When FINS Command is Sent FINS node number IP address table P i IP address Node number in IP address table 18 193 21 0 02 IP address 20 153 214 0 129 gt IP address method 23 153 218 51 8 FINS command sent Node number not in IP address table Network number xx xx 00 00 IP address Automatic FINS node number xx See note generation FINS command method sent Automatic When FINS Command is Received generation FINS node number Aaa nin Internal table address table 25 153 218 51 10 _ _ IP address Changed Fe 153 218 51 10 FINS response returned Note When an internal table IP address has been changed with the reception of a FINS command this is sent to the IP address in the
434. out multicast filtering i e the values in parentheses Adjust these values according to instructions in 2 3 4 Checking the Device Bandwidth Usage and Resetting the RPI The Network Configurator displays the total maximum bandwidth that can be used for the entire network as the Network Total of Max Mbit s This value indicates the maximum bandwidth that can be used on the transmission paths when switching hubs are cascaded If the value exceeds the bandwidth of a cascade connection in the actual network the maximum bandwidth for part of the communications path may be exceeded depending on how the network is wired If this occurs either calculate the bandwidth usage for each communications path and be sure that the maximum bandwidth is not exceeded for any cas cade connection or adjust the bandwidth for all cascade connections so that the total maximum network bandwidth is not exceeded Adjust the bandwidth according to instructions in 2 3 4 Checking the Device Bandwidth Usage and Resetting the RPI 2 3 2 Tag Data Link Devices Note 40 The usage of capacity can be adjusted using the RPI setting If the RPI is made shorter the usage of capacity will increase If the RPI is made longer the usage of capacity will decrease The RPI can be set in any one of the following ways e Setting the same interval for all connections e Setting a particular device s connection e Setting a particular connection When the same RPI is set for
435. owing dialog box will be displayed Network Configurator Operations Section 6 2 Select Connect Network Port Select a network port that you would like to connect Browse P Back Plone Device Information Vendor ID Product Name Device Type Revision 5 Select the Backplane Icon and click the Refresh Button The CPU Unit CPU Bus Units and Special I O Units connected in the PLC will be displayed as shown below Select Connect Network Port Select a network port that you would like to connect Browse Y CEE 0 CJ2H GPU6 7 EIP amp 0 CJ2B E1P21 6 Click the icon to the left of the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port CJ1W EIP21 CJ2 or CU2B EIP21 The TCP ports on the EtherNet IP Unit will be displayed as shown below Select Connect Network Port Select a network port that you would like to connect Select the TCP port of the EtherNet IP Unit 7 Select the port for the EtherNet IP Unit and then click the OK Button The Network Configurator will be connected to the EtherNet IP_ network If the Network Configurator goes online normally On line will be displayed in the status bar at the bottom of the window Browse 3 BackPlane 4 0 CJ2H GPU67 EIP 4 0 CJ2B EIP21 eT ice 177 Network Configurator Operations Section 6 2 6 2 8 Downloading Tag Data Link Parameters In order to use tag data links the tag data link parameters such as the tag set se
436. oxes and protect it from being exposed to excessive vibration or impacts during transportation e CPU Bus Units will be restarted when routing tables are transferred from a Programming Device to the CPU Unit Restarting these Units is required to read and enable the new routing tables Confirm that the system will not be adversely affected before allowing the CPU Bus Units to be reset e When the settings IP address or tag data link settings of the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port are transferred from a Programming Device all of the destination EtherNet IP Units or built in EtherNet IP ports nodes will be reset in order to enable the transferred settings Transfer settings to the EtherNet IP Units or built in EtherNet IP ports only after verifying that restarting the Units will not cause any problems in the system e If a repeater hub is used for EtherNet IP tag data links cyclic communica tions the network s communications load will increase data collisions will occur frequently and stable communications will be impossible Always use a switching hub when using tag data links in the network e Before resetting a CPU Bus Unit or Special I O Unit always verify that restart the Unit will not cause any problems in the system Conformance to EC Directives Applicable Directives Concepts Note e EMC Directives e Low Voltage Directive EMC Directives OMRON devices that comply with EC Directives also conform to the
437. p of tags d e group of tags a b and c n groups Each tag set can contain up CPU Unit Tag set SP1_OUT l 1 O memory Tag set SP2_IN Connection EtherNet IP The I O memory words used in tags addresses The tags can also be from d in a tag set do not have continuous ifferent I O memory areas To enable a connection however each tag set must include only input tags or only output tags Both input and output tags cannot be included in the same tag set The following table shows the tag and tag set specifications Total size of all tags lt 184 832 words Maximum size of 1 tag set lt 722 words 1 444 bytes The maximum size is 721 words when the tag set includes the PLC status Maximum size of 1 tag lt 722 words The maximum size is 721 words when the tag set includes the PLC status Number of tags per tag set lt 8 7 tags tag set when the tag set includes the PLC status Note Input and output variables cannot be combined Number of registrable tags lt 256 Number of registrable tag sets lt 256 Overview of Tag Data Links Section 6 1 PLC Status A characteristic function of the CS1W EIP21 and CJ1W EIP21 EtherNet IP Units and CJ2 built in EtherNet IP ports is the ability to specify the PLC status as a member of the tag set This function reads the operating status operat ing and error status of the CPU Unit of the PLC
438. path segment error is encountered Path destination unknown The path is referencing an object class instance or structure element that is not known or is not contained in the processing node Path processing shall stop when a path destination unknown error is encountered Partial transfer Only part of the expected data was transferred Connection lost The messaging connection was lost Service not supported The requested service was not implemented or was not defined for this Object Class Instance Invalid attribute value Invalid attribute data detected Attribute list error An attribute in the Get_Attribute_List or Set_Attribute_List response has a non zero status Already in requested mode state The object is already in the mode state being requested by the service Object state conflict The object cannot perform the requested service in its current mode state Object already exists The requested instance of object to be created already exists Attribute not settable A request to modify a non modifiable attribute was received Privilege violation A permission privilege check failed Device state conflict The device s current mode state prohibits the execution of the requested ser vice Reply data too large The data to be transmitted in the response buffer is larger than the allocated response buffer Fragmentation of a primitive value The
439. ppendix E 5 The number of received ICMP packets discarded because the type indication code was out of range 6 The number of received ICMP packets discarded because the overall packet length value in the packet header was smaller than the minimum ICMP packet length 7 The number of received ICMP packets discarded because of an incorrect checksum value in the packet header 8 The number of received ICMP packets discarded because the ICMP header length value in the packet head er did not match the lengths of individual header types 9 The number of responses returned to received ICMP packets requiring a response 10 Total number of inputs of each packet type during ICMP input The 19 statistical values are returned in the order shown below Contents are defined for 13 types only all other types contain 0 Echo reply Undefined always 0 Destination unreachable Source quench Routing redirect Undefined always 0 Echo Undefined always 0 Time exceeded Parameter problem Time stamp Time stamp reply Information request Information request reply Address mask request TCP Status Response Address mask reply Three types 46 items of TCP status information occupying 4 bytes each are returned in the following sequence Each value is returned as an 8 digit hexadecimal value 1 Connection Information 60 Bytes Fifteen items are returned in the follo
440. precise estimate contact the switching hub manufacturer The following values are the delays when cascade connections are not being used If cascade connections are used more nodes can be connected but the switching hub delays will increase Words per connection Number of connections used for reception 32 64 128 256 2 words 200 words 400 words 600 words 722 words Receive Processing The receive processing delay is the delay that occurs within the EtherNet IP Delay Unit or built in EtherNet IP port from the reception of the data packet at the Unit until the completion of reception processing in the Unit This delay depends on the size of the connections used in the tag data links and the number of connections In practice the delay depends on the number of con nections used in tag data links with less than 200 words If the number of con nections is n the maximum delay can be calculated with the following equation Maximum reception processing delay 1 n x 0 043 ms The size of the connections may cause a delay when the data sizes are smaller and a large number of packets may be received in a fixed interval because the data may wait for receive processing 274 Communications System Section 10 1 Example Calculation This example shows how to calculate the tag data link delay when the follow of the Tag Data Link ing tag data link connection settings have been made Delay
441. r Operations Section 6 2 1 2 3 Node A Output tag set O_Signal Excluded characters O_ and _ Connection Node B Node C Input tag set _Signal O C Connection O Input tag set _Signal O EtherNet IP 1 Set the same tag set names for the output and input tag sets for the con nection The tag set names can also include forward and backward el lipses 2 Select Auto Connection from the Network Menu The connections will be set automatically A dialog box will appear to set forward and backward ellipses for both out put product and input consume tag sets as soon as automatic connec tion setting processing has begun Auto Connection Configuration It will compare Originator s Tag set and Target s If these are the same it will be configured as connection If you would like to ellipsis a part of Tae set please input the following words Consume Variable Forward ellipsis Backward ellipsis Produce Variable Forward ellipsis Backward ellipsis _Output Input the ellipses and click the OK Button Automatic setting will be pro cessed 3 If there are tag sets that meet the conditions for automatic connection set ting they will be displayed 171 Network Configurator Operations Section 6 2 Confirm Auto Connection List The connection configuration will b
442. r Tag Data Links Checking the Total Number of Multicast IP Addresses in the Network Checking the Total Maximum Network Bandwidth The percentage of the allowable communications bandwidth for tag data links for each EtherNet IP Unit is displayed as the Usage of Capacity and the band width used for tag data link communications in the entire network is displayed as the Mbit s The usage of capacity and used network bandwidth that are displayed in parentheses are for a switching hub that does not use multicast filtering In this case multicast packets will be sent to even the nodes without connection settings so the displayed values will include these packets as well These values can be adjusted according to instructions in 2 3 4 Checking the Device Bandwidth Usage and Resetting the RPI When using a switching hub that provides multicast filtering there must be enough multicast filters for the network being used The number of multicast IP address used in the entire network that is displayed by the Network Config urator as the Network Total of Max Mbit s is based on connection settings Make sure that the number of multicast IP addresses used in the entire net work does not exceed the number of multicast filters supported by the switch ing hub If necessary change to a switching hub with enough multicast filters or adjust the usage of capacity and network bandwidth for tag data links Mbit s values given for a switching hub with
443. r company s EtherNet IP node Specify the node address of the actual destination in the command data of the explicit message send command There are two ways to send an explicit message send command 1 2 3 1 CIP UCMM MESSAGE SEND command 28 10 Messages can be routed through multiple CIP network layers Messages can be routed through 16 network levels The explicit message send com mand may time out if routing is attempted for more than 16 networks 2 EXPLICIT MESSAGE SEND command for DeviceNet Units 28 01 This command is compatible with the DeviceNet Units explicit message send command 28 01 in the ladder program The message must be sent 244 Sending Explicit Messages Section 9 1 in the same network layer and the remote node s IP address range is lim ited The following diagram shows an example of actual node address specifica tions Jo EtherNet IP Unit with unit number 2 LA PLC s i CPU i Unit FINS Node 05 command Explicit message Other company s EtherNet IP node The node address of the non OMRON node is set as the destination node address in the FINS command data 15 87 0 T s i 8 0 1 __ Command code S 1 L l Explicit command block Node address of the non OMRON node 06 Hex 15 87 0 cal o 5 F E L J L J Destina
444. r details on error codes refer to SECTION 14 Troubleshooting and Error Processing Displaying Multiple Error Sources e A d6 error failed to establish connection occurred with IP address 192 168 250 8 e A d6 error failed to establish connection occurred with IP address 192 168 250 9 e A d5 error verification error target nonexistent occurred with IP address 192 168 250 64 e A C6 error multiple switches ON and EA error EtherNet IP expansion setting error occurred at the local EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port IP address 192 168 250 10 The error code is displayed and then the last digit of the target node s IP address is displayed in hexadecimal En db 9P 00 gt BE 868 42 89 Displays errors that occurred within the Unit 4 H L e E a Sa The last digit of the Unit s IP address is displayed in hexadecimal e There is no particular priority to the order in which the errors are dis played All of the errors are displayed repeatedly in order 21 Nomenclature and Functions Section 1 3 Right and Left Dot LEDs If an error occurred in two or more devices with the same rightmost byte in their IP addresses the Right Dot LED will be lit while the devices error is being displayed Example Displaying the Following Errors e A d6 error failed to establish connection occurred with IP address 10 0 1 8 e A d6 error failed to establish connection occu
445. rameters Dialog Box There are two kinds of tag sets input consume and output produce 150 Network Configurator Operations Section 6 2 Edit Device Parameters Connections Tag Sets In Consume Out Produce Name New Edit Tags Delete all of unused Tag Sets Usage Count 0 256 Import To From File g OK Cancel Creating and Adding Tags 3 Click the Edit Tags Button The Edit Tags Dialog Box will be displayed Register the input consume tags and output produce tags separately In Consume Out Produce Name Usage count 0 256 4 Click the In Consume Tab and click the New Button The Edit Tag Dialog Box will be displayed 151 Network Configurator Operations Section 6 2 Edit Tag Name DO Size 2 Byte Over Load Regist Close 5 In the Name Field input the character string of the CPU Unit s data area address e g 100 W100 or DO The following data areas can be set CPU Unit s data area Address Text to input in Name Field CIO Area 0000 to 6143 Holding Area HOOO to H511 Work Area Woo00 to W511 DM Area D00000 to D32767 EM Area Bank 0 hex E0_00000 to E0_32767 Bank 18 E18_00000 to E18_32767 hex Note a The H W D and E characters can also be input in lower case as h w d and e b Be sure to input the data area address such as 100 W100 or DO directly as a character string 6 Input the
446. ramming Devices 4 connecting 66 CX Net 66 CX Programmer 66 Programming Console 66 PROTOCOL STATUS READ 395 protocols FTP server 291 reading status 395 put command 291 296 299 308 pwd command 291 296 298 419 Q QoS 35 quit command 291 296 300 R radioactivity xxiv receiving explicit messages 258 recommended network devices 34 recommended products 61 RECV 098 instruction 200 230 233 accessible data areas 231 delays 284 refresh cycle 38 Register Device List 163 Registered Target Node Flags 101 105 registering devices 142 163 relay tables 217 rename command 291 296 replacing a Unit 320 replacing Units precautions xxv restoring data from the Memory Card 323 Retry timer field 314 316 rmdir command 291 296 route path 371 Routing Table Area 5 routing tables 217 precautions Xxvi relay network table 217 setting examples 219 RPI adjusting 42 S safety precautions xxii SEND 090 instruction 200 230 232 accessible data areas 231 delays 281 sending explicit messages 253 Server specification type field 314 315 Setup Tab 294 seven segment Display 20 seven segment display error status 335 339 341 343 346 420 Index short circuits precautions xxv Simple Backup Function 321 SNMP 3 83 SNMP trap 83 SNTP 3 82 312 SNTP server automatic clock adjustment errors 316 obtaining clock information 312 SOCKET STATUS REA
447. ration Manual Note Depending on the actual operating environment the transmission time may be longer than the one calculated with the equations given here The following factors can cause longer transmission times other traffic on the network win dow sizes of network nodes other traffic at the EtherNet IP Unit or built in Eth erNet IP port itself e g simultaneous tag data link communications and the system configuration Example Calculation In this example SEND 090 is used to send 256 words of data between two PLCs The maximum transmission delay is calculated based on the following operating conditions e Local node s CPU cycle time 10 ms e Local node s CPU execution mode Normal e Local node s CPU peripheral servicing time Default 4 e Remote node s CPU cycle time 5 ms e Remote node s CPU execution mode Normal e Remote node s CPU peripheral servicing time Default 4 e Baud rate 100Base TX Item Calculated value CPU Bus Unit service cycle local 10 ms node CPU Bus Unit service processing time local node 0 4 ms Send processing 256 x 0 002 0 550 1 062 1 1 ms Transmission delay Receive processing 256 x 0 0013 0 0118 0 3446 0 3 ms 256 x 0 003 0 704 1 472 1 5 ms CPU Bus Unit service cycle remote node 5ms CPU Bus Unit service processing time remote node 0 2 ms Maximum transmission delay 10 0 4 1 1 0 3
448. re a EtherNet IP Hardware amp Vendor Gj Omron Corporation Sj Communications Ade 3 Cu1W EIP21 5 CSTW EIP21 B DeviceType To change the name displayed in the Network Tab Page select Network Property The name set in the Comment Field of the Network Property Win dow can be changed Network Property Generic Type EtherNet IP je m Comment EtherNet IP_1 OK Cancel 6 2 2 Setting Procedure Use the Network Configurator to make the settings in the following procedure Set the connection settings in the originator side only Create network symbols using the CX Programmer CJ2H CPU6L1 EIP only Register all devices in the EtherNet IP network such as EtherNet IP Units Create and group tags or import network symbols Network symbols are supported by CJ2H CPU6L1 EIP only Note 1 This step must be executed for both originators and targets 2 When it isn t necessary to create multiple tag groups set the connections with 1 tag 1 tag set Set connections with target devices Set in originator only 4 Download the tag sets 141 Network Configurator Operations Section 6 2 6 2 3 Registering Devices Register all of the devices required in the equipment such as EtherNet IP Units performing tag data links as a network configuration 1 2 3 1 Register the devices that will participate in the tag data links by
449. re downloaded normally Set pins 7 and 8 of the DIP switch on the front panel of the CPU Unit as shown in the following table and turn the power to the CPU Unit OFF and then ON again with the Memory Card inserted into the slot DIP switch settings SW7 EtherNet IP Unit CPU Unit All setup data This operation will read the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port setup data file from the Memory Card and restore the data in the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port When the power supply is ON the MCPWR indicator on the front of the CPU Unit will turn ON flash once and then remain lit while data is being read The BUSY indicator will flash while data is being read After the data has been read correctly the MCPWR and BUSY indicators will turn OFF If the MCPWR indicator flashes five times or if only the BUSY indicator turns OFF it means that an error has occurred If the restoration from the Memory Card fails an H8 error will be displayed on the 7 segment display on the front panel If this happens the data on the Memory Card may not be correct Confirm that the backup operation was completed normally before performing the restore operation 323 Using the Backup Tool Comparing EtherNet IP Unit or Built in EtherNet IP Port Data with the Setup File in the Memory Card Note Section 13 3 Set pins 7 and 8 of the DIP switch on the front panel of the CPU Unit as shown in the following table
450. re attempting to set up or operate an EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port NN BWN Intended Audience General Precautions 0 0 eee eee eens Safety Precautions Operating Environment Precautions 000 000 e eee eee Application Precautions 0 0 cece eee teen ences Conformance to EC Directives 0 0 0 eee eee eee Applicable Directives 0 0 0 0 eee eee ene ne 6 1 6 2 Concepts xxii xxii xxii xxiv xxiv xxvi xxvi xxvi xxi Intended Audience 1 2 3 xxii Intended Audience This manual is intended for the following personnel who must also have knowledge of electrical systems an electrical engineer or the equivalent e Personnel in charge of installing FA systems e Personnel in charge of designing FA systems e Personnel in charge of managing FA systems and facilities General Precautions N WARNING The user must operate the product according to the performance specifica tions described in the operation manuals Before using the product under conditions which are not described in the manual or applying the product to nuclear control systems railroad systems aviation systems vehicles combustion systems medical equipment amuse ment machines safety equipment and other systems machines and equip ment that may have a serious influence on lives and property if used improperly consult your OMRON representative Make sure that the ratin
451. records table records of stored records records Parameters Number of Records Command Response The number of records to read is specified between 0000 and 0020 0 to 32 decimal in the command If this value is set to 0 the number of stored records is returned but the IP address table records are not returned The response returns the actual number of records read Maximum Number of Stored Records Response The maximum number of records that can be stored in the IP address table is returned The maximum number of stored records is fixed at 0020 32 records Number of Stored Records Response The number of IP address table records stored at the time the command is executed is returned as a hexadec imal number IP Address Table Records Response The number of IP address table records specified in the number of records parameter is returned The total number of bytes in the IP address table records is calculated as the number of records x 6 bytes record The configuration of the 6 bytes of data in each record is as shown in the following diagram 393 FINS Commands Addressed to EtherNet IP Units or Built in EtherNet IP Ports Appendix E 1 6 bytes nn SEED Set FINS node IP address number FINS Node Address Node address for communications via the FINS command in hexadecimal IP Address IP number used by TCP IP protocol in hexadecimal Precautions e If the IP address table contains fewer records tha
452. ree data exchanges based on the data size The PLC cycle time is 15 ms the time affect on the CPU Unit cycle time is 5 38 ms and the data processing time for the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port is 6 92 ms Therefore the number of data exchanges will remain three Also if one PLC cycle is required to prepare for the data exchange before the actual data exchange the number of data exchanges is increased to four Maximum Tag Data Link I O Response Time Input I O processin l Input device ee a Input ON delay E Data exchange 1 1 cycle time ni I i I IE PLC 1 processing f a W 2 A B A B Ss m Send data exchange 8 Total network delay f t 1 peee Tag data link i RPI 4 b c a b c _ PLC 7 processing T if il if if r cea 1 cycle time aes Output device Output ON dela Tag data link I O response time Output The following list describes delays 1 2 3 and 4 in the time chart 1 The input does not arrive in time for the CPU Unit s I O processing and processing is delayed about 1 cycle until the next I O processing 2 The data exchange for CPU Unit 1 send data is divided over two cycles A and B one data exchange is performed over two cycles Therefore data cannot be exchanged in cycle A so it is exchanged in cycle B and the processing is delayed for four cycles 3 The send
453. register Device List Product Name _ _ 192 168 250 1 CS1W EIP21 Variable Connections 2 256 0 1 T 1 Register Device List Product Name Target Variable C44 192 168 250 2 002 CJ1W CNO1_01 Input TagSet2 192 168 250 1 TagSet2_192 168 250 2 Edit All Change Target Node ID l To From File In the Register Device List select the connection for which you want to change the RPI and click the Edit Button Edit Device Parameters Connections Tag Sets Unregister Device List Product Name EE Connections 2 256 0 1 T 1 Register Device List Product Name 192 168 250 1 CS1W EIP21 Variable Target Variable 192 168 2502 002 CUT W TagSet2 192 168 2501 TagSet2_192 168 250 2 Edit Delete Edit All To From File d The device s Edit Connections Dialog Box will be displayed Input a new RPI value and click the OK Button 45 Checking Bandwidth Usage and Adjusting the RPI Section 2 3 4 6 192 168 250 2 CJ1W EIP21 Edit Connection Connection Name CNO1_01 Connection L O Type Input Only Tae type Packet Interval RPD 50 0 ms 05 100000 ms Timeout Value Packet Interval RPD x 4 Input from Target Device Consume Variable TagSet2_192 169 250 1 22Byte Produce Variable TagSet2_192 169 2502 22Byte Connection Type Multi cast connection Output to Target Device Produce Variable Consume Variable
454. ress 192 168 2501 Comment CS1W EIP21 TagSet20_192 168 250 20 22Byte Multi cast connection Target Device Node Address Comment 192 168 250 20 gt GJTW EIP21 In the Edit Connection Dialog Box input 1 0 ms as the new RPI value and click the OK Button The tag data link bandwidth being used by device 192 168 250 1 Usage of Capacity increases to 54 67 which indicates that a RPI is set to a higher speed for this device Usage of Device Bandwidth 192 168 250 1 amp 192 168 250 2 192 168 250 3 192 168 250 4 192 168 250 5 192 168 250 6 P 192 168 250 7 192 168 250 8 192 168 250 9 192 168 250 10 192 168 250 11 192 168 250 12 192 168 250 13 P 192 168 250 14 192 168 250 15 192 168 250 16 192 168 250 17 192 168 250 183 192 168 250 19 amp 192 168 250 20 Comment CS1Ww EIP21 CS1Ww ElP21 CS1W ElP21 CS1W EIP21 CS1W EIP21 CS1W EIP21 CS1W EIP21 CS1W EIP21 CS1W EIP21 CS1W EIP21 CJTW EIP21 CJTW EIP21 CJTW EIP21 CJTW EIP21 CJTW EIP21 CJTW EIP21 CJTW EIP21 CJTW EIP21 CJTW EIP21 CJTW EIP21 54 67 39 67 39 67 39 67 39 67 39 67 39 67 39 67 39 67 39 67 39 67 39 67 39 67 39 67 39 67 39 67 39 67 39 67 39 67 56 33 Usage of Capac 56 33 56 33 56 33 56 33 56 33 56 33 56 33 56 33 56 33 56 33 56 33 56 33 56 33 56 33 56 33 56 33 56 33 56 33 56 33 56 33
455. returned 8 bytes 1 The number of short buffers currently being used 2 The number of short buffers in the system fixed at 23 928 decimal 2 Short Buffer Application by Type Thirteen items are returned 52 bytes The number of short buffers used for storing communications data The number of short buffers used for protocol headers TCP UDP IP ICMP ARP The number of short buffers used in socket structures The number of short buffers used as protocol control blocks The number of short buffers used for routing tables Not used always 0 Not used always 0 The number of short buffers used for IP fragment re assembly queue headers 9 The number of short buffers used for storing socket addresses 10 Not used always 0 11 The number of short buffers used for storing socket options 12 The number of short buffers used for storing access rights 13 The number of short buffers used for storing interface addresses 3 Long Buffer Application Two items are returned 8 bytes o n p op e o o 1 The number of long buffers currently being used 2 The number of long buffers in the system fixed at 64 decimal 4 Not Used Always 0 4 bytes 5 Network Memory Application Two items are returned 8 bytes 1 The number of bytes used in K bytes 2 The percentage used 6 Memory Exhaustion Log 12 bytes Counts for the following values indicate a high load on the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port These high lo
456. rocessing time which depends on the CPU Unit s CPU processing mode setting CPU execution mode Processing time details 4 of CPU Unit cycle time 10 for CJ2 CPU Units Normal Mode See note Priority peripheral servicing EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port is given prior ity Time slice peripheral servicing execution time EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port is not given priority Set peripheral servicing time Default 4 of CPU Unit cycle time 285 Message Service Transmission Delay CPU execution mode Processing time details CPU Bus Unit Service Cycle Local Node 2 CPU Bus Unit Service Processing Time Local Node 2 286 Note Section 10 3 Parallel processing with syn 4 of CPU Unit cycle time chronous memory access Parallel processing with asyn chronous memory access 1 ms max Note CJ2 CPU Units support only Normal Mode For details refer to the CPU Unit s Operation Manual The following table shows the CPU Bus Unit service cycle which depends on the CPU Unit s CPU processing mode setting CPU execution mode Processing time details Normal Mode See note One CPU Unit cycle time Priority peripheral servicing EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port is given prior ity Time slice instruction execution time EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port is not given priority One CPU Unit
457. roller Link network Network A Network B PS Power Supply Unit CPU CPU Unit EIP EtherNet IP Unit CLK Controller Link Unit Unit a Unit b Local Network Table No Local CPU Bus network Unit 1 A a 2 B b m Example 2 Three Interconnected Networks This example shows the relay network table settings for three different inter connected networks Relay Network Table No Sek Sear Node PLC 1 1 B A b REENE OTEA 2 Cc A b Node a Network A PLC 2 _Alode 6 11 Node c PLC 3 1 A B Network B N d Ha 2 Cc B e PLC 4 Nods Be 1 A B Node en Network C PLC 5 1 A c i Node g In the table for PLC 3 for example if network A is taken as the end net work then network B becomes the relay network and node c becomes the relay node If network C is taken as the end network then network B still becomes the relay network and node e becomes the relay node 219 Routing Tables m Example 3 All Nodes Section 8 4 This example uses the following configuration to show the routing tables for all nodes Unit 5 z PIC Node 6 P i Network 10 Unit 3 unit 4 Node 4 CIE PLC EIS PLC O e 5 Unit 2 ikp bR ae Node 3 ode Network 20 Ems Network 30 PLC S PLC S PLC L
458. rom the Network Configurator The next steps are completing the changes in the actual system and con necting the Network Configurator to the network Downloading the 17 Reading the Network Configuration File Changed Device Read the network configuration file which was saved with the completed Parameters design Refer to 6 2 14 Reading a Network Configuration File 18 Checking Connections Check the consistency of connection parameters for network configuration files that have been read Refer to 6 2 15 Checking Connections 19 Starting the Network Configurator and Connecting to the Network Start the Network Configurator and connect it to the network via the CPU Unit s serial port or an Ethernet interface Refer to 6 2 1 Starting the Network Configurator and 6 2 7 Connecting the Network Configurator to the Network 20 Downloading the Device Parameters Download the parameters to all of the devices Refer to 6 2 8 Downloading Tag Data Link Parameters 21 Verifying the Downloaded Device Parameters Compare the parameters in all of the devices to verify that the user set de vice parameters were properly downloaded and saved in the devices Refer to 6 2 10 Verifying the Tag Data Links 22 Closing the Network Configurator Exit from the Network Configurator Note 1 The EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port will restart automatically when the device parameters are downloaded from the Network Configu rator The
459. rom the net work configuration and save only them Add to current document Allows you to add the networks from the network configuration file being opened to the current config uration file Note The save format will vary depending on the Network Configurator version Configuration files ncf created using the Network Configurator for Ether Net IP version 2 or higher can be imported opened by selecting External Data Import from the File Menu 6 2 15 Checking Connections Check the consistency of connection parameters for network configuration files with device parameters set using the Network Configurator and device parameters uploaded from the network 1 Select Check Connections in the Network Menu The following dialog box will be displayed if parameters are normal Network Configurator x l No connection errors found The following dialog box will be displayed if there are parameter errors Check the displayed details and review the settings 190 Network Configurator Operations Section 6 2 Connection Check Result Network Description 192 168 250 1 CJ1 EtherNet IP_1 Connection CNO1_01 TagSet2_192 168 250 1 If an inconsistency occurs open the originator s Edit Device Parameter Di alog Box and click the Connection Tab The inconsistent connection will a a be displayed with a 2 icon instead of the normal 4m icon To change the connection setting and select a different
460. rove reliability Data transmission 1 Data transmission 2 Data transmission 3 Data is sent in one direction with no confirmation of whether the data was received Because there are few procedures involved data can be sent at high speed but with less reliability than with TCP The FINS UDP method has the following features e Because FINS UDP is a connectionless protocol there is no limit to the number of corrections e FINS UDP can be used for broadcasting e When data is sent via an IP network with multiple layers Such as the Internet communications reliability drops The following diagram shows the structure of a UDP packet used for sending and receiving data on an Ethernet network Ethernet Ver 2 ip UDP FINS frame FCS UDP packet As the diagram shows a nested structure is used with the FINS UDP method i e Ethernet Ver 2 IP frame UDP frame and FINS frame A UDP data sec tion FINS frame that exceeds 1 472 bytes is split into packets for transmis sion The split UDP data is then joined automatically at the UDP IP protocol layer There is normally no need to pay attention at the application layer to this split but it may not be possible to send 1 472 byte UDP packets over an IP network with multiple layers When using the FINS communications service in a system such as this select the FINS TCP method FINS UDP Method UDP Port Numbers for FINS UDP Section 8 2 The UDP port number is the n
461. rred with IP address 10 0 2 8 1 3 2 Switch Settings Unit Number Setting The Unit Number Setting Switch sets the unit number of the EtherNet IP Unit Switch or built in EtherNet IP port as a CPU Bus Unit The unit number determines which data area words are allocated to the Unit to contain data such as con trol bits flags status information and connection information vane OAN ORY Setting method One digit hexadecimal Note The unit number is factory set to 0 The unit number can be set to any number in the setting range 0 to F as long as the same number is not set on another CPU Bus Unit in the same PLC Note 1 Use a small screwdriver to make the setting and be sure not to damage the rotary switch 2 Always turn OFF the PLC s power supply before setting the unit number 3 The unit number is factory set to O 4 If the same unit number is set on more than one CPU Bus Unit mounted in a PLC a unit number duplication error will occur in the PLC and the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port will not be able to start oper ating 22 Nomenclature and Functions Section 1 3 Node Address Setting Switch Note The Node Address Setting Switch sets the node address of the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port We i ede Setting method Two digit hexadecimal 01 to FE Note The node address is factory set to 01 With the default settings the values set on these switches become the
462. rt itself processing is performed with a higher priority than message communi cations so specifications provide for a 6 000 pps bandwidth in tag data link performance only e Refer to 14 1 Checking Status with the Network Configurator for details on checking the connection status on the Monitor Device Window s Connection Tab Page Eliminate any errors which can be identified in the tables in 14 3 Connection Sta tus Codes and Error Processing 358 Troubleshooting with FINS Response Codes Section 14 6 14 5 5 Message Timeout Problems Timeout errors e When there is a high load in the tag data link and the CPU occur frequently in Unit s cycle time is relatively long or there are messages message services coming in from many nodes the message service response CIP UCMM CIP time may be delayed and messages may be discarded occa Class 3 or FINS sionally e In this case the communications load must be reduced by increasing slowing the tag data link s RPI reducing the message load or increasing the timeout value e The tag data link s bandwidth usage can be checked on the Monitor Device Window s Ethernet Information Tab Page Refer to 14 1 Checking Status with the Network Configurator for details e The error log error codes that indicate discarded messages insufficient memory due to heavy communications loads are 0117 0119 0123 0125 03C2 detail code 08 09 or LILIOA 03C3 and 03D2 Refer to 14 1 Checking
463. s UDP port numbers and TCP port numbers are paired with FINS node addresses to specify nodes on the network a Node number UDP port TCP TCP port number number IP address Application level FINS Transport level UDP Internet level IP Must be allocated RATS Te seas t Automatically allocated Ethernet address _ Use the Node Address Setting Switches NODE NO on the front of the Eth erNet IP Unit or for the built in EtherNet IP port on the front of the CPU Unit to set the FINS node address Physical level Ethernet Allocating Addresses to EtherNet IP Units and Built in EtherNet IP Ports FINS Message Reception for EtherNet IP Units or Built in EtherNet IP Ports 114 The IP address FINS UDP port number and FINS TCP port number set for the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port are mainly used when receiv ing FINS communications messages Application level FINS ROUDHURIDGE K Transport level UDP opp TCP TCP port number number Internet level IP IP address A Physical level Ethernet Ethernet address _ 7 Receives communications data 77 conforming to Ethernet address IP address UDP port number and FINS node number Ethernet V2 IP UDP FINS header FINS data SS IP Addresses in FINS Communications Section 5 2 e Ethernet ad
464. s momentary power interruptions or other causes Serious accidents may result from abnormal operation if proper measures are not provided Confirm safety at the destination node before changing or transferring to another node the contents of a program the PLC Setup I O tables I O mem ory or parameters Changing or transferring any of these without confirming safety may result in injury Tighten the screws on the terminal block of the AC Power Supply Unit to the torque specified in the operation manual The loose screws may result in burning or malfunction xxiii Operating Environment Precautions 4 4 Operating Environment Precautions Z Caution Do not operate the control system in the following locations e Locations subject to direct sunlight e Locations subject to temperatures or humidity outside the range specified in the specifications e Locations subject to condensation as the result of severe changes in tem perature e Locations subject to corrosive or flammable gases e Locations subject to dust especially iron dust or salts e Locations subject to exposure to water oil or chemicals e Locations subject to shock or vibration Caution Take appropriate and sufficient countermeasures when installing systems in the following locations e Locations subject to static electricity or other forms of noise e Locations subject to strong electromagnetic fields e Locations subject to possible exposure to radioac
465. s tem Setup Area 3 8 1 Setting Procedure with the CX Programmer 1 2 3 1 Register the EtherNet IP Unit in the I O tables in the CX Programmer Re fer to 3 6 Creating I O Tables for details 2 Right click the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port in the I O table and select Edit Unit Setup from the menus The Edit Parameters Dialog Box will be displayed CJ1W EIP21 Edit Parameters TCP IP Ethemet FINS UDP FINS TCP FTP Auto Adjust Time Status Area SNMP SNMP Trap IP ddress Notuse DNS Use the following address C UseDNS IP Address a Primary DNS Server Sub net Mask 0 Secondary DNS Server Default Gateway 0 0 0 0 Domain Name l Get IP address from the BOOTP server The BOOTP setting is valid only for next unit restart power restoration Then the BOOTP setting will be cleared The obtained IP address will be automatically IP Address Gateway Address Insert saved as system setting in the unit IP Router Table Broadcast All 4 3BSD AllO 4 2BSD Set Defaults 3 Make the necessary settings on the TCP IP Tab Page of the Edit Parame ters Dialog Box The IP address is set here 73 TCP IP and Link Settings Section 3 8 CJ1W EIP21 Edit Parameters TCP IP Ethemet FINS UDP FINS TCP FTP Auto Adjust Time Status Area SNMP SNMP Trap IP Address Not use DNS Use the following address C Use DNS IP Address 194 168 1 Prim
466. s 1 Automatic generation method Not selected IP address 192 168 250 2 Eth erNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port IP address Port number 9600 CX Programmer s FINS UDP Tab Page in Edit Parameters Dialog Box FINS UDP Port Default 9600 IP Address Conversion Automatic Dynamic generation method IP Router Table None 221 Using FINS Applications Note 222 Section 8 5 Example Inputs to the CX Programmer s Setup Window Example Change PLC Settings Change PLC Device Name N ewPLCI Device Type C51G CJ1G X Settings Network Type Ethernet v Settings Comment Cancel Help Example Network Settings Network Tab Page Network Settings Ethernet Network Driver FINS Source Address Network o H FINS Destination Address Network o Node 0 H Frame Length Response Timeout s ma Cancel Help When FinsGateway is selected as the network type make sure that the frame length is set to 2 000 bytes max Using FINS Applications Section 8 5 Example Network Settings Driver Tab Page Network Settings Ethernet Network Driver Workstation Node Number 1 I Auto detect IP Address Port Number 192 168 250 9600 Cancel Help m System Configuration Example 2 Using Routing Tables In this example an online connection is made via the Ethernet to a PLC on a Con
467. s Section 6 2 Network Configurator x Invalid device type e Click the OK Button or the Close Button Verifying the Device Use the following procedure to compare the device parameters for the devices Parameters selected in the Network Configuration Window with those of the devices con nected on the EtherNet IP network The IP addresses device types and device parameters are compared 1 2 3 1 Connect the Network Configurator to the network 2 Click the icon of the EtherNet IP Unit that is to be verified To select multiple nodes hold down the Shift Key while clicking the icons In the following ex ample the 192 168 250 1 and 192 168 250 2 nodes are selected With the icons selected right click and select Parameter Verify from the pop up menu Ee Ethernet 1P_1 eee Parameter Ld p Reset lt Upload Register to other Device gt Download ee External Data x Y A 3 The following dialog box will be displayed Network Configurator t Verifying parameters to selected device will start e OK Yes No Click the Yes Button or the No Button 4 One of the following dialog boxes will be displayed e Differences Not Found in the Comparison Network Configurator 1 L 192 168 250 1 CJ2B EIP21 No configuration differences found N e Differences Found in the Comparison 184 Network Configurator Operations Section 6 2 Comparison Result Description Loc
468. s with variable IP addresses Version 2003 or Yes higher 123 IP Addresses in FINS Communications Models Supporting Automatic Generation Method Static Models Supporting IP Address Table Method 124 Product Programmable Terminal Model Series Version NS Series Open Network Controller ONC Product CS series Ethernet Unit 100BASE TX Model Series Version CS1W ETN21 Section 5 2 Supports automatic generation method dynamic No Set manually so that automatic settings can be used with the automatic generation method Supports automatic generation method static Yes 10BASE 5 CS1W ETNO1 10BASE T CS1W ETN11 Yes Simply called auto matic generation method CJ series Ethernet Unit 100BASE TX CJ1W ETN21 Yes 10BASE T CJ1W ETN11 CV CVM1 series Ethernet Unit 10BASE 5 CV500 ETNO1 FinsGateway Version 4 xx or lower Yes Simply called auto matic generation method Version 2003 or higher Yes Programmable Terminal NS Series Open Network Controller ONC Product CS series Ethernet Unit 100BASE TX Model Series Version CS1W ETN21 10BASE 5 CS1W ETNO1 10BASE T CS1W ETN11 CJ series Ethernet Unit 100BASE TX CJ1W ETN21 10BASE T CJ1W ETN11 CV CVM1 series Ethernet Unit 10BASE 5 CV500 ETN
469. same network was received from the net work Attempted to send response data for a broadcast address Check the command format of the command and set it cor rectly Parameter error Parameter error Parameters in command data The specified parame ters are incorrect Check the command data and set the parameters correctly The UDP TCP socket number was not within the proper range Be sure the socket number is between 1 and 8 The local UDP port num ber might be set to 0 Set the local UDP port num ber correctly No data area code Variable type in command data A correct memory area code has not been used or EM Area is not avail able Check the command s data area code in the Results Stor age Area and set the appro priate code Address out of range error First word address in command data The first word is in an inaccessible area Check the data area range and set a first word that is in an accessible area The specified bit number is not 00 Check the command s data area code in the Results Stor age Area The bit address must be 00 for EtherNet IP Units Address range over flow Command data The address range speci fied in the command is not correct Set the address in the com mand data so that the start address plus the number of words does not exceed accessible memory Response too long Command data The re
470. se length exceeds maximum response length Unit is busy Description For details refer to CIP UCMM MESSAGE SEND 28 10 on page 246 in 9 1 1 Sending Explicit Messages Using CMND 490 406 Appendix F EDS File Management This section explains the EDS file management functions used in the Network Configurator Installing EDS Files EDS File Install The Network Configurator can support new devices if the proper EDS files are installed To install the EDS file use the following procedure 1 Select EDS File and Install The following window will be displayed Install EDS File Look jn Eds O2 eE R 3F86M DRT141 eds E 3G3MV PDRT2 eds E 3G3FV PORTI SIN eds E 3G3PV PDRT1 5INV1 eds E 3G3Fv PORTI SINVI eds E 3G3PV PDRT2 eds E 3G3FV PDRT2 eds E 3G3RY P105T8 DRT E eds E 3G3MV PDRT1 5IN eds E 3G3RY PDRT2 eds E 3G3MV PDRT1 SINV1 eds E 3G8F7 DRM21 eds lt File name Files of type Electronic Data Sheet eds v Device Information Vendor Device Type Product Name Revision 2 The device information will be displayed on the bottom of the window when the EDS file is selected 3 Select the EDS file to be installed and click the Open Button Next select the icon file ico and the EDS file will be added to the Hardware List If the EDS file already exists the new EDS file will overwrite the previous one If the hardware versions are different an EDS file will be added to
471. service specified an operation that is going to fragment a primitive data value i e half a REAL data type Not enough data The service did not supply enough data to perform the specified operation Attribute not supported The attribute specified in the request is not supported Too much data The service supplied more data than was expected Object does not exist The object specified does not exist in the device Service fragmentation sequence not in progress The fragmentation sequence for this service is not currently active for this data No stored attribute data The attribute data of this object was not saved prior to the requested service Store operation failure The attribute data of this object was not saved due to a failure during the attempt Routing failure request packet too large The service request packet was too large for transmission on a network in the path to the destination The routing device was forced to abort the service Routing failure response packet too large The service response packet was too large for transmission on a network in the path from the destination The routing device was forced to abort the ser vice Missing attribute list entry data The service did not supply an attribute in a list of attributes that was needed by the service to perform the requested behavior 375 CIP Message Communications General Status Code
472. shows the Subnet Mask for an 8 bit Subnet ID used in a class B IP address Bit 31 15 0 Class B 1 0 Network ID 14 bits Host ID 16 bits Subnet mask 1111111111111111 1111111100000000 FF FF FF 00 gt 4 gt 4 gt Network number Subnet number Host number Set the same Subnet Mask value for all of the nodes on that subnetwork If no subnetworks are used there is no need to set Subnet Masks In that case the following Subnet Mask values will be used depending on the IP address class Class Subnet Mask value 255 0 0 0 255 255 0 0 255 255 255 0 113 IP Addresses in FINS Communications Section 5 2 5 1 5 CIDR CIDR or classless interdomain routing is used to assign IP addresses that do not use classes IP addresses that use classes are separated into blocks according to net IDs and host IDs resulting in inefficient usage of IP address space CIDR does not use classes so IP address space can be divided as required to more efficiently use IP address space For example using a subnet mask setting with CIDR enables building a horizontally distributed network exceed ing 254 nodes even if a class C address block e g 192 168 Subnet mask range 192 0 0 0 to 255 255 255 252 CIDR was added for unit version 2 0 5 2 IP Addresses in FINS Communications 5 2 1 Specifying Nodes in FINS Communications Services Note With FINS communications services on an Ethernet network IP addresse
473. specified ellipses Connections are automatically set under the following conditions Output tag set names Except for specified ellipses the output tag set name must be the same as the input tag set name Ellipses can be set for the beginning or end of tag set names Input tag set names Except for specified ellipses the input tag set name must be the same as the output tag set name Ellipses can be set for the beginning or end of tag set names Connection types The connection type must be nput Only Multicast and single cast connection types can be specified when executing a connection RPI The default setting is used Timeouts The default setting is used Example 1 Automatic Connections with the Same Tag Set Names The following connections would automatically be set if there is an output tag set named A_Signal at node A and input tag sets named A_Signal at nodes B and C Excluded characters None Node A Node B Node C Output tag set A_Signal Connection Input tag set A_Signal Input tag set A_Signal Se O Connection EtherNet IP Example 2 Automatic Connections with the Ellipses The following connections would automatically be set if there is an output tag set named O_Signal at node A and input tag sets named I _ Signal at nodes B and C and O_ and I_ were set as ellipses 170 Network Configurato
474. splays of tag data link com munications e An asterisk will be displayed after the device name of the originator set for the connection e The Edit Device Parameters Dialog Box can be displayed by selecting a connection and clicking the Edit Button The connections can be edited in this dialog box 6 2 7 Connecting the Network Configurator to the Network This section explains how to connect the Network Configurator to the network EtherNet IP must be selected in advance as the network setting For details refer to 6 2 3 Registering Devices Connecting through Ethernet Note The Windows firewall settings must be changed when making this connection for the first time in Windows XP SP2 or higher or Vista For details on chang ing the firewall settings refer to Appendix G EtherNet IP Connections from Windows XP SP2 or Higher or Windows Vista Connect to the EtherNet IP Unit s Ethernet port via the Ethernet network 1 2 3 1 Select Option Select Interface Ethernet I F 173 Network Configurator Operations Section 6 2 2 Select Network Connect lf there are multiple Ethernet interfaces on the computer the Select Con nect Network Port Dialog Box will be displayed Select the interface that is to be connected and press the OK Button The following dialog box will be displayed Select Connect Network Port Select a network port that you would like to connect B Device Information Vendor ID Product Na
475. sponse frame is longer than allowed Correct the number of data elements or other parameters in the command data for which the response is being returned Parameter error Parameters in command data The specified parame ters are incorrect Check the command data and set the parameters correctly Cannot write Cannot change IP address conversion method A FINS message was received from an IP address that differed from the ones in the Unit Setup with FINS node addresses that could not be dynamically changed Correct the relationships between IP addresses and FINS node addresses Refer to SECTION 5 Determining IP Addresses for details 361 Troubleshooting with FINS Response Codes Main response code Sub response code Value and meaning Status error operating mode dis agreement Value and meaning Cannot execute because service is being processed Item to check Socket status area Likely cause The same socket service is already in progress at the specified socket num ber Section 14 6 Corrective action Use the corresponding socket status flag in PLC memory to be sure that socket service has finished before starting services again Socket not open Socket status area The specified socket is not open Open the socket For TCP sockets wait until the connec tion is made Local node busy send failed System load
476. ss CPU Unit with Configuration Units CPU Bus Units and Special I O Units Restore compare Back up Using the Backup Tool Section 13 3 Usage The PLC Backup Tool can be used for the following e Backing up all data in a PLC e Comparing all of the data in a PLC with data that was previously backed up in the computer e Using the restore function to transfer all of the PLC data to a system with the same configuration e Transferring data to a new Unit after replacing a faulty Unit Procedure Select PLC Backup Tool from the CX Programmer s Tool Menu You can also select OMRON CX One CX Programmer PLC Backup Tool from the Windows Start Menu TA PLC Backup Tool Backup Menu Backup from PLC Collectively backs up the data in a PLC to save as files Compare Compares the data between backup files and PLC Restore to PLC Transfers the backup files to PLC Communication Settings Communication Settings Sets the method of communications with backup restore tareet PLC Current Settings PLC Model CJ2H Network Type EtherNet IP IP 192 168 250 1 Backup Menu Button Function Backup from PLC Click this button to back up data All of the data in the target PLC will be backed up to the com puter Compare Click this button to compare data The data in the PLC can be compared to the data ina backup file or the data in two backup files can be compared Any differences wil
477. ss e If you want to store the setting in the CPU Unit set it in the EtherNet IP Unit s allocated DM area within the CPU Unit e If you want to store the setting in the Unit set the IP address in the Edit Parameters Dialog Box of the I O Table Dialog Box from the CX Pro grammer and transfer the setting to the Unit When necessary set the following items in the Edit Parameters Dialog Box and transfer them TCP IP Ethernet FINS UDP FINS TCP FTP Auto Ad just Time Status Area SNMP and SNMP Trap When necessary set the routing tables If the FINS communications service is being used and multiple network Communications Units are mounted in the PLC set the routing tables from the CX Integrator and transfer the table Test communications Send a PING command to the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port Settings Required for Tag Data Link Service Cyclic Communications 54 1 2 3 1 Create a network configuration file with the Network Configurator and download the file to the applicable nodes 1 In the Network Configurator select File New 2 Register the devices that will be linked in tag data links by dragging and dropping those devices Set the tag data links with the Network Configurator a Use the following procedure to set the tag data links between PLCs us ing only the physical addresses Overview of Initial Setup Procedures Section 3 1 1 Select N
478. ss IP address is not set correctly invalid device parameters may be set in the wrong PLC so check the connected PLC before downloading parameters TCP IP Parameters The following TCP IP parameters can be set from the Network Configurator e IP address e Subnet mask e Default gateway 77 Tag Data Link Parameters Section 3 9 e Preferred DNS server e Alternate DNS server e Domain name e Link parameters baud rate and full half duplex 3 9 Tag Data Link Parameters Set the following parameters when using tag data links with an EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port The parameter settings are saved in flash memory in the EtherNet IP Unit or CPU Unit See note Note The CPU Bus Unit Setup Area is not used for tag data link settings for an EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port This point is different from the operation of Ethernet Units Refer to SECTION 6 Tag Data Link Functions for details 3 9 1 Network Configurator Setting Procedure There are mainly two methods that can be used to set tag data links with the Network Configurator Using the EtherNet IP Datalink Tool The Datalink Tool can be used to set tables of physical addresses to set data links between EtherNet IP Units and built in EtherNet IP ports on CS CJ series PLCs Select Network EtherNet IP Datalink Tool Hi 002c6e06 DatalinkTool File Edit Datalink Help ee x v Nodes Datalink Table data of selected node IP Addre
479. ss Device Areal Area TagSet Total Target RPI IN OUT Link Cil gia Link CH Size Name Size Node Variable ms 1921682501 CU2B E1P21 pu ood D00000 200 TaeSeti 192 300 1921682502 Oui W EIP21 D00200 200 TaeSet2 192 300 1921682502 TaeSet2192 1321682503 CJI W EIPH D00400 200 TarSet3192 300 1921682503 TarSet3 192 D00600 200 TagSet4192 300 1921682504 TarSet4192 SERAIT RNs la DODO 200 TaeSeth192 300 1924682505 TecSet5 192 1921682505 CJI W EIP21 The number of PPS Without PPS With connection Multicast filter Multicast filter IN OUT Output with no overload is marked otal Size If it includes PLC Status data NetworkConfigurator will show the additional 2 bytes as a size 1CH 2bytes Fi F F3 F4 F5 F Help Edit Cell Show Prev Show Next Insert Delete ore oe ks Up Datalink Cheak the Node Node TagSet TaeSet TagSet TaeSet Wizard table Ready Editing Device Parameters The Datalink Tool can be used to set tables of physical addresses for data links between EtherNet IP Units and built in EtherNet IP ports on CS CJ series PLCs With a CJ2H CPU6LI EIP CPU Unit network symbols can also be specified for tag names Double click the icon for the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port on the right pane of the Network Configurator and then set the parameters on 78 Tag Data Link Parameters Section 3 9 the Connections and Tag Sets Tab Pages of the Edit Device Parameters Dia
480. ssing mode setting CPU execution mode Processing time details One CPU Unit cycle time Normal Mode See note Priority peripheral servicing Parallel processing with syn chronous memory access Parallel processing with asyn chronous memory access 0 2 ms peripheral servicing time 1 ms max for peripheral servicing of each Special I O Unit CPU Bus Unit peripheral port RS 232C port and Inner Board Note CJ2 CPU Units support only Normal Mode For details refer to the CPU Unit s Operation Manual The following table shows the CPU Bus Unit service processing time which depends on the CPU Unit s CPU processing mode setting CPU execution mode Processing time details Normal Mode See note Set peripheral servicing time Priority peripheral servicing Default 4 of CPU Unit cycle time 10 for CJ2 CPU Units 1 ms max Parallel processing with syn chronous memory access Parallel processing with asyn chronous memory access Note CJ2 CPU Units support only Normal Mode Message Service Transmission Delay Section 10 3 Send Processing Transmission Delay Receive Processing CPU Bus Unit Service Cycle Remote Node CPU Bus Unit Service Processing Time Remote Node For details refer to the CPU Unit s Operation Manual 0 550 ms Number of words being transferred x 0 002 0 550 ms Command Response The transmission delay time depends on the baud rate s
481. storage locations A maximum of 65 characters can be used in direc tory names 303 Using File Memory Section 11 7 File Names Handled by CPU Unit The files described in the following table can be read or written by the CPU Unit File type Data file File name kkkkkkkk Extension Contents Specified ranges of I O Memory Description e Contains word 16 bit data from a starting word through an end word in one memory area The following areas can be used CIO HR WR AR DM and EM Program file kkkkkkkk Complete user pro gram Contains all the programs for cyclic tasks and interrupt tasks as well as task infor mation for one CPU Unit Parameter area file kkkkkkkk e PLC Setup e Registered I O tables e Routing tables e CPU Bus Unit Setup and other setup data Contains all of the parameter data for one CPU Unit e There is no need for the user to distinguish the various types of data contained in the file e The file can be automatically read to or written from the CPU Unit simply by speci fying the extension STD Files Data files trans ferred at startup AUTOEXEC I O Memory data for the specified number of words starting from D20000 e There does not necessarily need to be a data file in the Memory Card when the automatic file transfer function is used at startup e The AUTOEXEC IOM file always contains DM Area data starting at D20000 e All data in t
482. t The node address is factory set to 01 Turn OFF the power supply before setting the node address When IP addresses are generated automatically either dynamic or passive the rightmost byte of the host ID of the IP address of the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port is set to the same value as the node address Refer to Section 5 Determining IP Addresses If the same node address value can not be used the IP address table method or the combined method must be used for address conversion For details refer to SECTION 5 Determining IP Addresses If the FINS communications service is not being used on the Ethernet net work then it is all right for the same node address to be set on two or more EtherNet IP Units or built in EtherNet IP ports The setting however must be made within a range of 01 to FE If a value outside of this range is set the MS indicator will light red the 7 segment display will indicate code H4 node address setting error and the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port will stop operating 57 Mounting to a PLC Section 3 3 3 3 Mounting to a PLC 3 3 1 Mounting to a CS series PLC Note EtherNet IP Units can be mounted to any slot in a CS series CPU Rack or a CS series Expansion CPU Rack but the number of slots to which they can be mounted depends on the Backplane Up to four EtherNet IP Units can be mounted to a single PLC If it is mounted in combination with other CPU Bus U
483. t ID does not match the FINS node address OFF when the values match Non volatile Mem ory Error ON when an error occurred in the Unit s internal non volatile memory OFF when the Unit s internal non volatile memory is oper ating normally Words n 16 to n 19 show the registration status of the target nodes that are connected with the EtherNet IP Unit as the originator These words show the status of nodes 0 to 63 only If it is necessary to show the status of nodes higher than node 63 select user settings as the layout pattern For details refer to 4 4 User Settings Area CIO Area Allocations Normal Target Node Table EtherNet IP Unit to CPU Unit n 20 to n 23 FINS TCP Connection Status EtherNet IP Unit to CPU Unit n 24 Section 4 2 15 14 13 12 1 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 n16 as rafia iz fio stel7fels s s fe s o n 17 n 18 a7 46 a5 44 4a 42 41 40 39 38 37 26 35 34 38 32 n 19 es 62 61 60 so se 57 se 55 54 s 52 51 0 49 48 T by Registered Target Indicates that the node s tag Node Flags data link is registered Indicates that the node s tag data link is not registered Words n 20 to n 23 show the connection status of the target nodes that are connected with the EtherNet IP Unit as the originator With revision 2 or higher the flag turns ON after all data for multiple conne
484. t quit Function Ends the FTP client 300 Using FTP Commands Section 11 5 11 5 3 Error Messages and FTP Status Error Messages The error messages returned by the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port are listed in the following table Message Meaning PPP is a directory The path name indicated at PPP is a directory PPP is not a directory The path name indicated at PPP is not a directory Another unit has access authority FINS error 0 x 3001 Another Unit currently has the access right Bad sequence of commands The RNFR command has not been executed Can t create data socket X X X X YY A socket cannot be created Cannot access to device FINS error 0 x 250F A file device error has occurred Cannot get memory blocks A message memory block cannot be allocated Command format error FINS error 0 x 1003 The command format is incorrect Connect error A connection error has occurred Directories of old and new paths are not same The directories before and after changing the name are different Directory name length exceeded max size The directory name is too long Directory not empty FINS error 0 x 2108 The directory must be empty to delete it Fatal error FINS error 0 x 1101 Fatal error FINS error 0 x 1103 A parameter error has occurred File or directory already exists File or dir
485. t 10 Meaning 0 No error 1 Error detected A time out occurred during communications with the BOOTP server SNTP Server Error Bit 10 Meaning 0 No error Error detected The setting of the host specification IP address or host name of the SNTP server is not correct or communications with the SNTP server timed out Address Mismatch Bit 14 Meaning 0 No error Error detected The address conversion method was set for automatic generation but the last eight bits of the local IP address does not match the local node address FINS node address or the host section other than the last byte of the local IP address is non zero Non volatile Memory Error Bit 15 Meaning 0 No error 1 Error detected The non volatile memory s service life has expired or the memory has failed Total Number of Packets Received Response The total number of packets received by the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port is returned Total Number of Receive Errors Response The total number of packet errors detected while the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port was receiving is returned The following types of error are detected e Short packet errors e Alignment errors e CRC errors e Frame length errors received frame 1 515 bytes or more Communications controller overflow errors 383 FINS Commands Addressed to EtherNet IP Units or Built in EtherNet IP Ports Appendix E Tota
486. t in the wrong PLC so check the connected PLC before downloading parameters Settings on the TCP IP Tab Page Settings for the following items are provided on the TCP IP Tab Page of the Edit Parameters Dialog Box in the CX Programmer e IP address e Subnet mask e Default gateway e Broadcasting e Preferred DNS server e Alternate DNS server e Domain name e IP router table IP Address Sets the local IP address of the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port 74 TCP IP and Link Settings Subnet Mask Default Gateway Broadcasting Section 3 8 Set the local IP address on the TCP IP Tab Page when not setting the IP address in the CPU Unit s allocated DM Area or using the default IP address default IP address 192 168 250 Node_address When the IP address is set on the TCP IP Tab Page it will be stored as the IP address in the DM Area words allocated to the Unit port as a CPU Bus Unit For the subnet mask all bits corresponding to the bits in the IP address used as the network ID are set to 1 and the bits corresponding to the host number are set to 0 The EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port supports CIDR Classless Inter Domain Routing The subnet mask can be set to 192 0 0 0 to 255 255 255 252 CIDR is supported by unit version 2 0 or later If no subnet mask is set or if an illegal value is set the following values will be used depending on the IP address class In normal applications we re
487. t the bottom of the Unit Tighten the screws to a torque of 0 4 N m 59 Mounting to a PLC Section 3 3 3 When removing the Unit first loosen the screw at the bottom of the Unit Fixing screws Note When mounting the Unit provide the clearance shown below to facilitate easy mounting or dismounting d 5 t 20 mm min Backplane T 20 mm min Phillips screwdriver 3 3 4 Handling Precautions e Always turn OFF the power supply to the PLC before mounting or dis mounting a Unit or connecting or disconnecting cables e Provide separate conduits or ducts for the I O lines to prevent noise from high tension lines or power lines e Leave the label attached to the Unit when wiring Removing the label may result in malfunction if wire clippings or other foreign matter enters the Unit Remove the label after the completion of wiring to ensure proper heat dissipation Leaving the label attached may result in malfunction Remove the label after wiring 60 Network Installation Section 3 4 3 4 Network Installation 3 4 1 Basic Installation Precautions e Take the greatest care when installing the Ethernet System being sure to follow ISO 8802 3 specifications You must obtain a copy of these specifi cations and be sure you understand them before attempting to install an Ethernet System Unless you are already experienced in installing com munications systems we strongly recommend that you employ a profes s
488. t to a 4 8 16 32 64 128 256 or 512 multiple The default setting is 4x the packet interval RPI Input from Allocates the originator s input consume tag set selected for Target Device the originator variable Consume Variable to the target s out put produce tag set selected for the target variable Produce Variable Output to Allocates the originator s output produce tag set selected for Target Device the originator variable Produce Variable to the target s input consume tag set selected for the target variable Consume Variable Setting Example 192 168 250 2 CJ1W EIP21 CJ2 Edit Connection Connection Name TEST Connection 1 0 Type Input Only Tag type Packet Interval RPI 50 0 ns 0 5 1000 0 ms Timeout Value Packet Interval RPI x 4 Input from Target Device Consume Variable DOOOOO 2Byte Produce Variable DOOOOO 2Byte Connection Type MESSE v Dutput to Target Device Produce Variable Consume Variable Connection Type Originator De Target Device Node Address 192 168 250 1 Node Address 192 168 250 2 Comment CJ2B EIP21 Comment CJ1W EIP21 CJ2 Regist Close 2 After completing the settings click the Regist Button 168 Network Configurator Operations Section 6 2 Confirming the Connections Settings 1 2 3 1 An overview of the connections set in the Register Device List is displayed in the Connections Tab Page Edit Device Paramet
489. ta in the CPU Unit but also all of the data stored in memory in the EtherNet IP Unit or data for the built in EtherNet IP port All of this data will automatically be backed up to the Memory Card The simple backup function can be used for the following EtherNet IP Units and built in EtherNet IP port e CS series EtherNet IP Unit CS1W EIP21 mounted to a CS1D CS1 H CPU Unit e CJ series EtherNet IP Unit CJ1W EIP21 mounted to a CJ1 H CJ1M CJ2H CPULILI EIP CPU Unit e A built in EtherNet IP port on a CJ2H CPULILI EIP CPU Unit When the EtherNet IP Unit s setup data is written to the Memory Card using a simple backup operation it is stored in the Memory Card as a Unit Board backup file with the file name BACKUPLIL PRM The digits in the backup file name indicate the unit address of the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port which is the unit number 10 hex This backup file is also used when reading data from the Memory Card or comparing data with a file in the Memory Card EtherNet IP Unit CPU Unit Memory Card Power Supply Switch All data e Backup e Restore e Compare All setup data Note The following table shows the Units that support the simple backup function Confirm that the Units being used support the function CPU Unit EtherNet IP Unit CS1W EIP21 CJ1W EIP21 321 Simple Backup Function Section 13 2
490. ta is stored in the DM Area starting at DM01000 and the response data is stored in the DM Area starting at D02000 If the command ends with an error the end code is stored in D00006 and command transmission is retried Command Details CMND S D C S D01000 First command word D01000 2810 hex Command Code D01001 0000 hex Transport ID 0000 hex D01002 05DC hex Message monitoring time 15 00 s D01003 5202 hex Slave code 52 hex Unconnected Send Request path size 2 words D01004 2006 hex Request path 20 06 24 01 hex Connection Manager Class ID 06 hex D01005 2401 hex Instance ID 01 hex Words S 6 to S 19 contain the request data D01006 OAOC hex Priority Time_Tick OA hex Time Out Ticks OC hex D01007 0600 hex Message request size 6 bytes Words S 8 to S 10 contain the request message request D01008 0102 hex Service 01 hex Get_Attribute_Single Request path size 2 words Words S 9 and S 10 contain the request path D01009 2001 hex 8 bit class ID 20 hex Class ID 01 hex D01010 2401 hex 8 bit instance ID 24 hex Instance ID 01 hex Identity object Words S 11to S 19 contain the root path D01011 0800 hex Route path size 8 words D01012 120D hex Extended link address size 1 hex Route path size 13 bytes characters OD hex D01013 3139 hex IP address 19 D01014 322E hex IP address 2 D01015 3136 hex IP address 16 255 Sending Explicit Messages Response 256 D
491. ta link and message connections not established Not lit Offline or power supply OFF Communication Yellow Lit Transferring data Not lit Not transferring data 100 Mbps Yellow Lit 100BASE TX link established Not lit 100BASE TX link not established 10 Mbps Yellow Lit 10BASE TX link established Not lit 10BASE TX link not established Seven segment Display When the power is turned ON or the Unit is restarted all of the segments will flash twice the IP address set in the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port will be displayed on the 7 segment display just once from right to left Afterwards the rightmost 8 bits of the IP address is displayed in hexadecimal during normal operation Example 1 Displaying IP Address 192 168 250 10 Cc IP address is displayed in decimal flowing from right to left 19 93 4 88 8 l ww TE ap 08 480 8E fe OO Cm Cm CO Y cD T C Q f Co ol l o ml ce 3 If the Unit is operating normally the last digit of the Unit s IP address is displayed in hexadecimal o o _ Flashing The tag data link is stopped Lit The tag data link is operating 20 Nomenclature and Functions Section 1 3 If an error occurs the error code will be displayed alternately with the right most byte of the affected device s IP address Fo
492. table method is used as the IP address conversion method of the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port e The TCP port number to be used for FINS TCP cannot be used if prohib ited by a firewall in the communications path m Explicit Message Communications Service e A device such as a personal computer a CIP application including the Network Configurator can connect online and communicate over the Internet with an EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port that has a global address 129 Private and Global Addresses Section 5 3 e If the TCP port number 44818 or UDP port number 44818 that is used for EtherNet IP cannot be used if prohibited by a firewall in the communi cations path Note 1 Tag data links cannot be used through an IP router 2 Network Security and Firewalls Setting a global IP address for an EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port involves network security considerations It is recommended that the user contract with a communications company for a dedicated line rather than using a general line such as a broadband line Also be sure to con sult with a network specialist and consider security measures such as a firewall Once a firewall has been set up by a communications technician on the other hand there may be some applications that cannot be used Be sure to check first with the communications technician 130 SECTION 6 Tag Data Link Functions This section describes tag data lin
493. talled Connecting a Programming Console To connect a Programming Console attach a CS CJ series Key Sheet and then connect the Console to the CPU Unit s peripheral port It cannot be con nected to the RS 232C port 3 6 3 Procedure for Creating I O Tables Programming Console This section provides the procedure for creating the I O tables using a Pro gramming Console For details on using the Programming Console refer to the Programming Console s operation manual 66 Creating I O Tables Section 3 6 Note 1 With the CJ Series it is necessary to create I O tables only when the user is allocating I O manually With the CS Series it is always necessary to create I O tables 2 With the CJU2H CPULILI EIP CPU Units the built in EtherNet IP port is set in the I O tables by default and cannot be changed It is not necessary to register it in the I O tables Use the following procedure to create the I O tables Initial screen CH Save or clear the CPU Bus Unit System Setup CX Programmer Version 8 0 or Higher This section provides the procedure for registering an EtherNet IP Unit in the O tables using CX Programmer version 8 0 or higher For details on CX Programmer operation refer to the CX Program operation manual 1 2 3 1 Double click the I O Table and Unit Setup Icon in the project workspace in CX Programmer The PLC IO Table Window will be displayed 67 Creating
494. target node indicate that the PLC is operating Each node address s flag location target ID can be changed from the Network Configura tor The data in this table is refreshed when neces sary When the PLC status is not selected in the input consume tags the PLC sta tus information 16 bit data can be used as reception data Local tags for tag data links can be set using I O memory addresses or net work symbols Support for network symbols however depends on the model of CPU Unit as shown in the following table Network Configurator Operations Section 6 2 Communications with the remote node are possible regardless of whether the remote node tags are set using I O memory addresses or network symbols Name in hardware list of CPU Unit EtherNet IP Unit or Symbol name I O memory Network Configurator built in EtherNet IP port specification address specification CJ2B EIP21 CJ2H CPU6L EIP CJ2H CPULILJ EIP OK OK CJ1W EIP21 CJ1 CPU Unit CJ1W EIP21 OK CS1W EIP21 CS1 CPU Unit CS1W EIP21 OK CJ1W EIP21 CJ2 CJ2H CPU6L EIP CJ1W EIP21 OK OK 6 2 Network Configurator Operations 6 2 1 Starting the Network Configurator Procedure There are two ways to start the Network Configurator E Starting from the Windows Start Menu To start the Network configurator select OMRON CX One Network Con figurator for EtherNet IP Network Configurator from the Wi
495. tatus information is enabled when the PLC status is included in CPU Unit n 6ton the communications data in both the originator and target node 9 These words show the error status of nodes 0 to 63 only If it is necessary to show the error status of nodes higher than node 63 select user settings as the layout pattern For details refer to 4 4 User Settings Area The flags are valid only when the corresponding Normal Target Node Flag is ON If the corresponding Normal Target Node Flag is OFF the Target Node PLC Error Flag indicates the previous error status 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 helw is e npole s 7 els s e 1 po 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 48 Status Manipulated Unit operation by Target Node PLC Error i A fatal or non fatal error Flags occurred in the corre sponding PLC No error occurred in the PLC Unit Status 1 EtherNet IP Unit to CPU Unit n 10 n 10 Unit Error Occurred Network Error Occurred Unit Memory Error Communications Controller Error IP Address Duplication Error Link OFF Error Status Area Layout Setting Error 93 CIO Area Allocations 94 Unit Error Occurred Status Manipulated Section 4 2 Unit operation Indicates that an error occurred that is related to EtherNet IP Unit operation
496. technician on the other hand there may be some applications that cannot be used Be sure to check first with the communications technician 128 Private and Global Addresses Section 5 3 5 3 3 EtherNet IP Unit with a Global Address Intranet Communications over Internet FINS TCP client computer with CX Programmer etc or CIP client computer with Network Configurator etc Ethernet EtherNet IP Private address Not output to Internet Internet Global address SE Sete ee eee Te eee ORCS eee _ _ Global address IP router Firewall Communications Private address nee PLC required Not output to Internet Private address Ethernet EtherNet IP in intranet EtherNet IP Unit Global address Conditions for Using Communications applications can be used over the Internet under the follow Communications ing conditions Applications m FINS Communications Service e A device such as a personal computer a FINS application including the CX Programmer can connect online and communicate over the Internet with an EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port that has a global address e FINS TCP is recommended as the FINS communications service method FINS TCP is more reliable than FINS UDP in terms of communications errors involving IP routers e The IP address
497. ted and ACK received Awaiting FIN 00 00 00 0A TIME WAIT Precautions All the above values are set to 0 if Ethernet communications functions are stopped due to improper settings in the system setup Response Codes After closing pauses twice the maximum segment life 2MSL 0000 1001 ADDRESS INFORMATION READ Reads FINS node addresses and IP addresses Normal end Command too large Command Block 27 65 iwN Command code Response Block Rey n n S Address information Number of addresses Command Response code code Parameters Number of Addresses Response Returns the number of pairs of FINS node addresses and IP addresses With the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port this value is always 0001 1 decimal 402 FINS Commands Addressed to EtherNet IP Units or Built in EtherNet IP Ports Appendix E Address Information Returns the FINS node addresses and IP addresses Each pair requires 6 bytes and has the following configu ration 1 6 T FINS node IP address number FINS Node Address Node address set in the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port hexadecimal IP Address IP address set in the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port hexadecimal Response Codes 0000 Normal end 1001 Command too large IP ADDRESS READ Reads the local IP address and subnet mask in the CPU Bus Unit System Setup and the FINS node address The values read with this
498. ted switching hub If the settings do not match the link will become unstable and prevent normal communications The following table shows the allowed settings for each switching hub communications mode Switching hub setting EtherNet IP Unit setting Auto 10 Mbps fixed 100 Mbps fixed negotiation Ful Half Full Half duplex duplex duplex duplex Auto negotiation 10 Mbps Full duplex fixed Half duplex 100 Mbps Full duplex fixed Half duplex Best Recommended OK Allowed Not allowed 3 8 2 Making TCP IP Settings with the Network Configurator 76 1 2 3 Use the Network Configurator to change IP address settings for any device other than a CS CJ series EtherNet IP Unit or built in port You can also use the Network Configurator to change IP address settings for a CS CJ series EtherNet IP Unit or built in port 1 Connect the Network Configurator online Refer to 6 2 7 Connecting the Network Configurator to the Network for details on connecting the Network Configurator to the EtherNet IP Unit TCP IP and Link Settings Section 3 8 2 Select Tools Setup TCP IP Configuration to display the following Setup TCP IP Configuration Dialog Box and set the TCP IP Configuration for the target device In the following example the settings are all at their default values Setup TCP IP Configuration Target IP Address New Configuration Get the IP address via BOO
499. the PLC clocks Manage the Network with an SNMP Manager Note Internal status information from the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port can be passed to network management software that uses an SNMP manager A separate SNMP manager is necessary for network management Specify Servers with Host Names Note DNS client functionality allows you to use host names instead of IP addresses to specify SNTP servers and SNMP managers This is useful for example when server IP addresses change for system revisions because the IP addresses are automatically found when host names are used 1 A separate DNS server is necessary to use host names with the DNS cli ent 2 The DNS server is specified directly using its IP address Set Classless IP Address with CIDR A subnet mask can be set to use classless IP addresses allowing more flexi bility in address settings Plentiful Troubleshooting Functions A variety of functions are provided to quickly identify and handle errors e Self diagnosis at power ON e PING command to check the connection with another node Overview of EtherNet IP Unit and Built in EtherNet IP Port Section 1 1 e Error Log functions record the time of occurrence and other error details 1 1 2 System Configuration Network 3 Switching hub Configurator 2 Twisted pair cable 1 Built in EtherNet IP port on CJ2 CPU Unit CJ2H CPULIL EIP
500. the backplane port The Link Address of a CPU Bus Unit on the Backplane is the unit number 10 hex For example when the unit number is 0 the Link Address is 10 hex When the unit number is F the Link Address is 1F hex The Link Address of a Special I O Unit on the Backplane is the unit number 20 hex For example when the unit number is 0 the Link Address is 20 hex Network e EtherNet IP The Ethernet port s Link Address is described by the IP address The IP address must be described entirely in ASCII For example IP address of 192 168 200 200 will be 31 39 32 2E 81 86 88 2E 32 30 30 2E 32 30 30 374 CIP Message Communications Response Codes General Status Code The General Status Code is stored in the response data after execution of the CMND instruction has been completed General Status Code hex Status Name Success Appendix D Description of Status Service was successfully performed by the object specified Connection failure A connection related service failed along the connection path Resource unavailable Resources needed for the object to perform the requested service were unavailable Invalid parameter value See Status Code 20 hex which is the preferred value to use for this condition Path segment error The path segment identifier or the segment syntax was not understood by the processing node Path processing shall stop when a
501. the communications flags i e the Communica tions Port Enabled Flag and the Communications Port Error Flag The CS CJ series CPU Unit s communications flags are allocated in the Auxiliary Area as shown in the following table Flag name Address Contents Bits Communications Port Port 7 OFF Execution enabled Enabled Flag Port 6 being executed Port 5 ON Execution disabled Port 4 not being executed Port 3 Port 2 Port 1 Port 0 Communications Port Port 7 0 Normal completion Error Flag Port 6 1 Abnormal completion Port 5 Port 4 Port 3 Port 2 Port 1 Port 0 Note In CS CJ series PLCs communications ports 0 to 7 are also used when exe cuting the PCMR 260 PROTOCOL MACRO TXDU 256 and RXDU 255 instructions so these flags are shared by SEND 090 RECV 098 CMND 490 PCMR 260 TXDU 256 and RXDU 255 SEND 090 RECV 098 and CMND 490 cannot be executed at a communi cations port if PCMR 260 TXDU 256 or RXDU 255 is being executed at that port 237 Communicating between OMRON PLCs Section 8 6 Communications Port Completion Codes The status of a SEND 090 RECV 098 and CMND 490 instruction after execution is reflected as a communications port completion code in one word two bytes of data as shown in the following table The value is 0000 during instruction execution The recorded status is saved until execution of the next instruction Word Contents Communications Port 0 Completion Co
502. the destination of a CIP UCMM MESSAGE SEND command s control data is the local node s EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port and the actual destination node is specified in the command s route path e When an EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port receives an explicit message it automatically returns a response to the message e When specifying the timeout time the proper values are different for last hop and relay hop methods With the last hop method set the timeout time for the actual request service processing With the relay hop method the timeout for the relay path must be added to the timeout time for the actual request service processing In CIP routing the node Unit performing the routing subtracts the timeout time for 1 hop deletes its own address from the routing information and relays the message to the next node Unit Set the following timeout values for command processing The maximum number of relay nodes Units is 16 If the number is more than 16 the explicit message send command may time out even if the con ditions of network and each node Unit are normal If more than 16 relay nodes Units have been set a constant time must be specified for the re quest service processing timeout time normally 0000 hex e Priority Time Tick and Time Out Ticks 5 s x Number of relay nodes Units Request processing timeout e Message monitoring time gt Priority Time Tick and Time Out Ticks e CMND 490
503. therNet IP _ CIP messages CIP commands and responses can also be transferred to another CIP based network via the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port using the CIP routing function for message communications In the CS CJ Series CIP routing is possible only through two EtherNet IP Units or built in EtherNet IP port Overview of EtherNet IP Unit and Built in EtherNet IP Port Section 1 1 FINS Communications Service Note Note EtherNet IP CS CJ series CPU Unit EtherNet IP Unit Ethernet EtherNet IP etc EtherNet IP Unit FINS commands can be sent to or received from other PLCs or computers on the same Ethernet network by executing SEND 090 RECV 098 or CMND 490 instructions in the ladder diagram program This enables various control operations such as the reading and writing of I O memory between PLCs mode changes and file memory operations There are no particular restrictions when sending FINS messages to OMRON Ethernet Units CS1W ETN21 or CJ1W ETN21 in an Ethernet network Ethernet EtherNet IP IP _ UDP or TCP IP _ UDP or TCP CS CJ series CPU Unit EtherNet IP Unit Ethernet Unit EtherNet IP Unit User program SEND 090 RECV 098 or CMND 490 instruction Various control operations such as the reading and writing of I O memory between PLCs mode changes and file memory operations can be exe
504. therNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port Errors that occurred in the past are recorded and can be cleared or saved in a computer file as required In some cases error records are cleared when the power is turned OFF and in other cases the records are retained For details on the error log refer to 14 4 Error Log Function Monitor Device Controller Error History Tag Status Ethernet Information Status 1 Status 2 Connection Error History Time of Error Error Inf Detailed Content 08 05 23 11 41 13 0305 0002 Tag data link error EEE Controller Error History The error history of the CPU Unit for the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet Tab Page IP port is displayed on this tab page The error history shows errors that have occurred It can be cleared or saved in a file in the computer 332 Checking Status with the Network Configurator Refer to the operation Section 14 1 manual of the CPU Unit for details on error information Monitor Device Status 1 Controller Error History Time of Error 08 05 23 11 44 11 Error History Ethernet Information Connection Tag Status Status 2 Error Inf 80E9 Detailed Content 0000 Number Duplication Error Cie Tag Status Tab Page i Clear Save This tab page shows if the tag settings for each tag for tag data links is set so that data can be exchanged with the CPU Unit The following status is dis played Ok Process
505. therNet IP Hardware Uy Vendor Q Ci ti 8 s perae Adapter 1921682501 192 168 2502 1921682503 192 168 2504 1921682505 192 168 2506 192 168 2507 192 168 2508 8 CJ1W EIP21 P CS1W EIP21 CS1W EIP21 CS1W EIP21 CS1W EIP21 CS1W EIP21 CSIW EIP21 CS1W EIP21 CS1W ElP21 SD onw en a1 ja jz Ja ja Ja ja Rev 2 E Cw EIP21 C2 CJ2B EIP21 E E E E E E E OS1W EIP21 5 Rev 1 A av 192 168 250 9 192 168 250 10 192 168 250 111 192 168 250 12 192 168 250 13 192 168 250 14 192 168 250 15 192 168 250 16 ed CS1W EIP21 CS1W EIP21 C 1W EIP21 CJ1W ElP21 CJ1W ElP21 CJ1W EIP21 CJ1W E1P21 CJ1W EIP21 2 8 Device Type ja ja Ja ja ja ja ja Ja E da Communications Adapter 192 168 250 17 192 168 25018 192 168 250 19 192 168 250 20 CJIW EIP21 CJ1W EIP21 CJIW EIP21 CJIWEIP21 pie 2 ja 2 Usage of Device Bandwidth lt gt Message Code Date Description Ready LEtherNet IP T Unknown Realtek RTL8139 810x Family Fast Ethernet NIC 192 168 250 200 100M Off line Connections In this example there are 10 CS1W EIP21 Units and 10 CJ1W EIP21 Units for a total of 20 devices connected in the network Each device has one 100 word tag for transmission and nineteen 100 word tags for reception so that the Units exchange data mutually By default the packet intervals RPI are set to 10 ms for all of the connec tions The devices IP addresses range from 192 168 250 1 to 192 168 250 20 IP address 192 168 250 1 192 168 250 2
506. timeout set value Message monitoring time A timeout may occur sooner than the actual set value depending on the point where the timeout occurs in the path General status 01 hex and Additional status 0204 hex A FINS timeout error response 0205 hex may occur if the CMND 490 timeout set value or message monitoring time is less than the Priority Time Tick and Time Out Ticks Note 1 For details on the parameters of explicit messages refer to the EtherNet IP and CIP specifications 2 The Open DeviceNet Vendor Association Inc ODVA can be contacted at the following address to obtain copies of the EtherNet IP and CIP specifi cations ODVA Headquarters 4220 Varsity Drive Suite A 249 Sending Explicit Messages 250 Section 9 1 Ann Arbor Michigan 48108 5006 USA TEL 1 734 975 8840 FAX 1 734 922 0027 Email odva odva org WEB www odva org Sending Explicit Messages Section 9 1 EXPLICIT MESSAGE SEND 28 01 EXPLICIT MESSAGE SEND will send a DeviceNet Unit compatible explicit message to the specified class of another node and receive a response The other node is specified with the destination node address in the com mand The actual destination IP address is as follows Destination IP address Local IP address amp Subnet mask Destination node address Command Block 28 01 468 bytes max T j Command Class ID Instance ID Service data code Service code D
507. ting Retry Timer Sets the time to wait before retrying the connection when connect ing to the SNTP server fails It is normally not necessary to change this setting Adjust Time Using the Status Area Tab Page in Edit Parameters Dialog Box Status Area 82 Setting Layout Type Sets the time to offset the clock in the CPU Unit when setting the clock in the CPU Unit to the time obtained from the SNTP server To use the time from the SNTP server as is enter O for the Adjust Time Function Specifies whether to use the default setting or a custom setting for the words allocated to the status area Allocation Area Sets the first word in the status area when the Layout Type is set for a customer setting With CS1 CJ1 CPU Units only a physical address can be set With CJ2 CPU Units either a physical address or a symbol defined in the CPU Unit can be set Section 3 10 Other Parameters Using SNMP Tab Page in Edit Parameters Dialog Box Using SNMP Trap Tab Page in Edit Parameters Dialog Box SNMP Trap Setting Not use SNMP service or Use SNMP service Function Specifies whether to use the SNMP If not using the SNMP service is specified an SNMP manager will not be able to connected from an external device SNMP Port Sets the port number to use when connecting from an SNMP man ager It is normally not necessary to change this setting SNMP C
508. ting ode CPU execution mode Processing time details Normal Mode See note Set peripheral servicing time Priority peripheral servicing Default 4 of CPU Unit cycle time 10 for CJ2 CPU Units Parallel processing with syn chronous memory access Parallel processing with asyn 1 ms max chronous memory access Note CJ2 CPU Units support only Normal Mode For details refer to the CPU Unit s Operation Manual Send Processing Number of words being transferred x 0 002 0 550 ms Transmission Delay The transmission delay time depends on the baud rate set for the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port as shown in the following table There may be additional delays due to the other devices in the network such as switch ing hubs 100Base TX Number of words being transferred x 0 0013 0 0118 ms 10Base T Number of words being transferred x 0 0019 0 0157 ms Receive Processing Number of words being transferred x 0 003 0 704 ms CPU Bus Unit Service The following table shows the CPU Bus Unit service cycle which depends on Cycle Remote Node the CPU Unit s CPU processing mode setting CPU execution mode Processing time details Normal Mode See note One CPU Unit cycle time Priority peripheral servicing EtherNet IP Unit or Time slice instruction execution built in EtherNet IP time port is given prior ity EtherNet IP Unit or One CPU Unit cycle time built in EtherNet IP port is
509. tings for the FINS TCP connection num ber the remote IP address and the remote port number No such Unit Envi ronment error 362 Parameters Unit Setup IP address conversion failed Check the IP address and subnet mask in the Unit Setup and correct if neces sary Configuration error IP address conversion in Unit Setup IP address conversion is set for automatic conver sion only Check the IP address conver sion setting in the Unit Setup This error will be generated for the READ IP ADDRESS TABLE command only Appendix A CS CJ series Ethernet Unit Function Comparison Tag data link communications service Support for function Ethernet Unit EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port Unit version 1 0 Unit version 2 0 CIP message communications service FINS UDP service FINS TCP service Socket service File transfer FTP Mail send receive Web functions Automatic adjustment of PLC s internal clock Simple backup function Error log Response to PING command SNMP SNMP trap CIDR function for IP addresses Online connection by EtherNet IP using CX One Online connection by Ethernet FINS using CX One Online connection by EtherNet IP using Network Configu rator 363 CS CJ series Ethernet Unit Function Comparison Appendix A 364 Parameter TCP send buffer Appe
510. tion Number of data exchanges PLC cycle time Affect on CPU Unit cycle time Number of data exchanges based gt EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP 0 the data size port data processing time PLC cycle time Affect on CPU Unit cycle time Number of data exchanges x 2 lt EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP_ based on the data size port data processing time 1 Data exchange processing affects the CPU Unit s cycle time For details refer to 10 2 3 Effect on the CPU Unit s Cycle Time I O Response Time in Tag Data Links Section 10 2 2 With the CS CJ Series consecutive data area words specified in the tag set will be exchanged together if possible Up to 19 send data blocks can be processed in one data exchange up to 20 receive data blocks can be processed in one data exchange If there are more blocks the data will be divided and transferred in separate data exchanges 3 The preceding data processing time approximation is valid when the Eth erNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port is the only CPU Bus Unit or Spe cial I O Unit mounted to the CPU Unit When there are Special I O Units or other CPU Bus Units mounted to the CPU Unit add the following val ues for each Unit and calculate the total 4 The preceding data processing time approximation is the standard formu la when a higher priority processing event does not occur in peripheral servicing For example if an instruction such as SEND
511. tion node address Destination unit address Local node address 05 FE or 12 Hex Note Depending on conditions the destination slave may not always accept an explicit message Always perform retry processing when sending explicit mes sages 245 Sending Explicit Messages Section 9 1 CIP UCMM MESSAGE SEND 28 10 Command Block This command sends an explicit message for CIP routing to another node s specified class and receives a response There are two command formats one with a specified route path path to the target device and the other with out the route path e Relay Hop Format The following format includes the route path routing service data Specify the entire routing path in the command s request path 4 502 bytes max Request path I I I I 28 10 52 02 20 06 24 01 l l l Command Transport Message t code ID monitoring Instance ID 01 Hex time 8 bit instance ID 24 Hex Class ID Connection Manager 06 Hex 8 bit class ID 20 Hex Request path size 2 words 02 Hex Service code i Unconnected Send service 52 Hex Routing service data 502 bytes max gt a Ines gt 00 Saal laas Asad Message Request path Request data i Route path request size variable length variable length variable length j Request path size Padding data Route p
512. tions on High Traffic in FINS Communications 0 00008 242 SECTION 9 Message Communications ccecccessecccees 243 9 1 Sending Explicit Messages 0 0 ee cee eee eee 244 9 2 Receiving Explicit Messages 1 0 0 cee eee nee 258 SECTION 10 Communications Performance and Communications Load 271 10 1 Communications System 0 a p cc eee eee eens 272 10 2 I O Response Time in Tag Data Links 00 00 eee eee eee 276 10 3 Message Service Transmission Delay 0 0 0 eee ee ees 281 TABLE OF CONTENTS SECTION 11 ELP Server cc o56 0eh Oe S4 SSA SORE Oe ee aS OD 11 1 Overview and Specifications 2 2 0 0 eect eens 290 11 2 FTP Server Function Details 0 2 0 0 2 cee eee 291 11 3 Using the FTP Server Function orras rispe rr rao a EE ce eee eee 293 11 4 FTP Server Application Example 0 00 eee eee eee 295 II S Using FTP Commands sneren oy reggie ke twee wees Ta byes BOE E 296 11 6 Checking PEP Status oy ee eal yeni ed ye a a eae ae 302 TEZ Using Fil Memory esserne ae ee ee LSE eRe a See Salads ee ee oe 303 11 8 FTP File Transfer Time 0 A E cee eens 308 11 9 Host Computer Application Example 0 0 0 cee eee ee eee 309 SECTION 12 Automatic Clock Adjustment Function 311 12 1 Automatic Clock Adjustment 0 0 0 2 eee cee eens 312 12 2 Using the Automatic Clock Adjustment Function
513. tivity e Locations close to power supplies 5 Application Precautions Observe the following precautions when using the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port N WARNING Always heed these precautions Failure to abide by the following precautions could lead to serious or possibly fatal injury e Always connect to a ground of 100 Q or less when installing the Units Not connecting to a ground of 100 Q or less may result in electric shock e Always turn OFF the power supply to the CPU Unit and Slaves before attempting any of the following Not turning OFF the power supply may result in malfunction or electric shock e Mounting or dismounting Power Supply Units I O Units CPU Units Memory Packs or Master Units e Assembling the Units e Setting DIP switches or rotary switches e Connecting cables or wiring the system e Connecting or disconnecting the connectors N Caution Failure to abide by the following precautions could lead to faulty operation of the EtherNet IP Unit built in EtherNet IP port or the system or could damage the Ethernet Unit Always heed these precautions e Interlock circuits limit circuits and similar safety measures in external cir cuits i e not in the Programmable Controller must be provided by the customer Xxiv Application Precautions 5 e Always use the power supply voltages specified in the operation manuals An incorrect voltage may result in malfunction or burning e
514. tor Some other error occurred This error does not occur The originator gener ates this code when an unsupported response code is returned from the target in reply toa connection opening request Depends on the orig inator s specifica tions Contact the originator device s manufacturer Error code returned from target There is no Forward Open or Large Forward Open service in the target device This error does not occur Depends on the tar get s specifications Contact the target device s manufac turer Depends on the orig inator s specifica tions Contact the originator device s manufacturer Error code generated in origina tor The connection operation is stopped The connection was stopped because the Tag Data Link Stop Bit was turned ON or the settings data is being down loaded Either turn ON the Tag Data Link Start Bit or wait until the settings data has been downloaded Includes Control ler stop errors Unit failure and EM bank files at the refresh desti nation To handle these errors refer to 14 2 1Errors Occurring at the EtherNet IP Unit or built in Ether Nev P port The meaning of this error code is defined by each vendor so it depends on the tar get s specifications Contact the target device s manufac turer Depends on the orig inator s specifica tions Contact the originator device s manufacturer
515. troller Link network PLC 3 below from a CX Programmer CX Integrator connected to the Ethernet network Conditions e FINS UDP method e IP address conversion Automatic generation method dynamic CX Programmer CX Integrator Controller Link Unit Node address 1 IP address 192 168 250 1 EtherNet IP Unit IP address conversion Automatic generation method dynamic Gateway between networks PLC1 EtherNet IP Unit node address 2 EtherNet IP Unit IP address 192 168 250 2 EtherNet IP Unit unit number 0 Controller Link Unit node address 1 Controller Link Unit unit number 1 Controller Link Unit Target PLC Controller Link Unit Ethernet or EtherNet IP network address 1 Routing according to routing table SA _Node adddress 3 Routing to final network address 2 5 requires relaying through node Controller Link network address 2 address 2 of relay network address 1 EtherNet IP Unit CX Programmer s Change PLC Dialog Box PLC name PLC3 Network classification Ethernet Network Tab FINS destination FINS transmission 1 Page source address Network number 2 Node address 3 Frame length 2 000 bytes Response monitor time 2 seconds 223 Using FINS Applications 224 Section 8 5 Settings for target PLC PLC3 s Change PLC Dialog Box Setting Driver Tab Page Workstation node address 1 Automatic generation method Not selected IP address 19
516. ttings 54 D data exchange timing 276 data processing time 276 Datalink Tool 78 143 default gateway 75 delays message service delays 281 delete command 291 296 300 design designing an EtherNet IP system 28 device bandwidth usage checking 42 Device Monitor function 328 device parameters clearing 186 editing 150 devices registering 142 DHCP client computer 122 DHCP service automatic IP address setting by DHCP service 122 dimensions CJ series 11 12 15 CS series 10 14 dir command 291 296 297 distance CJ series transmission distance 11 12 transmission distance 10 DM Area allocations 103 DNS server 75 Index automatic clock adjustment errors 316 DNS Tab 314 domain name 76 downloading tag data link parameters 178 dynamic changes of remote IP address prohibiting 119 E EC Directives xxvi Edit Parameters 5 73 80 EDS file management 407 EDS files 24 407 creating 407 installing 407 saving 408 searching 408 electromagnetic fields xxiv EM File Memory 303 using 303 EMC Directives xxvi EMI Standard xxvi EMS Standard xxvi EPATH type 371 error codes table of error codes 353 error flags Target Node PLC Error Flags 93 107 error log clearing 352 codes 353 overflow 352 specifications 352 ERROR LOG CLEAR 387 error log function 352 ERROR LOG READ 386 error processing 327 errors automatic clock adjustment 316 controller status 382 error log cleari
517. ttings and connection settings set in 6 2 5 Creating Tag Sets and 6 2 6 Set ting Connections with Target Devices Originator Only must be downloaded to all of the devices in the EtherNet IP network When the download operation is executed the tag data link parameters will be transferred to the EtherNet IP Units that require the settings The following procedure shows how to download the tag data link parameters 178 Note 1 2 3 For details on connecting to the network from the Network Configurator refer to 6 2 7 Connecting the Network Configurator to the Network If the target node IP address is not set correctly invalid device parameters may be set in the wrong PLC Check the connected PLC before down loading parameters If incorrect tag data link parameters are set it may cause equipment to operate unpredictably Even when the correct tag data link parameters are set make sure that there will be no effect on equipment before transfer ring the data When network symbols are used in tag settings a connection error will result if the symbols are not also set in the CPU Unit Before downloading the tag data link parameters check to confirm that the network symbols have been set in the CPU Unit On the Connection and Tag Status Tab Pages described in 14 71 17 The Network Configurator s Device Monitor Function check whether the network symbol tag and connection set tings are correct When a communications error o
518. tus EtherNet IP Note The target ID may be duplicated depending on the IP addresses of the target nodes In this case it is necessary to change the target ID with the Network Configurator For details on changing the device number refer to step 4 of the first procedure Registering the Connection in the Register Device List in 6 2 6 Setting Connections with Target Devices Originator Only 137 Overview of Tag Data Links Section 6 1 The following table shows the operation of each the bits when multiple con nections are used to communicate with a node and the PLC status is speci fied in all of the connections Name allocated area Contents Note Setting Symbols or Physical Addresses 138 Target Node PLC Operating Flag Information Layout set to default settings Words n 2 to n 5 Layout set to user settings Words n 32 to n 47 Note Corresponds to the PLC sta tus s PLC Operating Flag Each flag indicates the operating status of the corresponding target node PLC of connections in which the EtherNet IP Unit is the originator The flag corresponding to the target node s target ID will be ON when the PLC Operating Flags for all connections with that target node indicate that the PLC is operating Each node address s flag location i e target ID can be changed from the Network Configu rator The PLC status f
519. twork s communications load will increase data collisions will occur frequently and stable communications will be impossible Always use a switching hub when using tag data links in the network 1 1 4 Setup Area and Related Programming Devices Make the tag data link settings and Unit setup settings for the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port Both of these settings are stored in the EtherNet IP Unit s non volatile memory See note Support Software is provided for each as described below Note Unlike the Ethernet Units the EtherNet IP Unit s TCP IP settings are not stored in the CPU Unit s CPU Bus Unit System Setup Area The settings are stored in the EtherNet IP Unit itself Overview of EtherNet IP Unit and Built in EtherNet IP Port Section 1 1 Making Settings in the Routing Table Area with CX Integrator E Unit Setup CX Programmer The CX Programmer is used to set basic parameters such as the local IP address of the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port and the subnet mask Right click the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port in the I O table of the CX Programmer and select Edit Unit SETUP from the Edit Parameters Dialog Box You can then set the parameters on the tab pages TCP IP Ethernet FINS UDP FINS TCP FTP Auto Adjust Time Status Area SNMP and SNMP Trap Computer EtherNet IP Unit CX Programmer or built in See Edit Parameters EtherNet IP port Dialog Box
520. ub Connection Methods Connect two hubs to each other as follows Connect an MDI port to an MDI X port with a straight cable connect two MDI ports with a cross cable and connect two MDI X ports with a cross cable Note It is very difficult to distinguish cross cables and straight cables by appear ance Incorrect cables will cause communications to fail We recommend using cascade connections with straight cables whenever possible MDI ports MDI X port I 4s Straight cable cross fa ene Cross cable Switching Hub Some switching hubs can automatically distinguish between MDI and MDI X When this kind of switching hub is being used straight cable can be used between switching hubs Note Adjust the link settings of the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port to match the communications settings of the connected switching hub If the set tings do not match the link will become unstable and prevent normal commu nications The following table shows the allowed settings for each switching hub communications mode Switching hub setting EtherNet IP Unit setting Auto 10 Mbps fixed 100 Mbps fixed negotiation Auto negotiation 10 Mbps Full duplex fixed Half duplex 62 Network Installation Section 3 4 Switching hub setting EtherNet IP Unit setting Auto 10 Mbps fixed 100 Mbps fixed negotiation Half Half les duplex duple
521. ued With the SEND 090 RECV 098 and CMND 490 instructions retry processing is executed automatically by specifying the num ber of retries so specify a number other than 0 233 Communicating between OMRON PLCs Section 8 6 CMND 490 The CMND 490 instruction sends n bytes of command data starting from the beginning word S at the local node to the node at node address N the data in m number of words starting from the beginning word S at the remote node node address M is received at the words starting from the beginning word D at the local node Local node Destination node number N 15 0 s Ea comes Com Interpretation gt mand S 1 data n 5 bytes S S J Response D gt Re 7 sponse D 1 data m 4 bytes SEMADI 490 S Beginning command storage word D Beginning response storage word C First word of control data below 15 ie T T T c 1 Number of bytes of command data n 0000 to 07C6 Hex 1 to 1 990 bytes 15 0 C 1 j j j Number of bytes of response data m 0000 to 07C6 Hex 1 to 1 990 bytes 15 11 87 0 15 10 87 3 o o o i c o o e a Destination network number L Number of retries 00 Hex Local network Oto F Hex 0 to 15 retries 01 to 7F Hex 1 to 127 Communications port number 0 to 7 15 87 o Response C 3 0 Required 1 Not required i Destination Unit address
522. umber for UDP to identify the application layer i e the FINS communications service in this case When communications are executed by UDP IP this port number must be allocated to the communi cations service The default setting for the UDP port number i e the UDP port number of the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port is 9600 To set another number set the number on the FINS UDP Tab Page of the CX Programmers Edit Parameters Dialog Box At the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port a UDP IP frame received with a FINS UDP port number is recognized as a FINS frame Procedure for Using FINS UDP 1 2 3 Note 1 Make the basic settings Refer to Initial Settings in 3 1 1 Procedures 2 Keep the CX Programmer connected online right click the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port in the PLC IO Table Dialog Box and select Edit Unit Setup Set the following in the CPU Bus Unit Setup Area from the FINS UDP Tab Page of the Edit Parameters Dialog Box e IP Address Conversion e FINS UDP Port No Default 9600 e IP Address List Set only when the conversion method is set to IP ad dress table e Dynamic Change of remote IP addresses 3 Select Transfer to PLC from the Options Menu and click the Yes Button The setting data will be transferred to the CPU Bus Unit System Setup Area in the CPU Unit 4 Make the routing table settings and transfer them to each PLC See note Set the routing tables with C
523. urator etc Ethernet EtherNet IP Communications in intranet Firewall EtherNet IP Unit Private address el Internet Intranet IP router Firewall Conditions for Using Communications Applications FINS communications FINS TCP client computer Explicit messages with CX Programmer etc or CIP client computer with Network Configurator etc Communications in Intranet EtherNet IP Unit Private address EtherNet IP Unit Private address ___________ Communications in Intranet When the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port has a private address communications applications can be used under the following conditions m FINS Communications Service e The FINS communications service can be executed on the intranet between EtherNet IP Units and built in EtherNet IP ports with private addresses only A device such as a personal computer with a FINS application including the CX Programmer cannot connect online and communicate over the Internet with an EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port that has a pri vate address FINS communications are also not possible over the Inter net between EtherNet IP Units and or built in EtherNet IP ports with private addresses e Either FINS TCP or FINS UDP can be used for the FINS communications service
524. ure that the terminal blocks expansion cable connectors and other items with locking devices are locked in place e Wire all connections correctly according to instructions in this manual e Double check all wiring and switch settings before turning ON the power supply Incorrect wiring may result in burning e Mount Units only after checking terminal blocks and connectors com pletely e Check the user program ladder program and other programs and parameters for proper execution before actually running it on the Unit Not checking the program may result in unexpected operation e Confirm that no adverse effect will occur in the system before attempting any of the following Not doing so may result in an unexpected operation e Changing the operating mode of the PLC e Force setting force resetting any bit in memory e Changing the present value of any word or any set value in memory e After replacing Units resume operation only after transferring to the new CPU Unit and or Special I O Units the contents of the DM Area HR Area programs parameters and other data required for resuming operation Not doing so may result in an unexpected operation e Before touching a Unit be sure to first touch a grounded metallic object in order to discharge any static build up Not doing so may result in malfunc tion or damage XXV Conformance to EC Directives 6 6 6 1 6 2 xxvi e When transporting the Unit use special packing b
525. user name for the remote FTP server ls Displays the Memory Card file names dir Display the Memory Card file names and details rename Changes a file name mkdir Creates a new directory in the working directory in the remote host rmdir Deletes a new directory from the working directory in the remote host cd Changes the Ethernet Unit work directory to the specified directory cdup Changes the working directory at the remote host to the parent directory pwd Displays the Ethernet Unit work directory type Specifies the data type of transferred files get Transfers the specified file from the Memory Card to the local host mget Transfers multiple files from the Memory Card to the local host put Transfers the specified local file to the Memory Card mput Transfers multiple local files to the Memory Card delete Deletes the specified file from the Memory Card mdelete Deletes multiple files from the Memory Card close Disconnects the FTP server bye Closes the FTP client quit Closes the FTP client Protection FTP login name consists of 12 letters max CONFIDENTIAL is the default login name Password consists of 8 characters max Protocol FTP port number 20 TCP 21 TCP Number of connec 1 tions Note The PLC however is unable to read or write files at other nodes using FTP because the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port does not support FTP client functions 11 2 FTP Server Fun
526. ust n is displayed Target Variable Selects and allocates the target node s tag set e In Selects the target s output produce tag set e Out Selects the target s input consume tag set Originator Vari able Selects and allocates the originator node s tag set e In Selects the originator s output produce tag set e Out Selects the originator s input consume tag set Connection Type Selects whether the data is sent in a multicast or unicast The default setting is multicast e Multicast connection Select when the same data is shared by multiple nodes This setting is usually selected e Point to Point connection Select when the same data is not being shared by multiple nodes In a unicast transmission other nodes are not bur dened with an unnecessary load Note Refer to 6 1 3 Overview of Operation for details on using multicast and unicast transmissions and counting the number of connections 165 Network Configurator Operations Section 6 2 Setting Function Sets the packet interval RPI of each connection between the originator and target The interval can be set between 0 5 and 10 000 ms in 0 5 ms units The default setting is 50 ms data refreshed once every 50 ms Timeout Value Sets the time until a connection timeout is detected The time out value is set as a multiple of the packet interval RPI and can be set to a 4 8 16 32 64 128 256 or 512 multiple The
527. uting tables to the con nected PLC a Using FINS Applications Section 8 5 8 5 2 FinsGateway FinsGateway Ver 2003 must be used to communicate using FINS TCP between applications serving as communications drivers and CS1W EIP21 CJ1W EIP21 or CU2H CPULIL EIP Ethernet Units FinsGateway Ver 3 L or lower versions can be used however when commu nicating by the FINS UDP method only m Overview of Setup Methods 1 Starting FinsGateway Settings Select FinsGateway FinsGateway Setup to start the FinsGateway Setup 2 ETN UNIT Driver Setup 1 Double click on ETN_UNIT in the settings for the network and Unit The fol lowing ETN_UNIT Properties Window will be displayed e Network Tab Page ETN_UNIT Properties About Communication Unit UDF nodes TCP nodes Network number 0 Local node number 100 Communication unit number 117 e Network number Set the network number for the personal computer Ethernet port e Local node address Set the personal computer Ethernet port node address 1 to 254 on the Ethernet network e Communication unit number Set the unit number in decimal 16 to 31 for the per sonal computer Ethernet port 225 Using FINS Applications Section 8 5 e Communication Unit Tab Page ETN_UNIT Properties About Network DP nodes TCP nodes UDP port number 3600 Primary IP address IPAddress 192 168 250 30 DHCP FAL
528. ver For communi cations between two PLCs either one can be set as the client and the other as the server Node Server Node Client Request to establish a connection Connection established atl Notification of establishing _ connection 7 7 Acknowledgement Acknowledgement _ lt An acknowledgement is received whenever a connection is established or data is sent so transmissions are more reliable but somewhat slower Compared to the FINS UDP method the FINS TCP method has the following characteristics e Data transmission is more reliable due to factors such as retry process ing at the TCP IP layer The FINS TCP method is thus better suited to dealing with communications errors in an IP network that spans several layers e Remote clients can be restricted by means of settings at the server i e the server can be protected from access by non specified IP addresses e Broadcasting cannot be used e TCP IP has various retry procedures and this tends to lower its perfor mance in comparison with UDP IP e There is a limit to the number of connections that can be made i e 16 connections maximum and any given node can communicate only with up to 16 other nodes at a time 212 FINS TCP Method FINS TCP Frame Format TCP Port Number for FINS TCP FINS TCP Connection Numbers Section 8 3 e After a FINS TCP connection connecti
529. vice corresponding to addresses Status reading CPU UNIT STATUS READ Reads the status of the CPU Unit CYCLE TIME READ Reads the maximum minimum and average cycle time Time data access CLOCK READ Reads the present year month date minute second and day of the week CLOCK WRITE Changes the present year month date minute second or day of the week Message display MESSAGE READ CLEAR Reads and clears messages and reads FAL FALS messages Access rights ACCESS RIGHT ACQUIRE Acquires the access right as long as no other device holds it ACCESS RIGHT FORCED ACQUIRE Acquires the access right even if another device already holds it ACCESS RIGHT RELEASE Releases the access right that has been acquired Error log ERROR CLEAR Clears errors or error messages ERROR LOG READ Reads the error log ERROR LOG POINTER CLEAR Clears the error log pointer 235 Communicating between OMRON PLCs Section 8 6 Command Function code MR SR File memory FILE NAME READ Reads file memory data SINGLE FILE READ Reads a specified length of file data from a specified position within a single file SINGLE FILE WRITE Writes a specified length of file data from a specified position within a single file FILE MEMORY FORMAT Formats initializes the file memory FILE DELETE Deletes specified files stored in the file memory
530. w the network was wired e g switch hub or cascade connection causing a tag data link to operate abnor mally Check the bandwidth of the transmission path for all cascade con nections If the bandwidth is exceeded rewire the network or increase the bandwidth between switching hubs e g to 1 Gbps If these countermea sures are not possible change the connection settings e g the RPI set tings and adjust the bandwidth for all cascade connections until the total network bandwidth is not exceeded Is the network bandwidth usage under 100 Mbps for each node If any node exceeds 100 Mbps change the connections settings such as the RPI Is the usage of capacity under 100 for all nodes If any node exceeds 100 change the connections settings such as the RPI Is the network bandwidth usage without multicast filtering under 100 Mbps for each node If any node exceeds 100 Mbps the multicast filtering function of the switching hub may not be working normally If the number of multicast fil ters supported by the switching hub is less than the number of multicast IP addresses in the network the bandwidth of part of the transmission path e g a switching hub or media converter had been exceeded as the result of how the network was wired e g switch hub or cascade connec tion causing a tag data link to operate abnormally Calculate the number of multicast filters necessary for the switching hubs on the network and c
531. wing sequence 397 FINS Commands Addressed to EtherNet IP Units or Built in EtherNet IP Ports Appendix E 0 91 OO NOD OV Bee GIN e 13 14 15 The number of times active connections were correctly established The number of times a SYN packet was received while waiting to establish a passive connection The number of times active or passive connections were correctly established The number of times an established connection was cut off The number of times the connection wait status was cut off The number of times protocol control blocks or other actively allocated structures were released The number of segments for the round trip time time from segment transmission to ACK The number of times the round trip time was changed The number of times a delayed acknowledgement ACK was sent If the order of the received segments is reversed ACK is sent with a packet of data separate from ACK response to input data etc or is immedi ately sent with the ACK for other data The number of times the connection was cut off because no ACK was returned after several resend at tempts The number of times no ACK was returned within the resend timer set time The resend timer sets the max imum time limit between the data being output and ACK being returned The number of times no window advertisement is received within the time set on the duration timer The duration timer sets the maximum time limit for a window adv
532. work Target Network EtherNet IP_1 EtherNet IP_2 6 2 14 Reading a Network Configuration File A previously saved network configuration file can be read into the Network Configurator 1 2 3 1 Select File Open or click the Button The following dialog box will be displayed Look in O My Documents la Equip1 nvf File name Files of type Network Configuration File v3 nvf v Option C Select target network C Add to current network If the network configuration file that you want to read is not displayed change to Look in another folder 2 When you click and select the network configuration file that you want to read that file name will be displayed in the File name Field Look in O My Documents EX Equipt nv Files of type Network Configuration File v3 nvf v Option C Select target network C Add to current network 3 Click the Open Button to read the network configuration file 189 Network Configurator Operations Section 6 2 4 The Network Configurator s Title Bar will display the name of the file that was read q Equip1 Nebwork Configurator Network Device EDSFile T Dei 2 I Network Configurator F EtherNet IP Hardware LS Vendor Omron Corporation E DeviceType a Gg Communications Adapter 5 Select any of the options as necessary The options are listed below Select target network Allows you to select specific networks f
533. work port with the destination network and node address on that network Then repeat the same procedure to the final destina tion Object A Object B Q Q When sending data from X to Z Route Path Port A 3 Port C 1 Send data from the network port of X Port A to 3 on that circuit and the data reaches Y Then send it from the network port of Y Port C to 1 on that circuit Through this procedure the destination node Z can be designated Description by EPATH Type In CIP the EPATH type is used to describe the route path and request path With this method the route path and request path are divided into segments and a value is assigned to each segment so the route path description shows the path to the final destination when the data segments are joined together The segment includes the segment type information and the segment data Details of Segment Type The interpretation method of a segment is included in the first 1 byte which consists of two parts a 3 bit Seg ment Type and a 5 bit Segment Format 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 371 CIP Message Communications Appendix D According to CIP Specifications the Segment Type specifications are decided as follows Segment Type Description 7 6 5 Port Segment Logical Segment Network Segment Symbolic Segment Data Segment Data Type Data Type Reserved 4 4 4 olo olo 3 o o o o Oj OoOoj oj o
534. x duplex Note Best Recommended OK Allowed Not allowed 100 Mbps Full duplex fixed Half duplex 3 4 4 Using Contact Outputs Common to All Units When an EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port and Contact Output Unit are mounted in the same Rack or connected to the same PLC communica tions errors may occur due to noise generated by the contact outputs Use one or more of the following measures when installing Contact Output Units and EtherNet IP Units on the same Rack Mounting Location Mount or connect any Contact Output Units as far away from the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port as possible Contact Output Unit l To switching hub Contact outputs EtherNet IP Unit Lb Cable Location Separate the transceiver cable or twisted pair cable connecting the EtherNet IP Unit as far from the wiring to the Contact Output Units as possible The coaxial cable must also be placed as far away from the Contact Output Units and their wiring as possible Contact outputs Contact Output Unit A EtherNet IP Unit I switching hub 63 Connecting to the Network Section 3 5 3 5 Connecting to the Network 3 5 1 Ethernet Connectors The following standards and specifications apply to the connectors for the Ethernet twisted pair cable e Electrical specifications Conforming to IEEE802 3 standards e Connector structur
535. y 0 00 eee cece eee 303 Lil 721 Pile Memory aerem ay Sa eee Gh ies ta Ee eR ee 303 7 2 gt Pile Ty pestis vec Gt eh ee ee oer yA eR aes 303 11 7 3 Initializing File Memory 0 00 0000 000000 305 11 7 4 I O Memory Data Format 0 0 00 00002 ee eee 305 11 8 FTP File Transfer Time a E EEE EO ee eee eee 308 11 9 Host Computer Application Example 0 00 0 00008 309 289 Overview and Specifications Section 11 1 11 1 Overview and Specifications 11 1 1 Overview The EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port has a built in FTP File Trans fer Protocol server function so other computers on the Ethernet can read or write upload download large files in the EM file memory by executing FTP commands from the FTP client software FTP can be used for EtherNet IP Units with unit version 2 0 Intranet FTP client Specify the file and upload or download using FTP commands such as get and put Ethernet EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port Download z Upload Large file Files in the EM File Memory or the Memory Card mounted to the CPU Unit Note Only one FTP client can connect at the same time 290 FTP Server Function Details Section 11 2 11 1 2 Specifications Item Specification Executable com Connects the specified host FTP server mands Specifies
536. y EtherNet IP Hardware Ug Vendor a a Omron Corporation Ug DeviceType Usage of Device Bandwidth Message Code Description LiEtherNet IP T Unknown Intel R PRO 100 VE Network Connection 192 168 200 30 100M Off line The Main Window consists of a Hardware List and a Network Configuration Window as shown in the following diagram Untitled Network Configurator File Edit Yiew Network Device EDSFile Tools Option Help Ooi a 8 3 EtherNet IP_1 Network Configurator Gf EtherNet IP Hardware Vendor f Omron Corporation Communications Ade 192 168 250 1 192 168 250 2 192 168 250 3 E CJTW EIP21 CS1W EIP21 CS1W EIP21 CJ1W EIP21 3 CS1W EIP21 w GS DeviceType Network Configuration Window Displays the layout and network configuration of devices that are set Hardware List and monitored Displays the devices that can be added to the network I Usage of Device Bandwidth Message Code Description L EtherNet IP T Unknown Intel R PRO 100 VE Network Connection 192 168 200 30 100M Off line Network Configurator Operations Section 6 2 When two or more networks are being managed a new Network Configura tion Window can be added by selecting Network Add Untitled Network Configurator File Edit View Network Device EDSFile Tools Option Help Cea a 8 amp id EtherNet IP_1 EtherNet IP_2 iy Network Configurator o DeviceNet Hardwa
537. yte EEPROM Server connection error 00 hex DNS 01 hex Specified host 03 hex SNTP does not exist 04 hex FTP 02 hex No such service at specified host 03 hex Timeout 06 hex Host name resolu tion error 07 hex Transmission error 08 hex Reception error 09 hex Other error OA hex Obtaining IP address error Clock write error 0001 The clock time Clear the error from the could not be updated CPU Unit because a error occurred in the CPU Unit 0002 The clock time Refer to SECTION 12 could not be updated Automatic Clock Adjust because the CPU Unit or ment Function and check operating mode does not the application conditions support this function Ethernet basic setting error 01 hex Ethernet setting 01 hex Checksum error error 11 hex Inconsistent set tings 12 hex Specified baud rate is not supported 02 hex TCP IP basic set 01 hex Checksum error ting error 11 hex Invalid IP address 12 hex Invalid subnet mask 13 hex Invalid default gateway address 14 hex Invalid primary name server 15 hex Invalid secondary name server 16 hex Invalid domain name 17 hex Invalid host name Ethernet advanced setting error 02 hex FINS setting error 01 hex Checksum error 10 hex Invalid IP router table 11 hex Invalid FINS UDP setting 12 hex Invalid FINS TCP setting 13 hex Invalid FTP setting 14 hex Invalid SNTP set ting 15 hex Invalid SNMP set ting 16 hex Invalid SNMP trap setting P
538. ze EM File Memory from the CX Programmer 11 7 4 I O Memory Data Format E IOM Format The IOM format is a data format used for binary data specified by the ladder instructions READ DATA FILE FREAD 700 and WRITE DATA FILE FWRIT 701 in the CPU Unit If five words of data from the I O memory 1234 hexadecimal 5678 hexadeci mal 9ABC hexadecimal etc is contained in an attached file in IOM format the data will be stored in the attached file as shown in the following diagram Example Binary data format with a delimiter after every 10 fields I O memory 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1234 5678 9ABC DEFO 1234 5678 9ABC DEFO 1234 5678 10 9ABC DEFO 1234 5678 9ABC DEFO 1234 5678 9ABC DEFO IOM file contents XXIXX XX 12 34 56 78 9A BC DE FO 12 34 a 48 bytes Reserved by the system m TXT Format The TXT format is a data format using tab delimiters specified by the ladder instructions READ DATA FILE FREAD 700 and WRITE DATA FILE FWRIT 701 in the CPU Unit The format is configured according to the specified FREAD 700 and FWRIT 701 parameters as follows Data format Use of CRs and CR position e Words without delimiters e No CRs e Double words without delimiters e CR after every 10 fields e Words delimited by tabs e CR after each field e Double words deli

EtherNet/IP Units Operation

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents